THE SAUDI BUILDING CODE for STEEL

STRUCTURES
SBC 306 - CR
Code Requirements

2018
 The Saudi Building Code for
STEEL STRUCTURES

(SBC 306-CR)
Key List of the Saudi Codes: Designations and brief titles
Title Code Req.1 Code & Com.2 Arabic Prov. 3
The General Building Code SBC 201-CR SBC 201-CC SBC 201-AR
Structural – Loading and Forces SBC 301-CR SBC 301-CC SBC 301-AR
Structural – Construction SBC 302- CR SBC 302-AR
Structural – Soil and Foundations SBC 303- CR SBC 303-CC SBC 303-AR
Structural – Concrete Structures SBC 304- CR SBC 304-CC SBC 304-AR
Structural – Masonry Structures SBC 305- CR SBC 305-CC SBC 305-AR
Structural – Steel Structures SBC 306-CR SBC 306-CC SBC 306-AR
Electrical Code SBC 401- CR SBC 401-AR
Mechanical Code SBC 501-CR SBC 501-CC SBC 501-AR
Energy Conservation- Nonresidential SBC 601- CR SBC 601- CC SBC 601- AR
Energy Conservation-Residential SBC 602- CR SBC 602- CC SBC 602- AR
Plumbing Code SBC 701- CR SBC 701-CC SBC 701-AR
Private sewage Code SBC 702- CR SBC 702-AR
Fire Code SBC 801- CR SBC 801-CC SBC 801-AR
Existing Buildings Code SBC 901- CR SBC 901-CC SBC 901-AR
Green Construction Code SBC 1001- CR SBC 1001-CC SBC 1001-AR
Residential Building Code-V1 SBC 1101- CR SBC 1101-CC SBC 1101-AR
Arch. Planning and Structural Reqs.
Residential Building Code-V2 SBC 1102- CR SBC 1102-CC SBC 1102-AR
MEP, Gas and Energy Requirements
1. CR: Code Requirements without Commentary
2. CC: Code Requirements with Commentary
3. AR: Arabic Code Provisions

SBC 306-CR-18 i
 The Saudi Building Code for
STEEL STRUCTURES

(SBC 306-CR)

COPYRIGHT © 2018
by
The Saudi Building Code National Committee (SBCNC).
(Edition 200923)

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. All intellectual property rights of this Saudi Code are owned by the National
Committee of Saudi Building Code as per the Saudi laws of the intellectual property. No part of this code may
be reproduced, distributed or leased in any form or by any means, including but not limited to publishing on
cloud sites, computer networks or any electronic means of communication, without prior written permission
from the National Committee of the Saudi Building Code. The purchase of an electronic or a paper copy does
not exempt the individual or entity from complying with the above limitations.

SBC 306-CR-18 i
 THE TECHNICAL COMMITTEE
(SBC 306-CR)
The Saudi Building Code for
STEEL STRUCTURES
1 Dr. Saleh Ibrahim Aldeghaither Chairman
2 Dr. Shehab Eldin M. Mourad Member
3 Dr. Mohamed Nour Eldin Fayed Member
4 Dr. Abdelrahim Badawy Abdelrahim Member
5 Dr. Sherif Mohamed Ibrahim Member
REVIEW COMMITTEE
THE SAUDI BUILDING CODE NATIONAL 1 Dr. Naif M. Alabbadi Chairman
COMMITTEE (SBCNC)
2 Dr. Khaled M. Aljammaz Member
1 H. E. Dr. Saad O. AlKasabi Chairman 3 Dr. Abdulrahman G. Al-enizi Member
2 Dr. Naif M. Alabbadi Vice Chairman 4 Eng. Saeed K. Kadasah Member
3 Dr. Abdulrahman G. Al-Enizi Member 5 Eng. Tawifik I. Aljrayed Member
4 Engr. Saeed K. Kadasah Member
5 Dr. Hassan S. Alhazmi Member REVIEWERS
6 Engr. Badr S. AL-maayoof Member Prof. Mostafa Morsi Elshami RCJY team
7 Engr. Fayez A. Alghamdi Member
8 Engr. Mohammed A. Alwaily Member
EDITORIAL COMMITTEE
9 Dr. Bandar S. Alkahlan Member 1 Prof. Ahmed B. Shuraim Chairman
10 Engr. Ahmad N. Hassan Member 2 Dr. Abdallah M. Al-Shehri Member
11 Engr. Abdulnasser S. Alabdullatif Member 3 Eng. Tawifik I. Aljrayed Member
12 Dr. Hani M. Zahran Member
EDITORIAL SUPPORT
13 Engr. Khalifa S. Alyahyai Member
14 Dr. Khaled M. Aljammaz Member
15 Dr. Ibrahim O. Habiballah Member
16 Dr. Saeed A. Asiri Member
17 Dr. Abdallah M. Al-Shehri Member
18 Engr. Saad S. Shuail Member
THE ADVISORY COMMITTEE
1 Dr. Khaled M. Aljammaz Chairman
2 Eng. Khalifa S. Alyahyai Vice Chairman
3 Dr. Hani M. Zahran Member
4 Prof. Ali A. Shash Member
5 Prof. Ahmed B. Shuraim Member
6 Dr. Khalid M. Wazira Member
7 Dr. Abdulhameed A. Al Ohaly Member
8 Dr. Hamza A. Ghulman Member
9 Engr. Hakam A. Al-Aqily Member
10 Prof. Saleh F. Magram Member
11 Engr. Nasser M. Al-Dossari Member
12 Dr. Waleed H. Khushefati Member
13 Dr. Waleed M. Abanomi Member
14 Dr. Fahad S. Al-Lahaim Member

SBC 306-CR-18 ii
PREFACE

PREFACE

The Saudi Building Code for Steel Structures (SBC 306) provides minimum requirements for the
structural design and construction of structural steel system or systems with structural steel acting
compositely with reinforced concrete. The first edition of SBC 306 was published in the year of 2007.
SBC 306-18 is the second edition of SBC 306. The current edition of the Code has been substantially
reorganized and reformatted relative to its 2007 version. The code is reorganized into 16 chapters and
six appendices. The reorganization was in response to past requests concerning the difficulty in finding
provisions. The new layout is more user-friendly and will better facilitate the use of the design
provisions.

ANSI/AISC 360-10 is the base code in the development of this Code. Saudi Building Code National
Committee (SBCNC) has made an agreement with the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
to use their materials and modify them as per the local construction needs and regulatory requirements
of Saudi Arabia. AISC is not responsible for any modifications or changes the SBCNC has made to
accommodate local conditions.

The writing process of SBC 306-18 followed the methodology approved by the Saudi Building Code
National Committee. Many changes and modifications were made in its base code (ANSI/AISC 360-
10) to meet the local weather, materials, construction and regulatory requirements.

The committees responsible for SBC 306 Code and Commentary have taken all precautions to avoid
ambiguities, omissions, and errors in the document. Despite these efforts, the users of SBC 306 may
find information or requirements that may be subject to more than one interpretation or may be
incomplete. The SBCNC alone possesses the authority and responsibility for updating, modifying and
interpreting the Code.

It is a common assumption that engineering knowledge is a prerequisite in understanding code

provisions and requirements; thus, the code is oriented towards individuals who possess the
background knowledge to evaluate the significance and limitations of its content and
recommendations. They shall be able to determine the applicability of all regulatory limitations before
applying the Code and must comply with all applicable laws and regulations.

The requirements related to administration and enforcement of this Code are advisory only. SBCNC
and governmental organizations, in charge of enforcing this Code, possess the authority to modify
these administrative requirements.

SBC 306-CR-18 iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 —GENERAL PROVISIONS......................................................................................................... 29
1.1 —SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................................................ 29
1.2 —REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS ....................................................................................... 30
1.3 —MATERIAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 32
1.4 —STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 34
CHAPTER 2 —DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 36
2.1 —GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 36
2.2 —LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS........................................................................................................................... 36
2.3 —DESIGN BASIS ............................................................................................................................................................ 36
2.4 —MEMBER PROPERTIES ............................................................................................................................................... 38
2.5 —MEMBER LENGTHS .................................................................................................................................................... 39
2.6 —FABRICATION AND ERECTION ................................................................................................................................... 39
2.7 —QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................................................ 39
2.8 —EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES................................................................................................................... 39
CHAPTER 3 —DESIGN FOR STABILITY........................................................................................................ 43
3.1 —GENERAL STABILITY REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................................ 43
3.2 —CALCULATION O F REQUIRED STRENGTHS .............................................................................................................. 43
3.3 CALCULATION OF DESIGN STRENGTHS ......................................................................................................................... 46
CHAPTER 4 —DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION................................................................................. 48
4.1 —SLENDERNESS LIMITATIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 48
4.2 —DESIGN TENSILE STRENGTH ...................................................................................................................................... 48
4.3 —EFFECTIVE NET AREA ................................................................................................................................................. 48
4.4 —BUILT-UP MEMBERS ................................................................................................................................................. 48
4.5 —PIN-CONNECTED MEMBERS ...................................................................................................................................... 49
4.6 —EYEBARS .................................................................................................................................................................... 49
CHAPTER 5 —DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION ............................................................................................... 52
5.1 —GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 52
5.2 —EFFECTIVE LENGTH .................................................................................................................................................... 52
5.3 —FLEXURAL BUCKLING OF MEMBERS WITHOUT SLENDER ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 52
5.4 —TORSIONAL AND FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING OF MEMBERS WITHOUT SLENDER ELEMENTS ........................ 53
5.5 —SINGLE ANGLE COMPRESSION MEMBERS................................................................................................................. 54
5.6 —BUILT-UP MEMBERS .................................................................................................................................................. 54
5.7 —MEMBERS WITH SLENDER ELEMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 56
CHAPTER 6 —DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE ................................................................................ 61
6.1 —GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 61
6.2 —DOUBLY SYMMETRIC COMPACT I-SHAPED MEMBERS AND CHANNELS BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS ............ 62
6.3 —DOUBLY SYMMETRIC I-SHAPED MEMBERS WITH COMPECT WEBS AND NONCOMPECT OR SLENDER FLANGES
BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS ....................................................................................................................................... 63
6.4 —OTHER I-SHAPED MEMBERS WITH COMPACT OR NONCOMPACT WEBS BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS ......... 63
6.5 —DOUBLY SYMMECTRIC AND SINGLY SYMMETRIC I-SHAPED MEMBERS WITH SLENDER WEBS BENT ABOUT THEIR
MAJOUT AXIS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 65
6.6 —I-SHAPED MEMBERS AND CHANNELS BENT ABOUT THEIR MINOR AXIS ................................................................ 66
6.7 —SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR HSS AND BOX-SHAPED MEMBERS ............................................................................ 67
6.8 —ROUND HSS ............................................................................................................................................................... 67
6.9 —TEES AND DOUBLE ANGLES LOADED IN THE PLANE O F SYMMETRY ..................................................................... 68
6.10 —SINGLE ANGLES ....................................................................................................................................................... 69
6.11 —RECTANGULAR BARS AND ROUNDS....................................................................................................................... 70
6.12 —UNSYMMETRICAL SHAPES ...................................................................................................................................... 70

SBC 306-CR-18 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.13 —PROPORTIONS OF BEAMS AND GIRDERS .............................................................................................................. 71

CHAPTER 7 —DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR .................................................................................... 75
7.1 —GENERAL PROVISIONS .............................................................................................................................................. 75
7.2 —MEMBERS WITH UNSTIFFENED OR STIFFENED WEBS ........................................................................................... 75
7.3 —TENSION FIELD ACTION ............................................................................................................................................. 76
7.4 —SINGLE ANGLES ......................................................................................................................................................... 77
7.5 —RECTANGULAR HSS AND BOX-SHAPED MEMBERS................................................................................................... 77
7.6 —ROUND HSS ............................................................................................................................................................... 77
7.7 —WEAK AXIS SHEAR IN DOUBLY SYMMETRIC AND SINGLY SYMMETRIC SHAPES ..................................................... 78
7.8 —BEAMS AND GIRDERS WITH WEB OPENINGS .......................................................................................................... 78
CHAPTER 8 —DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION .................................. 80
8.1 —DOUBLY AND SINGLY SYMMETRIC MEMBERS SUBJECT TO FLEXURE AND AXIAL FORCE ......................................... 80
8.2 —UNSYMMETRIC AND OTHER MEMBERS SUBJECT TO FLEXURE A N D AXIAL FORCE .............................................. 81
8.3 —MEMBERS SUBJECT TO TORSION AND COMBINED TORSION, FLEXURE, SHEAR AND/OR AXIAL FORCE ................ 81
8.4 RUPTURE OF FLANGES WITH HOLES SUBJECT TO TENSION ......................................................................................... 83
CHAPTER 9 —DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS .................................................................................... 85
9.1 —GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 85
9.2 —AXIAL FORCE ............................................................................................................................................................. 86
9.3 —FLEXURE .................................................................................................................................................................... 88
9.4 —SHEAR ........................................................................................................................................................................ 90
9.5 —COMBINED FLEXURE AND AXIAL FORCE .................................................................................................................. 91
9.6 —LOAD TRANSFER........................................................................................................................................................ 91
9.7 —COMPOSITE DIAPHRAGMS AND COLLECTOR BEAMS .............................................................................................. 93
9.8 —STEEL ANCHORS ........................................................................................................................................................ 93
9.9 —SPECIAL CASES .......................................................................................................................................................... 97
CHAPTER 10 —DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS .............................................................................................. 100
10.1 —GENERAL PROVISIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 100
10.2 —WELDS ................................................................................................................................................................... 102
10.3 —BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS .............................................................................................................................. 105
10.4 —AFFECTED ELEMENTS OF MEMBERS AND CONNECTING ELEMENTS ................................................................. 109
10.5 —FILLERS .................................................................................................................................................................. 110
10.6 —SPLICES .................................................................................................................................................................. 110
10.7 —BEARING STRENGTH .............................................................................................................................................. 110
10.8 —COLUMN BASES AND BEARING ON CONCRETE ................................................................................................... 111
10.9 —ANCHOR RODS AND EMBEDMENTS..................................................................................................................... 111
10.10 —FLANGES AND WEBS WITH CONCENTRATED FORCES ....................................................................................... 111
CHAPTER 11 —DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS ................................................... 122
11.1 —CONCENTRATED FORCES ON HSS ........................................................................................................................ 122
11.2 —HSS-TO-HSS TRUSS CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................................................... 122
11.3 —HSS-TO-HSS MOMENT CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................................. 124
11.4 —WELDS OF PLATES AND BRANCHES TO RECTANGULAR HSS ............................................................................... 125
CHAPTER 12 —SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS ................................... 143
12.1 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................................................... 143
12.2 —GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................... 146
12.3 —MOMENT-FRAME AND BRACED-FRAME SYSTEMS ............................................................................................... 155
12.4 —COMPOSITE MOMENT-FRAME AND BRACED-FRAME SYSTEMS ........................................................................... 165
12.5 —FABRICATION AND ERECTION ............................................................................................................................... 167
12.6 —QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................... 169
12.7 —PREQUALIFICATION AND CYCLIC QUALIFICATION TESTING PROVISIONS ............................................................. 169
CHAPTER 13 —DESIGN FOR SERVICEABLILITY ...................................................................................... 181

SBC 306-CR-18 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS

13.1 —GENERAL PROVISIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 181

13.2 —CAMBER................................................................................................................................................................. 181
13.3 —DEFLECTION........................................................................................................................................................... 181
13.4 —DRIFT ..................................................................................................................................................................... 181
13.5 —VIBRATION............................................................................................................................................................. 181
13.6 —WIND-INDUCED MOTION ...................................................................................................................................... 181
13.7 —EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION........................................................................................................................... 181
13.8 —CONNECTION SLIP ................................................................................................................................................. 182
CHAPTER 14 —FABRICATION AND ERECTION ........................................................................................ 184
14.1 —SHOP AND ERECTION DRAWINGS......................................................................................................................... 184
14.2 —FABRICATION......................................................................................................................................................... 184
14.3 —SHOP PAINTING ..................................................................................................................................................... 186
14.4 —ERECTION .............................................................................................................................................................. 186
CHAPTER 15 —QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................... 188
15.1 —SCOPE .................................................................................................................................................................... 188
15.2 —FABRICATOR AND ERECTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM ................................................................................ 188
15.3 —FABRICATOR AND ERECTOR DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................... 189
15.4 —INSPECTION AND NONDESTRECTIVE TESTING PERSONNEL ................................................................................. 190
15.5 —MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS F O R INSPECTION O F STRUCTURAL STEEL BULIDINGS .......................................... 191
15.6 —MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR INSPECTION OF COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION.................................................. 195
15.7 —APPROVED FABRICATORS AND ERECTORS ............................................................................................................ 195
15.8 —NONCONFORMING MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................ 196
CHAPTER 16 —EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES .................................................................... 204
16.1 —GENERAL PROVISIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 204
16.2 —MATERIAL PROPERTIES ......................................................................................................................................... 204
16.3 —EVALUATION B Y STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS ............................................................................................................ 205
16.4 —EVALUATION BY LOAD TESTS............................................................................................................................... 205
16.5 —EVALUATION REPORT ........................................................................................................................................... 205
APPENDIX A —DESIGN BY INELASTIC ANALYSIS ................................................................................... 207
A.1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................................................... 207
A.2 — DUCTILITY REQUIREMENTS. ................................................................................................................................... 207
A.3 — ANALYSIS REQUIREMENTS. ................................................................................................................................... 209
APPENDIX B —DESIGN FOR PONDING ...................................................................................................... 211
B.1 —SIMPLIFIED DESIGN FOR PONDING ........................................................................................................................ 211
B.2 — IMPROVED DESIGN FOR PONDING ......................................................................................................................... 211
APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE ....................................................................................................... 216
C.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 216
C.2 — CALCULATION OF MAXIMUM STRESSES AND STRESS RANGES ............................................................................. 216
C.3 — DESIGN STRESS RANGE........................................................................................................................................... 217
C.4 — SPECIAL FABRICATION AND ERECTION REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................ 218
APPENDIX D —STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS ............................................................. 237
D.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 237
D.2 — STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS BY ANALYSIS ................................................................................... 237
D.3 — DESIGN BY QUALIFICATION TESTING ..................................................................................................................... 240
APPENDIX E —STABILITY BRACING FOR COLUMNS AND BEAMS ....................................................... 246
E.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................................................................................ 246
E.2 — COLUMN BRACING ................................................................................................................................................. 246
E.3 — BEAM BRACING ...................................................................................................................................................... 247
E.4 — BEAM-COLUMN BRACING ...................................................................................................................................... 248

SBC 306-CR-18 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPENDIX F —ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF DESIGN FOR STABILITY............................................. 250

F.1 — GENERAL STABILITY REQUIREMENTS...................................................................................................................... 250
F.2 — EFFECTIVE LENGTH METHOD ................................................................................................................................ 250
F.3 — FIRST-ORDER ANALYSIS METHOD ........................................................................................................................... 251
APPENDIX G —APPROXIMATE SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS ................................................................. 254
G.1 — LIMITATIONS .......................................................................................................................................................... 254
G.2 — CALCULATION PROCEDURE.................................................................................................................................... 254

SBC 306-CR-18 4
LIST OF SYMBOLS

List of Symbols
Some definitions in the list below have been simplified in the interest of brevity. In all cases, the definitions
given in the body of the Code govern. Symbols without text definitions, used only in one location and defined
at that location are omitted in some cases. The section or table number in the right-hand column refers to the
Section where the symbol is first used.

Symbol Definition ............................................................................................ Section

ABM Cross-sectional area of the base metal, mm2 ........................................ 10.2.4

Ab Nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or threaded part, mm2 ............. 10.3.6
Abi Cross-sectional area of the overlapping branch, mm2 .......................... 11.2.3
Abj Cross-sectional area of the overlapped branch, mm2 ........................... 11.2.3
Ac Area of concrete, mm2 ......................................................................... 9.2.1.2
Ac Area of concrete slab within effective width, mm2 ............................... 9.3.2.3
Ae Effective net area, mm2 .............................................................................. 4.2
Ae Summation of the effective areas of the cross section based on the reduced
effective width, be, mm2 ............................................................................. 5.7
Afc Area of compression flange, mm2 .......................................................... 7.3.1
Afg Gross area of tension flange, mm2 ..................................................... 6.13.1
Afn Net area of tension flange, mm2 ......................................................... 6.13.1
Aft Area of tension flange, mm2 .................................................................... 7.3.1
Ag Gross cross-sectional area of member, mm2 .......................................... 2.3.6
Ag Gross area of composite member, mm2 ................................................. 9.2.1
Agv Gross area subject to shear, mm2 ........................................................ 10.4.3
An Net area of member, mm2 ....................................................................... 2.4.3
An Area of the directly connected elements, mm2................................ Table 4-1
Ant Net area subject to tension, mm2 .......................................................... 10.4.3
Anv Net area subject to shear, mm2 ............................................................. 10.4.3
Apb Projected area in bearing, mm2 ............................................................... 10.7
As Cross-sectional area of steel section, mm2 .......................................... 9.2.1.2
As Cross-sectional area of the structural steel core, mm2 .................. 12.2.5.4 .2
Asa Cross-sectional area of steel headed stud anchor, mm2....................... 9.8.2.1
Asf Area on the shear failure path, mm2........................................................ 4.5.1
Ash Minimum area of tie reinforcement, mm2 ...................................... 12.2.5.4 .2
Asr Area of continuous reinforcing bars, mm2 .............................................. 9.2.1
Asr Area of adequately developed longitudinal reinforcing steel within the
effective width of the concrete slab, mm2 ............................................. 9.3.2.4
At Net area in tension, mm2 ................................................................. App. C.3.2
Aw Area of web, the overall depth times the web thickness, dtw, mm2 ............... 7.2.1

SBC 306-CR-18 2
LIST OF SYMBOLS

Awe Effective area of the weld, mm2 ............................................................. 10.2.4

Awei Effective area of weld throat of any ith weld element, mm2 .................. 10.2.4
A1 Loaded area of concrete, mm2 ............................................................. 9.6.3.1
A1 Area of steel concentrically bearing on a concrete support, mm2 ........... 10.8
A2 Maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that is geometrically
similar to and concentric with the loaded area, mm2 ............................... 10.8
B Overall width of rectangular HSS member, measured 90 to the plane of the
connection, mm ...............................................................................Table 4-1
B Overall width of rectangular steel section along face transferring load, mm
.............................................................................................................. 9.6.3.1
Bb Overall width of rectangular HSS branch member, measured 90to the plane
of the connection, mm ......................................................................... 11.2.1
Bbi Overall width of the overlapping branch, mm ..................................... 11.2.3
Bbj Overall width of the overlapped branch, mm ..................................... 11.2.3
Bp Width of plate, measured 90 to the plane of the connection, mm....... 11.1.1
B1 Multiplier to account for P-effects ................................................... App.G.2
B2 Multiplier to account for P-Δeffects ................................................ App.G.2
C HSS torsional constant............................................................................ 8.3.1
Ca Ratio of required strength to design strength ............................. TABLE 12-2
Cb Lateral-torsional buckling modification factor for nonuniform moment
diagrams ................................................................................................... 6.1
Cd Coefficient relating relative brace stiffness and curvature............. 12.2.5.2.1
Cd Coefficient accounting for increased required bracing stiffness at inflection
point ............................................................................................... App. E.3.1
Cf Constant from Table A-3.1 for the fatigue category ....................... App.C.3.1
Cm Coefficient accounting for nonuniform moment ............................ App. G.2.1
Cp Ponding flexibility coefficient for primary member in a flat roof .. App. B.1
Cr Coefficient for web sidesway buckling ................................................ 10.10.4
Cs Ponding flexibility coefficient for secondary member in a flat roof . App. B.1
Cv Web shear coefficient ............................................................................. 7.2.1
Cw Warping constant, mm6 ............................................................................. 5.4
C2 Edge distance increment .......................................................TABLE 10-10
D Outside diameter of round HSS, mm ............................................ Table 2-1
D Outside diameter of round HSS main member, mm ............................ 11.2.1
D Nominal dead load, N ................................................................................ App. B.2
D Dead load due to the weight of the structural elements and permanent
features on the building, N ............................................................. 12.2.5.4 .2
Db Outside diameter of round HSS branch member, mm ......................... 11.2.1
Du In slip-critical connections, a multiplier that reflects the ratio of the mean
installed bolt pretension to the specified minimum bolt pretension ..... 10.3.8
E Modulus of elasticity of steel 200 000 MPa...................................Table 2-1

SBC 306-CR-18 3
LIST OF SYMBOLS

Ec Modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa ............................................... 9.2.1.2

Ec (T) Modulus of elasticity of concrete at elevated temperature, MPa App. D2.3.2
Emh Horizontal seismic load ffect including overstrength factor, N ............ 12.2.1
Es Modulus of elasticity of steel  200 000 MPa ..................................... 9.2.1.2
E (T) Elastic modulus of elasticity of steel at elevated temperature, MPa ...............
................................................................................................................... App. D2.4.3
EIeff Effective stiffness of composite section, N-mm2 .................................. 9.2.1.2
Fc Design stress, MPa ............................................................................... 11.1.1
Fca Design axial stress at the point of consideration, MPa .......................... 8.2
Fcbw , Fcbz Design flexural stress at the point of consideration, MPa ....................... 8.2
Fcr Critical stress, MPa ................................................................................... 5.3
Fcre Critical stress calculated from Specification Chapter E using expected yield
stress, MPa......................................................................................... 12.3.4.6
Fcry Critical stress about the y-axis of symmetry, MPa ..................................... 5.4
Fcrz Critical torsional buckling stress, MPa ..................................................... 5.4
Fe Elastic buckling stress, MPa ................................................................... 5.3
Fe (T) Critical elastic buckling stress with the elastic modulus E (T ) at elevated
temperature, MPa ........................................................................ App. D2.4.3
Fex Flexural elastic buckling stress about the major principal axis, MPa ...... 5.4
FEXX Filler metal classification strength, MPa ........................................... 10.2.4
Fey Flexural elastic buckling stress about the minor principal axis, MPa ...... 5.4
Fez Torsional elastic buckling stress, MPa ................................................... 5.4
Fin Nominal bond stress, 0.40 MPa ........................................................ 9.6.3.3
FL Magnitude of flexural stress in compression flange at which flange local
buckling or lateral-torsional buckling is influenced by yielding, MPa . Table
2-2
Fn Nominal stress, MPa ............................................................................... 8.3.3
Fn Nominal tensile stress, Fnt, or shear stress, Fnv, from TABLE 10-7, MPa10.3.6
FnBM Nominal stress of the base metal, MPa ................................................. 10.2.4
Fnt Nominal tensile stress from TABLE 10-7, MPa .................................... 10.3.7
F nt Nominal tensile stress modified to include the effects of shear stress, MPa
............................................................................................................... 10.3.7
Fnv Nominal shear stress from TABLE 10-7, MPa ...................................... 10.3.7
Fnw Nominal stress of the weld metal, MPa ................................................. 10.2.4
Fnw Nominal stress of the weld metal Chapter 10 with no increase in strength due
to directionality of load, MPa .................................................................. 11.4
Fnwi Nominal stress in ith weld element, MPa ............................................... 10.2.4
Fnwix x component of nominal stress, Fnwi, MPa ........................................... 10.2.4
Fnwiy y component of nominal stress, Fnwi, MPa ............................................ 10.2.4
Fp (T) Proportional limit at elevated temperatures, MPa ......................... App. D2.3.2

SBC 306-CR-18 4
LIST OF SYMBOLS

FSR Allowable stress range, MPa..................................................................... App. C.3

FTH Threshold allowable stress range, maximum stress range for indefinite design
life from TABLE C-1, MPa ........................................................................ App. C.1
Fu Specified minimum tensile strength, MPa .................................................. 4.2
Fu (T) Minimum tensile strength at elevated temperature, MPa....................................
................................................................................................................... App. D2.3.2
Fy Specified minimum yield stress, MPa. As used in this Code, “yield stress”
denotes either the specified minimum yield point for those steels that have a
yield point or specified yield strength (for those steel that do not have a yield
point) ....................................................................................................... 2.3.6
Fyb Specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch member material, MPa .........
............................................................................................................... 11.2.1
Fybi Specified minimum yield stress of the overlapping branch material, MPa ....
.............................................................................................................. 11.2.3
Fybj Specified minimum yield stress of the overlapped branch material, MPa11.2.3
Fyf Specified minimum yield stress of the flange, MPa ........................... 10.10.1
Fyp Specified minimum yield stress of plate, MPa ...................................... 11.1.1
Fysr Specified minimum yield stress of reinforcing bars, MPa ................... 9.2.1.2
Fyst Specified minimum yield stress of the stiffener material, MPa ............. 7.3.3
Fy (T) Yield stress at elevated temperature, MPa ....................................... App. D2.4.3
Fyw Specified minimum yield stress of the web material, MPa ................... 7.3.3
Fysr Specified minimum yield stress of the ties, MPa ............................ 12.2.5.4 .2
G Shear modulus of elasticity of steel 77 200 MPa ................................... 5.4
G (T) Shear modulus of elasticity of steel at elevated temperature, MPa ................
...................................................................................................... App. D2.3.2
H Flexural constant ....................................................................................... 5.4
H Story shear, in the direction of translation being considered, produced by the
lateral forces used to compute ΔH, N........................................ App. G.2.2
H Overall height of rectangular HSS member, measured in the plane of the
connection, mm ..............................................................................Table 4-1
H Height of story, which is permitted to be taken as the distance between the
centerline of floor framing at each of the levels above and below, or the
distance between the top of floor slabs at each of the levels above and below,
mm ................................................................................................... 12.2.6.4.3
Hb Overall height of rectangular HSS branch member, measured in the plane of
the connection, mm ............................................................................. 11.2.1
Hbi Overall depth of the overlapping branch, mm ..................................... 11.2.3
I Moment of inertia in the plane of bending, mm4 ............................. App. G.2.1
Ic Moment of inertia of the concrete section about the elastic neutral axis of the
composite section, mm4 ..................................................................9.2.1.2
Id Moment of inertia of the steel deck supported on secondary members, mm4
......................................................................................................................... App. B.1
Ip Moment of inertia of primary members, mm4 ........................................ App. B.1

SBC 306-CR-18 5
LIST OF SYMBOLS

Is Moment of inertia of secondary members, mm4 ............................... App. B.1

Is Moment of inertia of steel shape about the elastic neutral axis of the
composite section, mm4 ........................................................................ 9.2.1.2
Isr Moment of inertia of reinforcing bars about the elastic neutral axis of the
composite section, mm4 ......................................................................... 9.2.1.2
Ist Moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners about an axis in the web center for
stiffener pairs, or about the face in contact with the web plate for single
stiffeners, mm4 ......................................................................................... 7.3.3
Ist1 Minimum moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners required for development
of the web shear buckling resistance in Section 7.3.3 , mm4 ................... 7.3.3
Ist2 Minimum moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners required for development
of the full web shear buckling plus the web tension field resistance, Vr Vc2,
mm4 ......................................................................................................... 7.3.3
Ix, Iy Moment of inertia about the principal axes, mm4 ...................................... 5.4
Iy Out-of-plane moment of inertia, mm4 ........................................... App. E3.2.1
Iyc Moment of inertia the compression flange about the y-axis, mm4 .......... 6.4.2
Iz Minor principal axis moment of inertia, mm4 ....................................... 6.10.2
J Torsional constant, mm4............................................................................. 5.4
K Effective length factor ......................................................................... 3.3, 5.2
Kx Effective length factor for flexural buckling about x-axis.......................... 5.4
Ky Effective length factor for flexural buckling about y-axis.......................... 5.4
Kz Effective length factor for torsional buckling ............................................ 5.4
K1 Effective length factor in the plane of bending, calculated based on the
assumption of no lateral translation at the member ends, set equal to 1.0
unless analysis justifies a smaller value ............................................. App. G.2.1
L Height of story, mm .................................................................................. App. F.3.2
L Length of member, mm ............................................................................ 8.3.1
L Nominal occupancy live load ......................................................... App. D.1.4
L Laterally unbraced length of member, mm .............................................. 5.2
L Length of span, mm ...................................................................... App. E3.2.1
L Length of member between work points at truss chord centerlines, mm . 5.5
L Live load due to occupancy and moveable equipment, N .............. 12.2.5.4 .2
L Length of brace, mm .......................................................................... 12.3.4.5
Lb Length between points that are either braced against lateral displacement of
compression flange or braced against twist of the cross section, mm .... 6.2.2
Lb Distance between braces, mm ................................................................... App. E.2
Lb Largest laterally unbraced length along either flange at the point of load, mm
............................................................................................................. 10.10.4
Lm Limiting laterally unbraced length for eligibility for moment redistribution in
beams according to Section 2.3.7 ........................................................ 6.13.5
Lp Limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of yielding, mm .. 6.2.2
Lp Length of primary members, mm ...................................................... App. B.1

SBC 306-CR-18 6
LIST OF SYMBOLS

Lpd Limiting laterally unbraced length for plastic analysis, mm ......... App. A.2.3
Lr Limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic lateral-
torsional buckling, mm............................................................................ 6.2.2
Ls Length of secondary members, m..................................................... App. B.1
Lv Distance from maximum to zero shear force, mm ..................................... 7.6
MA Absolute value of moment at quarter point of the unbraced segment, N-mm6.1
MB Absolute value of moment at centerline of the unbraced segment, N-mm . 6.1
MC Absolute value of moment at three-quarter point of the unbraced segment, N-
mm .............................................................................................................. 6.1
Mcx , Mcy Design flexural strength determined in accordance with Chapter 6, N-mm
................................................................................................................. 8.1.1
Mcx Design lateral-torsional strength for strong axis flexure determined in
Accordance with Chapter 6 using Cb = 1.0, N-mm .............................. 8.1.3
Mcx Design flexural strength about the x-axis for the limit state of tensile rupture
of the flange, N-mm .................................................................................. 8.4
Me Elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, N-mm .............................. 6.10.2
Mlt First-order moment, due to lateral translation of the structure only, N-mm
.........................................................................................................................App. G.2
Mmax Absolute value of maximum moment in the unbraced segment, N-mm ...... 6.1
Mmid Moment at the middle of the unbraced length, N-mm .................... App. A.2.3
Mn Nominal flexural strength, N-mm ............................................................... 6.1
Mn,PR Nominal flexural strength of PR connection at a rotation of 0.02 rad, N-mm
......................................................................................................... 12.3.1.6.3
Mnt First-order moment, with the structure restrained against lateral translation,
N-mm ...........................................................................................................App. G.2
Mp Plastic bending moment, N-mm ................................. Table 2-1, Table 2-2
Mp Moment corresponding to plastic stress distribution over the composite cross
section, N-mm ...................................................................................... 9.3.4.2
Mp Nominal plastic flexural strength, N-mm ........................................ 12.3.1.6.2
Mpc Nominal plastic flexural strength of the column, N-mm .................... 12.2.6.4
Mp,exp Expected flexural strength, N-mm................................................... 12.2.5.2.3
Mr Required second-order flexural strength, N-mm ...................................App. G.2
Mr Required flexural strength, N-mm ........................................................... 8.1.1
Mrb Required bracing moment, N-mm ......................................................... App. E.3.2
Mr-ip Required in-plane flexural strength in branch, N-mm .......................... 11.3.2
Mr-op Required out-of-plane flexural strength in branch, N-mm ................... 11.3.2
Mrx,Mry Required flexural strength, N-mm........................................................... 8.1.1
Mrx Required flexural strength at the location of the bolt holes; positive for
tension in the flange under consideration, negative for compression, N-mm8.4
Mu Required flexural strength, N-mm ....................................................... 10.10.4
My Moment at yielding of the extreme fiber, N-mm ............................ Table 2-2

SBC 306-CR-18 7
LIST OF SYMBOLS

My Yield moment about the axis of bending, N-mm .................................. 6.10.1

Myc Moment at yielding of the extreme fiber in the compression flange, N-mm6.4.2
Myt Moment at yielding of the extreme fiber in the tension flange, N-mm .... 6.4.4
M1 Effective moment at the end of the unbraced length opposite from M2, N-mm
...................................................................................................................... App. A.2.3
M1 Smaller moment at end of unbraced length, N-mm ......... 6.13.5 , App. A.2.3
M2 Larger moment at end of unbraced length, N-mm ............ 6.13.5 , App. A.2.3
Ni Notional load applied at level i, N ....................................................... 3.2.2.2
Ni Additional lateral load, N .......................................................................... App. F.3
Ov Overlap connection coefficient ............................................................ 11.2.2
Pc Design axial strength, N ......................................................................... 8.1.1
Pcy Design compressive strength out of the plane of bending, N .................. 8.1.3
Pe Elastic critical buckling load determined in accordance with Chapter 3 or
Appendix F, N ...................................................................................... 9.2.1.2
Pe story Elastic critical buckling strength for the story in the direction of translation
being considered, N .................................................................................. App G.2.2
Pey Elastic critical buckling load for buckling about the weak axis, N ....... 8.1.2
Pe1 Elastic critical buckling strength of the member in the plane of bending, N
..................................................................................................................... App. G.2.1
Plt First-order axial force, due to lateral translation of the structure only, NApp.
G.2
Pmf Total vertical load in columns in the story that are part of moment frames, if
any, in the direction of translation being considered, N ................ App. G.2.2
Pn Nominal axial strength, N .......................................................................... 4.2
Pn Nominal compressive strength, N .............................................................. 5.1
Pn Nominal compressive strength of the composite column calculated in
accordance with the Code, N ............................................................. 12.2.5.4
Pno Nominal compressive strength of zero length, doubly symmetric, axially
loaded composite member, N ..................................................................... 9.2
Pnt First-order axial force, with the structure restrained against lateral
translation, N ................................................................................................App. G.2
Pp Nominal bearing strength, N .................................................................... 10.8
Pr Required second-order axial strength, N ................................................App. G.2
Pr Required axial compressive strength, N ................................................. 3.2.3
Pr Required axial strength, N ...................................................................... 8.1.1
Pr Required axial strength of the member at the location of the bolt holes;
positive in tension, negative in compression, N ......................................... 8.4
Pr Required external force applied to the composite member, N ............. 9.6.2.1
Prb Required brace strength, N ........................................................................ App. E.2
Pstory Total vertical load supported by the story, including loads in columns that are
not part of the lateral force resisting system, N ................................ App. G.2.2

SBC 306-CR-18 8
LIST OF SYMBOLS

Pu Required axial strength in chord, N ............................................ TABLE 11-1

Pu Required axial strength in compression, N ......................................... App. A.2.2
Pu Required axial strength using LRFD load combinations,N ........ TABLE 12-2
Py Axial yield strength, N............................................................................. 3.2.3
Q Net reduction factor accounting for all slender compression elements .... 5.7
Qa Reduction factor for slender stiffened elements ......................................... 5.7
Qct Design tensile strength, N ....................................................................... 9.8.3
Qcv Design shear strength, N...................................................................... 9.8.3.3
Qf Chord-stress interaction parameter ................................................... 11.2.2
Qn Nominal strength of one steel headed stud or steel channel anchor, N .. 9.3.2
Qnt Nominal tensile strength of steel headed stud anchor, N .................... 9.8.3.2
Qnv Nominal shear strength of steel headed stud anchor, N .................... 9.8.3.1
Qrt Required tensile strength, N ................................................................. 9.8.3.3
Qrv Required shear strength, N .................................................................. 9.8.3.3
Qs Reduction factor for slender unstiffened elements ..................................... 5.7
R Radius of joint surface, mm .......................................................... TABLE 10-2
R Nominal load due to rainwater, exclusive of the ponding contribution, MPa
......................................................................................................................... App. B.2
R Seismic response modification coefficient .............................................. 1.1.1
RFIL Reduction factor for joints a pair of transverse fillet welds only ... App. C.3
Rg Coefficient to account for group effect................................................. 9.8.2.1
RM Coefficient to account for influence of P- on P-ΔApp. G.2.2
Rn Nominal strength, specified in Chapters 2 through 11 .......................... 2.3.3
Rn Nominal slip resistance, N .................................................................... 10.3.8
Rn Nominal strength of the applicable force transfer mechanism, N .......... 9.6.3
Rnwl Total nominal strength of longitudinally loaded fillet welds, as determined in
accordance with TABLE 10-5, N .......................................................... 10.2.4
Rnwt Total nominal strength of transversely loaded fillet welds, as determined in
accordance with TABLE 10-5 without the alternate in Section 10.2.4 a, N
............................................................................................................... 10.2.4
Rnx Horizontal component of the nominal strength of a weld group, N ..... 10.2.4
Rny Vertical component of the nominal strength of a weld group, N .......... 10.2.4
Rp Position effect factor for shear studs.................................................... 9.8.2.1
Rpc Web plastification factor ......................................................................... 6.4.1
Rpg Bending strength reduction factor .......................................................... 6.5.2
RPJP Reduction factor for reinforced or nonreinforced transverse partial-joint-
penetration PJP groove welds............................................................ App. C.3
Rpt Web plastification factor corresponding to the tension flange yielding limit
state ........................................................................................................ 6.4.4
Rt Ratio of the expected tensile strength to the specified minimum tensile strength
Fu, as related to overstrength in material yield stress, Ry ................ 12.1.2.2

SBC 306-CR-18 9
LIST OF SYMBOLS

Ru Required strength ................................................................................... 2.3.3

Ry Ratio of the expected yield stress to the specified minimum yield stress, Fy
............................................................................................................ 12.1.2.2
S Elastic section modulus, mm3 ................................................................. 6.8.2
S Spacing of secondary members, m ................................................... App. B.1
Sc Elastic section modulus to the toe in compression relative to the axis of
bending, mm3 ........................................................................................ 6.10.3
Se Effective section modulus about major axis, mm3 ................................. 6.7.2
Sip Effective elastic section modulus of welds for in-plane bending TABLE 11-13,
mm3 .......................................................................................................... 11.4
Smin Lowest elastic section modulus relative to the axis of bending, mm3 ...... 6.12
Sop Effective elastic section modulus of welds for out-of-plane bending TABLE
11-13, mm3 ........................................................................................ 11.4
Sxc, Sxt Elastic section modulus referred to compression and tension flanges,
respectively, mm3 ...............................................................................Table 2-2
Sx Elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, mm3 ............................. 6.2.2
Sy Elastic section modulus taken about the y-axis. For a channel, the minimum
section modulus, mm3 ............................................................................. 6.6.2
T Nominal forces and deformations due to the design-basis fire defined in
Appendix Section D.2.1 .................................................................. App. D.1.4
Tb Minimum fastener tension given in TABLE 10-6, N ............................. 10.3.8
Tc Design torsional strength, N-mm ............................................................ 8.3.2
Tn Nominal torsional strength, N-mm........................................................... 8.3.1
Tr Required torsional strength, N-mm .......................................................... 8.3.2
Tu Required tension force, N .................................................................... 10.3.9
U Shear lag factor.......................................................................................... 4.3
U Utilization ratio ..................................................................................... 11.2.2
Ubs Reduction coefficient, used in calculating block shear rupture strength 10.4.3
Up Stress index for primary members .................................................... App. B.2
Us Stress index for secondary members ................................................. App. B.2
V Nominal shear force between the steel beam and the concrete slab transferred
by steel anchors, N ............................................................................... 9.3.2.3
Vc Design shear strength, N ......................................................................... 8.3.2
Vc1 Smaller of the design shear strengths in the adjacent web panels with Vn as
defined in Section 7.2.1 , N ..................................................................... 7.3.3
Vc2 Smaller of the design shear strengths in the adjacent web panels with Vn as
defined in Section 7.3.2 , N .................................................................... 7.3.3
Vn Nominal shear strength, N ......................................................................... 7.1
Vr Larger of the required shear strengths in the adjacent web panels, N ... 7.3.3
Vr Required shear strength, N ..................................................................... 8.3.2
Vr Required longitudinal shear force to be transferred to the steel or concrete, N
................................................................................................................. 9.6.2

SBC 306-CR-18 10
LIST OF SYMBOLS

Yi Gravity load applied at level i from the LRFD load combination, N, 3.2.2.2 ,
App. F.3.2
Z Plastic section modulus about the axis of bending, mm3 ..................... 6.7.1
Zb Plastic section modulus of branch about the axis of bending, mm3 ...... 11.3.1
Zx Plastic section modulus about the x-axis, mm3 .................................... 6.2.1
Zy Plastic section modulus about the y-axis, mm3 ....................................... 6.6.1
a Clear distance between transverse stiffeners, mm ................................ 6.13.2
a Distance between connectors, mm ............................................................. 5.6
a Shortest distance from edge of pin hole to edge of member measured parallel
to the direction of force, mm ................................................................... 4.5.1
a Half the length of the non-welded root face in the direction of the thickness of
the tension-loaded plate, mm ............................................................ App. C.3
a Weld length along both edges of the cover plate termination to the beam or
girder, mm ............................................................................................. 6.13.3
aw Ratio of two times the web area in compression due to application of major
axis bending moment alone to the area of the compression flange components
................................................................................................................. 6.4.2
b Full width of leg in compression, mm ................................................... 6.10.3
b For flanges of I-shaped members, half the full-flange width, bf ; for flanges of
channels, the full nominal dimension of the flange, mm ......................... 6.6.2
b Full width of longest leg, mm ..................................................................... 5.7
b Width of unstiffened compression element; width of stiffened compression
element, mm ............................................................................................ 2.4.1
b Width of the leg resisting the shear force, mm ........................................... 7.4
b Inside width of a box section, mm ................................................... 12.4.3.5.2
bcf Width of column flange, mm ............................................................... 10.10.6
be Reduced effective width, mm ...................................................................... 5.7
be Effective edge distance for calculation of tensile rupture strength of pin-
connected member, mm ........................................................................... 4.5.1
beoi Effective width of the branch face welded to the chord, mm................. 11.2.3
beov Effective width of the branch face welded to the overlapped brace, mm11.2.3
bf Width of flange, mm ................................................................................ 2.4.1
bfc Width of compression flange, mm ........................................................... 6.4.2
bft Width of tension flange, mm.................................................................... 7.3.1
bl Length of longer leg of angle, mm ............................................................. 5.5
bs Length of shorter leg of angle, mm ............................................................ 5.5
bs Stiffener width for one-sided stiffeners, mm ................................... App. E.3.2
d Nominal fastener diameter, mm ............................................................ 10.3.3
d Nominal bolt diameter, mm ................................................................. 10.3.10
d Full nominal depth of the section, mm .................................. 2.4.1 , 10.10.3
d Depth of rectangular bar, mm ............................................................... 6.11.2
d Diameter, mm ........................................................................................... 10.7

SBC 306-CR-18 11
LIST OF SYMBOLS

d Diameter of pin, mm ............................................................................... 4.5.1

d Overall beam depth, mm ............................................................. TABLE 12-2
db Depth of beam, mm ............................................................................. 10.10.6
db Nominal diameter (body or shank diameter), mm ............................ App. C.4
dc Depth of column, mm .......................................................................... 10.10.6
e Eccentricity in a truss connection, positive being away from the branches, mm
............................................................................................................... 11.2.1
emid-ht Distance from the edge of steel headed stud anchor shank to the steel deck
web, mm ............................................................................................... 9.8.2.1
fc Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa ............................... 9.2.1.2
fc(T) Compressive strength of concrete at elevated temperature, MPa ...............
........................................................................................................App. D2.3.2
fo Stress due to D R (D nominal dead load, R nominal load due to
rainwater exclusive of the ponding contribution), MPa ......................... App.
B.2
fra Required axial stress at the point of consideration, MPa .......................... 8.2
frbw, frbz Required flexural stress at the point of consideration, MPa...................... 8.2
frv Required shear stress, MPa .................................................................. 10.3.7
g Transverse center-to-center spacing (gage) between fastener gage lines, mm
................................................................................................................. 2.4.3
g Gap between toes of branch members in a gapped K-connection, neglecting
the welds, mm ........................................................................................ 11.2.1
h Width of stiffened compression element, mm .......................................... 2.4.1
h Height of shear element, mm................................................................ 7.2.1 b
h Clear distance between flanges less the fillet or corner radius for rolled
shapes; distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear distance
between flanges when welds are used for built-up shapes, mm.......... 10.10.4
hc Twice the distance from the center of gravity to the following: the inside face
of the compression flange less the fillet or corner radius, for rolled shapes;
the nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the inside faces of
the compression flange when welds are used, for built-up sections, mm 2.4.1
hcc Cross-sectional dimension of the confined core region in composite columns
measured center-to-center of the transverse reinforcement, mm ...... 12.2.5.4
ho Distance between the flange centroids, mm............................................ 6.2.2
hp Twice the distance from the plastic neutral axis to the nearest line of fasteners
at the compression flange or the inside face of the compression flange when
welds are used, mm ................................................................................. 2.4.1
hr Nominal height of rib, mm ................................................................... 9.8.2.1
k Distance from outer face of flange to the web toe of fillet, mm .......... 10.10.2
kc Coefficient for slender unstiffened element ......................................Table 2-2
ksc Slip-critical combined tension and shear coefficient............................ 10.3.9
kv Web plate shear buckling coefficient ...................................................... 7.2.1
l Actual length of end-loaded weld, mm .................................................. 10.2.2

SBC 306-CR-18 12
LIST OF SYMBOLS

l Length of connection, mm ................................................................Table 4-1

lb Length of bearing, mm ............................................................................. 10.7
lc Clear distance, in the direction of the force, between the edge of thehole and
the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material, mm ................. 10.3.10
la Length of channel anchor, mm ............................................................. 9.8.2.2
le Total effective weld length of groove and fillet welds to rectangular HSS for
weld strength calculations, mm ................................................................. 11.4
lov Overlap length measured along the connecting face of the chord beneath the
two branches, mm ................................................................................. 11.2.1
lp Projected length of the overlapping branch on the chord, mm ............ 11.2.1
n Number of nodal braced points within the span ............................... App. E.3
nb Number of bolts carrying the applied tension....................................... 10.3.9
ns Number of slip planes required to permit the connection to slip.......... 10.3.8
nSR Number of stress range fluctuations in design life ............................ App. C.3
p Pitch, mm per thread...................................................................... App. C.3.2
pi Ratio of element i deformation to its deformation at maximum Stress . 10.2.4
r Radius of gyration, mm .............................................................................. 5.2
rcr Distance from instantaneous center of rotation to weld element with minimum
u/ri ratio, mm ..................................................................................... 10.2.4
ri Minimum radius of gyration of individual component, mm....................... 5.6
ri Distance from instantaneous center of rotation to ith weld element, mm10.2.4
𝑟̄0 Polar radius of gyration about the shear center, mm ................................ 5.4
rt Radius of gyration of the flange components in flexural compression plus one-
third of the web area in compression due to Application of major axis bending
moment alone, mm .................................................................................. 6.4.2
rts Effective radius of gyration, mm ............................................................. 6.2.2
rx Radius of gyration about the x-axis, mm ................................................... 5.4
rx Radius of gyration about the geometric axis parallel to the connected leg, mm
.................................................................................................................... 5.5
ry Radius of gyration about y-axis, mm ......................................................... 5.4
rz Radius of gyration about the minor principal axis, mm ............................ 5.5
s Longitudinal center-to-center spacing (pitch) of any two consecutive holes,
mm ........................................................................................................... 2.4.3
t Thickness of element, mm .......................................................................... 5.7
t Thickness of wall, mm ................................................................................ 5.7
t Thickness of angle leg, mm ................................................................... 6.10.2
t Width of rectangular bar parallel to axis of bending, mm ................... 6.11.2
t Thickness of connected material, mm ................................................. 10.3.10
t Thickness of plate, mm ............................................................................ 4.5.1
t Total thickness of fillers, mm ................................................................ 10.5.2
t Design wall thickness of HSS member, mm ............................... 2.4.1 , 11.1.1

SBC 306-CR-18 13
LIST OF SYMBOLS

tb Design wall thickness of HSS branch member, mm .............................. 11.2.1

tbi Thickness of overlapping branch, mm .................................................. 11.2.3
tbj Thickness of overlapped branch, mm ................................................... 11.2.3
tcf Thickness of column flange, mm ......................................................... 10.10.6
tf Thickness of flange, mm .......................................................................... 6.6.2
tf Thickness of loaded flange, mm .......................................................... 10.10.1
tf Thickness of flange of channel anchor, mm ......................................... 9.8.2.2
tfc Thickness of compression flange, mm .................................................... 6.4.2
tp Thickness of plate, mm .......................................................................... 11.1.1
tp Thickness of tension loaded plate, mm ............................................. App. C.3
tst Thickness of web stiffener, mm..................................................... App. E3.2.1
tw Thickness of web, mm ......................................................................Table 2-1
tw Smallest effective weld throat thickness around the perimeter of branch or
plate, mm .................................................................................................. 11.4
tw Thickness of channel anchor web, mm ................................................ 9.8.2.2
w Width of cover plate, mm ...................................................................... 6.13.3
w Size of weld leg, mm .............................................................................. 10.2.2
w Subscript relating symbol to major principal axis bending ....................... 8.2
w Width of plate, mm ...........................................................................Table 4-1
w Leg size of the reinforcing or contouring fillet, if any, in the direction of the
thickness of the tension-loaded plate, mm ........................................ App. C.3
wc Weight of concrete per unit volume (1500 wc 2500 kg/m3) .............. 9.2.1
wr Average width of concrete rib or haunch, mm ........................................ 9.3.2
x Subscript relating symbol to strong axis bending ................................... 8.1.1
xi x component of ri .................................................................................. 10.2.4
xo, yo Coordinates of the shear center with respect to the centroid, mm............. 5.4
x– Eccentricity of connection, mm........................................................Table 4-1
y Subscript relating symbol to weak axis bending ..................................... 8.1.1
yi y component of ri ................................................................................... 10.2.4
z Subscript relating symbol to minor principal axis bending ....................... 8.2
Ωo System overstrength factor .................................................................... 12.2.1
 Reduction factor given by Eq. (10-1) ..................................................... 10.2.2
 Width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to chord diameter for round HSS;
the ratio of overall branch width to chord width for rectangular HSS . 11.2.1
T Overall brace system stiffness, N-mm/rad ..................................... App. E3.2.1
br Required brace stiffness, N/mm ..................................................... App. E.2.1
eff Effective width ratio; the sum of the perimeters of the two branch members in
a K-connection divided by eight times the chord width ........................ 11.2.1
eop Effective outside punching parameter................................................... 11.2.3
sec Web distortional stiffness, including the effect of web transversestiffeners, if

SBC 306-CR-18 14
LIST OF SYMBOLS

any, N-mm/rad.............................................................................. App. E3.2.1

Tb Required torsional stiffness for nodal bracing, N-mm/rad .......... App. E3.2.1
w Section property for unequal leg angles, positive for short legs in compression
and negative for long legs in compression ........................................... 6.10.2
 First-order interstory drift combinations, mm .............................. App. F.3.2
H First-order interstory drift due to lateral forces, mm ................. App.G.2.2
i Deformation of weld elements at intermediate stress levels, linearly
proportioned to the critical deformation based on distance from the
instantaneous center of rotation, ri, mm........................................... 10.2.4
mi Deformation of weld element at maximum stress, mm ...................... 10.2.4
ui Deformation of weld element at ultimate stress (rupture), usually in element
furthest from instantaneous center of rotation, mm .............................. 10.2.4
cu(T) Maximum concrete strain at elevated temperature, % ................ App. D2.3.2
 Chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half the diameter to the wall
thickness for round HSS; the ratio of one-half the width to wall thickness for
rectangular HSS ..................................................................................... 11.2.1
 Gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the branches of a gapped K-
connection to the width of the chord for rectangular HSS .................... 11.2.1
 Load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular HSS; the ratio of the
length of contact of the branch with the chord in the plane of the connection
to the chord width ................................................................................... 11.2.1
 Slenderness parameter ............................................................................ 6.3.2
p Limiting slenderness parameter for compact element ............................... 2.4
pd Limiting slenderness parameter for plastic design ........................... App. A.2
pf Limiting slenderness parameter for compact flange .............................. 6.3.2
pw Limiting slenderness parameter for compact web ...................................... 6.4
r Limiting slenderness parameter for noncompact element ......................... 2.4
rf Limiting slenderness parameter for noncompact flange ........................ 6.3.2
rw Limiting slenderness parameter for noncompact web............................. 6.4.2
 Mean slip coefficient for Class A or B surfaces, as applicable, or as
established by tests................................................................................ 10.3.8
 Resistance factor, specified in Chapters 2 through 11 ........................... 2.3.3
B Resistance factor for bearing on concrete ........................................... 9.6.3.1
b Resistance factor for flexure ...................................................................... 6.1
c Resistance factor for compression .......................................................... 2.3.6
c Resistance factor for axially loaded composite columns ..................... 9.2.1.2
T Resistance factor for torsion ................................................................... 8.3.1
t Resistance factor for tension...................................................................... 4.2
t Resistance factor for steel headed stud anchor in tension ................... 9.8.3.2
v Resistance factor for shear ........................................................................ 7.1

SBC 306-CR-18 15
LIST OF SYMBOLS

v Resistance factor for steel headed stud anchor in shear ...................... 9.8.3.1
sr Minimum reinforcement ratio for longitudinal reinforcing .................... 9.2.1
st The larger of Fyw /Fyst and 1.0 ................................................................. 7.3.3
 Angle of loading measured from the weld longitudinal axis, degrees .. 10.2.4
 Acute angle between the branch and chord, degrees ........................... 11.2.1
i ngle of loading measured from the longitudinal axis of ith weld element,
degrees .................................................................................................. 10.2.4
b Stiffness reduction parameter ................................................................. 3.2.3

COMMENTARY SYMBOLS
Symbol Definition ............................................................................................ Section

A Angle cross-sectional area, mm2 ............................................................... 7.4

Cf Compression force in concrete slab for fully composite beam; smaller of Fy As
and 0.85fcAc, N ........................................................................................ 9.3.2
Fys Static yield stress, MPa ......................................................................... 16.2.2
H Height of anchor, mm ............................................................................. 9.8.2
Ig Moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis, neglecting
reinforcement, mm4 ................................................................................. 9.2.1
ILB Lower bound moment of inertia, mm4 ..................................................... 9.3.2
Ipos Effective moment of inertia for positive moment, mm4 ........................... 9.3.2
Ineg Effective moment of inertia for negative moment, mm4 .......................... 9.3.2
Is Moment of inertia for the structural steel section,mm4........................... 9.3.2
Itr Moment of inertia for the fully composite uncracked transformed section,mm4
.........................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................. 9.3.2
Iy Top Moment of inertia of the top flange about an axis through the web, mm4 6.1
Iy Moment of inertia of the entire section about an axis through the web, mm4
… ................................................................................................................ 6.1
Ks Secant stiffness, MPa .............................................................................. 2.3.5
MCL Moment at the middle of the unbraced length, N-mm ................................ 6.1
MS Moment at service loads, N-mm.............................................................. 2.3.5
MT Torsional moment, N-mm........................................................................... 7.4
Mo Maximum first-order moment within the member due to the transverse
loading, N-mm.......................................................................................... G.2
N Number of cycles to failure ....................................................................... C.3
Qm Mean value of the load effect Q .............................................................. 2.3.3
Rcap Minimum rotation capacity .....................................................................A.2.2
Rm Mean value of the resistance R ............................................................... 2.3.3
Sr Stress range............................................................................................... C.3
Ss Section modulus for the structural steel section, referred to the tension flange,
mm3 ......................................................................................................... 9.3.2

SBC 306-CR-18 16
LIST OF SYMBOLS

Str Section modulus for the fully composite uncracked transformed section,
referred to the tension flange of the steel section mm3 ........................... 9.3.2
VQ Coefficient of variation of the load effect Q............................................ 2.3.3
VR Coefficient of variation of the resistance R............................................. 2.3.3
Vb Component of the shear force parallel to the angle leg with width b and
thickness t, N .............................................................................................. 7.4
acr Distance from the compression face to the neutral axis for a slender section,
mm .............................................................................................................. 9.3
ap Distance from the compression face to the neutral axis for a compact section,
mm .............................................................................................................. 9.3
ay Distance from the compression face to the neutral axis for a noncompact
section, mm ................................................................................................ 9.3
fv Shear stress in angle, MPa ........................................................................ 7.4
k Plate buckling coefficient characteristic of the type of plate edge-restraint5.7
𝛽 Reliability index ...................................................................................... 2.3.3
𝛽act Actual bracing stiffness provided...............................................................E.1
𝛿𝑜 Maximum deflection due to transverse loading, mm ................................ G.2
𝜈 Poisson’s ratio .......................................................................................... 5.7
𝜃𝑆 Rotation at service loads, rad ................................................................. 2.3.5

SBC 306-CR-18 17
GLOSSARY

Glossary
Block shear rupture. In a connection, limit state of
Terms defined in this Glossary are italicized in the
tension rupture along one path and shear yielding or
Glossary and where they first appear within a section
shear rupture along another path.
or long paragraph throughout the code.
Boundary member. Portion along wall or diaphragm
Notes:
edge strengthened with structural steel sections
(1) Terms designated with * are usually qualified and/or longitudinal steel reinforcement and
by the type of load effect; for example, transverse reinforcement.
nominal tensile strength, design compressive Braced frame. Essentially vertical truss system that
strength, and design flexural strength. provides resistance to lateral forces and provides
(2) Terms designated with ** are usually qualified by stability for the structural system.
the type of component; for example, web local Bracing. Member or system that provides stiffness
buckling and flange local bending. and strength to limit the out-of-plane movement of
another member at a brace point.

Active fire protection. Building materials and systems Branch member. In an HSS connection, member that
that are activated by a fire to mitigate adverse effects terminates at a chord member or main member.
or to notify people to take some action to mitigate Buckling. Limit state of sudden change in the
adverse effects. geometry of a structure or any of its elements under a
Amplified seismic load. Seismic load effect including critical loading condition.
overstrength factor. Buckling strength. Strength for instability limit
Applicable building code. Building code under which states.
the structure is designed. Buckling-restrained brace. A prefabricated, or
Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). Organization, manufactured, brace element consisting of a steel
political subdivision, office or individual charged core and a buckling-restraining system as described
with the responsibility of administering and enforcing in Section 12.4 and qualified by testing.
the provisions of the applicable building code. Buckling-restrained braced frame (BRBF). A
Average rib width. In a formed steel deck, average diagonally braced frame employing buckling
width of the rib of a corrugation. restrained braces.

Batten plate. Plate rigidly connected to two parallel Built-up member, cross section, section, shape.
components of a built-up column or beam designed Member, cross section, section or shape fabricated
to transmit shear between the components. from structural steel elements that are welded or
bolted together.
Beam. Nominally horizontal structural member that
has the primary function of resisting bending Camber. Curvature fabricated into a beam or truss so
moments. as to compensate for deflection induced by loads.

Beam-column. Structural member that resists both Charpy V-notch impact test. Standard dynamic test
axial force and bending moment. measuring notch toughness of a specimen.

Bearing. In a connection, limit state of shear forces Chord member. In an HSS connection, primary
transmitted by the mechanical fastener to the member that extends through a truss connection.
connection elements. Cladding. Exterior covering of structure.
Bearing (local compressive yielding). Limit state of Cold-formed steel structural member. Shape
local compressive yielding due to the action of a manufactured by press-braking blanks sheared from
member bearing against another member or surface. sheets, cut lengths of coils or plates, or by roll
Bearing-type connection. Bolted connection where forming cold- or hot-rolled coils or sheets; both
shear forces are transmitted by the bolt bearing forming operations being performed at ambient room
against the connection elements. temperature, that is, without manifest addition of heat
such as would be required for hot forming.

SBC 306-CR-18 18
GLOSSARY

Collector. Also known as drag strut; member that Composite slab. Reinforced concrete slab supported
serves to transfer loads between floor diaphragms on and bonded to a formed steel deck that acts as a
and the members of the lateral force resisting system. diaphragm to transfer load to and between elements
of the seismic force resisting system.
Column. Nominally vertical structural member that
has the primary function of resisting axial Concrete breakout surface. The surface delineating a
compressive force. volume of concrete surrounding a steel headed stud
anchor that separates from the remaining concrete.
Column base. Assemblage of structural shapes,
plates, connectors, bolts and rods at the base of a Concrete crushing. Limit state of compressive
column used to transmit forces between the steel failure in concrete having reached the ultimate
superstructure and the foundation. strain.
Compact section. Section capable of developing a Concrete haunch. In a composite floor system
fully plastic stress distribution and pos- sessing a constructed using a formed steel deck, the section of
rotation capacity of approximately three before the solid concrete that results from stopping the deck on
onset of local buckling. each side of the girder.
Compartmentation. Enclosure of a building space Concrete-encased beam. Beam totally encased in
with elements that have a specific fire endurance. concrete cast integrally with the slab.
Complete-joint-penetration (CJP) groove weld. Concrete-encased shapes. Structural steel sections
Groove weld in which weld metal extends through encased in concrete.
the joint thickness, except as permitted for HSS
Connection. Combination of structural elements and
connections.
joints used to transmit forces between two or more
Composite. Condition in which steel and concrete members.
elements and members work as a unit in the
Construction documents. Design drawings,
distribution of internal forces.
specifications, shop drawings and erection
Composite beam. Structural steel beam in contact drawings.
with and acting compositely with a rein- forced
Continuity plates. Column stiffeners at the top and
concrete slab.
bottom of the panel zone; also known as transverse
Composite component. Member, connecting element stiffeners.
or assemblage in which steel and concrete elements
Cope. Cutout made in a structural member to remove
work as a unit in the distribution of internal forces,
a flange and conform to the shape of an intersecting
with the exception of the special case of composite
member.
beams where steel anchors are embedded in a solid
concrete slab or in a slab cast on formed steel deck. Coupling beam. Structural steel or composite beam
connecting adjacent reinforced concrete wall
Composite brace. Concrete-encased structural steel
elements so that they act together to resist lateral
section (rolled or built-up) or concrete filled steel
loads. Demand critical weld. Weld so designated by
section used as a diagonal brace.
these Provisions.
Composite column. Concrete-encased structural steel
Cover plate. Plate welded or bolted to the flange of
section (rolled or built-up) or concrete-filled steel
a member to increase cross-sectional area, section
section used as a column.
modulus or moment of inertia.
Composite intermediate moment frame (C-IMF).
Cross connection. HSS connection in which forces
Composite moment frame meeting the requirements
in branch members or connecting elements
of Section 12.4.2 .
transverse to the main member are primarily
Composite ordinary braced frame (C-OBF). equilibrated by forces in other branch members or
Composite braced frame meeting the requirements of connecting elements on the opposite side of the main
Section 12.4.3 . member.
Composite ordinary moment frame (C-OMF). Design-basis fire. Set of conditions that define the
Composite moment frame meeting the requirements development of a fire and the spread of combustion
of Section 12.4.1 . products throughout a building or portion thereof.

SBC 306-CR-18 19
GLOSSARY

Design drawings. Graphic and pictorial documents Doubler. Plate added to, and parallel with, a beam
showing the design, location and dimensions of the or column web to increase strength at locations of
work. These documents generally include plans, concentrated forces.
elevations, sections, details, schedules, diagrams and
Drift. Lateral deflection of structure.
notes.
Eccentrically braced frame (EBF). Diagonally
Design load. Applied load determined in accordance
braced frame meeting the requirements of Section
with either LRFD load combinations.
12.4.3 that has at least one end of each diagonal brace
Design strength*. Resistance factor multiplied by the connected to a beam with a defined eccentricity from
nominal strength, Rn. another beam-to-brace connection or a beam-to-
column connection.
Design wall thickness. HSS wall thickness assumed in
the determination of section properties. Effective length. Length of an otherwise identical
column with the same strength when analyzed with
Design earthquake. The earthquake represented by pinned end conditions.
the design response spectrum as specified in the
applicable building code. Effective length factor, K. Ratio between the effective
length and the unbraced length of the member.
Design story drift. Calculated story drift, including
the effect of expected inelastic action, due to design Effective net area. Net area modified to account for
level earthquake forces as determined by the the effect of shear lag.
applicable building code. Effective section modulus. Section modulus
Diagonal brace. Inclined structural member carrying reduced to account for buckling of slender
primarily axial force in a braced frame. compression elements.
Diagonal stiffener. Web stiffener at column panel Effective width. Reduced width of a plate or slab
zone oriented diagonally to the flanges, on one or with an assumed uniform stress distribution which
both sides of the web. produces the same effect on the behavior of a
structural member as the actual plate or slab width
Diaphragm. Roof, floor or other membrane or bracing with its nonuniform stress distribution.
system that transfers in-plane forces to the lateral
force resisting system. Elastic analysis. Structural analysis based on the
assumption that the structure returns to its original
Diaphragm plate. Plate possessing in-plane shear geometry on removal of the load.
stiffness and strength, used to transfer forces to the
supporting elements. Elevated temperatures. Heating conditions
experienced by building elements or structures as a
Direct analysis method. Design method for stability result of fire which are in excess of the anticipated
that captures the effects of residual stresses and ambient conditions.
initial out-of-plumbness of frames by reducing
stiffness and applying notional loads in a second- Encased composite member. Composite member
order analysis. consisting of a structural concrete member and one or
more embedded steel shapes.
Direct bond interaction. In a composite section,
mechanism by which force is transferred between Encased composite beam. Composite beam
steel and concrete by bond stress. completely enclosed in reinforced concrete.
Distortional failure. Limit state of an HSS truss Encased composite column. Structural steel column
connection based on distortion of a rectangular HSS completely encased in reinforced concrete.
chord member into a rhomboidal shape. End panel. Web panel with an adjacent panel on one
Distortional stiffness. Out-of-plane flexural stiffness side only.
of web. End return. Length of fillet weld that continues
Double curvature. Deformed shape of a beam with one around a corner in the same plane.
or more inflection points within the span. Engineer of record. Licensed professional
Double-concentrated forces. Two equal and responsible for sealing the design drawings and
opposite forces applied normal to the same flange, specifications.
forming a couple.

SBC 306-CR-18 20
GLOSSARY

Engineer of record. Licensed professional Finished surface. Surfaces fabricated with a

responsible for sealing the contract documents. roughness height value measured in accordance with
ANSI/ASME B46.1 that is equal to or less than 500.
Expansion rocker. Support with curved surface on
which a member bears that can tilt to accommodate Fire. Destructive burning, as manifested by any or
expansion. all of the following: light, flame, heat or smoke.
Expansion roller. Round steel bar on which a Fire barrier. Element of construction formed of fire-
member bears that can roll to accommodate resisting materials and tested in accordance with an
expansion. approved standard fire resistance test, to demonstrate
compliance with the applicable building code.
Expected tensile strength*. Tensile strength of a
member, equal to the specified minimum tensile Fire resistance. Property of assemblies that prevents
strength, Fu, multiplied by Rt. or retards the passage of excessive heat, hot gases or
flames under conditions of use and enables them to
Expected yield strength. Yield strength in tension of
continue to perform a stipulated function.
a member, equal to the expected yield stress
multiplied by Ag. First-order analysis. Structural analysis in which
equilibrium conditions are formulated on the
Expected yield stress. Yield stress of the material,
undeformed structure; second-order effects are
equal to the specified minimum yield stress, F y,
neglected.
multiplied by R y.
Fitted bearing stiffener. Stiffener used at a support
Eyebar. Pin-connected tension member of uniform
or concentrated load that fits tightly against one or
thickness, with forged or thermally cut head of
both flanges of a beam so as to transmit load through
greater width than the body, proportioned to provide
bearing.
approximately equal strength in the head and body.
Flare bevel groove weld. Weld in a groove formed
Face bearing plates. Stiffeners attached to structural
by a member with a curved surface in contact with
steel beams that are embedded in reinforced concrete
a planar member.
walls or columns. The plates are located at the face of
the reinforced concrete to provide confinement and to Flare V-groove weld. Weld in a groove formed by two
transfer loads to the concrete through direct bearing. members with curved surfaces.
Factored load. Product of a load factor and the Flashover. Transition to a state of total surface
nominal load. Fastener. Generic term for bolts, rivets involvement in a fire of combustible materials within
or other connecting devices. an enclosure.
Fatigue. Limit state of crack initiation and growth Flat width. Nominal width of rectangular HSS minus
resulting from repeated application of live loads. twice the outside corner radius. In the absence of
knowledge of the corner radius, the flat width may
Faying surface. Contact surface of connection
be taken as the total section width minus three times
elements transmitting a shear force.
the thickness.
Filled composite member. Composite member
Flexural buckling. Buckling mode in which a
consisting of a shell of HSS filled with structural
compression member deflects laterally with- out
concrete.
twist or change in cross-sectional shape.
Filled composite column. HSS filled with structural
Flexural-torsional buckling. Buckling mode in
concrete.
which a compression member bends and twists
Filler. Plate used to build up the thickness of one simultaneously without change in cross-sectional
component. shape.
Filler metal. Metal or alloy added in making a Force. Resultant of distribution of stress over a
welded joint. prescribed area.
Fillet weld. Weld of generally triangular cross Formed section. See cold-formed steel structural
section made between intersecting surfaces of member.
elements.
Formed steel deck. In composite construction, steel
Fillet weld reinforcement. Fillet welds added to cold formed into a decking profile used as a
groove welds. permanent concrete form.

SBC 306-CR-18 21
GLOSSARY

Fully composite beam. Composite beam that has a Inelastic analysis. Structural analysis that takes into
sufficient number of steel headed stud anchors to account inelastic material behavior, including plastic
develop the nominal plastic flexural strength of the analysis.
composite section.
In-plane instability. Limit state involving buckling in
Fully restrained moment connection. Connection the plane of the frame or the member.
capable of transferring moment with negligible
Instability. Limit state reached in the loading of a
rotation between connected members.
structural component, frame or structure in which a
Gage. Transverse center-to-center spacing of slight disturbance in the loads or geometry produces
fasteners. large displacements.
Gapped connection. HSS truss connection with a Intermediate moment frame (IMF). Moment frame
gap or space on the chord face between intersecting system that meets the requirements of Section 12.3.2
branch members. .
Geometric axis. Axis parallel to web, flange or angle Introduction length. In an encased composite
leg. column, the length along which the column force is
assumed to be transferred into or out of the steel
Girder. See Beam.
shape.
Girder filler. In a composite floor system
Inverted-V-braced frame. See V-braced frame.
constructed using a formed steel deck, narrow piece
of sheet steel used as a fill between the edge of a Joint. Area where two or more ends, surfaces or
deck sheet and the flange of a girder. edges are attached. Categorized by type of fastener
or weld used and method of force transfer.
Gouge. Relatively smooth surface groove or cavity
resulting from plastic deformation or removal of Joint eccentricity. In an HSS truss connection,
material. perpendicular distance from chord member center of
gravity to intersection of branch member work points.
Gravity load. Load acting in the downward direction,
such as dead and live loads. k-area. The region of the web that extends from the
tangent point of the web and the flange- web fillet a
Grip (of bolt). Thickness of material through which a
distance 38 mm into the web beyond the k
bolt passes.
dimension.
Groove weld. Weld in a groove between connection
K-braced frame. A braced-frame configuration in
elements. See also AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
which braces connect to a column at a location with
Gusset plate. Plate element connecting truss no out-of-plane support.
members or a strut or brace to a beam or column.
K-connection. HSS connection in which forces in
Heat flux. Radiant energy per unit surface area. branch members or connecting elements transverse
Heat release rate. Rate at which thermal energy is to the main member are primarily equilibriated by
generated by a burning material. forces in other branch members or connecting
elements on the same side of the main member.
High-strength bolt. Fastener in compliance with
ASTM A325, A325M, A490, A490M, F1852, Lacing. Plate, angle or other steel shape, in a lattice
F2280 or an alternate fastener as permitted in Section configuration, that connects two steel shapes
10.3.1 . together.

Highly ductile member. A member expected to Lap joint. Joint between two overlapping connection
undergo significant plastic rotation (more than 0.02 elements in parallel planes.
rad) from either flexure or flexural buckling under the Lateral bracing. Member or system that is designed
design earthquake. to inhibit lateral buckling or lateral- torsional
Horizontal shear. In a composite beam, force at the buckling of structural members.
interface between steel and concrete surfaces. Lateral force resisting system. Structural system
HSS. Square, rectangular or round hollow structural designed to resist lateral loads and provide stability
steel section produced in accordance with a pipe or for the structure as a whole.
tubing product specification. Lateral load. Load acting in a lateral direction, such
as wind or earthquake effects.

SBC 306-CR-18 22
GLOSSARY

Lateral-torsional buckling. Buckling mode of a Local yielding**. Yielding that occurs in a local area
flexural member involving deflection out of the of an element.
plane of bending occurring simultaneously with twist
Lowest anticipated service temperature (LAST). The
about the shear center of the cross section.
lowest 1-hour average temperature with a 100-year
Leaning column. Column designed to carry gravity mean recurrence interval.
loads only, with connections that are not intended to
LRFD (load and resistance factor design). Method of
provide resistance to lateral loads.
proportioning structural components such that the
Length effects. Consideration of the reduction in design strength equals or exceeds the required
strength of a member based on its unbraced length. strength of the component under the action of the
LRFD load combinations.
Lightweight concrete. Structural concrete with an
equilibrium density of 1840 kg/m3 or less as LRFD load combination. Load combination in the
determined by ASTM C567. applicable building code intended for strength design
(load and resistance factor design).
Limit state. Condition in which a structure or
component becomes unfit for service and is judged Main member. In an HSS connection, chord member,
either to be no longer useful for its intended function column or other HSS member to which branch
(serviceability limit state) or to have reached its members or other connecting elements are attached.
ultimate load-carrying capacity (strength limit state).
Mechanism. Structural system that includes a
Link. In EBF, the segment of a beam that is located sufficient number of real hinges, plastic hinges or
between the ends of the connections of two diagonal both, so as to be able to articulate in one or more rigid
braces or between the end of a diagonal brace and a body modes.
column. The length of the link is defined as the clear
Member brace. Member that provides stiffness and
distance between the ends of two diagonal braces or
strength to control movement of another member out-
between the diagonal brace and the column face.
of-the plane of the frame at the braced points.
Link intermediate web stiffeners. Vertical web
Mill scale. Oxide surface coating on steel formed by
stiffeners placed within the link in EBF.
the hot rolling process.
Link rotation angle. Inelastic angle between the link
Moment connection. Connection that transmits
and the beam outside of the link when the total story
bending moment between connected members.
drift is equal to the design story drift.
Moderately ductile member. A member expected to
Load-carrying reinforcement. Reinforcement in
undergo moderate plastic rotation (0.02rad or less)
composite members designed and detailed to resist
from either flexure or flexural buckling under the
the required loads.
design earthquake.
Load. Force or other action that results from the
Moment frame. Framing system that provides
weight of building materials, occupants and their
resistance to lateral loads and provides stability to the
possessions, environmental effects, differential
structural system, primarily by shear and flexure of the
movement or restrained dimensional changes.
framing members and their connections.
Load effect. Forces, stresses and deformations
Negative flexural strength. Flexural strength of a
produced in a structural component by the applied
composite beam in regions with tension due to
loads.
flexure on the top surface.
Load factor. Factor that accounts for deviations of
Net area. Gross area reduced to account for removed
the nominal load from the actual load, for
material.
uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load
into a load effect and for the prob- ability that more Nodal brace. Brace that prevents lateral movement or
than one extreme load will occur simultaneously. twist independently of other braces at adjacent brace
points (see relative brace).
Local bending**. Limit state of large deformation of
a flange under a concentrated transverse force. Nominal dimension. Designated or theoretical
dimension, as in tables of section properties.
Local buckling**. Limit state of buckling of a
compression element within a cross section. Nominal load. Magnitude of the load specified by the
applicable building code.

SBC 306-CR-18 23
GLOSSARY

Nominal rib height. In a formed steel deck, height of Percent elongation. Measure of ductility, determined
deck measured from the underside of the lowest in a tensile test as the maximum elongation of the
point to the top of the highest point. gage length divided by the original gage length
expressed as a percentage.
Nominal strength*. Strength of a structure or
component (without the resistance factor or safety Pipe. See HSS.
factor applied) to resist load effects, as determined in
Pitch. Longitudinal center-to-center spacing of
accordance with this code.
fasteners. Center-to-center spacing of bolt threads
Noncompact section. Section that can develop the along axis of bolt.
yield stress in its compression elements before local
Plastic analysis. Structural analysis based on the
buckling occurs, but cannot develop a rotation
assumption of rigid-plastic behavior, that is, that
capacity of three.
equilibrium is satisfied and the stress is at or below
Nondestructive testing. Inspection procedure the yield stress throughout the structure.
wherein no material is destroyed and the integrity
Plastic hinge. Fully yielded zone that forms in a
of the material or component is not affected.
structural member when the plastic moment is
Notch toughness. Energy absorbed at a specified attained.
temperature as measured in the Charpy V-notch
Plastic moment. Theoretical resisting moment
impact test.
developed within a fully yielded cross section.
Notional load. Virtual load applied in a structural
Plastic stress distribution method. In a composite
analysis to account for destabilizing effects that are
member, method for determining stresses assuming
not otherwise accounted for in the design provisions.
that the steel section and the concrete in the cross
Ordinary cantilever column system (OCCS). A section are fully plastic.
seismic force resisting system in which the seismic
Plastification. In an HSS connection, limit state based
forces are resisted by one or more columns that are
on an out-of-plane flexural yield line mechanism in
cantilevered from the foundation or from the
the chord at a branch member connection.
diaphragm level below and that meets the
requirements of Section 12.3.3 . Plastic hinge. Yielded zone that forms in a structural
member when the plastic moment is attained. The
Ordinary concentrically braced frame (OCBF).
member is assumed to rotate further as if hinged,
Diagonally braced frame meeting the requirements of
except that such rotation is restrained by the plastic
Section 12.3.4 in which all members of the braced-
moment.
frame system are subjected primarily to axial forces.
Plate girder. Built-up beam.
Ordinary moment frame (OMF). Moment frame
system that meets the requirements of Section 12.3.1 Plug weld. Weld made in a circular hole in one
. element of a joint fusing that element to another
element.
Out-of-plane buckling. Limit state of a beam, column
or beam-column involving lateral or lateral-torsional Ponding. Retention of water due solely to the
buckling. deflection of flat roof framing.
Overlapped connection. HSS truss connection in Positive flexural strength. Flexural strength of a
which intersecting branch members overlap. composite beam in regions with compres- sion due
to flexure on the top surface.
Panel zone. Web area of beam-to-column
connection delineated by the extension of beam Pretensioned bolt. Bolt tightened to the specified
and column flanges through the connection, minimum pretension.
transmitting moment through a shear panel. Pretensioned joint. Joint with high-strength bolts
Partial-joint-penetration (PJP) groove weld. Groove tightened to the specified minimum pretension.
weld in which the penetration is intentionally less Properly developed. Reinforcing bars detailed to
than the complete thickness of the connected yield in a ductile manner before crushing of the
element. concrete occurs. Bars meeting the provisions of SBC
Partially restrained moment connection. Connection 304, insofar as development length, spacing and
capable of transferring moment with rotation cover, are deemed to be properly developed.
between connected members that is not negligible.

SBC 306-CR-18 24
GLOSSARY

Protected zone. Area of members or connections of Relative brace. Brace that controls the relative
members in which limitations apply to fabrication movement of two adjacent brace points along the
and attachments. length of a beam or column or the relative lateral
displacement of two stories in a frame (see nodal
Prying action. Amplification of the tension force in
brace).
a bolt caused by leverage between the point of
applied load, the bolt and the reaction of the Required strength*. Forces, stresses and
connected elements. deformations acting on a structural component,
determined by either structural analysis, for the
Punching load. In an HSS connection, component of
LRFD load combinations.
branch member force perpendicular to a chord.
Required strength*. Forces, stresses and
P- effect. Effect of loads acting on the deflected
deformations acting on a structural component,
shape of a member between joints or nodes.
determined by structural analysis, for the LRFD load
P-Δeffect. Effect of loads acting on the displaced combinations.
location of joints or nodes in a structure. In tiered
Resistance factor . Factor that accounts for
building structures, this is the effect of loads acting
unavoidable deviations of the nominal strength from
on the laterally displaced location of floors and roofs.
the actual strength and for the manner and
Quality assurance. Monitoring and inspection tasks consequences of failure.
to ensure that the material provided and work
Restrained construction. Floor and roof assemblies
performed by the fabricator and erector meet the
and individual beams in buildings where the
requirements of the approved construction documents
surrounding or supporting structure is capable of
and referenced standards. Quality assurance
resisting substantial thermal expansion throughout
includes those tasks designated “special inspection”
the range of anticipated elevated temperatures.
by the applicable building code.
Response modification coefficient, R. Factor that
Quality assurance inspector (QAI). Individual
reduces seismic load effects to strength level as
designated to provide quality assurance inspection
specified by the applicable building code.
for the work being performed.
Reverse curvature. See double curvature.
Quality assurance plan (QAP). Program in which
the agency or firm responsible for quality Risk category. Classification assigned to a structure
assurance maintains detailed monitoring and based on its use as specified by the applicable
inspection procedures to ensure conformance with building code.
the approved construction documents and referenced Root of joint. Portion of a joint to be welded where
standards. the members are closest to each other.
Quality control. Controls and inspections Rotation capacity. Incremental angular rotation that a
implemented by the fabricator or erector, as appli- given shape can accept prior to excessive load
cable, to ensure that the material provided and work shedding, defined as the ratio of the inelastic rotation
performed meet the requirements of the approved attained to the idealized elastic rotation at first yield..
construction documents and referenced standards.
Rupture strength. Strength limited by breaking or
Quality control inspector (QCI). Individual
tearing of members or connecting elements.
designated to perform quality control inspection tasks
for the work being performed. Second-order effect. Effect of loads acting on the
deformed configuration of a structure; includes P-
Quality control program (QCP). Program in which
effect and P-Δeffect.
the fabricator or erector, as applicable, maintains
detailed fabrication or erection and inspection Seismic response modification factor. Factor that
procedures to ensure conformance with the approved reduces seismic load effects to strength level.
design drawings, specifications and referenced
Seismic design category. Classification assigned to a
standards.
building by the applicable building code based upon
Reentrant. In a cope or weld access hole, a cut at an its risk category and the design spectral response
abrupt change in direction in which the exposed acceleration coefficients.
surface is concave.
Seismic force resisting system (SFRS). That part of
the structural system that has been considered in the

SBC 306-CR-18 25
GLOSSARY

design to provide the required resistance to the Slot weld. Weld made in an elongated hole fusing an
seismic forces prescribed in SBC 301. element to another element.
Service load. Load under which serviceability limit Snug-tightened joint. Joint with the connected plies in
states are evaluated. firm contact as specified in Chapter J.
Service load combination. Load combination under Specifications. Written documents containing the
which serviceability limit states are evaluated. requirements for materials, standards and
workmanship.
Serviceability limit state. Limiting condition
affecting the ability of a structure to preserve its Specified minimum tensile strength. Lower limit of
appearance, maintainability, durability or the tensile strength specified for a material as defined by
comfort of its occupants or function of machinery, ASTM.
under normal usage.
Specified minimum yield stress. Lower limit of
Shear buckling. Buckling mode in which a plate yield stress specified for a material as defined by
element, such as the web of a beam, deforms under ASTM.
pure shear applied in the plane of the plate.
Splice. Connection between two structural elements
Shear lag. Nonuniform tensile stress distribution in a joined at their ends to form a single, longer element.
member or connecting element in the vicinity of a
Stability. Condition in the loading of a structural
connection.
component, frame or structure in which a slight
Shear wall. Wall that provides resistance to lateral disturbance in the loads or geometry does not
loads in the plane of the wall and provides stability produce large displacements.
for the structural system.
Statically loaded. Not subject to significant fatigue
Shear yielding (punching). In an HSS connection, stresses. Gravity, wind and seismic loadings are
limit state based on out-of-plane shear strength of considered to be static loadings.
the chord wall to which branch members are attached.
Steel anchor. Headed stud or hot rolled channel
Sheet steel. In a composite floor system, steel used for welded to a steel member and embodied in concrete
closure plates or miscellaneous trimming in a formed of a composite member to transmit shear, tension or a
steel deck. combination of shear and tension at the interface of
the two materials.
Shim. Thin layer of material used to fill a space
between faying or bearing surfaces. Stiffened element. Flat compression element with
adjoining out-of-plane elements along both edges
Sidesway buckling (frame). Stability limit state
parallel to the direction of loading.
involving lateral sidesway instability of a frame.
Stiffener. Structural element, usually an angle or
Simple connection. Connection that transmits
plate, attached to a member to distribute load,
negligible bending moment between connected
transfer shear or prevent buckling.
members.
Stiffness. Resistance to deformation of a member or
Single-concentrated force. Tensile or compressive
structure, measured by the ratio of the applied force
force applied normal to the flange of a member.
(or moment) to the corresponding displacement (or
Single curvature. Deformed shape of a beam with no rotation).
inflection point within the span.
Strain compatibility method. In a composite
Slender-element section. Cross section possessing member, method for determining the stresses
plate components of sufficient slenderness such that considering the stress-strain relationships of each
local buckling in the elastic range will occur. material and its location with respect to the neutral
Slip. In a bolted connection, limit state of relative axis of the cross section.
motion of connected parts prior to the attainment of Steel core. Axial-force-resisting element of a
the design strength of the connection. buckling-restrained brace. The steel core contains a
Slip-critical connection. Bolted connection designed yielding segment and connections to transfer its axial
to resist movement by friction on the faying surface force to adjoining elements; it may also contain
of the connection under the clamping force of the projections beyond the casing and transition segments
bolts. between the projections and yielding segment.

SBC 306-CR-18 26
GLOSSARY

Strength limit state. Limiting condition in which the Tie plate. Plate element used to join two parallel
maximum strength of a structure or its components is components of a built-up column, girder or strut
reached. rigidly connected to the parallel components and
designed to transmit shear between them.
Stress. Force per unit area caused by axial force,
moment, shear or torsion. Toe of fillet. Junction of a fillet weld face and base
metal. Tangent point of a fillet in a rolled shape.
Stress concentration. Localized stress considerably
higher than average due to abrupt changes in Torsional bracing. Bracing resisting twist of a beam
geometry or localized loading. or column.
Strong axis. Major principal centroidal axis of a cross Torsional buckling. Buckling mode in which a
section. compression member twists about its shear center
axis.
Story drift angle. Inter story displacement divided by
story height. Transverse reinforcement. In an encased composite
column, steel reinforcement in the form of closed ties
Structural analysis. Determination of load effects on
or welded wire fabric providing confinement for the
members and connections based on principles of
concrete surrounding the steel shape.
structural mechanics.
Transverse stiffener. Web stiffener oriented
Structural component. Member, connector,
perpendicular to the flanges, attached to the web.
connecting element or assemblage.
Tubing. See HSS.
Structural steel. Steel elements as defined in
Section 2.1 of the AISC (2010a) Code of Standard Turn-of-nut method. Procedure whereby the
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. specified pretension in high-strength bolts is
controlled by rotating the fastener component a
Structural system. An assemblage of load-carrying
predetermined amount after the bolt has been snug
components that are joined together to provide
tightened.
interaction or interdependence.
Unbraced length. Distance between braced points of
System overstrength factor, Ωo. Factor specified by
a member, measured between the centers of gravity
the applicable building code in order to determine the
of the bracing members.
amplified seismic load, where required by these
Provisions. Uneven load distribution. In an HSS connection,
condition in which the load is not distributed through
T-connection. HSS connection in which the branch
the cross section of connected elements in a manner
member or connecting element is perpendicular to
that can be readily determined.
the main member and in which forces transverse to
the main member are primarily equilibriated by shear Unframed end. The end of a member not restrained
in the main member. against rotation by stiffeners or connection elements.
Tensile strength (of material). Maximum tensile Unrestrained construction. Floor and roof assemblies
stress that a material is capable of sustaining as and individual beams in buildings that are assumed to
defined by ASTM. be free to rotate and expand throughout the range of
anticipated elevated temperatures.
Tensile strength (of member). Maximum tension
force that a member is capable of sustaining. Unstiffened element. Flat compression element
with an adjoining out-of-plane element along one
Tension and shear rupture. In a bolt or other type of
edge parallel to the direction of loading.
mechanical fastener, limit state of rupture due to
simultaneous tension and shear force. Vertical boundary element (VBE). A column with a
connection to one or more web plates in an SPSW.
Tension field action. Behavior of a panel under
shear in which diagonal tensile forces develop in V-braced frame. Concentrically braced frame
the web and compressive forces develop in the (OCBF, C-OBF) in which a pair of diagonal braces
transverse stiffeners in a manner similar to a Pratt located either above or below a beam is connected to
truss. a single point within the clear beam span. Where the
diagonal braces are below the beam, the system is
Thermally cut. Cut with gas, plasma or laser.
also referred to as an inverted-V-braced frame.

SBC 306-CR-18 27
GLOSSARY

Weak axis. Minor principal centroidal axis of a cross

section.
Weathering steel. High-strength, low-alloy steel that,
with suitable precautions, can be used in normal
atmospheric exposures (not marine) without
protective paint coating.
Web crippling. Limit state of local failure of web
plate in the immediate vicinity of a concentrated load
or reaction.
Web sidesway buckling. Limit state of lateral
buckling of the tension flange opposite the location
of a concentrated compression force.
Weld metal. Portion of a fusion weld that has been
completely melted during welding. Weld metal has
elements of filler metal and base metal melted in the
weld thermal cycle.
Weld root. See root of joint.
X-braced frame. Concentrically braced frame
(OCBF, C-OBF) in which a pair of diagonal braces
crosses near the mid-length of the diagonal braces.
Y-connection. HSS connection in which the branch
member or connecting element is not perpendicular
to the main member and in which forces transverse to
the main member are primarily equilibriated by shear
in the main member.
Yield moment. In a member subjected to bending, the
moment at which the extreme outer fiber first attains
the yield stress.
Yield point. First stress in a material at which an
increase in strain occurs without an increase in
stress as defined by ASTM.
Yield strength. Stress at which a material exhibits a
specified limiting deviation from the proportionality
of stress to strain as defined by ASTM.
Yield stress. Generic term to denote either yield point
or yield strength, as appropriate for the material.
Yielding. Limit state of inelastic deformation that
occurs when the yield stress is reached.
Yielding (plastic moment). Yielding throughout the
cross section of a member as the bending moment
reaches the plastic moment.
Yielding (yield moment). Yielding at the extreme fiber
on the cross section of a member when the bending
moment reaches the yield moment.

SBC 306-CR-18 28
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL PROVISIONS

CHAPTER 1—GENERAL PROVISIONS

This chapter states the scope of the Code, designs are permitted to be based on tests or
summarizes referenced specifications, codes analysis, subject to the approval of the authority
and standards, and provides requirements for having jurisdiction.
materials and structural design documents. Alternative methods of analysis and design are
The chapter is organized as follows: permitted, provided such alternative methods or
criteria are acceptable to the authority having
1.1 —Scope jurisdiction.
1.2 —Referenced Specifications, Codes and
Standards User Note: For the design of cold-formed
structural members, other than hollow structural
1.3 —Material sections (HSS) that are cold-formed to shapes
1.4 —Structural Design Drawings and with elements not more than 25 mm in thickness,
Specifications the provisions of the AISI North American
Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members (AISI S100) are
1.1—Scope recommended.
The Saudi Building Code for Steel Structures 1.1.1 Seismic Applications. The Seismic
(SBC 306), hereafter referred to as the Code, Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings in Chapter
provides minimum requirements for design and 12 shall apply to the design of seismic force
construction of Steel Structures. This Code shall resisting systems of structural steel or of structural
apply to the design of the structural steel system steel acting compositely with reinforced concrete,
or systems with structural steel acting unless specifically exempted by other Saudi
compositely with reinforced concrete. building codes.
This Code includes the Symbols, the Glossary,
Chapter 1 through Chapter 16, and Appendix A User Note: SBC 301 (Table 12-1, Item H)
through Appendix G. The Commentary and the specifically exempts structural steel systems,
Notes interspersed through-out are not part of but not composite systems, in seismic design
the Code. categories B and C from the provisions of
Chapter 12 if the seismic loads are computed
User Note: Notes are intended to provide concise using a seismic response modification factor,
and practical guidance in the application of the R, of 3. For Seismic Design Category A, SBC
provisions. 301 does specify lateral forces to be used as the
seismic loads and effects, but these
This Code sets forth criteria for the design, calculations do not involve the use of an R
fabrication and erection of structural steel factor. Thus for Seismic Design Category A, it
buildings and other structures, where other is not necessary to define a seismic force
structures are defined as structures designed, resisting system that meets any special
fabricated and erected in a manner similar to requirements and the Seismic Provisions for
buildings, with building-like vertical and lateral Structural Steel Buildings do not apply.
load resisting-elements.
The provisions of Appendix A of this Code shall
Wherever this Code refers to the applicable not apply to the seismic design of buildings and
building code and there is none, the loads, load other structures.
combinations, system limitations, and general
design requirements shall be those in Saudi 1.1.2 Nuclear Applications. The design,
Building Code: Minimum Design Loads for fabrication and erection of nuclear structures
Buildings and other Structures (SBC 301). shall comply with the requirements of the
Specification for Safety-Related Steel Structures
Where conditions are not covered by the Code,

SBC 306-CR-18 29
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL PROVISIONS

for Nuclear Facilities (ANSI/AISC N690), in A6/A6M-09 Standard Specification for General
addition to the provisions of this Code. Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars,
Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
A36/A36M-08 Standard Specification for Carbon
1.2—Referenced Specifications, Codes Structural Steel
and Standards
A53/A53M-07 Standard Specification for Pipe,
The following specifications, codes and standards Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded
are referenced in this code: and Seamless
Saudi Building Codes (SBC) A193/A193M-08b Standard Specification for
SBC 301-18 Saudi Building Code- General. Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for
High Temperature or High Pressure Service and
SBC 301-18 Saudi Building Code for Loading and Other Special Purpose Applications
Forces.
A194/A194M-09 Standard Specification for
SBC 304-18 Saudi Building Code for Concrete Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High
Structures. Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both
ACI International (ACI) A216/A216M-08 Standard Specification for Steel
ACI 349-13 Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety- Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for
Related Concrete Structures and Commentary High Temperature Service
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) A242/A242M-04 (2009) Standard Specification for
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
AISC 303-10 Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges A283/A283M-03 Standard Specification for Low
and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel
ANSI/AISC 341-10 Seismic Provisions for Plates
Structural Steel Buildings
A307-07b Standard Specification for Carbon Steel
ANSI/AISC N690-12 Specification for Safety- Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI (420 MPa) Tensile
Related Steel Structures for Nuclear Facilities Strength
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) A325M-09 Standard Specification for Structural
ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum
Methods for Structural Fire Protection Tensile Strength
American Society of Mechanical Engineers A354-07a Standard Specification for Quenched
(ASME) and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other
Externally Threaded Fasteners
ASME B18.2.6-10 Fasteners for Use in Structural
Applications A370-09 Standard Test Methods and Definitions
for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
ASME B46.1-09 Surface Texture, Surface
Roughness, Waviness, and Lay A449-07b Standard Specification for Hex Cap
Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
American Society for Nondestructive Testing 120/105/90 ksi (830/730/630MPa) Minimum
(ASNT) Tensile Strength, General Use
ANSI/ASNT CP-189-2011 Standard for A490-08b Standard Specification for Heat-
Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive Treated Steel Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
Testing Personnel Treated, 150 ksi ( 1040MPa) Minimum Tensile
Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A-2011 Strength
Personnel Qualification and Certification in A490M-08 Standard Specification for High-
Nondestructive Testing Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for
ASTM International (ASTM) Structural Steel Joints
A500/A500M-07 Standard Specification for Cold-
Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

SBC 306-CR-18 30
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL PROVISIONS

A501-07 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Steel Plate with 485 MPa Minimum Yield Strength
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural to 100 mm Thick
Tubing
A913/A913M-07 Standard Specification for High-
A502-03 Standard Specification for Steel Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural
Structural Rivets, Steel, Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and Self-
Tempering Process (QST)
A514/A514M-05 Standard Specification for High-
Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel A992/A992M-06a Standard Specification for
Plate, Suitable for Welding Structural Steel Shapes
A529/A529M-05 Standard Specification for High- A1011/A1011M-09a Standard Specification for
Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Quality Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-
Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
A563M-07 Standard Specification for Carbon and
and Ultra-High Strength
Alloy Steel Nuts
A1043/A1043M-05 Standard Specification for
A568/A568M-09 Standard Specification for Steel,
Structural Steel with Low Yield to Tensile Ratio for
Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-
Use in Buildings
Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled
C567-05a Standard Test Method for Determining
A572/A572M-07 Standard Specification for High-
Density of Structural Lightweight Concrete
Strength Low-Alloy Columbium - Vanadium
Structural Steel E119-08a Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of
Building Construction and Materials
A588/A588M-05 Standard Specification for High-
Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, up to 345 MPa E165-02 Standard Test Method for Liquid
Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion Penetrant Examination E709-08 Standard Guide
Resistance for Magnetic Particle Examination
A606/A606M-09 Standard Specification for Steel, F436-09 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel
Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot- Washers
Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved
F436M-09 Standard Specification for Hardened
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
Steel Washers
A618/A618M-04 Standard Specification for Hot-
F606-07 Standard Test Methods for Determining
Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength Low-
the Mechanical Properties of Externally and
Alloy Structural Tubing
Internally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, Direct
A668/A668M-04 Standard Specification for Steel Tension Indicators, and Rivets
Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial
F606M-07 Standard Test Methods for Determining
Use
the Mechanical Properties of Externally and
A673/A673M-04 Standard Specification for Internally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, and
Sampling Procedure for Impact Testing of Rivets
Structural Steel
F844-07a Standard Specification for Washers,
A709/A709M-09 Standard Specification for Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use
Structural Steel for Bridges
F959-09 Standard Specification for Compressible-
A751-08 Standard Test Methods, Practices, and Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use
Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel with Structural Fasteners
Products
F959M-07 Standard Specification for
A847/A847M-05 Standard Specification for Cold- Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension
Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength, Low- Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners
Alloy Structural Tubing with Improved
F1554-07a Standard Specification for Anchor
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 ksi (240,380, and 730
A852/A852M-03 (2007) Standard Specification for MPa) Yield Strength
Quenched and Tempered Low- Alloy Structural

SBC 306-CR-18 31
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL PROVISIONS

AWS D1.3 -2008 Structural Welding Code—Sheet

User Note: ASTM F1554 is the most
Steel
commonly referenced specification for anchor
rods. AWS D1.4/D1.4M-2005 Structural Welding
Code—Reinforcing Steel
F1852-08 Standard Specification for “Twist-Off”
AWS D1.4/D1.4M-2005 Structural Welding
Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer
Code—Seismic Supplement
Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
(830/730MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength Research Council on Structural Connections
(RCSC)
F2280-08 Standard Specification for “Twist Off”
Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/ Nut/Washer Specification for Structural Joints Using High-
Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi (1040 Strength Bolts, 2009
MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength
American Welding Society (AWS)
1.3—Material
AWS A5.1/A5.1M-2004 Specification for Carbon
Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding 1.3.1 Structural Steel Materials. Material test
reports or reports of tests made by the fabricator or
AWS A5.5/A5.5M-2004 Specification for Low- a testing laboratory shall constitute sufficient
Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc evidence of conformity with one of the ASTM
Welding standards listed in Section 1.3.1.1 For hot-rolled
AWS A5.17/A5.17M-1997 (R2007) Specification structural shapes, plates, and bars, such tests shall
for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for be made in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M; for
Submerged Arc Welding sheets, such tests shall be made in accordance with
ASTM A568/A568M; for tubing and pipe, such
AWS A5.18/A5.18M-2005 Specification for tests shall be made in accordance with the
Carbon Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded requirements of the applicable ASTM standards
Arc Welding listed above for those product forms.
AWS A5.20/A5.20M-2005 Specification for 1.3.1.1 ASTM Designations. Structural steel
Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc material conforming to one of the following ASTM
Welding specifications is approved for use under this Code:
AWS A5.23/A5.23M-2007 Specification for Low- 1.3.1.1.1 Hot-rolled structural shapes
Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged
Arc Welding ASTM A36/A36M ASTM A709/A709M

AWS A5.25/A5.25M-1997 (R2009) Specification ASTM A529/A529M ASTM A913/A913M

for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and ASTM A572/A572M ASTM A992/ A992M
Fluxes for Electroslag Welding
ASTM A588/A588M ASTM A1043/A1043M
AWS A5.26/A5.26M-1997 (R2009) Specification
for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for 1.3.1.1.2 Structural tubing
Electrogas Welding ASTM A500 ASTM A618/A618M
AWS A5.28/A5.28M-2005 Specification for Low- ASTM A501 ASTM A847/A847M
Alloy Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded
1.3.1.1.3 Pipe
Arc Welding
ASTM A53/A53M, Gr. B
AWS A5.29/A5.29M-2005 Specification for Low-
Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding 1.3.1.1.4 Plates
AWS A5.32/A5.32M-1997 (R2007) Specification ASTM A36/A36M ASTM A588/A588M
for Welding Shielding Gases
ASTM A242/A242M ASTM A709/A709M
AWS B5.1-2003 Specification for the Qualification
ASTM A283/A283M ASTM A852/A852M
of Welding Inspectors
ASTM A514/A514M ASTM A1011/A1011M
AWS D1.1M-2010 Structural Welding Code—
Steel ASTM A529/A529M ASTM A1043/A1043M

SBC 306-CR-18 32
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL PROVISIONS

ASTM A572/A572M
User Note: Additional requirements for joints
1.3.1.1.5 Bars in heavy rolled members are given in Sections
10.1.5 , 10.1.6 , 10.2.6 and 14.2.2 .
ASTM A36/A36M ASTM A572/A572M
ASTM A529/A529M ASTM A709/A709M 1.3.1.4 Built-Up Heavy Shapes. Built-up cross
1.3.1.1.6 Sheets sections consisting of plates with a thickness
exceeding 50 mm are considered built-up heavy
ASTM A606/A606M shapes. Built-up heavy shapes used as members
ASTM A1011/A1011M SS, HSLAS, AND subject to primary (computed) tensile forces due
HSLAS-F to tension or flexure and spliced or connected to
other members using complete-joint-penetration
User Note: Materials with other international groove welds that fuse through the thickness of
designations (e.g. JIS, EN) considered equivalent the plates, shall be specified as follows. The
to ASTM are also approved for use under this structural design documents shall require that
code. the steel be supplied with Charpy V-notch
impact test results in accordance with ASTM
1.3.1.2 Unidentified Steel. Unidentified steel, A6/A6M, Supplementary Requirement S5,
free of injurious defects, is permitted to be used only Charpy V-Notch Impact Test. The impact test shall
for members or details whose failure will not be conducted in accordance with ASTM
reduce the strength of the structure, either locally or A673/A673M, Frequency P, and shall meet a
overall. Such use shall be subject to the approval of minimum average value of 27 J absorbed energy
the engineer of record. at a maximum temperature of +21 ºC.
When a built-up heavy shape is welded to the face
User Note: Unidentified steel may be used for of another member using groove welds, the
details where the precise mechanical properties requirement above applies only to the shape that
and weldability are not of concern. These are has weld metal fused through the cross section.
commonly curb plates, shims and other similar
pieces. User Note: Additional requirements for joints
in heavy built-up members are given in
1.3.1.3 Rolled Heavy Shapes. ASTM A6/A6M Sections 10.1.5 , 10.1.6 , 10.2.6 and 14.2.2 .
hot-rolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding
50 mm are considered to be rolled heavy shapes. 1.3.2 Steel Castings and Forgings. Steel
Rolled heavy shapes used as members subject to castings shall conform to ASTM A216/A216M,
primary (computed) tensile forces due to tension Grade WCB with Supplementary Requirement
or flexure and spliced or connected using S11. Steel forgings shall conform to ASTM
complete-joint-penetration groove welds that fuse A668/A668M. Test reports produced in accordance
through the thickness of the flange or the flange with the above reference standards shall constitute
and the web, shall be specified as follows. The sufficient evidence of conformity with such
structural design documents shall require that standards.
such shapes be supplied with Charpy V-notch
(CVN) impact test results in accordance with 1.3.3 Bolts, Washers and Nuts. Bolt, washer
ASTM A6/A6M, Supplementary Requirement and nut material conforming to one of the
S30, Charpy V-Notch Impact Test for Structural following ASTM specifications is approved for use
Shapes – Alternate Core Location. The impact test under this Code:
shall meet a minimum average value of 27 J 1.3.3.1 Bolts
absorbed energy at a maximum temperature of +21
ºC. ASTM A307 ASTM A490

The above requirements do not apply if the splices ASTM A325 ASTM A490M
and connections are made by bolting. Where a ASTM A325M ASTM F1852
rolled heavy shape is welded to the surface of
ASTM A354 ASTM F2280
another shape using groove welds, the requirement
above applies only to the shape that has weld metal ASTM A449
fused through the cross section.
1.3.3.2 Nuts

SBC 306-CR-18 33
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL PROVISIONS

ASTM A194/A194M ASTM A563M AWS A5.17/A5.17M AWS A5.28/A5.28M

ASTM A563 AWS A5.18/A5.18M AWS A5.29/A5.29M
1.3.3.3 Washers AWS A5.20/A5.20M AWS A5.32/A5.32M
ASTM F436 ASTM F844 AWS A5.23/A5.23M
ASTM F436M Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute
sufficient evidence of conformity with the
1.3.3.4 Compressible-Washer-Type Direct
standards. Filler metals and fluxes that are suitable
Tension Indicators
for the intended application shall be selected.
ASTM F959 ASTM F959M
1.3.6 Headed Stud Anchors. Steel headed stud
Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute anchors shall conform to the requirements of
sufficient evidence of conformity with the the Structural Welding Code—Steel (AWS
standards. D1.1/D1.1M).
Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute
User Note: Materials with other international
sufficient evidence of conformity with AWS
designations (e.g. JIS, EN) considered equivalent
D1.1/D1.1M.
to ASTM are also approved for use under this
Code.

1.3.4 Anchor Rods and Threaded Rods. 1.4—Structural Design Drawings and
Anchor rod and threaded rod material conforming Specifications
to one of the following ASTM specifications is The structural design drawings and specifications
approved for use under this Code: shall meet the requirements in the Code of Standard
ASTM A36/A36M ASTM A572/A572M Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, AISC
303-10.
ASTM A193/A193M ASTM A588/A588M
ASTM A354 ASTM F1554 User Note: Provisions in this Code contain
information that is to be shown on design
ASTM A449 drawings. These include:
User Note: ASTM F1554 is the preferred Section 1.3.1.3 Rolled heavy shapes where
material specification for anchor rods. alternate core Charpy V-notch toughness
(CVN) is required
A449 material is acceptable for high-strength Section 1.3.1.4 Built-up heavy shapes where
anchor rods and threaded rods of any diameter. CVN toughness is required
Threads on anchor rods and threaded rods shall i) Section 10.3.1 Locations of connections
conform to the Unified Standard Series of ASME using pretensioned bolts
B18.2.6 and shall have Class 2A tolerances.
Other information is needed by the fabricator
Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute or erector and should be shown on design
sufficient evidence of conformity with the drawings including:
standards.
Fatigue details requiring nondestructive
User Note: Materials with other international testing (Appendix C; e.g., TABLE C-1, Cases
designations (e.g. JIS, EN) considered equivalent 5.1 to 5.4)
to ASTM are also approved for use under this
Risk category (Chapter 15)
Code.
Indication of complete-joint-penetration (CJP)
1.3.5 Consumables for Welding. Filler metals welds subject to tension (Chapter 15)
and fluxes shall conform to one of the following
specifications of the American Welding Society:
AWS A5.1/A5.1M AWS A5.25/A5.25M
AWS A5.5/A5.5M AWS A5.26/A5.26M

SBC 306-CR-18 34
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL PROVISIONS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 35
CHAPTER 2—DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

CHAPTER 2—DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

structure is subjected to all appropriate load

This chapter addresses general requirements for the
combinations.
analysis and design of steel structures applicable to
all chapters of the Code. The chapter is organized Design for structural integrity requirements shall be
as follows: based on nominal strength rather than design
strength. Limit states for connections based on
2.1 —General Provisions
limiting deformations or yielding of the connection
2.2 —Loads and Load Combinations components need not be considered for meeting
2.3 —Design Basis structural integrity requirements.

2.4 —Member Properties For the purpose of satisfying structural integrity

provisions of SBC 301, bearing bolts in
2.5 —Member Lengths connections with short-slotted holes parallel to the
direction of the tension load are permitted, and shall
2.6 —Fabrication and Erection
be assumed to be located at the end of the slot.
2.7 —Quality Control and Quality Assurance
2.3.3 Design for Strength. Design shall satisfy
2.8 —Evaluation of Existing Structures the requirements of this Code when the design
strength of each structural component equals or
exceeds the required strength determined on the
2.1—General Provisions basis of the LRFD load combinations of SBC 301.
Design shall be performed in accordance with Eq.
The design of members and connections shall be
(2-1):
consistent with the intended behavior of the framing
system and the assumptions made in the structural 𝑅𝑢 ≤ 𝜑 𝑅𝑛 (2-1)
analysis. Unless restricted by the Saudi Building
Code (SBC 301), lateral load resistance and where
stability may be provided by any combination of Ru = required strength
members and connections.
Rn = nominal strength, specified in Chapter 2
2.2—Loads and Load Combinations through Chapter 11
The loads and load combinations shall be as  = resistance factor, specified in Chapter 2
stipulated in SBC 301. For design purposes, the through Chapter 11
nominal loads shall be taken as the loads stipulated
by the SBC 301.  Rn = design strength
2.3.4 Design for Stability. General stability
2.3—Design Basis
shall be provided for the structure as a whole and
Designs shall be made according to the provisions for each of its elements. Stability of the structure
for load and resistance factor design (LRFD). and its elements shall be determined in accordance
with Chapter 3.
2.3.1 Required Strength. The required strength
of structural members and connections shall be 2.3.5 Design of Connections. Connection
determined by structural analysis for the elements shall be designed in accordance with the
appropriate load combinations as stipulated in provisions of Chapters 10 and 11. The forces and
Section 2.2. Design by elastic, inelastic or plastic deformations used in design shall be consistent with
analysis is permitted. Provisions for inelastic and the intended performance of the connection and the
plastic analysis are as stipulated in Appendix A, assumptions used in the structural analysis. Self-
Design by Inelastic Analysis. limiting inelastic deformations of the connections
are permitted. At points of support, beams, girders
2.3.2 Limit States. Design shall be based on the
and trusses shall be restrained against rotation about
principle that no applicable strength or
their longitudinal axis unless it can be shown by
serviceability limit state shall be exceeded when the
analysis that the restraint is not required.

SBC 306-CR-18 36
CHAPTER 2—DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

(a) Simple Connections: A simple connection connections, or for design by inelastic analysis
transmits a negligible moment. In the analysis using the provisions of Appendix A. The required
of the structure, simple connections may be axial strength shall not exceed 0.15 c Fy Ag; where
assumed to allow unrestrained relative c is determined from Section 5.1, and Ag = gross
rotation between the framing elements being area of member, mm2, and Fy = specified minimum
connected. A simple connection shall have yield stress, MPa.
sufficient rotation capacity to accommodate
the required rotation determined by the 2.3.7 Diaphragms and Collectors. Diaphragms
analysis of the structure. and collectors shall be designed for forces that
result from loads as stipulated in Section 2.2. They
(b) Moment Connections: Two types of moment shall be designed in conformance with the
connections, fully restrained and partially provisions of Chapters 3 through 11, as applicable.
restrained, are permitted, as specified below.
2.3.8 Design for Serviceability. The overall
1. Fully Restrained (FR) Moment structure and the individual members and
Connections. A fully restrained (FR) connections shall be checked for serviceability.
moment connection transfers moment with Requirements for serviceability design are given in
a negligible rotation between the Chapter 13.
connected members. In the analysis of the
structure, the connection may be assumed 2.3.9 Design for Ponding. The roof system shall
to allow no relative rotation. An FR be investigated through structural analysis to assure
connection shall have sufficient strength adequate strength and stability under ponding
and stiffness to maintain the angle between conditions, unless the roof surface is provided with
the connected members unchanged at the a slope of 20 mm per meter or greater toward points
strength limit states. of free drainage or an adequate system of drainage
is provided to prevent the accumulation of water.
2. Partially Restrained (PR) Moment Methods of checking ponding are provided in
Connections. Partially restrained (PR) Appendix B, Design for Ponding.
moment connections transfer moments, but
the rotation between connected members is 2.3.10 Design for Fatigue. Fatigue shall be
not negligible. In the analysis of the considered in accordance with Appendix C, Design
structure, the force-deformation response for Fatigue, for members and their connections
characteristics of the connection shall be subject to repeated loading. Fatigue need not be
included. The response characteristics of a considered for seismic effects or for the effects of
PR connection shall be documented in the wind loading on normal building lateral force
technical literature or established by resisting systems and building enclosure
analytical or experimental means. The components.
component elements of a PR connection 2.3.11 Design for Fire Conditions. Two methods
shall have sufficient strength, stiffness and of design for fire conditions are provided in
deformation capacity at the strength limit Appendix D, Structural Design for Fire Conditions:
states. by Analysis and by Qualification Testing.
2.3.6 Moment Redistribution in Beams. The Compliance with the fire protection requirements
required flexural strength of beams composed of given in SBC 801 shall be deemed to satisfy the
compact sections, as defined in Section 2.4.1 , and requirements of this section and Appendix D.
satisfying the unbraced length requirements of Nothing in this section is intended to create or imply
Section 6.13.5 may be taken as nine-tenths of the a contractual requirement for the engineer of record
negative moments at the points of support, responsible for the structural design or any other
produced by the gravity loading and determined by member of the design team.
an elastic analysis satisfying the requirements of
Chapter 3, provided that the maximum positive User Note: Design by qualification testing is the
moment is increased by one-tenth of the average prescriptive method specified in SBC 801.
negative moment determined by an elastic analysis. Traditionally, on most projects where the
This reduction is not permitted for moments in architect is the prime professional, the architect
members with Fy exceeding 450 MPa, for moments has been the responsible party to specify and
produced by loading on cantilevers, for design coordinate fire protection requirements. Design
using partially restrained (PR) moment by analysis is a new engineering approach to fire

SBC 306-CR-18 37
CHAPTER 2—DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

protection. Designation of the person(s) 4. For stems of tees, d is taken as the full
responsible for designing for fire conditions is a nominal depth of the section.
contractual matter to be addressed on each
Refer to Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 for the graphic
project. representation of unstiffened element dimensions.
2.3.12 Design for Corrosion Effects. Where (b) Stiffened Elements. For stiffened elements
corrosion may impair the strength or serviceability supported along two edges parallel to the
of a structure, structural components shall be direction of the compression force, the width
designed to tolerate corrosion or shall be protected shall be taken as follows:
against corrosion. 1. For webs of rolled or formed sections, h is
2.3.13 Anchorage to Concrete. Anchorage the clear distance between flanges less the
between steel and concrete acting compositely shall fillet or corner radius at each flange; hc is
be designed in accordance with Chapter 9. The twice the distance from the center of
design of column bases and anchor rods shall be in gravity to the inside face of the
accordance with Chapter 10. compression flange less the fillet or corner
radius.
2.4—Member Properties
2. For webs of built-up sections, h is the
2.4.1 Classification of Sections for Local distance between adjacent lines of
Buckling. For compression, sections are classified fasteners or the clear distance between
as nonslender element or slender-element sections. flanges when welds are used, and hc is
For a nonslender element section, the width-to- twice the distance from the center of
thickness ratios of its compression elements shall gravity to the nearest line of fasteners at the
not exceed r from Table 2-1. If the width-to- compression flange or the inside face of the
thickness ratio of any compression element exceeds compression flange when welds are used;
r, the section is a slender-element section. hp is twice the distance from the plastic
For flexure, sections are classified as compact, neutral axis to the nearest line of fasteners
noncompact or slender-element sections. For a at the compression flange or the inside face
section to qualify as compact, its flanges must be of the compression flange when welds are
continuously connected to the web or webs and the used.
width-to-thickness ratios of its compression 3. For flange or diaphragm plates in built-up
elements shall not exceed the limiting width-to- sections, the width, b, is the distance
thickness ratios, p, from Table 2-2. If the width-to- between adjacent lines of fasteners or lines
thickness ratio of one or more compression of welds.
elements exceeds p, but does not exceed r from
Table 2-2, the section is noncompact. If the width- 4. For flanges of rectangular hollow
to-thickness ratio of any compression element structural sections (HSS), the width, b, is
the clear distance between webs less the
exceeds r, the section is a slender-element section.
inside corner radius on each side. For webs
(a) Unstiffened Elements. For unstiffened elements of rectangular HSS, h is the clear distance
supported along only one edge parallel to the between the flanges less the inside corner
direction of the compression force, the width radius on each side. If the corner radius is
shall be taken as follows: not known, b and h shall be taken as the
corresponding outside dimension minus
1. For flanges of I-shaped members and tees,
three times the thickness. The thickness, t,
the width, b, is one-half the full-flange
shall be taken as the design wall thickness,
width, bf.
per Section 2.4.2 .
2. For legs of angles and flanges of channels
5. For perforated cover plates, b is the
and zees, the width, b, is the full nominal
transverse distance between the nearest
dimension.
line of fasteners, and the net area of the
3. For plates, the width, b, is the distance plate is taken at the widest hole.
from the free edge to the first row of
Refer to Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 for the graphic
fasteners or line of welds.
representation of stiffened element dimensions.

SBC 306-CR-18 38
CHAPTER 2—DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

For tapered flanges of rolled sections, the thickness 1. For angles, the gage for holes in opposite
is the nominal value halfway between the free edge adjacent legs shall be the sum of the gages
and the corresponding face of the web. from the back of the angles less the
thickness.
2.4.2 Design Wall Thickness for HSS. The
design wall thickness, t, shall be used in calculations 2. For slotted HSS welded to a gusset plate,
involving the wall thickness of hollow structural the net area, An, is the gross area minus the
sections (HSS). The design wall thickness, t, shall product of the thickness and the total width
be taken equal to 0.93 times the nominal wall of material that is removed to form the slot.
thickness for electric-resistance-welded (ERW)
3. In determining the net area across plug or
HSS and equal to the nominal thickness for
slot welds, the weld metal shall not be
submerged-arc-welded (SAW) HSS.
considered as adding to the net area.
User Note: A pipe can be designed using the 4. For members without holes, the net area,
provisions of the Code for round HSS sections An, is equal to the gross area, Ag.
as long as the pipe conforms to ASTM A53
Class B and the appropriate limitations of the User Note: Section 10.4.1 (b) limits An to a
Code are used. maximum of 0.85Ag for splice plates with
ASTM A500 HSS and ASTM A53 Grade B holes.
pipe are produced by an ERW process. The
SAW process is used for cross sections that are 2.5—Member Lengths
larger than those permitted by ASTM A500. For members in which the design is based on
compression, the slenderness ratio Kl/r preferably
2.4.3 Gross and Net Area Determination should not exceed 200. For members in which the
(a) Gross Area. The gross area Ag of a member at design is based on tension, the slenderness ratio l / r
any section is the sum of the products of the preferably should not exceed 300. The above
thickness and the gross width of each element limitation does not apply to rods in tension.
measured normal to the axis of the member. For Members in which the design is dictated by tension
angles, the gross width is the sum of the widths loading, but which may be subject to some
of the legs less the thickness. compression under other load conditions, need not
satisfy the compression slenderness limit. For
(b) Net Area. The net area, An, of a member is the beams, girders and trusses designed on the basis of
sum of the products of the thickness and the net simple spans shall have an effective length equal to
width of each element computed as follows: the distance between centers of gravity of the
1. In computing net area for tension and members to which they deliver their end reactions.
shear, the width of a bolt hole shall be
2.6—Fabrication and Erection
taken as 2 mm greater than the nominal
dimension of the hole. Shop drawings, fabrication, shop painting and
erection shall satisfy the requirements stipulated in
2. For a chain of holes extending across a part
Chapter 14, Fabrication and Erection.
in any diagonal or zigzag line, the net
width of the part shall be obtained by 2.7—Quality Control and Quality
deducting from the gross width the sum of Assurance
the diameters or slot dimensions as
provided in this section, of all holes in the Quality control and quality assurance activities
chain, and adding, for each gage space in shall satisfy the requirements stipulated in Chapter
the chain, the quantity s2/4g, 15, Quality Control and Quality Assurance.

where 2.8—Evaluation of Existing Structures

s = longitudinal center-to-center spacing The evaluation of existing structures shall satisfy
(pitch) of any two consecutive holes, mm the requirements stipulated in Chapter 16
Evaluation of Existing Structures.
g = transverse center-to-center spacing
(gage) between fastener gage lines, mm

SBC 306-CR-18 39
CHAPTER 2—DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

TABLES OF CHAPTER 2

Table 2-1 : Width-to-Thickness Ratios: Compression Elements Members Subject to Axial Compression

Limiting
Width-to- Width-to-
Case

Description of Element Thickness Thickness Examples

Ratio Ratio r
(nonslender/slender)
1 Flanges of rolled
I-shaped sections, plates
projecting from rolled I-
shaped sections; 𝑏 𝐸
outstanding legs of pairs 0.56√
𝑡 𝐹𝑦
of angles connected with
continuous contact,
flanges of channels, and
Unstiffened Elements

flanges of tees
2 Flanges of built-up I-
   [𝑎]
shaped sections and plates
𝑏 𝑘𝑐 𝐸
or angle legs projecting 0.64√
from built-up I-shaped 𝑡 𝐹𝑦
sections
3 Legs of single angles, legs
of double angles with
separators, and all other 𝑏 𝐸
unstiffened elements 0.45√
𝑡 𝐹𝑦

4 Stems of tees
𝑑 𝐸
0.75√
𝑡 𝐹𝑦
5 Webs of doubly-
symmetric I-shaped ℎ 𝐸
1.49√
sections and channels 𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑦
6 Walls of rectangular HSS
𝑏 𝐸
and boxes of uniform 1.40√
thickness 𝑡 𝐹𝑦
Stiffened Elements

7 Flange cover plates and 𝐸

diaphragm plates between 𝑏 1.40√
lines of fasteners or welds 𝐹𝑦
𝑡

8 All other stiffened 𝐸

elements 𝑏 1.49√
𝐹𝑦
𝑡

9 Round HSS 𝐸
0.11
𝐷 𝐹𝑦
𝑡

SBC 306-CR-18 40
 CHAPTER 2—DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Table 2-2: Width-to-Thickness Ratios: Compression Elements Members Subject to Flexure

Width Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratio

-to-
Case

Description of
Thick p r Examples
Element
ness (compact/ (noncompact/
Ratio noncompact) slender)
Flanges of rolled I- 𝐸 𝐸
𝑏
10 shaped sections, 0.38√ 1.0√
channels and tees 𝑡 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦

Flanges of doubly [a] [b]

and singly 𝑏 𝐸 𝑘𝑐 𝐸
Unstiffened Elements

11 0.38√
symmetric I-shaped 𝑡 𝐹𝑦 0.95√
built-up sections 𝐹𝐿

Legs of single 𝑏 𝐸 𝐸
12 0.54√ 0.91√
angles 𝑡 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦
Flanges of all I-
shaped sections and 𝑏 𝐸 𝐸
13
channels in flexure 𝑡 0.38√ 1.0√
𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦
about the weak axis
𝑑 𝐸 𝐸
14 Stems of tees 0.84√ 1.03√
𝑡 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦
Webs of doubly- 𝐸
symmetric I-shaped ℎ 𝐸 5.70√
15 3.76√ 𝐹𝑦
sections and 𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑦
channels
[c]
𝒉𝒄 𝑬
Webs of singly- ℎ𝑐 𝒉𝒑
√𝑭
𝒚 𝐸
16 symmetric I-shaped 𝟐 ≤ 𝝀𝒓 5.70√
𝑡𝑤 (𝟎.𝟓𝟒
𝑴𝒑
−𝟎.𝟎𝟗) 𝐹𝑦
𝑴𝒚
sections

Flanges of
Stiffened Elements

rectangular HSS and 𝑏 𝐸 𝐸

17 1.12√ 1.40√
boxes of uniform 𝑡 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦
thickness
Flange cover plates 𝐸
and diaphragm 𝑏 1.12√ 𝐸
18 𝐹𝑦 1.40√
plates between lines 𝑡 𝐹𝑦
of fasteners or welds

Webs of rectangular ℎ 𝐸 𝐸
19 2.42√ 5.70√
HSS and boxes 𝑡 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦

𝐸 𝐸
0.07 0.31
𝐷 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦
20 Round HSS
𝑡

Notes:
[a] kc= 4/ (h / tw) ½ but shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation purposes.
[b] FL =0.7Fy for major axis bending of compact and noncompact web built-up I-shaped members with Sxt /Sxc ≥ 0.7;
FL = FySxt /Sxc ≥ 0.5Fy for major-axis bending of compact and noncompact web built-up I-shaped members with Sxt /Sxc < 0.7.
[c] My is the moment at yielding of the extreme fiber. Mp =plastic bending moment, N-mm
E =modulus of elasticity of steel, 200 000 MPa
Fy = specified minimum yield stress, MPa.

SBC 306-CR-18 41
CHAPTER 2—DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 42
CHAPTER 3—DESIGN FOR STABILITY

CHAPTER 3—DESIGN FOR STABILITY

methods of design listed in Sections 3.1.1 and

This chapter addresses requirements for the
design of structures for stability. The direct 3.1.2 .
analysis method is presented herein; alternative
3.1.1 Direct Analysis Method of Design. The
methods are presented in Appendix F.
direct analysis method of design, which consists of
The chapter is organized as follows: the calculation of required strengths by structural
3.1 —General Stability Requirements analysis method in accordance with Section 3.2
and the calculation of design strengths in
3.2 —Calculation of Required Strengths accordance with Section 3.3, is permitted for all
3.3 Calculation of Design Strengths structures.
3.1.2 Alternative Methods of Design. The
effective length method and the first-order analysis
3.1—General Stability Requirements method, defined in Appendix F, are permitted as
Stability shall be provided for the structure as a alternatives to the direct analysis method for
whole and for each of its elements. The effects of structures that satisfy the constraints specified in
all of the following on the stability of the structure that Appendix.
and its elements shall be considered: 3.2—Calculation of Required
1 . Flexural, shear and axial member Strengths
deformations, and all other deformations
For the direct analysis method of design, the
that contribute to displacements of the
required strengths of components of the structure
structure.
shall be determined from a structural analysis
2 . Second-order effects (both P-and P- conforming to Section 3.2.1 . The structural
 effects). analysis shall include consideration of initial
imperfections in accordance with Section 3.2.2 and
3. Geometric imperfections. adjustments to stiffness in accordance with Section
4 . Stiffness reductions due t o inelasticity. 3.2.3 .
5. Uncertainty in stiffness and strength. 3.2.1 General Analysis Requirements. The
structural analysis of the structure shall conform to
All load-dependent effects shall be calculated at the following requirements:
a level of loading corresponding to LRFD load
combinations. 1. The analysis shall consider flexural, shear
and axial member deformations, and all
Any rational method of design for stability that other component and connection
considers all of the listed effects is permitted; this deformations that contribute to
includes the methods identified in Sections 3.1.1 displacements of the structure. The
and 3.1.2. analysis shall include consideration for
For structures designed by inelastic analysis, the initial imperfections as specified in Section
provisions of Appendix A shall be satisfied. 3.2.2 . Moreover, the analysis shall
incorporate reductions in all stiffnesses that
User Note: The term “design” as used in this are considered to contribute to the stability
Code is the combination of structural analysis of the structure, as specified in Section
to determine the required strengths of 3.2.3 .
components and the proportioning of
2. The analysis shall be a second-order
components to have adequate design strength.
analysis that considers both P-and P-
See Commentary of Section 3.1 for effects, except that it is permissible to
explanation of how requirements (1) neglect the effect of P-on the response
through (5) of Section 3.1 are satisfied in the of the structure when the following

SBC 306-CR-18 43
CHAPTER 3—DESIGN FOR STABILITY

conditions are satisfied: (a) The structure columns. Initial out-of-straightness of

supports gravity loads primarily through individual members is not addressed in this
nominally-vertical columns, walls or section; it is accounted for in the compression
frames; (b) the ratio of maximum second- member design provisions of Chapter 5 and
order drift to maximum first-order drift need not be considered explicitly in the
(both determined for LRFD load analysis as long as it is within the limits
combinations, with stiffnesses adjusted as specified in Chapter 14.
specified in Section 3.2.3 ) in all stories is
equal to or less than 1.7; and (c) no more 3.2.2.1 Direct Modeling of Imperfections. In all
than one-third of the total gravity load on cases, it is permissible to account for the effect
the structure is supported by columns that of initial imperfections by including the
are part of moment-resisting frames in the imperfections directly in the analysis. The structure
direction of translation being considered. shall be analyzed with points of intersection of
It is necessary in all cases to consider P- members displaced from their nominal locations.
effects in the evaluation of individual The magnitude of the initial displacements shall be
members subject to compression and the maximum amount considered in the design; the
flexure. pattern of initial displacements shall be such that it
provides the greatest destabilizing effect.
User Note: A P--only second-order
analysis (one that neglects the effects of P- User Note: Initial displacements similar in
on the response of the structure) is permitted configuration to both displacements due to
under the conditions listed. The requirement loading and anticipated buckling modes should
for considering P- effects in the evaluation be considered in the modeling of
of individual members can be satisfied by imperfections. The magnitude of the initial
applying the B1 multiplier defined in Appendix displacements should be based on
G. permissible construction tolerances, as
specified in Chapter 14 or on actual
Use of the approximate method of second-order imperfections if known
analysis provided in Appendix G is permitted as an
alternative to a rigorous second-order analysis. In the analysis of structures that support gravity
loads primarily through nominally- vertical
3. The analysis shall consider all gravity and columns, walls or frames, where the ratio of
other applied loads that may influence the maximum second-order drift to maximum first-
stability of the structure. order drift (both determined for LRFD load
combinations, with stiffnesses adjusted as specified
User Note: It is important to include in the in Section 3.2.3 ) in all stories is equal to or less
analysis all gravity loads, including loads on than 1.7, it is permissible to include initial
leaning columns and other elements that are imperfections only in the analysis for gravity-only
not part of the lateral force resisting system. load combinations and not in the analysis for load
combinations that include applied lateral loads.
4. The second-order analysis shall be carried
out under LRFD load combinations. 3.2.2.2 Use of Notional Loads to Represent
Imperfections. For structures that support gravity
3.2.2 Consideration of Initial Imperfections. loads primarily through nominally-vertical
The effect of initial imperfections on the stability of columns, walls or frames, it is permissible to use
the structure shall be taken into account either by notional loads to represent the effects of initial
direct modeling of imperfections in the analysis imperfections in accordance with the requirements
as specified in Section 3.2.2.1 or by the application of this section. The notional load shall be applied
of notional loads as specified in Section 3.2.2.2 . to a model of the structure based on its nominal
geometry.
User Note: The imperfections considered in
this section are imperfections in the locations User Note: The notional load concept is
of points of intersection of members. In typical applicable to all types of structures, but the
building structures, the important imperfection specific requirements in Sections 3.2.2.2 (1)
of this type is the out-of-plumbness of

SBC 306-CR-18 44
CHAPTER 3—DESIGN FOR STABILITY

through 3.2.2.2 (4) are applicable only for the adjust the notional load coefficient
particular class of structure identified above. proportionally.

1. Notional loads shall be applied as lateral User Note: An out-of-plumbness of 1/500

loads at all levels. The notional loads shall represents the maximum tolerance on column
be additive to other lateral loads and shall plumbness specified in Chapter 14. In some
be applied in all load combinations, except cases, other specified tolerances such as those
as indicated in 3.2.2.2 (4), below. The on plan location of columns will govern and
magnitude of the notional loads shall be: will require a tighter plumbness tolerance.
𝑁𝑖 = 0.002 𝑌𝑖 (3-1) 4. For structures in which the ratio of
Ni notional load applied at level i, N maximum second-order drift to maximum
first-order drift (both determined for
Yi =gravity load applied at level i from the LRFD load combinations, with stiffnesses
LRFD load combination, N adjusted as specified in Section 3.2.3 in all
stories is equal to or less than 1.7, it is
User Note: The notional loads can lead to permissible to apply the notional load, Ni,
additional (generally small) fictitious base only in gravity-only load combinations and
shears in the structure. The correct horizontal not in combinations that include other
reactions at the foundation may be obtained lateral loads.
by applying an additional horizontal force at
the base of the structure, equal and opposite 3.2.3 Adjustments to Stiffness. The analysis of
in direction to the sum of all notional loads, the structure to determine the required strengths of
distributed among vertical load-carrying components shall use reduced stiffnesses, as
elements in the same proportion as the gravity follows:
load supported by those elements. The 1. A factor of 0.80 shall be applied to all
notional loads can also lead to additional stiffnesses that are considered to contribute
overturning effects, which are not fictitious. to the stability of the structure. It is
permissible to apply this reduction factor
2. The notional load at any level, Ni, shall be to all stiffnesses in the structure.
distributed over that level in the same
manner as the gravity load at the level. The User Note: Applying the stiffness reduction to
notional loads shall be applied in the some members and not others can, in some cases,
direction that provides the greatest result in artificial distortion of the structure under
destabilizing effect. load and possible unintended redistribution of
forces. This can be avoided by applying the
User Note: For most building structures, the reduction to all members, including those that do
requirement regarding notional load direction not contribute to the stability of the structure.
may be satisfied as follows: For load
combinations that do not include lateral 2. An additional factor, 𝜏𝑏 , shall be applied to
loading, consider two alternative orthogonal the flexural stiffnesses of all members
directions of notional load application, in a whose flexural stiffnesses are considered
positive and a negative sense in each of the to contribute to the stability of the
two directions, in the same direction at all structure.
levels; for load combinations that include
lateral loading, apply all notional loads in the When 𝑃𝑟 ⁄𝑃𝑦 ≤ 0.5
direction of the resultant of all lateral loads in 𝜏𝑏 = 1.0 (3-2)
the combination.
When 𝑃𝑟 ⁄𝑃𝑦 > 0.5
3. The notional load coefficient of 0.002 in
Eq. (3-1) is based on a nominal initial story 𝜏𝑏 = 4(𝑃𝑟 ⁄𝑃𝑦 ) [1 − (𝑃𝑟 ⁄𝑃𝑦 )] (3-3)
out-of-plumbness ratio of 1/500; where the
use of a different maximum out-of-
plumbness is justified, it is permissible to where

SBC 306-CR-18 45
CHAPTER 3—DESIGN FOR STABILITY

𝑃𝑟 = required axial compressive strength, N

𝑃𝑦     = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 = axial yield strength, N

User Note: Taken together, sections (1) and (2)

require the use of 0.8b times the nominal elastic
flexural stiffness and 0.8 times other nominal
elastic stiffnesses for structural steel members in
the analysis.

3. In structures to which Section 3.2.2.2 is

applicable, in lieu of using b 1.0 where
𝑃𝑟 ⁄𝑃𝑦 > 0.5, it is permissible to use 𝜏𝑏 =
1.0 for all members if a notional load of
0.001 𝑌𝑖 [where Yi is as defined in Section
3.2.2.2 (1)] is applied at all levels, in the
direction specified in Section 3.2.2.2 (2),
in all load combinations. These notional
loads shall be added to those, if any, used
to account for imperfections and shall not
be subject to Section 3.2.2.2 (4).
4. Where components comprised of materials
other than structural steel are considered to
contribute to the stability of the structure
and the governing codes and
specifications for the other materials
require greater reductions in stiffness, such
greater stiffness reductions shall be applied
to those components.

3.3Calculation of Design Strengths

For the direct analysis method of design, the
design strengths of members and connections shall
be calculated in accordance with the provisions of
Chapter 4, Chapter 5, Chapter 6, Chapter 7, Chapter
8, Chapter 9, Chapter 10 and Chapter 11 as
applicable, with no further consideration of overall
structure stability. The effective length factor, K, of
all members shall be taken as unity unless a smaller
value can be justified by rational analysis.
Bracing intended to define the unbraced lengths
of members shall have sufficient stiffness and
strength to control member movement at the braced
points.
Methods of satisfying bracing requirements for
individual columns, beams and beam-columns are
provided in Appendix E. The requirements of
Appendix E are not applicable to bracing that is
included as part of the overall force-resisting
system.

SBC 306-CR-18 46
CHAPTER 3—DESIGN FOR STABILITY

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 47
CHAPTER 4—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION

CHAPTER 4—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION

𝑃𝑛   =   𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 (4-1)
This chapter applies to prismatic members subject
to axial tension caused by static forces acting (b) For tensile rupture in the net section:
through the centroidal axis. 𝜑𝑡 = 0.75
The chapter is organized as follows: 𝑃𝑛   =   𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑒 (4-2)
4.1 —Slenderness Limitations where
4.2 —Design Tensile Strength Ae effective net area, mm2
4.3 —Effective Net Area Ag gross area of member, mm2
4.4 —Built-up Members Fy specified minimum yield stress, MPa
4.5 —Pin-Connected Members
Fu specified minimum tensile strength, MPa
4.6 —Eyebars
When members without holes are fully connected
User Note: For cases not included in this by welds, the effective net area used in Eq. (4-2)
chapter the following sections apply: shall be as defined in Section 4.3. When holes are
present in a member with welded-end connections,
Appendix C Design for Fatigue or at the welded connection in the case of plug or
Chapter 8 Design for Combined Forces and slot welds, the effective net area through the holes
Torsion shall be used in Eq. (4-2).
10.3 Threaded rods 4.3—Effective Net Area
10.4.1 Connecting elements in tension The gross area, Ag, and net area, An, of tension
10.4.3 Block shear rupture strength at members shall be determined in accordance with
end connections of tension the provisions of Section 2.4.3.
members The effective net area of tension members shall be
determined as follows:

4.1—Slenderness Limitations 𝐴𝑒 = 𝐴𝑛 𝑈 (4-3)

There is no maximum slenderness limit for where U, the shear lag factor, is determined as
members in tension. shown in Table 4-1.
For open cross sections such as W, M, S, C or HP
User Note: For members designed on the basis shapes, WTs, STs, and single and double angles, the
of tension, the slenderness ratio L /r preferably shear lag factor, U, need not be less than the ratio of
should not exceed 300. This suggestion does not the gross area of the connected element(s) to the
apply to rods or hangers in tension. member gross area. This provision does not apply
to closed sections, such as HSS sections, nor to
plates.
4.2—Design Tensile Strength
User Note: For bolted splice plates Ae An
The design strength of tension members, tPn, shall
0.85Ag, according to Section 10.4.1 .
be the lower value obtained according to the limit
states of yielding in the gross section and fracture
in the net section.
4.4—Built-up Members
(a) For tesile yielding in the gross section:
𝜑𝑡 = 0.90 For limitations on the longitudinal spacing of
connectors between elements in continuous contact

SBC 306-CR-18 48
CHAPTER 4—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION

consisting of a plate and a shape or two plates, see force. When the pin is expected to provide for
Section 10.3.5 . relative movement between connected parts while
under full load, the diameter of the pin hole shall
User Note: The longitudinal spacing of not be more than 1 mm greater than the diameter of
connectors between components should the pin.
preferably limit the slenderness ratio in any
The width of the plate at the pin hole shall not be
component between the connectors to 300.
less than 2be d and the minimum extension, a,
Either perforated cover plates or tie plates without beyond the bearing end of the pin hole, parallel to
lacing are permitted to be used on the open sides of the axis of the member, shall not be less than 1.33be.
built-up tension members. Tie plates shall have a
The corners beyond the pin hole are permitted to
length not less than two-thirds the distance between
be cut at 45 to the axis of the member, provided
the lines of welds or fasteners connecting them to
the net area beyond the pin hole, on a plane
the components of the member. The thickness of
perpendicular to the cut, is not less than that
such tie plates shall not be less than one-fiftieth of
required beyond the pin hole parallel to the axis
the distance between these lines. The longitudinal
of the member.
spacing of intermittent welds or fasteners at tie
plates shall not exceed 150 mm. 4.6—Eyebars
4.5—Pin-Connected Members 4.6.1 Design Strength. The design strength of
eyebars shall be determined in accordance with
4.5.1 Design Strength. The design strength of
Section 4.2, with Ag taken as the cross-sectional
pin-connected members tPn, shall be the lowest of
area of the body.
the following limit states:
For calculation purposes, the width of the body of
(a) Tensile rupture on the net effective area:
the eyebars shall not exceed eight times its
𝜑𝑡 = 0.75 thickness.
𝑃𝑛 = 𝐹𝑢 (2𝑡𝑏𝑒 ) (4-4)
4.6.2 Dimensional Requirements. Eyebars
(b) Shear rupture on the effective area: shall be of uniform thickness, without
𝜑𝑡 = 0.75 reinforcement at the pin holes, and have circular
𝑃𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑠𝑓 (4-5) heads with the periphery concentric with the pin
(c) For bearing on the projected area of the pin, hole.
use Section 10.7. The radius of transition between the circular head
(d) For yielding on the gross section, use Section and the eyebar body shall not be less than the head
4.2. diameter.
where The pin diameter shall not be less than seven-
eighths times the eyebar body width, and the pin
Asf area on the shear failure path 2t(a hole diameter shall not be more than 1 mm greater
d/2), mm2 than the pin diameter.
a shortest distance from edge of the pin For steels having Fy greater than 485 MPa, the hole
hole to the edge of the member diameter shall not exceed five times the plate
measured parallel to the direction of the thickness, and the width of the eyebar body shall
force, mm be reduced accordingly.
be 2t 16, but not more than the actual A thickness of less than 12 mm is permissible only
distance from the edge of the hole to the if external nuts are provided to tighten pin plates
edge of the part measured in the direction and filler plates into snug contact. The width from
normal to the applied force, mm the hole edge to the plate edge perpendicular to the
d pin diameter, mm direction of applied load shall be greater than two-
t thickness of plate, mm thirds and, for the purpose of calculation, not more
than three-fourths times the eyebar body width.
4.5.2 Dimensional Requirements. The pin hole
shall be located midway between the edges of the
member in the direction normal to the applied

SBC 306-CR-18 49
CHAPTER 4—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION

TABLES AND FIGURES OF CHAPTER 4

Table 4-1 : Shear Lag Factors for Connections to Tension Members

Case Description of Element Shear Lag Factor, U Example

All tension members where the tension load is
transmitted directly to each of the cross-sectional
1 U = 1.0 ---
elements by fasteners or welds (except as in Cases 4,
5 and 6).
All tension members, except plates and HSS, where
the tension load is trans- mitted to some but not all of
the cross- sectional elements by fasteners or
2 longitudinal welds or by longitudinal welds in
𝑈 = 1 − 𝑥̅⁄1
combination with transverse welds. (Alternatively,
for W, M, S and HP, Case 7 may be used. For angles
Case 8 may be used.)
U = 1.0
All tension members where the tension load is
and
3 transmitted only by transverse welds to some but not
An = area of the directly ---
all of the cross-sectional elements.
connected elements

Plates where the tension load is transmitted by / 2w…U 1.0

4
longitudinal welds only. 2w / 1.5w…U 0.87
1.5w / w…U 0.75

/ 1.3D…U 1.0
5 Round HSS with a single concentric gusset plate D ≤ l < 1.3D... U = 1 – x
̅⁄
l
𝑥̅ = 𝐷⁄𝜋
with a single l ≥ H... 𝑈 = 1 − 𝑥̅⁄1
concentric gusset plate 𝐵2 + 2𝐵𝐻
𝑥̄   =  
4(𝐵 + 𝐻)
6 Rectangular HSS
l ≥ H... 𝑈 = 1 − 𝑥̅⁄1
with two side gusset
plates 𝐵2
𝑥̅   =  
4(𝐵 + 𝐻)
with flange con- nected
W, M, S or HP with 3 or more Bf ≥ 2/3d…U = 0.90
---
Shapes or Tees cut from fasteners per line in the bf < 2/3d…U = 0.85
these shapes. (If U is direction of loading
7
calculated per Case 2, the with web connected
larger value is per- mitted to with 4 or more fas-
U = 0.70
be used.) teners per line in the
direction of loading
with 4 or more fas-
teners per line in the U =0.80 ---
direction of loading
Single and double angles (If
U is calculated per Case 2, With 3 fasteners per
8
the larger value is permitted line in the direction of
to be used.) loading (With fewer U =0.60 ---
than 3 fasteners per
line in the direction of
loading, use Case 2.)
l = length of connection, mm; w= plate width, mm; x– = eccentricity of connection, mm; B = overall width of rectangular
HSS member, measured 90° to the plane of the connection, mm; H = overall height of rectangular HSS member, measured
in the plane of the connection, mm

SBC 306-CR-18 50
CHAPTER 4—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 51
CHAPTER 5—DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION

CHAPTER 5—DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION

L = laterally unbraced length of the member,

This chapter addresses members subject to axial
mm
compression through the centroidal axis. The
chapter is organized as follows: r = radius of gyration, mm
5.1 —General Provisions For members designed on the basis of compression,
the effective slenderness ratio KL /r preferably
5.2 —Effective Length
should not exceed 200.
5.3 —Flexural Buckling of Members Without
Slender Elements
5.4 —Torsional and Flexural-Torsional 5.3—Flexural Buckling of Members
Buckling of Members Without Slender Without Slender Elements
Elements This section applies to nonslender element
5.5 —Single Angle Compression Members compression members as defined in Section 2.4.1
for elements in uniform compression.
5.6 —Built-up Members
5.7 —Members With Slender Elements User Note: When the torsional unbraced
length is larger than the lateral unbraced length,
Section 5.4 may control the design of wide
flange and similarly shaped columns.
User Note: For cases not included in this
chapter, the following sections apply: The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be
8.1 – 8.2 Members subject to combined axial determined based on the limit state of flexural
compression and flexure buckling.
8.3 Members subject to axial compression 𝑃𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝐴𝑔 (5-1)
and torsion
The critical stress, Fcr, is determined as follows:
9.2 Composite axially loaded members
𝐾𝐿 𝐸 𝐹𝑦
(a) When ≤ 4.71√ ( or ≤ 2.25)
10.4.4 Compressive strength of connecting 𝑟 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑒
elements 𝐹𝑦
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = [0.658𝐹𝑒 ] ⋅ 𝐹𝑦 (5-2)

5.1—General Provisions (b) When

𝐾𝐿 𝐸 𝐹𝑦
The design compressive strength, c Pn, is > 4.71√ ( or > 2.25)
𝑟 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑒
determined as follows.
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 0.877𝐹𝑒 (5-3)
The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be the
lowest value obtained based on the applicable limit Where, Fe = elastic buckling stress determined
states of flexural buckling, torsional buckling, and according to Eq. (5-4), as specified in Appendix F,
flexural- torsional buckling. Section F.2.3(b), or through an elastic buckling
analysis, as applicable, MPa
𝜑𝑐 = 0.85
𝜋2𝐸
𝐹𝑒 = (5-4)
5.2—Effective Length 𝐾𝐿 2
( )
𝑟
The effective length factor, K, for calculation of
member slenderness, KL/r, shall be determined in
User Note: The two inequalities for
accordance with Chapter 3 or Appendix F,
calculating the limits and applicability of
where

SBC 306-CR-18 52
CHAPTER 5—DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION

Sections 5.3(a) and 5.3(b), one based on KL/r For unsymmetric members, Fe is the
and one based on Fy /Fe, provide the same lowest root of the cubic equation
result. (𝐹𝑒 − 𝐹𝑒𝑥 )(𝐹𝑒 − 𝐹𝑒𝑦 )(𝐹𝑒 − 𝐹𝑒𝑧 ) − 𝐹𝑒2 (𝐹𝑒 −
𝑥 2 𝑦 2 (5-10)
5.4—Torsional and Flexural-Torsional 𝐹𝑒𝑦 ) ( 𝑜 ) − 𝐹𝑒2 (𝐹𝑒 − 𝐹𝑒𝑥 ) ( 𝑜 ) = 0
𝑟̄𝑜 𝑟̄𝑜
Buckling of Members Without Slender
Elements where

This section applies to singly symmetric and Ag = gross cross-sectional area of member, mm2
unsymmetric members and certain doubly Cw = warping constant, mm6
symmetric members, such as cruciform or built-up
columns without slender elements, as defined in 𝜋2𝐸
𝐹𝑒𝑥 =
Section 2.4.1 for elements in uniform compression. 𝐾𝑥 𝐿 2 (5-11)
( )
In addition, this section applies to all doubly 𝑟𝑥
symmetric members without slender elements when 𝜋2𝐸
𝐹𝑒𝑦 =
the torsional unbraced length exceeds the lateral 𝐾𝑦 𝐿 2 (5-12)
unbraced length. These provisions are required for ( )
𝑟𝑦
single angles with b/t > 20. 𝜋2 𝐸𝐶𝑤 1
𝐹𝑒𝑧 = ( (𝐾 + 𝐺𝐽) (5-13)
The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be 𝑧 𝐿)2 𝐴𝑔 𝑟̄02
determined based on the limit states of torsional and
G = shear modulus of elasticity of steel
flexural-torsional buckling, as follows:
= 77 200 MPa
𝑃𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝐴𝑔 (5-5) 𝑥02 +𝑦02
𝐻       = 1 − (5-14)
The critical stress, Fcr, is determined as follows: 𝑟̄02

(a) For double angle and tee-shaped compression Ix, Iy = moment of inertia about the principal
members: axes, mm4.
𝐹𝑐𝑟𝑦 +𝐹𝑐𝑟𝑧 4𝐹𝑐𝑟𝑦 𝐹𝑐𝑟𝑧 𝐻 J = torsional constant, mm4.
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = ( ) [1 − √1 −  2 ] (5-6)
2𝐻 (𝐹𝑐𝑟𝑦 +𝐹𝑐𝑟𝑧 ) Kx = effective length factor for flexural
where Fcry is taken as Fcr from Eq. (5-2) or buckling about x-axis.
(5-3) for flexural buckling about the y-axis Ky = effective length factor for flexural
of symmetry, and KL/r = KyL/ry for tee- buckling about y-axis.
shaped compression members, and KL/r =
(KL/r)m from Section 5.6 for double angle Kz = effective length factor for torsional
compression members, and buckling.
𝑟̄0 = polar radius of gyration about the shear
𝐺𝐽
𝐹𝑐𝑟𝑧 = (5-7) center, mm.
𝐴𝑔  𝑟̄02
Ix  Iy
(b) For all other cases, Fcr shall be determined r02  x02  y02  (5-15)
according to Eq. (5-2) or (5-3), using the Ag
torsional or flexural-torsional elastic buckling
rx = radius of gyration about x-axis, mm.
stress, Fe, determined as follows:
ry = radius of gyration about y-axis, mm.
For doubly symmetric members:
xo, yo = coordinates of the shear center with
𝜋 2 𝐸𝐶𝑤 1 respect to the centroid, mm.
𝐹𝑒 = [ 2
+ 𝐺𝐽] (5-8)
(𝐾𝑧 𝐿) 𝐼𝑥 + 𝐼𝑦
For singly symmetric members where y User Note: For doubly symmetric I-shaped
ℎ2
is the axis of symmetry sections, Cw may be taken as 𝐼𝑦 𝑜 where ho is
4
𝐹𝑒𝑦 +𝐹𝑒𝑧 4𝐹𝑒𝑦 𝐹𝑒𝑧 𝐻
the distance between flange centroids, in lieu of
𝐹𝑒 = ( ) [1 − √1 −  2 ] (5-9) a more precise analysis. For tees and double
2𝐻 (𝐹𝑒𝑦 +𝐹𝑒𝑧 )
angles, omit the term with Cw when computing
Fez and take xo as 0.

SBC 306-CR-18 53
CHAPTER 5—DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION

5.5—Single Angle Compression adjacent web members attached to the same

Members side of the gusset plate or chord:
𝐿
The nominal compressive strength, Pn, of single When ≤ 75
𝑟𝑥
angle members shall be determined in accordance
𝐾𝐿 𝐿
with Section 5.3 or Section 5.7, as appropriate, for = 60 + 0.8 (5-18)
axially loaded members. For single angles with b/t 𝑟 𝑟𝑥
> 20, Section 5.4 shall be used. Members meeting 𝐿
When > 75
the criteria imposed in Section 5.5(a) or 5.5(b) are 𝑟𝑥
permitted to be designed as axially loaded members 𝐾𝐿 𝐿
using the specified effective slenderness ratio, KL/r. = 45 + ≤ 200 (5-19)
𝑟 𝑟𝑥
The effects of eccentricity on single angle members
For unequal-leg angles with leg length ratios less
are permitted to be neglected when evaluated as
than 1.7 and connected through the shorter leg, KL/r
axially loaded compression members using one of
from Eqs. (5-18) and (5-19) shall be increased by
the effective slenderness ratios specified in Section
adding 6[(bl/bs)2 - 1], but KL/r of the member shall
5.5(a) or 5.5(b), provided that:
not be taken as less than 0.82L/rz
1. members are loaded at the ends in
where
compression through the same one leg;
L = length of member between work points at
2. members are attached by welding or by
truss chord centerlines, mm.
connections with a minimum of two bolts;
and bl = length of longer leg of angle, mm.
3. There are no intermediate transverse loads. bs = length of shorter leg of angle, mm.
Single angle members with different end conditions rx = radius of gyration about the geometric
from those described in Section 5.5(a) or (b), with axis parallel to the connected leg, mm,
the ratio of long leg width to short leg width greater rz = radius of gyration about the minor
than 1.7 or with transverse loading, shall be principal axis, mm.
evaluated for combined axial load and flexure using
the provisions of Chapter 8.
(a) For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles 5.6—Built-up Members
connected through the longer leg that are
5.6.1 Compressive Strength. This section
individual members or are web members of
applies to built-up members composed of two
planar trusses with adjacent web members
shapes either (a) interconnected by bolts or welds,
attached to the same side of the gusset plate
or (b) with at least one open side interconnected by
or chord:
perforated cover plates or lacing with tie plates.
𝐿
When ≤ 80 The end connection shall be welded or connected
𝑟𝑥
by means of pretensioned bolts with Class A or B
𝐾𝐿 𝐿 faying surfaces.
= 72 + 0.75 (5-16)
𝑟 𝑟𝑥
𝐿
User Note: It is acceptable to design a bolted
When > 80 end connection of a built-up compression
𝑟𝑥
member for the full compressive load with
𝐾𝐿 𝐿 bolts in bearing and bolt design based on the
= 32 + 1.25 ≤ 200 (5-17)
𝑟 𝑟𝑥 shear strength; however, the bolts must be
For unequal-leg angles with leg length ratios less pretensioned. In built-up compression members,
than 1.7 and connected through the shorter leg, KL/r such as double-angle struts in trusses, a small
from Eqs. (5-16) and (5-17) shall be increased by relative slip between the elements especially at
adding 4[(bl/bs)2-1], but KL/r of the members shall the end connections can increase the effective
not be taken as less than 0.95L/rz. length of the combined cross section to that of the
individual components and significantly reduce
(b) For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles the compressive strength of the strut. Therefore,
connected through the longer leg that are web the connection between the elements at the ends
members of box or space trusses with

SBC 306-CR-18 54
CHAPTER 5—DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION

of built-up members should be designed to resist built-up member. The least radius of gyration, ri,
slip. shall be used in computing the slenderness ratio of
each component part.
The nominal compressive strength of built-up
At the ends of built-up compression members
members composed of two shapes that are
bearing on base plates or finished surfaces, all
interconnected by bolts or welds shall be
components in contact with one another shall be
determined in accordance with Sections 5.3, 5.4 or
connected by a weld having a length not less than
5.7 subject to the following modification. In lieu of
the maximum width of the member or by bolts
more accurate analysis, if the buckling mode
spaced longitudinally not more than four diameters
involves relative deformations that produce shear
apart for a distance equal to 1.5 times the maximum
forces in the connectors between individual shapes,
width of the member.
KL/r is replaced by (KL/r)m determined as follows:
Along the length of built-up compression members
(a) For intermediate connectors that are bolted
between the end connections required above,
snug-tight:
longitudinal spacing for intermittent welds or bolts
𝐾𝐿 𝐾𝐿 2 𝑎 2 shall be adequate to provide for the transfer of the
( ) = √( ) + ( ) (5-20) required strength. For limitations on the
𝑟 𝑚 𝑟 0 𝑟𝑖 longitudinal spacing of fasteners between elements
(b) For intermediate connectors that are welded or in continuous contact consisting of a plate and a
are connected by means of pre- tensioned bolts: shape or two plates, see Section 10.3.5 . Where a
𝑎 component of a built-up compression member
When ≤ 40 consists of an outside plate, the maximum spacing
𝑟𝑖
shall not exceed the thickness of the thinner outside
𝐾𝐿 𝐾𝐿
( ) =( ) (5-21) plate times 0.75√𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 nor 300 mm, when
𝑟 𝑚 𝑟 𝑜
intermittent welds are provided along the edges of
𝑎
When > 40 the components or when fasteners are provided on
𝑟𝑖
all gage lines at each section. When fasteners are
staggered, the maximum spacing of fasteners on
𝐾𝐿 𝐾𝐿 2 𝐾𝑖 𝑎 2
√
( ) = ( ) +( ) (5-22) each gage line shall not exceed the thickness of the
𝑟 𝑚 𝑟 0 𝑟𝑖 thinner outside plate times 1.12√𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 nor 450
where mm.
𝐾𝐿 Open sides of compression members built up from
( ) = modified slenderness ratio of built up
𝑟 𝑚 plates or shapes shall be provided with continuous
member cover plates perforated with a succession of access
𝐾𝐿 holes. The unsupported width of such plates at
( ) = slenderness ratio of built-up member access holes, as defined in Section 2.4.1 , is
𝑟 𝑜
acting as a unit in the buckling direction assumed to contribute to the design strength
being considered provided the following requirements are met:
Ki = 0.50 for angles back-to-back 1. The width-to-thickness ratio shall conform
to the limitations of Section 2.4.1 .
= 0.75 for channels back-to-back
= 0.86 for all other cases User Note: It is conservative to use the limiting
width-to-thickness ratio for Case 7 in Table
a = distance between connectors, mm.
2-1 and Table 2-2 with the width, b, taken as
ri = minimum radius of gyration of the transverse distance between the nearest
individual component, mm. lines of fasteners. The net area of the plate is
taken at the widest hole. In lieu of this
5.6.2 Dimensional Requirements. Individual
approach, the limiting width-to-thickness
components of compression members composed of
ratio may be determined through analysis.
two or more shapes shall be connected to one
another at intervals, a, such that the effective
2. The ratio of length (in direction of stress)
slenderness ratio, Ki a/ri, of each of the component
to width of hole shall not exceed 2.
shapes between the fasteners does not exceed three-
fourths times the governing slenderness ratio of the

SBC 306-CR-18 55
CHAPTER 5—DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION

3. The clear distance between holes in the For additional spacing requirements, see Section
direction of stress shall be not less than the 10.3.5 .
transverse distance between nearest lines
of connecting fasteners or welds.
5.7—Members With Slender Elements

4. The periphery of the holes at all points This section applies to slender-element
compression members, as defined in Section 2.4.1
shall have a minimum radius of 38 mm.
for elements in uniform compression.
As an alternative to perforated cover plates, lacing
The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be the
with tie plates is permitted at each end and at
lowest value based on the applicable limit states of
intermediate points if the lacing is interrupted. Tie
plates shall be as near the ends as practicable. In flexural buckling, torsional buckling, and flexural-
members providing design strength, the end tie torsional buckling.
plates shall have a length of not less than the 𝑃𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝐴𝑔 (5-23)
distance between the lines of fasteners or welds
connecting them to the components of the member. The critical stress, Fcr, shall be determined as
Intermediate tie plates shall have a length not less follows:
than one-half of this distance. The thickness of tie 𝐾𝐿 𝐸 𝑄𝐹𝑦
plates shall be not less than one-fiftieth of the (a) When ≤ 4.71√ (or ≤ 2.25)
𝑟 𝑄𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑒
distance between lines of welds or fasteners 𝑄𝐹𝑦
connecting them to the segments of the members. 𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 𝑄 [0.658 𝐹𝑒 ] ⋅ 𝐹𝑦 (5-24)
In welded construction, the welding on each line
connecting a tie plate shall total not less than one- 𝐾𝐿 𝐸 𝑄𝐹𝑦
third the length of the plate. In bolted construction, (b) When > 4.71√ ( or > 2.25)
𝑟 𝑄𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑒
the spacing in the direction of stress in tie plates
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 0.877𝐹𝑒 (5-25)
shall be not more than six diameters and the tie
plates shall be connected to each segment by at least where
three fasteners.
Fe = elastic buckling stress, calculated using Eqs.
Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels or (5-4) and (5-8) for doubly symmetric
other shapes employed as lacing, shall be so spaced members, Eqs. (5-4) and (5-9) for singly
that the L/r ratio of the flange element included symmetric members, and Eq. (5-10) for
between their connections shall not exceed three- unsymmetric members, except for single
fourths times the governing slenderness ratio for the angles with b/t ≤ 20, where Fe is calculated
member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to using Eq. (5-4), MPa
provide a shearing strength normal to the axis of the
Q = net reduction factor accounting for all
member equal to 2% of the design compressive
slender compression elements;
strength of the member. The L/r ratio for lacing bars
arranged in single systems shall not exceed 140. For = 1.0 for members without slender elements, as
double lacing this ratio shall not exceed 200. defined in Section 2.4.1 , for elements in
Double lacing bars shall be joined at the uniform compression
intersections. For lacing bars in compression, L is
= Qs Qa for members with slender-element
permitted to be taken as the unsupported length of
sections, as defined in Section 2.4.1 , for
the lacing bar between welds or fasteners
elements in uniform compression.
connecting it to the components of the built-up
member for single lacing, and 70% of that distance
User Note: For cross sections composed of only
for double lacing.
unstiffened slender elements, Q Qs (Qa
User Note: The inclination of lacing bars to 1.0). For cross sections composed of only
the axis of the member shall preferably be not stiffened slender elements, Q Qa (Qs 1.0).
less than 60 for single lacing and 45 for For cross sections composed of both stiffened
double lacing. When the distance between the and unstiffened slender elements, Q Qs Qa. For
lines of welds or fasteners in the flanges is cross sections composed of multiple unstiffened
more than 375 mm, the lacing shall preferably slender elements, it is conservative to use the
be double or be made of angles. smaller Qs from the more slender element in

SBC 306-CR-18 56
CHAPTER 5—DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION

determining the member strength for pure t = thickness of element, mm

compression.
h = Clear distance between flanges less the
fillet or corner radius for rolled shapes;
5.7.1 Slender Unstiffened Elements, Qs. The
distance between adjacent lines of fasteners
reduction factor, Qs, for slender unstiffened
or the clear distance between flanges when
elements is defined as follows:
welds are used for built-up shapes, mm.
(a) For flanges, angles and plates projecting from
(c) For single angles
rolled columns or other compression members:
𝑏 𝐸
𝑏 𝐸 When ≤ 0.45√
When ≤ 0.56√ 𝑡 𝐹𝑦
𝑡 𝐹𝑦
𝑄𝑠 = 1.0 (5-32)
𝑄𝑠 = 1.0 (5-26)
𝐸 𝑏 𝐸
When 0.45√ < ≤ 0.91√
𝐹𝑦 𝑡 𝐹𝑦
𝐸 𝑏 𝐸
When 0.56√ < < 1.03√
𝐹𝑦 𝑡 𝐹𝑦
𝑏 𝐹𝑦
𝐹𝑦
𝑄𝑠 = 1.34 − 0.76 ( ) √ (5-33)
𝑄𝑠 = 1.415 − 0.74 ( ) √
𝑏
(5-27) 𝑡 𝐸
𝑡 𝐸
𝑏 𝐸
𝑏
When ≥ 1.03√
𝐸 When > 0.91√
𝑡 𝐹𝑦 𝑡 𝐹𝑦

0.69𝐸 0.53𝐸
𝑄𝑠 = 𝑄𝑠 =
𝑏 2 (5-28) 𝑏 2 (5-34)
𝐹𝑦 ( ) 𝐹𝑦 ( )
𝑡 𝑡
(b) For flanges, angles and plates projecting from where
built-up I-shaped columns or other
b = full width of longest leg, mm.
compression members:
(d) For stems of tees
𝑏 𝐸𝑘𝑐
When ≤ 0.64√ 𝑑 𝐸
𝑡 𝐹𝑦
When ≤ 0.75√
𝑡 𝐹𝑦
𝑄𝑠 = 1.0 (5-29)
𝑄𝑠 = 1.0 (5-35)
𝐸𝑘𝑐 𝑏 𝐸𝑘𝑐
When 0.64√ < ≤ 1.17√
𝐹𝑦 𝑡 𝐹𝑦 𝐸 𝑑 𝐸
When 0.75√ < ≤ 1.03√
𝐹𝑦 𝑡 𝐹𝑦
𝑏 𝐹𝑦
𝑄𝑠 = 1.415 − 0.65 ( ) √ (5-30) 𝑑 𝐹𝑦
𝑡 𝐸𝑘𝑐 𝑄𝑠 = 1.908 − 1.22 ( ) √ (5-36)
𝑡 𝐸

𝑏 𝐸𝑘𝑐 𝑑 𝐸
When > 1.17√ When > 1.03√
𝑡 𝐹𝑦
𝑡 𝐹𝑦

0.90𝐸𝑘𝑐
𝑄𝑠 =
𝑏 2 (5-31) 0.69𝐸
𝐹𝑦 ( ) 𝑄𝑠 =
𝑡
𝑑 2 (5-37)
𝐹𝑦 ( )
where 𝑡
where
b = width of unstiffened compression element,
as defined in Section 2.4.1 , mm d = full nominal depth of tee, mm.
4 5.7.2 Slender Stiffened Elements, Qa. The
𝑘𝑐       = ℎ
, and shall not be taken less than
√𝑡 reduction factor, Qa, for slender stiffened elements
𝑤
0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation is defined as follows:
purposes

SBC 306-CR-18 57
CHAPTER 5—DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION

𝐴𝑒
𝑄𝑎 = (5-38)
𝐴𝑔
where
Ag = gross cross-sectional area of member, mm2.
Ae = summation of the effective areas of the cross
section based on the reduced effective width,
be, mm2.
The reduced effective width, be, is determined as
follows:
(a) For uniformly compressed slender elements,
𝑏 𝐸
with ≥ 1.49√ except flanges of square and
𝑡 𝑓
rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
𝐸 0.34 𝐸
𝑏𝑒 = 1.92 𝑡√ [1 − 𝑏 √𝑓 ] ≤ 𝑏 (5-39)
𝑓 ( )
𝑡

Where, f is taken as Fcr with Fcr calculated based on

Q = 1.0

(b) For flanges of square and rectangular slender-

𝑏
element sections of uniform thickness with ≥
𝑡
𝐸
1.40√ ;
𝑓

𝐸 0.38 𝐸
𝑏𝑒 = 1.92 𝑡√ [1 − 𝑏 √𝑓 ] ≤ 𝑏 (5-40)
𝑓 ( )
𝑡

where, 𝑓 = 𝑃𝑛 ⁄𝐴𝑒
User Note: In lieu of calculating f  Pn /Ae,
which requires iteration, f may be taken
equal to Fy. This will result in a slightly
conservative estimate of column design
strength.
(c) For axially loaded circular sections:
𝐸 𝐷 𝐸
When 0.11 < ≤ 0.45
𝐹𝑦 𝑡 𝐹𝑦

0.038𝐸 2
𝑄 = 𝑄𝑎 = + (5-41)
𝐷
𝐹𝑦 ( ) 3
𝑡

where
D = outside diameter of round HSS, mm.
t = thickness of wall, mm.

SBC 306-CR-18 58
CHAPTER 5—DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION

TABLES AND FIGURES OF CHAPTER 5

TABLE 5-1 : SELECTION TABLE FOR THE APPLICATION OF CHAPTER 5 SECTIONS

Without Slender Elements With Slender Elements

Cross Section Sections in Sections in
Limit States Limit States
Chapter 5 Chapter 5
LB
5.3 FB
5.7 FB
5.4 TB
TB

LB
5.3 FB
5.7 FB
5.4 FTB
FTB

LB
5.3 FB 5.7
FB

LB
5.3 FB 5.7
FB

LB
5.3 FB
5.7 FB
5.4 FTB
FTB

5.3 LB
FB 5.6
5.4 FB
FTB 5.7
0 FTB

LB
5.5 5.5
FB

N/A
5.3 FB N/A

Unsymmetrical shapes other LB

5.4 FTB 5.7
than single angles FTB
FB = flexural buckling, TB = torsional buckling, FTB = flexural-torsional buckling,
LB = local buckling

SBC 306-CR-18 59
CHAPTER 5—DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 60
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

Appendix C Members subject to fatigue

This chapter applies to members subject to simple
bending about one principal axis. For simple For guidance in determining the appropriate
bending, the member is loaded in a plane parallel sections of this chapter to apply, Table 6-1 can
to a principal axis that passes through the shear be used.
center or is restrained against twisting at load points
and supports.
The chapter is organized as follows: 6.1—General Provisions
6.1 —General Provisions The design flexural strength, b Mn, shall be
determined as follows:
6.2 —Doubly Symmetric Compact I-Shaped
Members and Channels Bent About Their 1. For all provisions in this chapter
Major Axis 𝜑𝑏 = 0.90
6.3 —Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Members and the nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall
with Compect Webs and Noncompect or
be determined according to Sections 6.2
Slender Flanges Bent about Their Major Axis
through 6.13.
6.4 —Other I-Shaped Members with Compact or
2. The provisions in this chapter are based on
Noncompact Webs Bent About Their Major
the assumption that points of support for
Axis
beams and girders are restrained against
6.5 —Doubly Symmectric and Singly rotation about their longitudinal axis.
Symmetric I-Shaped Members with Slender
3. For singly symmetric members in single
Webs Bent About Their Majout Axis
curvature and all doubly symmetric
6.6 —I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent members:
About Their Minor Axis
Cb, the lateral-torsional buckling modification
6.7 —Square and Rectangular HSS and Box- factor for non-uniform moment diagrams when
Shaped Members both ends of the segment are braced is determined
6.8 —Round HSS as follows:
12.5𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥
6.9 —Tees and Double Angles Loaded in The 𝐶𝑏 = (6-1)
Plane of Symmetry 2.5𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥 + 3𝑀𝐴 + 4𝑀𝐵 + 3𝑀𝐶
6.10 —Single Angles where
6.11 —Rectangular Bars and Rounds Mmax absolute value of maximum moment in the
unbraced segment, N-mm
6.12 —Unsymmetrical Shapes
MA absolute value of moment at quarter point
6.13 —Proportions of Beams and Girders
of the unbraced segment, N-mm
MB absolute value of moment at centerline of
User Note: For cases not included in this chapter the unbraced segment, N-mm
the following sections apply: MC absolute value of moment at three-quarter
Chapter 7 Design for shear point of the unbraced segment, N-mm
8.1–8.3 Members subject to biaxial flexure or For cantilevers or overhangs where the free end is
to combined flexure and axial force unbraced, 𝐶𝑏 = 1.0.
8.3 Members subject to flexure and torsion User Note: For doubly symmetric members
with no transverse loading between brace

SBC 306-CR-18 61
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

points, Eq. (6-1) reduces to 1.0 for the case of where

equal end moments of opposite sign (uniform
Lb = length between points that are either
moment), 2.27 for the case of equal end
braced against lateral displacement of the
moments of the same sign (reverse curvature
compression flange or braced against twist of
bending), and to 1.67 when one end moment
the cross section, mm
equals zero. For singly symmetric members, a
more detailed analysis for Cb is presented in
the Commentary. 𝐶𝑏 𝜋 2 𝐸 𝐽𝑐 𝐿𝑏 2
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = √1 + 0.078 ( ) (6-5)
𝐿𝑏 2 𝑆𝑥 ℎ0 𝑟𝑡𝑠
4. In singly symmetric members subject to ( )
𝑟𝑡𝑠
reverse curvature bending, the lateral-
torsional buckling strength shall be and where
checked for both flanges. The design
flexural strength shall be greater than or E modulus of elasticity of steel 200 000
equal to the maximum required moment MPa
causing compression within the flange J torsional constant, mm4
under consideration.
Sx elastic section modulus taken about the x-
6.2—Doubly Symmetric Compact I- axis, mm3
Shaped Members and Channels Bent
About Their Major Axis ho distance between the flange centroids, mm

This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped User Note: The square root term in Eq. (6-5)
members and channels bent about their major may be conservatively taken equal to 1.0.
axis, having compact webs and compact flanges
as defined in Section 2.4.1 for flexure. User Note: Eqs. (6-4) and (6-5) provide
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower identical solutions to the following expression
value obtained according to the limit states of for lateral-torsional buckling of doubly
yielding (plastic moment) and lateral-torsional symmetric sections that has been presented in
buckling. SBC 306:

6.2.1 Yielding 𝜋 𝜋 𝐸 2

𝑀𝑐𝑟 = 𝐶𝑏 √𝐸𝐼𝑦 𝐺𝐽 + ( ) 𝐼𝑦 𝐶𝑤
𝐿𝑏 𝐿𝑏
𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑃 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 (6-2)
The advantage of Eqs. (6-4) and (6-5) is that
where the form is very similar to the expression for
Fy specified minimum yield stress of the type of lateral-torsional buckling of singly symmetric
steel being used, MPa sections given in Eqs. (6-16) and (6-17).

Zx plastic section modulus about the x-axis, The limiting lengths Lp and Lr are determined as
mm3 follows:
6.2.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
𝐸
(a) When Lb Lp, the limit state of lateral- 𝐿𝑝 = 1.76𝑟𝑦 √ (6-6)
𝐹𝑦
torsional buckling does not apply.
(b) When Lp Lb Lr 𝐸
𝐿𝑟 = 1.95𝑟𝑡𝑠 √𝐴 + √(𝐴)2 + 6.76(𝐵)2 (6-7)
0.7𝐹𝑦
𝐿𝑏 −𝐿𝑝
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐶𝑏 [𝑀𝑃 − (𝑀𝑃 − 0.7𝐹𝑦 𝑆𝑥 ) ( )] ≤ 𝑀𝑝 (6-3)
𝐿𝑟 −𝐿𝑝 Where,
𝐽𝑐
𝐴=
(c) When Lb > Lr 𝑆𝑥 ℎ𝑜
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟  𝑆𝑥 ≤ 𝑀𝑝 (6-4)

SBC 306-CR-18 62
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

0.7𝐹𝑦 6.3.1 Lateral-Torsional Buckling. For lateral-

𝐵= torsional buckling, the provisions of Section 6.2.2
𝐸
shall apply.
6.3.2 Compression Flange Local Buckling
2 √𝐼𝑦 𝐶𝑤
𝑟𝑡𝑠 = (6-8)
𝑆𝑥 (a) For sections with non-compact flanges
𝜆 − 𝜆𝑝𝑓
and the coefficient c is determined as follows: 𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑝 − (𝑀𝑝 − 0.7𝐹𝑦  𝑆𝑥 ) ( ) (6-11)
𝜆𝑟𝑓 − 𝜆𝑝𝑓
(a) For doubly symmetric I-shapes: (b) For sections with slender flanges
0.9𝐸 𝑘𝑐  𝑆𝑥
𝑐=1 (6-9) 𝑀𝑛 = (6-12)
𝜆2
(b) For channels where
𝑏𝑓
ℎ0 𝐼𝑦 𝜆=
2𝑡𝑓
𝑐= √ (6-10)
2 𝐶𝑤
pf = p is the limiting slenderness for a compact
flange, Table 2-2
rf = r is the limiting slenderness for a non-
User Note: For doubly symmetric I-shapes compact flange, Table 2-2
with rectangular flanges, 4
𝑘𝑐 = and shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor
√ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤
𝐼𝑦 ℎ20 greater than 0.76 for calculation purpose
𝐶𝑤 =
4
h = distance as defined in Section 2.4.1 b, mm
and thus Eq. (6-8) becomes

2
𝐼𝑦 ℎ0
𝑟𝑡𝑠 = 6.4—Other I-Shaped Members with
2𝑆𝑥
Compact or Noncompact Webs Bent
rts may be approximated accurately and
About Their Major Axis
conservatively as the radius of gyration of
the compression flange plus one-sixth of the This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped
web: members bent about their major axis with non-
compact webs and singly symmetric I-shaped
𝑏𝑓 members with webs attached to the mid-width of
𝑟𝑡𝑠 =
1 ℎ 𝑡 the flanges, bent about their major axis, with
√12 (1 + 6 𝑏  𝑡𝑤 ) compact or non-compact webs, as defined in
𝑓 𝑓
Section 2.4.1 for flexure.

User Note: I-shaped members for which this

6.3—Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped section is applicable may be designed
Members with Compect Webs and conservatively using Section 6.5.
Noncompect or Slender Flanges Bent
about Their Major Axis The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the
lowest value obtained according to the limit states
This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped of compression flange yielding, lateral-torsional
members bent about their major axis having buckling, compression flange local buckling, and
compact webs and non-compact or slender flanges tension flange yielding.
as defined in Section 2.4.1 for flexure.
6.4.1 Compression Flange Yielding
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the
lower value obtained according to the limit states of 𝑀𝑛 = 𝑅𝑝𝑐  𝑀𝑦𝑐 = 𝑅𝑝𝑐  𝐹𝑦  𝑆𝑥𝑐 (6-13)
lateral-torsional buckling and compression flange where
local buckling.

SBC 306-CR-18 63
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

Myc yield moment in the compression 𝐽

flange, N-mm
𝐴=
𝑆𝑥𝑐 ℎ𝑜
6.4.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling 𝐹𝐿
𝐵=
(a) When Lb Lp, the limit state of lateral-torsional 𝐸
buckling does not apply. The web plastification factor, Rpc, shall be
(b) When Lp < Lb Lr determined as follows:
(i) When Iyc /Iy 0.23
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐶𝑏 [𝑅𝑝𝑐 𝑀𝑦𝑐 − (𝑅𝑝𝑐 𝑀𝑦𝑐 −
𝐿𝑏 −𝐿𝑝 (6-14) (a) When
ℎ𝑐
≤ 𝜆𝑝𝑤
𝐹𝐿 𝑆𝑥𝑐 ) ( )] ≤ 𝑅𝑝𝑐 𝑀𝑦 𝑡𝑤
𝐿𝑟 −𝐿𝑝
𝑀𝑝
(c) When Lb Lr 𝑅𝑝𝑐 = (6-22)
𝑀𝑦𝑐
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟  𝑆𝑥𝑐 ≤ 𝑅𝑝𝑐  𝑀𝑦𝑐 (6-15) ℎ𝑐
(b) When > 𝜆𝑝𝑤
where 𝑡𝑤
𝑀𝑝 𝑀𝑝 𝜆−𝜆𝑝𝑤 𝑀𝑝
𝑀𝑦𝑐 = 𝐹𝑦  𝑆𝑥𝑐 (6-16) 𝑅𝑝𝑐 = [ −( − 1) ( )] ≤ (6-23)
𝑀𝑦𝑐 𝑀𝑦𝑐 𝜆𝑟𝑤 −𝜆𝑝𝑤 𝑀𝑦𝑐

(ii) When Iyc /Iy 0.23

𝐶𝑏 𝜋 2 𝐸 𝐽 𝐿𝑏 2
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = √1 + 0.078 ( ) (6-17) 𝑅𝑝𝑐 = 1.0 (6-24)
𝐿 2 𝑆𝑥𝑐 ℎ0 𝑟𝑡
( 𝑏)
𝑟𝑡 where
𝐼𝑦𝑐
For ≤ 0.23, J shall be taken as zero 𝑀𝑝        = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 ≤ 1.6𝐹𝑦 𝑆𝑥𝑐
𝐼𝑦
Sxc, Sxt elastic section modulus referred to
where
compression and tension flanges,
Iyc = moment of inertia of the compression respectively, mm3
flange about the y-axis, mm4 ℎ𝑐
The stress, FL, is determined as follows: 𝜆=
𝑡𝑤
𝑆𝑥𝑡
When ≥ 0.7 pw p, the limiting slenderness for a compact
𝑆𝑥𝑐
web, Table 2-2
𝐹𝐿 = 0.7𝐹𝑦 (6-18)
rw r, the limiting slenderness for a non-
𝑆𝑥𝑡
When < 0.7 compact web, Table 2-2
𝑆𝑥𝑐

𝑆𝑥𝑡 hc twice the distance from the centroid to the

𝐹𝐿 = 𝐹𝑦 ≥ 0.5𝐹𝑦 (6-19) following: the inside face of the compression
𝑆𝑥𝑐
flange less the fillet or corner radius, for
The limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit rolled shapes; the nearest line of fasteners at
state of yielding, Lp, is determined as: the compression flange or the inside faces of
the compression flange when welds are used,
𝐸 for built-up sections, mm
𝐿𝑃 = 1.1𝑟𝑡 √ (6-20)
𝐹𝑦 The effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional
buckling, rt, is determined as follows:
The limiting unbraced length for the limit state of
inelastic lateral-torsional buckling, Lr, is i. For I-shapes with a rectangular
determined as: compression flange
𝑏𝑓𝑐
𝐸 𝑟𝑡 =
𝐿𝑟 = 1.95𝑟𝑡 √𝐴 + √(𝐴)2 + 6.76(𝐵)2 (6-21)
𝐹𝐿 ℎ 1 ℎ2 (6-25)
√12 ( 0 + 𝑎𝑤 )
Where, 𝑑 6 ℎ0  𝑑

where

SBC 306-CR-18 64
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

ℎ𝑐 𝑡𝑤 𝑏𝑓
𝑐
𝑎𝑤 = (6-26) 𝜆=
𝑏𝑓𝑐 𝑡𝑓𝑐 2 𝑡𝑓
𝑐
bfc width of compression flange, mm pf = p, the limiting slenderness for a compact
tfc compression flange thickness, mm flange, Table 2-2
rf = r, the limiting slenderness for a non-
compact flange, Table 2-2
ii. For I-shapes with a channel cap or a cover
plate attached to the compression flange 6.4.4 Tension Flange Yielding

rt radius of gyration of the flange components (a) When Sxt Sxc, the limit state of tension flange
in flexural compression plus one-third of the yielding does not apply.
web area in compression due to application of (b) When Sxt Sxc
major axis bending moment alone, mm
𝑀𝑛 = 𝑅𝑝𝑡 𝑀𝑦𝑡 (6-29)
aw the ratio of two times the web area in
compression due to application of major axis where
bending moment alone to the area of the
compression flange components 𝑀𝑦𝑡 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑆𝑥𝑡
The web plastification factor corresponding to the
tension flange yielding limit state, Rpt, is
User Note: For I-shapes with a rectangular
determined as follows:
compression flange, rt may be approximated
ℎ𝑐
accurately and conservatively as the radius of When ≤ 𝜆𝑝𝑤
𝑡𝑤
gyration of the compression flange plus one-
third of the compression portion of the web; in 𝑀𝑝
other words 𝑅𝑝𝑡 = (6-30)
𝑀𝑦𝑡
𝑏𝑓𝑐 ℎ𝑐
𝑟𝑡 = When > 𝜆𝑝𝑤
𝑡𝑤
√12 (1 + 1 𝑎𝑤 )
6 𝑀𝑝 𝑀𝑝 𝜆−𝜆𝑝𝑤 𝑀𝑝
𝑅𝑝𝑡 = [ −( − 1) ( )] ≤ (6-31)
𝑀𝑦𝑡 𝑀𝑦𝑡 𝜆𝑟𝑤 −𝜆𝑝𝑤 𝑀𝑦𝑡
6.4.3 Compression Flange Local Buckling
Where
(a) For sections with compact flanges, the limit
ℎ𝑐
state of local buckling does not apply. 𝜆=
𝑡𝑤
(b) For sections with non-compact flanges
𝜆−𝜆𝑝𝑓
pw p, the limiting slenderness for a compact
𝑀𝑛 = 𝑅𝑝𝑐 𝑀𝑦𝑐 − (𝑅𝑝𝑐 𝑀𝑦𝑐 − 𝐹𝐿 𝑆𝑥𝑐 ) ( ) (6-27) web, defined in Table 2-2
𝜆𝑟𝑓 −𝜆𝑝𝑓

(c) For sections with slender flanges rw r, the limiting slenderness for a non-
0.9𝐸𝑘𝑐 𝑆𝑥𝑐 compact web, defined in Table 2-2
𝑀𝑛 = (6-28)
𝜆2
where 6.5—Doubly Symmectric and Singly
FL is defined in Eqs. (6-18) and (6-19) Symmetric I-Shaped Members with
Slender Webs Bent About Their Majout
Rpc is the web plastification factor, determined
Axis
by Eq. (6-22)
4 This section applies to doubly symmetric and
𝑘𝑐 =  and shall not be taken less than singly symmetric I-shaped members with slender
√ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤
0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation webs attached to the mid-width of the flanges and
purposes bent about their major axis as defined in Section
2.4.1 for flexure.

SBC 306-CR-18 65
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the 0.9 𝐸 𝑘𝑐

lowest value obtained according to the limit states 𝐹𝑐𝑟 =
𝑏𝑓 2 (6-40)
of compression flange yielding, lateral-torsional (2𝑡 )
buckling, compression flange local buckling, and 𝑓
tension flange yielding. where
6.5.1 Compression Flange Yielding 4
𝑘𝑐 = and shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor
√ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤
𝑀𝑛 = 𝑅𝑝𝑔  𝐹𝑦  𝑆𝑥𝑐 (6-32) greater than 0.76 for calculation purpose.
𝑏𝑓
𝑐
6.5.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling 𝜆=
2 𝑡𝑓
𝑐
𝑀𝑛 = 𝑅𝑝𝑔 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝑆𝑥𝑐 (6-33)
pf p, the limiting slenderness for a compact
(a) When Lb Lp, the limit state of lateral-torsional
flange, Table 2-2
buckling does not apply.
(b) When Lp Lb Lr rf r, the limiting slenderness for a non-
compact flange, Table 2-2
𝐿𝑏 − 𝐿𝑝
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 𝐶𝑏 [𝐹𝑦 − (0.3𝐹𝑦 ) ( )] ≤ 𝐹𝑦 (6-34) 6.5.4 Tension Flange Yielding
𝐿𝑟 − 𝐿𝑝
(c) When Lb > Lr (a) When Sxt Sxc, the limit state of tension flange
𝐶𝑏 𝜋 2 𝐸 yielding does not apply.
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = ≤ 𝐹𝑦 (b) When Sxt Sxc
𝐿𝑏 2 (6-35)
( )
𝑟𝑡 𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑆𝑥𝑡 (6-41)
where
Lp is defined by Eq. (6-20) 6.6—I-Shaped Members and Channels
Bent About Their Minor Axis
𝐸
𝐿𝑟 = 𝜋 𝑟𝑡 √ (6-36) This section applies to I-shaped members and
0.7𝐹𝑦 channels bent about their minor axis.
Rpg, the bending strength reduction factor is The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the
determined as follows: lower value obtained according to the limit states of
yielding (plastic moment) and flange local buckling.
𝑎𝑤 ℎ𝑐 𝐸
𝑅𝑝𝑔 = 1 − ( − 5.7√ ) ≤ 1.0 (6-37) 6.6.1 Yielding
1,200+300𝑎𝑤 𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑦

where 𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑝 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑦 ≤ 1.6𝐹𝑦 𝑆𝑦 (6-42)

aw is defined by Eq. (6-26) but shall not 6.6.2 Flange Local Buckling
exceed 10 (a) For sections with compact flanges the limit
rt is the effective radius of gyration for state of flange local buckling does not apply.
lateral buckling as defined in Section 6.4 (b) For sections with non-compact flanges
6.5.3 Compression Flange Local Buckling 𝜆 − 𝜆𝑝𝑓
𝑀𝑛 = [𝑀𝑝 − (𝑀𝑝 − 0.7𝐹𝑦 𝑆𝑦 ) ( )] (6-43)
𝜆𝑟𝑓 − 𝜆𝑝𝑓
𝑀𝑛 = 𝑅𝑝𝑔 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝑆𝑥𝑐 (6-38)
(c) For sections with slender flanges
(a) For sections with compact flanges, the limit
state of compression flange local buckling 𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝑆𝑦 (6-44)
does not apply where
(b) For sections with non-compact flanges
0.69𝐸
𝜆−𝜆𝑝𝑓 𝐹𝑐𝑟 =
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = [𝐹𝑦 − (0.3𝐹𝑦 ) (
𝜆𝑟𝑓 −𝜆𝑝𝑓
)] (6-39) 𝑏 2 (6-45)
( )
𝑡𝑓
(c) For sections with slender flanges
𝑏
𝜆=
𝑡𝑓

SBC 306-CR-18 66
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

pf = p, the limiting slenderness for a compact 𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑝 − (𝑀𝑝 −

flange, Table 2-2 𝑏 𝐹𝑦 (6-47)
𝐹𝑦 𝑆) [3.57 √ − 4.0] ≤ 𝑀𝑝
rf = r, the limiting slenderness for a non- 𝑡𝑓 𝐸

compact flange, Table 2-2 (c) For sections with slender flanges
b = for flanges of I-shaped members, half the 𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑆𝑒 (6-48)
full-flange width, bf ; for flanges of
where
channels, the full nominal dimension of the
flange, mm Se effective section modulus determined with
the effective width, be, of the compression
tf = thickness of the flange, mm
flange taken as:
Sy = elastic section modulus taken about the
y-axis, mm3; for a channel, the minimum 𝐸 0.38 𝐸
section modulus 𝑏𝑒 = 1.92𝑡𝑓 √ [1 − √ ]≤𝑏 (6-49)
𝐹𝑦 𝑏⁄𝑡𝑓 𝐹𝑦

6.7.3 Web Local Buckling

6.7—Square and Rectangular HSS and
(a) For compact sections, the limit state of web
Box-Shaped Members
local buckling does not apply
This section applies to square and rectangular (b) For sections with non-compact webs
HSS, and doubly symmetric box- shaped
members bent about either axis, having compact 𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑝 − (𝑀𝑝 −
or non-compact webs and compact, non-compact ℎ 𝐹𝑦 (6-50)
𝐹𝑦 𝑆𝑥 ) [0.305 √ − 0.738] ≤ 𝑀𝑝
or slender flanges as defined in Section 2.4.1 for 𝑡𝑓𝑤 𝐸
flexure.
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the 6.8—Round HSS
lowest value obtained according to the limit states
of yielding (plastic moment), flange local buckling This section applies to round HSS having D/t ratios
and web local buckling under pure flexure. of less than 0.45 E/ Fy.
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the
User Note: Very long rectangular HSS bent lower value obtained according to the limit states of
about the major axis are subject to lateral- yielding (plastic moment) and local buckling.
torsional buckling; however, the Code provides
no strength equation for this limit state since 6.8.1 Yielding
beam deflection will control for all reasonable 𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑝 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍 (6-51)
cases.
6.8.2 Local Buckling
6.7.1 Yielding (a) For compact sections, the limit state of flange
local buckling does not apply.
𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑝 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍 (6-46) (b) For non-compact sections

0.021𝐸
𝑀𝑛 = ( + 𝐹𝑦 ) 𝑆 (6-52)
where 𝐷
𝑡
Z plastic section modulus about the axis of (c) For sections with slender walls
bending, mm3
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝑆 (6-53)
6.7.2 Flange Local Buckling
where
(a) For compact sections, the limit state of flange
local buckling does not apply. 0.33𝐸
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = (6-54)
(b) For sections with non-compact flanges 𝐷
( )
𝑡
S = elastic section modulus, mm3

SBC 306-CR-18 67
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

t = thickness of wall, mm where

Sxc elastic section modulus referred to the
compression flange, mm3
6.9—Tees and Double Angles Loaded
in The Plane of Symmetry 𝑏𝑓
𝜆        =
This section applies to tees and double angles 2𝑡𝑓
loaded in the plane of symmetry. pf p, the limiting slenderness for a compact
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the flange, Table 2-2
lowest value obtained according to the limit states rf r, the limiting slenderness for a non-
of yielding (plastic moment), lateral-torsional compact flange, Table 2-2
buckling, flange local buckling, and local buckling
of tee stems.
6.9.1 Yielding User Note: For double angles with flange legs in
compression, Mn based on local buckling is to be
𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑝 (6-55)
determined using the provisions of Section
where 6.10.3 with b /t of the flange legs and Eq. (6-66)
as an upper limit.
(a) For stems in tension
𝑀𝑃 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 ≤ 1.6𝑀𝑦 (6-56)
(b) For stems in compression 6.9.4 Local Buckling of Tee Stems in Flexural
Compression
𝑀𝑝 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 ≤ 𝑀𝑦 (6-57)
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝑆𝑥 (6-62)
6.9.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
where
𝜋√𝐸𝐼𝑦 𝐺𝐽
𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑐𝑟 = ( 𝐵 + √1 + 𝐵2 ) (6-58) Sx elastic section modulus, mm3
𝐿𝑏
where The critical stress, Fcr, is determined as follows:

 d  Iy (a) When
𝑑
≤ 0.84√
𝐸
B   2.3   (6-59) 𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑦
 Lb  J
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 𝐹𝑦 (6-63)
The plus sign for B applies when the stem is in
tension and the minus sign applies when the stem
𝐸 𝑑 𝐸
is in compression. If the tip of the stem is in (b) When 0.84√ < ≤ 1.03√
𝐹 𝑡 𝑦 𝐹
𝑤 𝑦
compression anywhere along the unbraced length,
the negative value of B shall be used.
𝑑 𝐹𝑦
6.9.3 Flange Local Buckling of Tees 𝐹𝑐𝑟 = [2.55 − 1.84 √ ]𝐹 (6-64)
𝑡𝑤 𝐸 𝑦
(a) For sections with a compact flange in flexural
compression, the limit state of flange local (c) When
buckling does not apply.
(b) For sections with a non-compact flange in 𝑑 𝐸
> 1.03√
flexural compression 𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑦
𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑝 − (𝑀𝑝 − 0.69𝐸
𝜆−𝜆𝑝𝑓 (6-60) 𝐹𝑐𝑟 =
0.7𝐹𝑦 𝑆𝑥𝑐 ) ( ) ≤ 1.6𝑀𝑦   𝑑 2 (6-65)
𝜆𝑟𝑓 −𝜆𝑝𝑓 ( )
𝑡𝑤
(c) For sections with a slender flange in flexural
compression
User Note: For double angles with web legs in
0.7𝐸𝑆𝑥𝑐
𝑀𝑛 = compression, Mn based on local buckling is to
𝑏𝑓 2 (6-61) be determined using the provisions of Section
(2𝑡 )
𝑓

SBC 306-CR-18 68
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

6.10.3 with b /t of the web legs and Eq. (6-66) (b) When 𝑀𝑒 > 𝑀𝑦
as an upper limit.
 My 
M n  1.92  1.17  M  1.5M (6-68)
 M  y y
 e 
6.10—Single Angles
where
This section applies to single angles with and
without continuous lateral restraint along their Me, the elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, is
length. determined as follows:
Single angles with continuous lateral-torsional For bending about the major principal axis of
restraint along the length are permitted to be equal-leg angles:
designed on the basis of geometric axis (x, y)
0.46Eb2t 2C b
bending. Single angles without continuous lateral- Me  (6-69)
torsional restraint along the length shall be designed Lb
using the provisions for principal axis bending
except where the provision for bending about a For bending about the major principal axis of
geometric axis is permitted. unequal-leg angles:
If the moment resultant has components about both  2 
4.9 EI z C b   Lb t  
principal axes, with or without axial load, or the Me  
 w
2
 0 .052
 
   w  (6-70)
2
moment is about one principal axis and there is axial Lb   rz  
 
load, the combined stress ratio shall be determined
using the provisions of Section 8.2. where
Cb is computed using Eq. (6-1) with a
User Note: For geometric axis design, use
section properties computed about the x- and y- maximum value of 1.5
axis of the angle, parallel and perpendicular to the Lb = laterally unbraced length of member, mm
legs. For principal axis design, use section
properties computed about the major and minor Iz = minor principal axis moment of inertia,
principal axes of the angle. mm4
rz = radius of gyration about the minor
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the principal axis, mm
lowest value obtained according to the limit states
of yielding (plastic moment), lateral-torsional t = thickness of angle leg, mm
buckling, and leg local buckling. w = section property for unequal leg angles,
positive for short legs in compression and
User Note: For bending about the minor axis, negative for long legs in compression. If
only the limit states of yielding and leg local the long leg is in compression anywhere
buckling apply. along the unbraced length of the member,
the negative value of w shall be used.
6.10.1 Yielding
𝑀𝑛 = 1.5𝑀𝑦 (6-66) User Note: The equation for w and values for
common angle sizes are listed in the
where Commentary.
My = yield moment about the axis of bending,
N-mm For bending moment about one of the
geometric axes of an equal-leg angle with
6.10.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling. For single no axial compression
angles without continuous lateral-torsional restraint
along the length (a) And with no lateral-torsional restraint:

(a) When 𝑀𝑒 ≤ 𝑀𝑦 With maximum compression at the

toe
0.17𝑀𝑒
𝑀𝑛 = (0.92 − ) 𝑀𝑒 (6-67)
𝑀𝑦

SBC 306-CR-18 69
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

 2 
0.66 Eb 4 t C b   Lb t  
Me   1  0 . 78   1  (6-71)
L2b  b 
2
 6.11—Rectangular Bars and Rounds
 
This section applies to rectangular bars bent about
With maximum tension at the toe either geometric axis and rounds. The nominal
 2  flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower value
0.66 Eb 4 t C b   Lb t  
Me   1  0 . 78   1  (6-72) obtained according to the limit states of yielding
2
Lb  b 
2
 (plastic moment) and lateral-torsional buckling.
 
𝐿𝑏  𝑑
My shall be taken as 0.80 times the yield moment 6.11.1 Yielding. For rectangular with ≤
𝑡2
calculated using the geometric section modulus. 0.08𝐸
bent about their major axis, rectangular bars
𝐹𝑦
where bent about their minor axis and rounds:
b full width of leg in compression, mm
𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑝 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍 ≤ 1.6𝑀𝑦 (6-76)
User Note: Mn may be taken as My for single 6.11.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
angles with their vertical leg toe in compression,
(a) For rectangular bars with
and having a span-to-depth ratio less than or
0.08𝐸 𝐿𝑏 𝑑 1.9𝐸
equal to < ≤ bent about their major axis:
𝐹𝑦 𝑡2 𝐹𝑦

1.64𝐸 𝑡 2 𝐹 𝐿𝑏 𝑑 𝐹𝑦
√( ) − 1.4 𝑦 𝑀𝑛 = 𝐶𝑏 [1.52 − 0.274 ( 2 ) ] 𝑀𝑦 ≤ 𝑀𝑝
𝐹𝑦 𝑏 𝐸 𝑡 𝐸 (6-77)

(b) and with lateral-torsional restraint at the point of 𝐿𝑏 𝑑 1.9𝐸

maximum moment only: (b) For rectangular bars with > bent about
𝑡2 𝐹𝑦
Me shall be taken as 1.25 times Me computed their major axis:
using Eq. (6-71) or (6-72). 𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝑆𝑥 ≤ 𝑀𝑝 (6-78)
My shall be taken as the yield moment calculated where
using the geometric section modulus.
1.9𝐸𝐶𝑏
6.10.3 Leg Local Buckling. The limit state of leg 𝐹𝑐𝑟 =
𝐿𝑏 𝑑
local buckling applies when the toe of the leg is in 𝑡2
compression.
Lb = length between points that are either
(a) For compact sections, the limit state of leg local braced against lateral displacement of the
buckling does not apply. compression region, or between points
(b) For sections with non-compact legs: braced to prevent twist of the cross section,
mm
𝑏 𝐹𝑦
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑆𝑐 (2.43 − 1.72 ( ) √ ) (6-73) d = depth of rectangular bar, mm
𝑡 𝐸

(c) For sections with slender legs: t = width of rectangular bar parallel to axis of
bending, mm
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝑆𝑐 (6-74)
(c) For rounds and rectangular bars bent
where
about their minor axis, the limit state of
0.71𝐸 lateral-torsional buckling need not be
𝐹𝑐𝑟 =
𝑏 2 (6-75) considered.
( )
𝑡
Sc = elastic section modulus to the toe in 6.12—Unsymmetrical Shapes
compression relative to the axis of bending,
mm3. For bending about one of the geometric This section applies to all unsymmetrical shapes,
axes of an equal-leg angle with no lateral- except single angles.
torsional restraint, Sc shall be 0.80 of the
geometric axis section modulus

SBC 306-CR-18 70
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑓𝑛

𝑀𝑛 = 𝑆 (6-83)
lowest value obtained according to the limit states 𝐴𝑓𝑔 𝑥
of yielding (yield moment), lateral-torsional
buckling, and local buckling where where
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑛  𝑆𝑚𝑖𝑛 (6-79) Afg gross area of tension flange, calculated in
accordance with the provisions of Section
where
2.4.3a, mm2
Smin = lowest elastic section modulus relative to
Afn net area of tension flange, calculated in
the axis of bending, mm3
accordance with the provisions of
6.12.1 Yielding Section 2.4.3b, mm2
𝐹𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 (6-80) Yt 1.0 for Fy /Fu 0.8
 1.1 otherwise
6.12.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling 6.13.2 Proportioning Limits for I-Shaped
𝐹𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 ≤ 𝐹𝑦 (6-81) Members. Singly symmetric I-shaped members
shall satisfy the following limit:
where
𝐼𝑦𝑐
Fcr = lateral-torsional buckling stress for the 0.1 ≤ ≤ 0.9 (6-84)
𝐼𝑦
section as determined by analysis, MPa
I-shaped members with slender webs shall also
User Note: In the case of Z-shaped members, it satisfy the following limits:
is recommended that Fcr be taken as 0.5Fcr of a 𝑎
channel with the same flange and web properties. (a) When ≤ 1.5
ℎ

6.12.3 Local Buckling ℎ 𝐸

( )√ (6-85)
𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑦
𝐹𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 ≤ 𝐹𝑦 (6-82) 𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝑎
Where (b) When > 1.5
ℎ
Fcr = local buckling stress for the section as ℎ 0.40𝐸
( ) (6-86)
determined by analysis, MPa 𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑦 𝑚𝑎𝑥
where
6.13—Proportions of Beams and a = clear distance between transverse stiffeners,
Girders mm
6.13.1 Strength Reductions for Members with In unstiffened girders h/ tw shall not exceed 260. The
Holes in the Tension Flange. This section applies ratio of the web area to the compression flange area
to rolled or built-up shapes and cover-plated beams shall not exceed 10.
with holes, proportioned on the basis of flexural
strength of the gross section. 6.13.3 Cover Plates. Flanges of welded beams or
girders may be varied in thickness or width by
In addition to the limit states specified in other splicing a series of plates or by the use of cover
sections of this Chapter, the nominal flexural plates.
strength, Mn, shall be limited according to the limit
state of tensile rupture of the tension flange. The total cross-sectional area of cover plates of
bolted girders shall not exceed 70% of the total
(a) When FuAfn Yt Fy Afg, the limit state of tensile flange area.
rupture does not apply.
High-strength bolts or welds connecting flange to
(b) When Fu Afn Yt Fy Afg, the nominal flexural web, or cover plate to flange, shall be proportioned
strength, Mn, at the location of the holes in the to resist the total horizontal shear resulting from the
tension flange shall not be taken greater than bending forces on the girder. The longitudinal

SBC 306-CR-18 71
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

distribution of these bolts or intermittent welds unbraced length, Lb, of the compression flange
shall be in proportion to the intensity of the shear. adjacent to the redistributed end moment locations
However, the longitudinal spacing shall not exceed shall not exceed Lm determined as follows.
the maximum specified for compression or tension (a) For doubly symmetric and singly symmetric I-
members in Section 5.6 or 4.4, respectively. Bolts shaped beams with the compression flange
or welds connecting flange to web shall also be equal to or larger than the tension flange
proportioned to transmit to the web any loads loaded in the plane of the web:
applied directly to the flange, unless provision is 𝑀1 𝐸
made to transmit such loads by direct bearing. 𝐿𝑚 = [0.12 + 0.076  ( )] ( ) 𝑟𝑦 (6-90)
𝑀2 𝐹𝑦
Partial-length cover plates shall be extended
(b) For solid rectangular bars and symmetric box
beyond the theoretical cutoff point and the
beams bent about their major axis:
extended portion shall be attached to the beam or
𝑀 𝐸
girder by high-strength bolts in a slip-critical 𝐿𝑚 = [0.17 + 0.10  ( 1 )] ( ) 𝑟𝑦 ≥
𝑀2 𝐹𝑦
connection or fillet welds. The attachment shall be (6-91)
𝐸
adequate, at the applicable strength given in 0.10 ( ) 𝑟𝑦
𝐹𝑦
Sections 10.2.2 , 10.3.8 or 2.3.10 to develop the
cover plate’s portion of the flexural strength in the where
beam or girder at the theoretical cut-off point.
Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the
For welded cover plates, the welds connecting the compression flange, MPa
cover plate termination to the beam or girder shall
have continuous welds along both edges of the cover M1 = smaller moment at end of unbraced length,
plate in the length a, defined below, and shall be N-mm
adequate to develop the cover plate’s portion of the M2 = larger moment at end of unbraced length,
design strength of the beam or girder at the distance N-mm
afrom the end of the cover plate.
ry = radius of gyration about y-axis, mm
(a) When there is a continuous weld equal to or
larger than three-fourths of the plate thickness (M1 /M2) is positive when moments cause reverse
across the end of the plate curvature and negative for single curvature
𝑎′ = 𝑤 (6-87) There is no limit on Lb for members with round or
square cross sections or for any beam bent about
where its minor axis.
w width of cover plate, mm
(b) When there is a continuous weld smaller than
three-fourths of the plate thickness across the
end of the plate
𝑎′ = 1.5𝑤 (6-88)
(c) When there is no weld across the end of the
plate
𝑎′ = 2𝑤 (6-89)
6.13.4 Built-Up Beams. Where two or more
beams or channels are used side-by-side to form a
flexural member, they shall be connected together
in compliance with Section 5.6. When concentrated
loads are carried from one beam to another or
distributed between the beams, diaphragms having
sufficient stiffness to distribute the load shall be
welded or bolted between the beams.
6.13.5 Unbraced Length for Moment
Redistribution.. For moment redistribution in
beams according to Section 2.3.6 , the laterally

SBC 306-CR-18 72
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

TABLES AND FIGURES OF CHAPTER 6

Table 6-1 : Selection Table for the Application of Chapter 6 Sections

Section in Flange
Cross Section Web Slenderness Limit States
Chapter 6 Slenderness

6.2 C C Y, LTB

6.3 NC, S C LTB, FLB

Y, LTB,
6.4 C, NC, S C, NC
FLB, TFY

Y, LTB,
6.5 C, NC, S S
FLB, TFY

6.6 C, NC, S N/A Y, FLB

6.7 C, NC, S C, NC Y, FLB, WLB

6.8 N/A N/A Y, LB

6.9 C, NC, S N/A Y, LTB, FLB

6.10 N/A N/A Y, LTB, LLB

6.11 N/A N/A Y, LTB

Unsymmetrical shapes, other than

6.12 N/A N/A All limit states
single angles
Y = yielding, LTB = lateral-torsional buckling, FLB = flange local buckling, WLB = web local buckling, TFY =
tension flange yielding, LLB = leg local buckling, LB = local buckling, C = compact, NC = non-compact, S = slender

SBC 306-CR-18 73
CHAPTER 6—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 74
CHAPTER 7—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR

CHAPTER 7—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR

This chapter addresses webs of singly or doubly 7.2—Members with Unstiffened or

symmetric members subject to shear in the plane of Stiffened Webs
the web, single angles and HSS sections, and shear
in the weak direction of singly or doubly symmetric 7.2.1 Shear Strength. This section applies to
shapes. webs of singly or doubly symmetric members and
channels subject to shear in the plane of the web.
The chapter is organized as follows:
The nominal shear strength, Vn, of unstiffened or
7.1 —General Provisions stiffened webs according to the limit states of shear
7.2 —Members with Unstiffened or Stiffened yielding and shear buckling, is
Webs
𝑉𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑤 𝐶𝑣 (7-1)
7.3 —Tension Field Action
7.4 —Single Angles (a) For members of rolled I-shaped members with
ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 ≤ 2.24√𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 :
7.5 —Rectangular HSS and Box-Shaped
Members 𝜑𝑣 = 1.00
𝐶𝑣 = 1.00 (7-2)
7.6 —Round HSS
(b) For webs of all doubly symmetric shapes and
7.7 —Weak Axis Shear in Doubly Symmetric singly symmetric shapes and channels, except
and Singly Symmetric Shapes round HSS, the web shear coefficient, Cv, is
7.8 —Beams and Girders with Web Openings determined as follows:
When

User Note: For cases not included in this ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 ≤ 1.10√𝑘𝑣 𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦
chapter, the following sections apply:
𝐶𝑣 = 1.00 (7-3)
8.3.3 Unsymmetric sections
When
10.4.2 Shear strength of connecting elements
1.10√𝑘𝑣 𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 ≤ ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 ≤ 1.37√𝑘𝑣 𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦
10.10.6 Web panel zone shear
1.10√𝑘𝑣 𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦
𝐶𝑣 = (7-4)
ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤
7.1—General Provisions
When
Two methods of calculating shear strength are
presented below. The method presented in Section ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 > 1.37√𝑘𝑣 𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦
7.2 does not utilize the post buckling strength of
the member (tension field action). The method 1.51 𝐸 𝑘𝑣
presented in Section 7.3 utilizes tension field 𝐶𝑣 = (7-5)
(ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 )2 𝐹𝑦
action.
where
The design shear strength, ϕvVn, shall be
determined as follows: Aw = area of web, the overall depth times the web
thickness, 𝑑𝑡𝑤 , mm2
For all provisions in this chapter
h = for rolled shapes, the clear distance between
𝜑𝑣 = 0.90
flanges less the fillet or corner radii, mm
= for built-up welded sections, the clear
distance between flanges, mm

SBC 306-CR-18 75
CHAPTER 7—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR

= for built-up bolted sections, the distance thickness from the near toe to the web-to-flange
between fastener lines, mm weld. When single stiffeners are used, they shall
be attached to the compression flange, if it
= for tees, the overall depth, mm
consists of a rectangular plate, to resist any uplift
tw = thickness of web, mm tendency due to torsion in the flange.
The web plate shear buckling coefficient, kv, is Bolts connecting stiffeners to the girder web shall
determined as follows: be spaced not more than 300 mm on center. If
intermittent fillet welds are used, the clear
For webs without transverse stiffeners and distance between welds shall not be more than 16
with ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 < 260: times the web thickness nor more than 250 mm.
𝑘𝑣 = 5 7.3—Tension Field Action
except for the stem of tee shapes 7.3.1 Limits on the Use of Tension Field
where Action. Consideration of tension field action is
permitted for flanged members when the web plate
𝑘𝑣 = 1.2. is supported on all four sides by flanges or
For webs with transverse stiffeners: stiffeners. Consideration of tension field action is
not permitted:
5
𝑘𝑣 = 5 + (7-6) (a) for end panels in all members with transverse
(𝑎⁄ℎ)2
stiffeners;
260 2
= 5 when 𝑎⁄ℎ > 3.0 or 𝑎⁄ℎ > [(ℎ⁄ ] (b) when a/h exceeds 3.0 or [260⁄(ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 )] 2 ;
𝑡𝑤 )
(c) when 2𝐴𝑤 ⁄(𝐴𝑓𝑐 + 𝐴𝑓𝑡 ) > 2.5; or
where
(d) when ℎ⁄𝑏𝑓𝑐 or ℎ⁄𝑏𝑓𝑡 > 6.0
a clear distance between transverse
stiffeners, mm where

7.2.2 Transverse Stiffeners. Transverse Afc = area of compression flange, mm2

stiffeners are not required where
Aft = area of tension flange, mm2
ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 ≤ 2.46√𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 , or where the design shear
strength provided in accordance with Section 7.2.1 bfc = width of compression flange, mm
for 𝑘𝑣 = 5 is greater than the required shear
strength. bft = width of tension flange, mm
The moment of inertia, Ist, of transverse stiffeners In these cases, the nominal shear strength, Vn, shall
used to develop the design web shear strength, as be determined according to the provisions of
provided in Section 7.2.1 , about an axis in the web Section 7.2.
center for stiffener pairs or about the face in contact
7.3.2 Shear Strength with Tension Field
with the web plate for single stiffeners, shall meet
Action. When tension field action is permitted
the following requirement
according to Section 7.3.1 , the nominal shear
3 strength, Vn, with tension field action, according
𝐼𝑠𝑡 ≥ 𝑏𝑡𝑤 𝑗 (7-7)
where to the limit state of tension field yielding, shall be

2.5
𝑗= − 2 ≥ 0.5 (7-8)
𝑎 2 (a) When ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 ≤ 1.10√𝑘𝑣 𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦
( )
ℎ
𝑉𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑤 (7-9)
and b is the smaller of the dimensions a and h
(b) When ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 > 1.10√𝑘𝑣 𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦
Transverse stiffeners are permitted to be stopped
short of the tension flange, provided bearing is not 1 − 𝐶𝑣
needed to transmit a concentrated load or reaction. 𝑉𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑤 𝐶𝑣 + (7-10)
The weld by which transverse stiffeners are 𝑎 2
1.15√1 + ( ) )
attached to the web shall be terminated not less ( ℎ
than four times nor more than six times the web where

SBC 306-CR-18 76
CHAPTER 7—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR

kv and Cv are as defined in Section 7.2.1

7.3.3 Transverse Stiffeners. Transverse 7.4—Single Angles
stiffeners subject to tension field action shall meet
The nominal shear strength, Vn, of a single angle
the requirements of Section 7.2.2 and the
following limitations: leg shall be determined using Eq. (7-1) and
Section 7.2.1 (b) with 𝐴𝑤 = 𝑏𝑡
𝐸
(1) (𝑏⁄𝑡)𝑠𝑡 ≤ 0.56√𝐹 (7-11) where
𝑦𝑠𝑡

b width of the leg resisting the shear force, mm

𝑉𝑟 −𝑉𝑐1 (7-12)
(2) 𝐼𝑠𝑡 ≥ 𝐼𝑠𝑡1 + (𝐼𝑠𝑡2 − 𝐼𝑠𝑡1 ) [𝑉 ] t thickness of angle leg, mm
𝑐2 −𝑉𝑐1

where ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤      = 𝑏⁄𝑡

(b/t)st width-to-thickness ratio of the stiffener 𝑘𝑣        = 1.2

Fyst specified minimum yield stress of the 7.5—Rectangular HSS and Box-Shaped
Members
stiffener material, MPa
The nominal shear strength, Vn, of rectangular HSS
Ist moment of inertia of the transverse
and box members shall be determined using the
stiffeners about an axis in the web center for provisions of Section 7.2.1 with 𝐴𝑤 = 2ℎ𝑡
stiffener pairs, or about the face in contact
with the web plate for single stiffeners, mm4 where

Ist1 minimum moment of inertia of the h width resisting the shear force, taken as the
clear distance between the flanges less the
transverse stiffeners required for inside corner radius on each side, mm
development of the web shear buckling
resistance in Section 7.2.2 , mm4 t design wall thickness, equal to 0.93 times the
nominal wall thickness for electric resistance-
ℎ4 𝜌𝑠𝑡
1.3 𝐹
𝑦𝑤
1.5 welded (ERW) HSS and equal to the nominal
𝐼𝑠𝑡1 = ( ) (7-13) thickness for submerged-arc-welded (SAW)
40 𝐸
HSS, mm
Ist2 minimum moment of inertia of the
𝑡𝑤    = 𝑡, mm
transverse stiffeners required for
development of the full web shear buckling 𝑘𝑣    = 5
plus the web tension field resistance, Vr = Vc2 If the corner radius is not known, h shall be
, mm4 taken as the corresponding outside dimension
minus 3 times the thickness.
2.5 3 3
𝐼𝑠𝑡2 = [(𝑎⁄ − 2] 𝑏𝑝 𝑡𝑤 ≥ 0.5𝑏𝑝 𝑡𝑤 (7-14) 7.6—Round HSS
ℎ)2
The nominal shear strength, Vn, of round HSS,
Vr larger of the required shear strengths in the
according to the limit states of shear yielding and
adjacent web panels, N shear buckling, shall be determined as:
Vc1 smaller of the design shear strengths in the
𝑉𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝐴𝑔 ⁄2 (7-15)
adjacent web panels with Vn as defined in
Section 7.2.1 , N where
Vc2 smaller of the design shear strengths in the Fcr shall be the larger of
adjacent web panels with Vn as defined
in Section 7.3.2 , N 1.60𝐸
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 5
st the larger of 𝐹𝑦𝑤 ⁄𝐹𝑦𝑠𝑡 and 1.0 (7-16)
√𝐿𝑣 (𝐷)
4
𝐷 𝑡
Fyw specified minimum yield stress of the web
material, MPa and

SBC 306-CR-18 77
CHAPTER 7—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR

0.78𝐸
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 3
𝐷 2 (7-17)
( )
𝑡

but shall not exceed 0.6Fy

Ag gross cross-sectional area of member, mm2

D outside diameter, mm
Lv distance from maximum to zero shear
force, mm
t design wall thickness, equal to 0.93 times
the nominal wall thickness for ERW HSS
and equal to the nominal thickness for SAW
HSS, mm

User Note: The shear buckling equations, Eq.

(7-16) and (7-17), will control for D/t over 100,
high-strength steels, and long lengths. For
standard sections, shear yielding will usually
control.

7.7—Weak Axis Shear in Doubly

Symmetric and Singly Symmetric
Shapes
For doubly and singly symmetric shapes loaded in
the weak axis without torsion, the nominal shear
strength, Vn, for each shear resisting element
shall be determined using Eq. (7-1) and Section
7.2.1 (b) with ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 = 𝑏𝑓 ⁄𝑡𝑓 , 𝑘𝑣 = 1.2, and b
for flanges of I-shaped members, half the full-
flange width, bf ; for flanges of channels, the full
nominal dimension of the flange, mm
7.8—Beams and Girders with Web
Openings
The effect of all web openings on the shear
strength of steel and composite beams shall be
determined. Adequate reinforcement shall be
provided when the required strength exceeds the
design strength of the member at the opening.

SBC 306-CR-18 78
CHAPTER 7—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 79
CHAPTER 8—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION

CHAPTER 8—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES

AND TORSION

This chapter addresses members subject to axial 𝑃𝑟

< 0.2
force and flexure about one or both axes, with or 𝑃𝑐
without torsion, and members subject to torsion 𝑃𝑟 𝑀𝑟𝑥 𝑀𝑟𝑦
only. +( + ) ≤ 1.0 (8-2)
2𝑃𝑐 𝑀𝑐𝑥 𝑀𝑐𝑦
The chapter is organized as follows:
where
8.1 —Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members
Subject to Flexure and Axial Force Pr = required axial strength, N
8.2 —Unsymmetric and Other Members Subject Pc = 𝜑𝑐 𝑃𝑛 = design axial strength, determined in
to Flexure and Axial Force accordance with Chapter 5, N
8.3 —Members Subject to Torsion and Mr = required flexural strength, N-mm
Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear and/or
Axial Force Mc =𝜑𝑏 𝑀𝑛 = design flexural strength, determined
in accordance with Chapter 6, N-mm
8.4 Rupture of Flanges with Holes Subject to
Tension x = subscript relating symbol to strong axis
bending
y = subscript relating symbol to weak axis
User Note: For composite members, see bending
Chapter 9. 𝜑𝑐 = resistance factor for compression = 0.85
𝜑𝑏 = resistance factor for flexure = 0.9
8.1—Doubly and Singly Symmetric 8.1.2 Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members
Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Subject to Flexure and Tension. The interaction
Force of flexure and tension in doubly symmetric
members and singly symmetric members
8.1.1 Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members constrained to bend about a geometric axis (x
Subject to Flexure and Compression. The and/or y) shall be limited by Eqs. (8-1) and (8-2),
interaction of flexure and compression in doubly
symmetric members and singly symmetric where
members for which 0.1 ≤ (𝐼𝑦𝑐 ⁄𝐼𝑦 ) ≤ 0.9, Pr = required axial strength, N
constrained to bend about a geometric axis (x and/or
y) shall be limited by Eqs. (8-1) and (8-2), where Iyc Pc =  t P n = design axial strength, determined
is the moment of inertia of the compression flange in accordance with Section 4.2, N
about the y-axis. Mr = required flexural strength, N-mm
User Note: Section 8.2 is permitted to be used Mc =  b M n = design flexural strength,
in lieu of the provisions of this section. determined in accordance with Chapter 6,
(a) When N-mm

𝑃𝑟 𝜑𝑡 =resistance factor for tension (see Section

≥ 0.2 4.2)
𝑃𝑐
𝑃𝑟 8 𝑀𝑟𝑥 𝑀𝑟𝑦 𝜑𝑏 = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90
+ ( + ) ≤ 1.0 (8-1)
𝑃𝑐 9 𝑀𝑐𝑥 𝑀𝑐𝑦
(b) When

SBC 306-CR-18 80
CHAPTER 8—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION

For doubly symmetric members, Cb in Chapter 6 is permitted to use the provisions of this Section for
𝑃𝑟 any shape in lieu of the provisions of Section 8.1.
may be multiplied by √1 +
𝑃𝑒𝑦
𝑓𝑟𝑎 𝑓𝑟𝑏𝑤 𝑓𝑟𝑏𝑧
| + + | ≤ 1.0 (8-4)
Where 𝐹𝑐𝑎 𝐹𝑐𝑏𝑤 𝐹𝑐𝑏𝑧
𝜋 2 𝐸𝐼𝑦 where
𝑃𝑒𝑦 =
𝐿2𝑏 fra = required axial stress at the point of
A more detailed analysis of the interaction of consideration, MPa
flexure and tension is permitted in lieu of Eqs. (8-1) Fca = design axial stress at the point of
and (8-2). consideration, determined in accordance
8.1.3 Doubly Symmetric Rolled Compact with Chapter 5 for compression (𝜑𝑐 Fcr), or
Members Subject to Single Axis Flexure and Section 4.2 for tension (𝜑𝑡 Fcr), MPa
Compression. For doubly symmetric rolled frbw , frbz = required flexural stress at the point of
compact members with (𝐾𝐿)𝑧 ≤ (𝐾𝐿)𝑦 subjected
consideration, MPa
to flexure and compression with moments primarily
𝜑 𝑀
about their major axis, it is permissible to consider 𝐹𝑐𝑏𝑤 , 𝐹𝑐𝑏𝑧 = 𝑏 𝑛 = design flexural stress at the
𝑆
the two independent limit states, in-plane point of consideration, determined in
instability and out-of-plane buckling or lateral- accordance with Chapter 6, MPa
torsional buckling, separately in lieu of the
combined approach provided in Section 8.1.1 . w = subscript relating symbol to major principal
axis bending
For members with𝑀𝑟𝑦 ⁄𝑀𝑐𝑦 ≥ 0.05, the provisions
of Section 8.1.1 shall be followed. z = subscript relating symbol to minor principal
axis bending
 For the limit state of in-plane instability,
Eq. (8-1) shall be used with Pc, Mrx and 𝜑𝑏 = resistance factor for flexure = 0.9
Mcx determined in the plane of bending. 𝜑𝑐 = resistance factor for compression = 0.85
 For the limit state of out-of-plane buckling 𝜑𝑡 = resistance factor for tension (Section 4.2)
and lateral-torsional buckling: Eq. (8-4) shall be evaluated using the principal
2 bending axes by considering the sense of the
𝑃𝑟 𝑃𝑟 𝑀𝑟𝑥
(1.5 − 0.5 ) + ( ) ≤ 1.0 (8-3) flexural stresses at the critical points of the cross
𝑃𝑐𝑦 𝑃𝑐𝑦 𝐶𝑏 𝑀𝑐𝑥
section. The flexural terms are either added to or
where subtracted from the axial term as appropriate. When
the axial force is compression, second order effects
Pcy = design compressive strength out of the plane
shall be included according to the provisions of
of bending, N Chapter 3.
Cb =lateral-torsional buckling modification factor A more detailed analysis of the interaction of
determined from Section 6.1 flexure and tension is permitted in lieu of Eq. (8-4).
Mcx = design lateral-torsional strength for strong
axis flexure determined in accordance with
Chapter 6 using𝐶𝑏 = 1.0, N-mm 8.3—Members Subject to Torsion and
Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear
User Note: In Eq.(8-3), 𝐶𝑏 𝑀𝑐𝑥 may be larger and/or Axial Force
than 𝜑𝑏 Mpx. The yielding resistance of the 8.3.1 Round and Rectangular HSS Subject to
beam-column is cap tured by Eq. (8-1). Torsion. The design torsional strength, 𝜑 𝑇 𝑇𝑛 , for
round and rectangular HSS according to the limit
states of torsional yielding and torsional buckling
8.2—Unsymmetric and Other Members shall be determined as follows:
Subject to Flexure a n d Axial Force
𝜑 𝑇 = 0.90
This section addresses the interaction of flexure and
axial stress for shapes not covered in Section 8.1. It 𝑇𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝐶 (8-5)

SBC 306-CR-18 81
CHAPTER 8—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION

where
User Note: the torsional constant, C may be
C is the HSS torsional constant conservatively taken as :
The critical stress, Fcr, shall be determined as 𝜋(𝐷−𝑡)2 𝑡
For round HSS : 𝐶 =
follows: 2

For rectangular HSS: 𝐶 = 2(𝐵 − 𝑡) (𝐻 −

(a) For round HSS, Fcr shall be the larger of
𝑡) 𝑡 − 4.5(4 − 𝜋) 𝑡 3
1.23𝐸
(i) 𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 5
𝐿 𝐷 (8-6) 8.3.2 HSS Subject to Combined Torsion,
√ ( )4
𝐷 𝑡
Shear, Flexure and Axial Force. When the
and required torsional strength, Tr, is less than or equal
0.6𝐸 to 20% of the design torsional strength, Tc, the
(ii) 𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 3
𝐷 (8-7) interaction of torsion, shear, flexure and/or axial
( 𝑡 )2
force for HSS shall be determined by Section 8.1
but shall not exceed 0.6𝐹𝑦 , and the torsional effects shall be neglected. When
Tr exceeds 20% of Tc, the interaction of torsion,
where shear, flexure and/or axial force shall be limited, at
L = length of the member, mm the point of consideration, by
D = outside diameter, mm 𝑃𝑟 𝑀𝑟 𝑉𝑟 𝑇𝑟 2
( + ) + ( + ) ≤ 1.0 (8-11)
(b) For rectangular HSS 𝑃𝑐 𝑀𝑐 𝑉𝑐 𝑇𝑐

When where
Pr = required axial strength , N
ℎ 𝐸
≤ 2.45√ Pc =𝜑 𝑃𝑛 = design tensile or compressive
𝑡 𝐹𝑦
strength in accordance with Chapter 4 or
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 (8-8) Chapter 5, N

When Mr = required flexural strength N-mm

Mc = 𝜑𝑏 𝑀𝑛 = design flexural strength in
𝐸 ℎ 𝐸
2.45√ < ≤ 3.07√ accordance with Chapter 6, N - mm
𝐹𝑦 𝑡 𝐹𝑦
Vr = required shear strength, N

0.6𝐹𝑦 (2.45√𝐸⁄𝐹 ) Vc = 𝜑𝑣 𝑉𝑛 = design shear strength in accordance

𝑦 with Chapter 7, N
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = (8-9)
ℎ
( ) Tr = required torsional strength, N-mm
𝑡
When Tc = 𝜑 𝑇 𝑇𝑛 = design torsional strength in
accordance with Section 8.3.1 , N-mm
𝐸 ℎ
3.07√ < ≤ 260 8.3.3 Non-HSS Members Subject to Torsion
𝐹𝑦 𝑡 and Combined Stress. The design torsional
strength for non-HSS members shall be the lowest
0.458 𝜋 2 𝐸 value obtained according to the limit states of
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = (8-10)
ℎ 2 yielding under normal stress, shear yielding under
( )
𝑡 shear stress, or buckling, determined as follows:
where 𝜑 𝑇 = 0.90
h = flat width of longer side as defined in Section (a) For the limit state of yielding under normal
2.4.1 b(4), mm stress
t = design wall thickness defined in Section 2.4.2 𝐹𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 (8-12)
, mm (b) For the limit state of shear yielding under shear
stress

SBC 306-CR-18 82
CHAPTER 8—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION

𝐹𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 (8-13)
(c) For the limit state of buckling
𝐹𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 (8-14)
where
Fcr = buckling stress for the section as determined
by analysis, MPa
Some constrained local yielding is permitted
adjacent to areas that remain elastic.

8.4Rupture of Flanges with Holes

Subject to Tension
At locations of bolt holes in flanges subject to
tension under combined axial force and major axis
flexure, flange tensile rupture strength shall be
limited by Eq. (8-15). Each flange subject to
tension due to axial force and flexure shall be
checked separately.
𝑃𝑟 𝑀𝑟𝑥
+ ≤ 1.0 (8-15)
𝑃𝑐 𝑀𝑐𝑥
where
Pr = required axial strength of the member at the
location of the bolt holes, positive in tension,
negative in compression, N
Pc = 𝜑𝑡 𝑃𝑛 = design axial strength for the limit
state of tensile rupture of the net section at
the location of bolt holes, determined in
accordance with Section 4.2(b), N
Mrx = required flexural strength at the location
of the bolt holes; positive for tension in
the flange under consideration, negative for
compression, N-mm
Mcx = 𝜑𝑏 𝑀𝑛 = design flexural strength about x-
axis for the limit state of tensile rupture of
the flange, determined according to Section
6.13.1 . When the limit state of tensile
rupture in flexure does not apply, use the
plastic bending moment, Mp, determined
with bolt holes not taken into consideration,
N-mm
𝜑𝑏 = resistance factor for tensile rupture = 0.75
𝜑𝑡 = resistance factor for flexure = 0.9

SBC 306-CR-18 83
CHAPTER 8—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 84
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

(b) Concrete and steel reinforcement material

This chapter addresses composite members
limitations shall be as specified in Section
composed of rolled or built-up structural steel
9.1.3 .
shapes or HSS and structural concrete acting
together, and steel beams supporting a reinforced (c) Transverse reinforcement limitations shall be as
concrete slab so interconnected that the beams and specified in Section 9.2.1.1 (2), in addition to
the slab act together to resist bending. Simple and those specified in SBC 304.
continuous composite beams with steel headed (d) The minimum longitudinal reinforcing ratio
stud anchors, concrete-encased, and concrete filled for encased composite members shall be as
beams, constructed with or without temporary specified in Section 9.2.1.1 (3).
shores, are included.
User Note: It is the intent of the Code that
The chapter is organized as follows: the concrete and reinforcing steel portions of
9.1 —General Provisions composite concrete members be detailed
utilizing the non-composite provisions of ACI
9.2 —Axial Force 318 as modified by the Code. All requirements
9.3 —Flexure specific to composite members are covered in
the Code.
9.4 —Shear
9.5 —Combined Flexure and Axial Force 9.1.2 Nominal Strength of Composite
Sections. The nominal strength of composite
9.6 —Load Transfer sections shall be determined in accordance with the
9.7 —Composite Diaphragms and Collector plastic stress distribution method or the strain
Beams compatibility method as defined in this section.
9.8 —Steel Anchors The tensile strength of the concrete shall be
neglected in the determination of the nominal
9.9 —Special Cases
strength of composite members.
Local buckling effects shall be considered for filled
9.1—General Provisions composite members as defined in Section 9.1.4 .
Local buckling effects need not be considered for
In determining load effects in members and encased composite members.
connections of a structure that includes composite
members, consideration shall be given to the 9.1.2.1 Plastic Stress Distribution Method. For
effective sections at the time each increment of load the plastic stress distribution method, the nominal
is applied. strength shall be computed assuming that steel
components have reached a stress of Fy in either
9.1.1 Concrete and Steel Reinforcement. The
tension or compression and concrete components
design, detailing and material properties related to
in compression due to axial force and/or flexure
the concrete and reinforcing steel portions of
composite construction shall comply with the have reached a stress of 0.85𝑓𝑐′ . For round HSS
reinforced concrete and reinforcing bar design filled with concrete, a stress of 0.95 𝑓𝑐′ is permitted
specifications stipulated by the applicable building to be used for concrete components in
code. Additionally, the provisions in SBC 304 compression due to axial force and/or flexure to
shall apply with the following exceptions and account for the effects of concrete confinement.
limitations: 9.1.2.2 Strain Compatibility Method. For the
(a) SBC 304 Sections 7.8.2 and 10.13, and strain compatibility method, a linear distribution of
Chapter 21 shall be excluded in their entirety. strains across the section shall be assumed, with
the maximum concrete compressive strain equal
to 0.003 mm/mm. The stress-strain relationships

SBC 306-CR-18 85
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

for steel and concrete shall be obtained from tests thickness ratio of its compression steel elements
or from published results for similar materials. shall not exceed the limiting width-to-thickness
ratio, λp, from
User Note: The strain compatibility method
should be used to determine nominal strength Table 9-2. If the maximum width-to-thickness ratio
for irregular sections and for cases where of one or more steel compression elements exceeds
the steel does not exhibit elasto-plastic λp, but does not exceed λr from
behavior. General guidelines for the strain Table 9-2, the section is noncompact. If the width-
compatibility method for encased members to-thickness ratio of any steel element exceeds λr,
subjected to axial load, flexure or both are the section is slender. The maximum permitted
given in AISC (2003) Design Guide 6 and width-to-thickness ratio shall be as specified in the
SBC 304. table.
9.1.3 Material Limitations. For concrete, Refer to Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 for definitions of
structural steel, and steel reinforcing bars in width (b and D) and thickness (t) for rectangular
composite systems, the following limitations shall and round HSS sections.
be met, unless justified by testing or analysis:
1. For the determination of the design
9.2—Axial Force
strength, concrete shall have a
′ This section applies to two types of composite
compressive strength, 𝑓𝑐 , of not less than
21 MPa nor more than 70 MPa for normal members subject to axial force: encased composite
weight concrete and not less than 21 MPa members and filled composite members.
nor more than 42 MPa for lightweight 9 . 2 . 1 Encased Composite Members
concrete.
9.2.1.1 Limitations. For encased composite
User Note: Higher strength concrete material members, the following limitations shall be met:
properties may be used for stiffness calculations 1. The cross-sectional area of the steel core
but may not be relied upon for strength shall comprise at least 1% of the total
calculations unless justified by testing or composite cross section.
analysis.
2. Concrete encasement of the steel core shall
2. The specified minimum yield stress of be reinforced with continuous longitudinal
structural steel and reinforcing bars used bars and lateral ties or spirals.
in calculating the strength of composite Where lateral ties are used, a minimum of
members shall not exceed 525 MPa. either a 10 mm bar spaced at a maximum
9.1.4 Classification of Filled Composite of 300 mm on center, or a 14 mm bar or
Sections for Local Buckling. For compression, larger spaced at a maximum of 400 mm on
filled composite sections are classified as compact, center shall be used. Deformed wire or
noncompact or slender. For a section to qualify as welded wire reinforcement of equivalent
compact, the maximum width-to-thickness ratio of area are permitted.
its compression steel elements shall not exceed Maximum spacing of lateral ties shall not
the limiting width-to-thickness ratio, λp, from exceed 0.5 times the least column
Table 9-1. If the maximum width-to-thickness ratio dimension.
of one or more steel compression elements exceeds
λp, but does not exceed λr from Table 9-1, the filled 3. The minimum reinforcement ratio for
continuous longitudinal reinforcing, 𝜌𝑠𝑟 ,
composite section is noncompact. If the maximum
shall be 0.004, where 𝜌𝑠𝑟 is given by:
width-to-thickness ratio of any compression steel
element exceeds λr, the section is slender. The 𝐴𝑠𝑟
maximum permitted width-to-thickness ratio shall 𝜌𝑠𝑟 = (9-1)
𝐴𝑔
be as specified in the table.
where
For flexure, filled composite sections are classified
as compact, noncompact or slender. For a section to Ag = gross area of composite member, mm2
qualify as compact, the maximum width-to-

SBC 306-CR-18 86
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

Asr = area of continuous reinforcing bars, mm2 Fysr = specified minimum yield stress of
reinforcing bars, MPa
User Note: Refer to Sections 7.10 and 10.9.3
of SBC 304 for additional tie and spiral Ic = moment of inertia of concrete section
reinforcing provisions. about the elastic neutral axis of the
composite section, mm4
9.2.1.2 Compressive Strength. The design
Is = moment of inertia of steel shape about the
compressive strength, 𝜑𝑐  𝑃𝑛 , of doubly symmetric
elastic neutral axis of the composite
axially loaded encased composite members shall
section, mm4
be determined for the limit state of flexural
buckling based on member slenderness as follows: Isr = moment of inertia of reinforcing bars
about the elastic neutral axis of the
𝜑𝑐  = 0.75
composite section, mm4
(a) When
K = effective length factor
𝑃𝑛𝑜
≤ 2.25 L = laterally unbraced length of the member,
𝑃𝑒 mm
𝑃𝑛𝑜
𝑃𝑛 = 𝑃𝑛𝑜 [0.658 𝑃𝑒 ] (9-2) 𝑓𝑐′ = specified compressive strength of
concrete, MPa
(b) When wc = weight of concrete per unit volume (1500
𝑃𝑛𝑜 ≤ 𝑤𝑐 ≤2500 kg/m3)
> 2.25
𝑃𝑒 The design compressive strength need not be less
𝑃𝑛 = 0.877 𝑃𝑒 (9-3) than that specified for bare steel member as required
by Chapter 5.
where
9.2.1.3 Tensile Strength. The design tensile
𝑃𝑛𝑜 = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑠 + 𝐹𝑦𝑠𝑟 𝐴𝑠𝑟 + 0.85𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑐 (9-4) strength of axially loaded encased composite
members shall be determined for the limit state of
Pe = elastic critical buckling load determined
yielding as follows:
in accordance to with Chapter 3, or
Appendix F, N 𝑃𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑠 + 𝐹𝑦𝑠𝑟 𝐴𝑠𝑟 (9-8)
𝜑𝑡 = 0.9
= 𝜋 2 (𝐸𝐼𝑒𝑓𝑓 )/(𝐾𝐿)2 (9-5)
9.2.1.4 Load Transfer. Load transfer
requirements for encased composite members shall
Ac = area of concrete, mm2
be determined in accordance with Section 9.6.
As = area of steel, mm2
9.2.1.5 Detailing Requirements. Clear spacing
Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete between the steel core and longitudinal reinforcing
shall be a minimum of 1.5 reinforcing bar diameters,
= 0.043𝑤𝑐1.5 √𝑓𝑐′ , MPa but not less than 40mm.
EIeff = effective stiffness of composite section, If the composite cross section is built up from two
N-mm2 or more encased steel shapes, the shapes shall be
=   𝐸𝑠 𝐼𝑠 + 0.5𝐸𝑠 𝐼𝑠𝑟 + 𝐶1 𝐸𝑐 𝐼𝑐 (9-6) interconnected with lacing, tie plates, batten plates
or similar components to prevent buckling of
C1 = coefficient for calculation of effective individual shapes due to loads applied prior to
rigidity of an encased composite hardening of the concrete.
compression member
9.2.2 Filled Composite Members
𝐴𝑠
=  0.1 + 2 ( ) ≤ 0.3 (9-7) 9.2.2.1 Limitations. For filled composite members,
𝐴𝑐 +𝐴𝑠
the cross-sectional area of the steel section shall
Es = modulus of elasticity of steel = 200 000 comprise at least 1% of the total composite cross
MPa section.
Fy = specified minimum yield stress of steel Filled composite members shall be classified for
section, MPa local buckling according to Section 9.1.4 .

SBC 306-CR-18 87
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

9.2.2.2 Compressive Strength. The design The design compressive strength need not be less
compressive strength of axially loaded doubly than specified for the bare steel member as required
symmetric filled composite members shall be by Chapter 5.
determined for the limit state of flexural buckling in
9.2.2.3 Tensile Strength. The design tensile
accordance with Section 9.2.1.2 with the following
strength of axially loaded filled composite
modifications:
members shall be determined for the limit state of
(a) For compact sections yielding as follows:
𝑃𝑛𝑜 = 𝑃𝑝 (9-9) 𝑃𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑠 + 𝐹𝑦𝑠𝑟 𝐴𝑠𝑟 (9-18)
where 𝜑𝑡 = 0.9
𝐸𝑠 9.2.2.4 Load Transfer. Load transfer
𝑃𝑝 = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑠 + 𝐶2 𝑓𝑐′  (𝐴𝑐 + 𝐴𝑠𝑟 ) (9-10) requirements for filled composite members shall
𝐸𝑐
be determined in accordance with Section 9.6.
C2 = 0.85 for rectangular sections and 0.95 for
round section 9.3—Flexure
(b) For noncompact sections This section applies to three types of composite
𝑃𝑃 − 𝑃𝑦 members subject to flexure: composite beams with
𝑃𝑛𝑜 = 𝑃𝑃 − (𝜆 − 𝜆𝑃 )2 (9-11) steel anchors consisting of steel headed stud
(𝜆𝑟 − 𝜆𝑃 )2
anchors or steel channel anchors, encased
Where 𝜆, 𝜆𝑝 ,  𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝜆𝑟 are slenderness ratios composite members, and filled composite members.
determined from Table 9-1 9.3.1 General
Pp is determined from Eq. (9-10) 9.3.1.1 Effective Width. The effective width of the
𝐸𝑠 concrete slab shall be the sum of the effective
𝑃𝑦 = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑠 + 0.7𝑓𝑐′ (𝐴𝑐 + 𝐴𝑠𝑟 ) (9-12) widths for each side of the beam centerline, each of
𝐸𝑐
which shall not exceed:
(c) For slender sections
𝐸𝑠 1. one-eighth of the beam span, center-to-
𝑃𝑛𝑜 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝐴𝑠 + 0.7𝑓𝑐′ (𝐴𝑐 + 𝐴𝑠𝑟 ) (9-13) center of supports;
𝐸𝑐
2. one-half the distance to the centerline of
where
the adjacent beam; or
For rectangular filled sections
3. the distance to the edge of the slab.
9𝐸𝑠
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 9.3.1.2 Strength During Construction. When
𝑏 2 (9-14) temporary shores are not used during construction,
( )
𝑡 the steel section alone shall have adequate strength
For round filled sections to support all loads applied prior to the concrete
0.72𝐹𝑦 attaining 75% of its specified strength 𝑓𝑐′ . The
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 0.2
design flexural strength of the steel section shall be
𝐷 𝐹𝑦 (9-15) determined in accordance with Chapter 6.
(( ) )
𝑡 𝐸𝑠
9.3.2 Composite Beams With Steel Headed
The effective stiffness of the composite section, Stud or Steel Channel Anchors
EIeff, for all sections shall be: 9.3.2.1 Positive Flexural Strength. The design
𝐸𝐼𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 𝐸𝑠 𝐼𝑠 + 𝐸𝑠 𝐼𝑠𝑟 + 𝐶3 𝐸𝑐 𝐼𝑐 (9-16) positive flexural strength, 𝜑𝑏 M n, shall be
determined for the limit state of yielding as
where follows:
C3 = coefficient for calculation of effective 𝜑𝑏 = 0.9
rigidity of filled composite compression member
(a) when ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 ≤ 3.76√𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 , Mn shall be
determined from the plastic stress distribution
𝐴𝑠
=  0.6 + 2 [ ] ≤ 0.9 (9-17) on the composite section for the limit state of
𝐴𝑐 + 𝐴𝑠 yielding (plastic moment).

SBC 306-CR-18 88
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

(b) when ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 > 3.76√𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 , Mn shall be exceed 450 mm. Such anchorage shall be
determined from the superposition of elastic provided by steel headed stud anchors, a
stresses, considering the effects of shoring, for combination of steel headed stud anchors
the limit state of yielding (yield moment). and arc spot (puddle) welds, or other
devices specified by the contract
9.3.2.2 Negative Flexural Strength. The design documents.
negative flexural strength shall be determined for
the steel section alone, in accordance with the 9.3.2.2.2 Deck Ribs Oriented
requirements of Chapter 6. Perpendicular to Steel Beam. Concrete below the
top of the steel deck shall be neglected in
Alternatively, the design negative flexural strength determining composite section properties and in
shall be determined from the plastic stress calculating Ac for deck ribs oriented
distribution on the composite section, for the limit perpendicular to the steel beams.
state of yielding (plastic moment), with 𝜑𝑏 = 0.9
provided that the following limitations are met: 9.3.2.2.3 Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to
Steel Beam. Concrete below the top of the steel
1. The steel beam is compact and is deck is permitted to be included in determining
adequately braced in accordance with composite section properties and shall be included
Chapter 6. in calculating Ac.
2. Steel headed stud or steel channel anchors
Formed steel deck ribs over supporting beams are
connect the slab to the steel beam in the
permitted to be split longitudinally and separated to
negative moment region.
form a concrete haunch.
3. The slab reinforcement parallel to the steel
When the nominal depth of steel deck is 38 mm or
beam, within the effective width of the slab,
greater, the average width, wr, of the supported
Composite Beams With Formed Steel
Deck haunch or rib shall be not less than 50 mm for the
first steel headed stud anchor in the transverse row
9.3.2.2.1 General. The design flexural plus four stud diameters for each additional steel
strength of composite construction consisting of headed stud anchor.
concrete slabs on formed steel deck connected to
steel beams shall be determined by the applicable 9.3.2.3 Load Transfer Between Steel Beam and
portions of Sections 9.3.2.1 and 9.3.2.2 , with the Concrete Slab
following requirements: 9.3.2.3.1 Load Transfer for Positive
1. The nominal rib height shall not be greater Flexural Strength. The entire horizontal shear at
than 75 mm. The average width of concrete the interface between the steel beam and the
rib or haunch, wr, shall be not less than 50 concrete slab shall be assumed to be transferred by
mm, but shall not be taken in calculations steel headed stud or steel channel anchors, except
as more than the minimum clear width near for concrete-encased beams as defined in Section
the top of the steel deck. 9.3.3 . For composite action with concrete subject
to flexural compression, the nominal shear force
2. The concrete slab shall be connected to the between the steel beam and the concrete slab
steel beam with welded steel headed stud transferred by steel anchors, 𝑉 ′ , between the point
anchors, 20 mm or less in diameter (AWS of maximum positive moment and the point of
D1.1/D1.1M). Steel headed stud anchors zero moment shall be determined as the lowest
shall be welded either through the deck or value in accordance with the limit states of
directly to the steel cross section. Steel concrete crushing, tensile yielding of the steel
headed stud anchors, after installation, shall section, or the shear strength of the steel anchors:
extend not less than 40 mm above the top
of the steel deck and there shall be at least (a) Concrete crushing
15 mm of specified concrete cover above 𝑉 ′ = 0.85𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴𝑐 (9-19)
the top of the steel headed stud anchors. (b) Tensile yielding of the steel section
3. The slab thickness above the steel deck 𝑉 ′ = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑠 (9-20)
shall be not less than 50 mm. (c) Shear strength of steel headed stud or steel
4. Steel deck shall be anchored to all channel anchors
supporting members at a spacing not to

SBC 306-CR-18 89
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

𝑉 ′ = ∑ 𝑄𝑛 (9-21) the limit state of yielding (plastic moment) on

the composite section. For concrete-encased
where members, steel anchors shall be provided.

Ac = area of concrete slab within effective 9 . 3 . 4 Filled Composite Members

width, mm2 9.3.4.1 Limitations. Filled composite sections
As = area of steel cross section, mm 2 shall be classified for local buckling according to
Section 9.1.4 .
∑ 𝑄𝑛 = sum of nominal shear strengths of steel
9.3.4.2 Flexural Strength. The design flexural
headed stud or steel channel anchors
strength, bMn, of filled composite members shall
between the point of maximum positive
moment and the point of zero moment, N be determined as follows:

9.3.2.3.2 Load Transfer for Negative 𝜑𝑏 = 0.9

Flexural Strength. In continuous composite beams The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be
where longitudinal reinforcing steel in the negative determined as follows:
moment regions is considered to act compositely
with the steel beam, the total horizontal shear (a) For compact sections
between the point of maximum negative moment 𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑝 (9-24)
and the point of zero moment shall be determined
as the lower value in accordance with the following where
limit states: Mp moment corresponding to plastic stress
(a) For the limit state of tensile yielding of the slab distribution over the composite cross
reinforcement section, N-mm
𝑉 ′ = 𝐹𝑦𝑠𝑟 𝐴𝑠𝑟 (9-22) (b) For noncompact sections
𝜆−𝜆𝑝
where 𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑝 − (𝑀𝑝 − 𝑀𝑦 ) ( ) (9-25)
𝜆𝑟 −𝜆𝑝
Asr = area of adequately developed
longitudinal reinforcing steel within the where
effective width of the concrete slab, mm2 𝜆, 𝜆𝑝  𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝜆𝑟 are the slenderness rations
Fysr = specified minimum yield stress of the determined from Table 9-2
reinforcing steel, MPa My = yield moment corresponding to yielding of
(b) For the limit state of shear strength of steel the tension flange and first yield of the
headed stud or steel channel anchors compression flange, N-mm. The capacity at
the first yield shall be calculated assuming a
𝑉 ′ = ∑ 𝑄𝑛 (9-23) linear elastic stress distribution with the
maximum concrete compressive stress
9.3.3 Encased Composite. The design flexural limited to 0.70𝑓𝑐′ and the maximum steel
strength, b Mn, of concrete-encased members shall stress limited to Fy.
be determined as follows:
( c ) For slender sections, Mn, shall be determined as
𝜑𝑏 = 0.9 the first yield moment. The compression flange
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be stress shall be limited to the local buckling
stress, Fcr, determined using Eqs. (9-14) or
determined using one of the following methods:
(9-15). The concrete stress distribution shall
(a) The superposition of elastic stresses on the be linear elastic with the maximum
composite section, considering the effects of compressive stress limited to 0.70f c.
shoring for the limit state of yielding (yield
moment).
(b) The plastic stress distribution on the steel 9.4—Shear
section alone, for the limit state of yielding
9.4.1 Filled and Encased Composite
(plastic moment) on the steel section.
Members. The design shear strength, vVn,, shall
(c) The plastic stress distribution on the composite be determined based on one of the following:
section or the strain-compatibility method, for

SBC 306-CR-18 90
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

(a) The design shear strength of the steel section accordance with the requirements for force
alone as specified in Chapter 7. allocation presented in this section.
(b) The design shear strength of the reinforced The design strength, 𝜑Rn, of the applicable force
concrete portion (concrete plus steel transfer mechanisms as determined in accordance
reinforcement) alone as defined by SBC 304 with Section 9.6.3 shall equal or exceed the
with required longitudinal shear force to be
v 0.75 transferred,𝑉𝑟′ , as determined in accordance with
(c) The nominal shear strength of the steel section Section 9.6.2 .
as defined in Chapter 7 plus the nominal 9.6.2 Force Allocation. Force allocation shall
strength of the reinforcing steel as defined by be determined based upon the distribution of
SBC 304 with a combined resistance factor of external force in accordance with the following
v 0.75 requirements:
9.4.2 Composite Beams with Formed Steel User Note: Bearing strength provisions for
Deck. The design shear strength of composite externally applied forces are provided in
beams with steel headed stud or steel channel Section 10.8. For filled composite members,
anchors shall be determined based upon the 𝐴2
properties of the steel section alone in accordance the term √ in Eq. (10-31) may be taken equal
𝐴1
with Chapter 7.
to 2.0 due to confinement effects.
9.5—Combined Flexure and Axial
Force 9.6.2.1 External Force Applied to Steel Section.
When the entire external force is applied directly
The interaction between flexure and axial forces in to the steel section, the force required to be
composite members shall account for stability as transferred to the concrete,𝑉𝑟′ , shall be determined
required by Chapter 3. The design compressive as follows:
strength and the design flexural strength shall be
determined as defined in Sections 9.2 and 9.3, 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑠
𝑉𝑟′ = 𝑃𝑟 (1 − ) (9-26)
respectively. To account for the influence of length 𝑃𝑛𝑜
effects on the axial strength of the member, the
where
nominal axial strength of the member shall be
determined in accordance with Section 9.2. Pno = nominal axial compressive strength without
For encased composite members and for filled consideration of length effects, determined by
composite members with compact sections, the Eq. (9-4) for encased composite members, and
interaction between axial force and flexure shall be Eq. (9-9) for filled composite members, N
based on the interaction equations of Section 8.1.1 Pr = required external force applied to the
or one of the methods as defined in Section 8.1.2 . composite member, N
For filled composite members with noncompact or 9.6.2.2 External Force Applied to Concrete.
slender sections, the interaction between axial When the entire external force is applied directly to
forces and flexure shall be based on the the concrete encasement or concrete fill, the force
interaction equations of Section 8.1.1 . required to be transferred to the steel, 𝑉𝑟′ , shall be
determined as follows:
User Note: Methods for determining the capacity
of composite beam-columns are discussed in the 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑠
𝑉𝑟′ = 𝑃𝑟 ( ) (9-27)
Commentary. 𝑃𝑛𝑜
where

9.6—Load Transfer Pno = nominal axial compressive strength without

consideration of length effects, determined by
9.6.1 General Requirements. When external Eq. (9-4) for encased composite members, and
forces are applied to an axially loaded encased or Eq. (9-9) for filled composite members, N
filled composite member, the introduction of force
to the member and the transfer of longitudinal Pr = required external force applied to the
shears within the member shall be assessed in composite member, N

SBC 306-CR-18 91
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

9.6.2.3 External Force Applied Concurrently to respectively, placed within the load
Steel and Concrete. When the external force is introduction length as defined in Section
applied concurrently to the steel section and 9.6.4 , N
concrete encasement or concrete fill, 𝑉𝑟′ shall be 9.6.3.3 Direct Bond Interaction. Where force is
determined as the force required to establish transferred in a filled composite member by direct
equilibrium of the cross section. bond interaction, the design bond strength
between the steel and concrete shall be determined
User Note: The Commentary provides an as follows:
acceptable method of determining the
longitudinal shear force required for equilibrium 𝜑 = 0.45
of the cross section. (a) For rectangular steel sections filled with
concrete:
9.6.3 Force Transfer Mechanisms. The
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐵2 𝐶𝑖𝑛 𝐹𝑖𝑛 (9-30)
nominal strength, Rn, of the force transfer
mechanisms of direct bond interaction, shear (b) For round steel sections filled with concrete:
connection, and direct bearing shall be determined 𝑅𝑛 = 0.25𝜋𝐷 2 𝐶𝑖𝑛 𝐹𝑖𝑛 (9-31)
in accordance with this section. Use of the force where
transfer mechanism providing the largest nominal
strength is permitted. Force transfer mechanisms Cin = 2 if the filled composite member extends
shall not be superimposed. to one side of the point of force transfer
The force transfer mechanism of direct bond = 4 if the filled composite member extends
interaction shall not be used for encased composite on both sides of the point of force transfer
members.
Rn = nominal bond strength, N
9.6.3.1 Direct Bearing. Where force is transferred
in an encased or filled composite member by direct Fin = nominal bond stress = 0.40 MPa
bearing from internal bearing mechanisms, the B = overall width of rectangular steel section
design bearing strength of the concrete for the limit along face transferring load, mm
state of concrete crushing shall be determined as
follows: D = outside diameter of round HSS, mm
9.6.4 Detailing Requirements
𝑅𝑛 = 1.7𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1 (9-28)
𝜑𝐵 = 0.65 9.6.4.1 Encased Composite Members. Steel
anchors utilized to transfer longitudinal shear shall
where be distributed within the load introduction length,
2
A1 = loaded area of concrete, mm which shall not exceed a distance of two times the
minimum transverse dimension of the encased
User Note: An example of force transfer via an composite member above and below the load
internal bearing mechanism is the use of internal transfer region. Anchors utilized to transfer
steel plates within a filled composite member. longitudinal shear shall be placed on at least two
faces of the steel shape in a generally symmetric
9.6.3.2 Shear Connection. Where force is configuration about the steel shape axes.
transferred in an encased or filled composite Steel anchor spacing, both within and outside of
member by shear connection, the design shear the load introduction length, shall conform to
strength of steel headed stud or steel channel Section 9.8.3.5 .
anchors shall be determined as follows:
9.6.4.2 Filled Composite Members. Where
𝑅𝑐 = ∑ 𝑄𝑐𝑣 (9-29) required, steel anchors transferring the required
longitudinal shear force shall be distributed within
where the load introduction length, which shall not exceed
∑ 𝑄𝑐𝑣 = sum of design shear strengths, 𝜑 𝑄𝑛𝑣 , a distance of two times the minimum transverse
dimension of a rectangular steel member or two
of steel headed stud or steel channel times the diameter of a round steel member both
anchors, determined in accordance with
above and below the load transfer region. Steel
Section 9.8.3.1 or Section 9.8.3.4 ,

SBC 306-CR-18 92
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

anchor spacing within the load introduction length (b) any number of steel headed stud anchors
shall conform to Section 9.8.3.5 . welded in a row directly to the steel shape;
9.7—Composite Diaphragms and (c) any number of steel headed stud anchors
Collector Beams welded in a row through steel deck with the
deck oriented parallel to the steel shape and
Composite slab diaphragms and collector beams the ratio of the average rib width to rib
shall be designed and detailed to transfer loads depth ≥1.5
between the diaphragm, the diaphragm’s boundary
members and collector elements, and elements of = 0.85 for:
the lateral force resisting system. (a) two steel headed stud anchors welded in a
steel deck rib with the deck oriented
User Note: Design guidelines for composite perpendicular to the steel shape;
diaphragms and collector beams can be found in (b) one steel headed stud anchor welded
the Commentary. through steel deck with the deck oriented
parallel to the steel shape and the ratio of
the average rib width to rib depth ≥1.5
9.8—Steel Anchors
= 0.7 for three or more steel headed stud
9.8.1 General. The diameter of a steel headed anchors welded in a steel deck rib with the
stud anchor shall not be greater than 2.5 times the deck oriented perpendicular to the steel
thickness of the base metal to which it is welded, shape
unless it is welded to a flange directly over a web.
Rp = 0.75 for:
Section 9.8.2 applies to a composite flexural
member where steel anchors are embedded in a (a) steel headed stud anchors welded
solid concrete slab or in a slab cast on formed steel directly to the steel shape;
deck. Section 9.8.3 applies to all other cases. (b) steel headed stud anchors welded in a
composite slab with the deck oriented
9.8.2 Steel Anchors in Composite Beams. The
perpendicular to the beam and emid-ht
length of steel headed stud anchors shall not be
≥ 50 mm;
less than four stud diameters from the base of the
steel headed stud anchor to the top of the stud head (c) steel headed stud anchors welded
after installation. through steel deck, or steel sheet used as
girder filler material, and embedded in a
9.8.2.1 Strength of Steel Headed Stud Anchors composite slab with the deck oriented
The nominal shear strength of one steel headed stud parallel to the beam
anchor embedded in a solid concrete slab or in a = 0.6 for steel headed stud anchors welded
composite slab with decking shall be determined as in a composite slab with deck oriented
follows: perpendicular to the beam and emid-ht < 50
𝑄𝑛 = 0.5𝐴𝑠𝑎 √𝑓𝑐′  𝐸𝑐   ≤   𝑅𝑔 𝑅𝑝 𝐴𝑠𝑎 𝐹𝑢 (9-32) mm
emid-ht = distance from the edge of steel headed
where
stud anchor shank to the steel deck web,
Asa = cross-sectional area of steel headed stud measured at mid-height of the deck rib,
anchor, mm2 and in the load bearing direction of the
steel headed stud anchor (in other words, in
Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete
the direction of maximum moment for a
0.043 𝑤𝑐1.5  √𝑓𝑐′ , MPa simply supported beam), mm
Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of a steel
User Note: The table below presents values of
headed stud anchor, MPa
Rg and Rp for several cases.
Rg = 1.0 for:
Condition Rg Rp
(a) one steel headed stud anchor welded in a
steel deck rib with the deck oriented
No decking 1.0 0.75
perpendicular to the steel shape;

SBC 306-CR-18 93
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

maximum bending moment, positive or negative,

Decking oriented
and the adjacent section of zero moment shall be
parallel to the steel
equal to the horizontal shear as determined in
shape
Sections 9.3.2.3.1 and 9.3.2.3.2 divided by the
𝑤𝑟 nominal shear strength of one steel anchor as
≥ 1.5 1.0 0.75 determined from Section 9.8.2.1 or Section 9.8.2.2
ℎ𝑟
The number of steel anchors required between any
𝑤𝑟 concentrated load and the nearest point of zero
< 1.5 0.85** 0.75 moment shall be sufficient to develop the
ℎ𝑟
maximum moment required at the concentrated
Decking oriented load point.
perpendicular to the 9.8.2.4 Detailing Requirements. Steel anchors
steel shape required on each side of the point of maximum
Number of steel bending moment, positive or negative, shall be
headed stud anchors distributed uniformly between that point and the
occupying the same adjacent points of zero moment, unless specified
decking rib otherwise on the contract documents.
Steel anchors shall have at least 25 mm of lateral
1 1.0 0.6+ concrete cover in the direction perpendicular to the
shear force, except for anchors installed in the
2 0.85 0.6+ ribs of formed steel decks. The minimum distance
from the center of an anchor to a free edge in the
3 or more 0.7 0.6+ direction of the shear force shall be 200 mm if
normal weight concrete is used and 250 mm if
hr = nominal rib height, mm lightweight concrete is used. The provisions of SBC
wr = average width of concrete rib or haunch 304, Chapter 17 are permitted to be used in lieu of
(as defined in Section 9.3.2.3 ), mm these values.
**
for a single steel headed stud anchor The minimum center-to-center spacing of steel
+
headed stud anchors shall be six diameters along
this value may be increased to 0.75 when the longitudinal axis of the supporting composite
emin-ht ≥ 50 mm beam and four diameters transverse to the
longitudinal axis of the supporting composite
beam, except that within the ribs of formed steel
9.8.2.2 Strength of Steel Channel Anchors. The decks oriented perpendicular to the steel beam the
nominal shear strength of one hot-rolled channel minimum center-to-center spacing shall be four
anchor embedded in a solid concrete slab shall be diameters in any direction. The maximum center-
determined as follows: to-center spacing of steel anchors shall not exceed
eight times the total slab thickness or 900 mm.
𝑄𝑛 = 0.3 (𝑡𝑓 + 0.5𝑡𝑤 )𝑙𝑎  √𝑓𝑐′ 𝐸𝑐 (9-33)
9.8.3 Steel Anchors in Composite
where Components. This section shall apply to the
la = length of channel anchor, mm design of cast-in-place steel headed stud anchors
and steel channel anchors in composite components.
tf = thickness of flange of channel anchor,
The provisions of SBC 304, Chapter 17 may be used
mm
in lieu of the provisions in this section.
tw = thickness of channel anchor web, mm
User Note: The steel headed stud anchor
The strength of the channel anchor shall be
strength provisions in this section are
developed by welding the channel to the beam
applicable to anchors located primarily in the
flange for a force equal to Qn, considering
load transfer (connection) region of composite
eccentricity on the anchor. columns and beam-columns, concrete-encased
9.8.2.3 Required Number of Steel Anchors. The and filled composite beams, composite
number of anchors required between the section of coupling beams, and composite walls, where

SBC 306-CR-18 94
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

the steel and concrete are working compositely

Shear h/d ≥5 h/d≥7
within a member. They are not intended for
hybrid construction where the steel and
Tension h/d ≥8 h/d≥10
concrete are not working compositely, such as
with embed plates.
Shear and
h/d ≥8 N/A*
Section 9.8.2 specifies the strength of steel Tension
anchors embedded in a solid concrete slab or
in a concrete slab with formed steel deck in a h/d = ratio of steel headed stud anchor shank
composite beam. length to the top of the stud head, to shank
Limit states for the steel shank of the anchor diameter
*
and for concrete breakout in shear are covered Refer to SBC 304, Chapter 17 for the
directly in this Section. Additionally, the calculation of interaction effects of anchors
spacing and dimensional limitations provided embedded in lightweight concrete.
in these provisions preclude the limit states of
concrete pry- out for anchors loaded in shear
and concrete breakout for anchors loaded in 9.8.3.1 Shear Strength of Steel Headed Stud
tension as defined by SBC 304, Chapter 17. Anchors in Composite Components. Where
concrete breakout strength in shear is not an
For normal weight concrete: Steel headed stud applicable limit state, the design shear strength,
anchors subjected to shear only shall not be less 𝜑𝑣 𝑄𝑛𝑣 of one steel headed stud anchor shall be
than five stud diameters in length from the base of determined as follows:
the steel headed stud to the top of the stud head
after installation. Steel headed stud anchors 𝑄𝑛𝑣 = 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑠𝑎 (9-34)
subjected to tension or interaction of shear and 𝜑𝑣 = 0.65
tension shall not be less than eight stud diameters where
in length from the base of the stud to the top of the
stud head after installation. Qnv = nominal shear strength of steel headed stud
anchor, N
For lightweight concrete: Steel headed stud anchors
subjected to shear only shall not be less than seven Asa = cross-sectional area of steel headed stud
stud diameters in length from the base of the steel anchor, mm2
headed stud to the top of the stud head after
Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of a
installation. Steel headed stud anchors subjected to
tension shall not be less than ten stud diameters in steel headed stud anchor, MPa
length from the base of the stud to the top of the Where concrete breakout strength in shear is an
stud head after installation. The nominal strength of applicable limit state, the design shear strength of
steel headed stud anchors subjected to interaction one steel headed stud anchor shall be determined by
of shear and tension for lightweight concrete shall one of the following:
be determined as stipulated by SBC 304, Chapter 17.
(1) Where anchor reinforcement is developed in
Steel headed stud anchors subjected to tension or accordance with Chapter 25 of SBC 304 on
interaction of shear and tension shall have a both sides of the concrete breakout surface
diameter of the head greater than or equal to 1.6 for the steel headed stud anchor, the
times the diameter of the shank. minimum of the steel nominal shear strength
from Eq. (9-34) and the nominal strength of
User Note: The following table presents the anchor reinforcement shall be used for
values of minimum steel headed stud anchor the nominal shear strength, Qnv, of the steel
h/d ratios for each condition covered in the headed stud anchor.
Code.
(2) As stipulated by the SBC 304, Chapter 17.
Normal
Loading Lightweight User Note: If concrete breakout strength in shear
Weight
Condition Concrete is an applicable limit state (for example, where
Concrete
the breakout prism is not restrained by an
adjacent steel plate, flange or web), appropriate

SBC 306-CR-18 95
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

anchor reinforcement is required for the 9.8.3.3 Strength of Steel Headed Stud Anchors
provisions of this Section to be used. for Interaction of Shear and Tension in
Composite Components. Where concrete
9.8.3.2 Tensile Strength of Steel Headed Stud breakout strength in shear is not a governing limit
Anchors in Composite Components. Where the state, and where the distance from the center of an
distance from the center of an anchor to a free anchor to a free edge of concrete in the direction
edge of concrete in the direction perpendicular to perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud
the height of the steel headed stud anchor is greater anchor is greater than or equal to 1.5 times the
than or equal to 1.5 times the height of the steel height of the steel headed stud anchor measured to
headed stud anchor measured to the top of the stud the top of the stud head, and where the center-to-
head, and where the center-to-center spacing of steel center spacing of steel headed stud anchors is
headed stud anchors is greater than or equal to three greater than or equal to three times the height of
times the height of the steel headed stud anchor the steel headed stud anchor measured to the top
measured to the top of the stud head, the design of the stud head, the nominal strength for interaction
tensile strength of one steel headed stud anchor shall of shear and tension of one steel headed stud anchor
be determined as follows: shall be determined as follows:
5 5
𝑄𝑛𝑡 = 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑠𝑎 (9-35) 𝑄𝑟𝑡 3 𝑄𝑟𝑣 3
𝜑𝑡 = 0.75 [( ) + ( ) ] ≤ 1.0 (9-36)
𝑄𝑐𝑡 𝑄𝑐𝑣
where
where
Qnt = nominal tensile strength of steel headed
stud anchor, N Qrt = required tensile strength, N
Where the distance from the center of an anchor Qct = 𝜑𝑡 Qnt = design tensile strength, determined
to a free edge of concrete in the direction in accordance with Section 9.8.3.2 , N
perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud
anchor is less than 1.5 times the height of the steel Qrv = required shear strength, N
headed stud anchor measured to the top of the stud Qcv=𝜑𝑣 Qnv = design shear strength, determined
head, or where the center-to-center spacing of steel in accordance with Section 9.8.3.1 , N
headed stud anchors is less than three times the
height of the steel headed stud anchor measured to 𝜑𝑡 = resistance factor for tension = 0.75
the top of the stud head, the nominal tensile strength 𝜑𝑣 = resistance factor for shear = 0.65
of one steel headed stud anchor shall be determined
by one of the following: Where concrete breakout strength in shear is a
governing limit state, or where the distance from
1. Where anchor reinforcement is developed the center of an anchor to a free edge of
in accordance with Chapter 25 of SBC 304 concrete in the direction perpendicular to the
on both sides of the concrete breakout height of the steel headed stud anchor is less than
surface for the steel headed stud anchor, 1.5 times the height of the steel headed stud anchor
the minimum of the steel nominal tensile measured to the top of the stud head, or where the
strength from Eq. (9-35) and the nominal center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud
strength of the anchor reinforcement shall anchors is less than three times the height of the
be used for the nominal tensile strength, steel headed stud anchor measured to the top of the
Qnt, of the steel headed stud anchor. stud head, the nominal strength for interaction of
2. As stipulated by the SBC 304, Chapter 17. shear and tension of one steel headed stud anchor
shall be determined by one of the following:
User Note: Supplemental confining (a) Where anchor reinforcement is developed in
reinforcement is recommended around the accordance with Chapter 25, SBC 304 on both
anchors for steel headed stud anchors subjected sides of the concrete breakout surface for the
to tension or interaction of shear and tension to steel headed stud anchor, the minimum of the
avoid edge effects or effects from closely steel nominal shear strength from Eq. (9-34)
spaced anchors. See the Commentary and SBC and the nominal strength of the anchor
304, Section 17.4.2.9 for guidelines. reinforcement shall be used for the nominal
shear strength, Qnv, of the steel headed stud

SBC 306-CR-18 96
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

anchor, and the minimum of the steel nominal

tensile strength from Eq. (9-35) and the
nominal strength of the anchor reinforcement
shall be used for the nominal tensile strength,
Qnt, of the steel headed stud anchor for use in
Eq. (9-36).
(b) As stipulated by the SBC 304, Chapter 17.
9.8.3.4 Shear Strength of Steel Channel
Anchors in Composite Components. The design
shear strength of steel channel anchors shall be
based on the provisions of Section 9.8.2.2 with the
resistance factor and safety factor as specified
below.
𝜑𝑣 = 0.75
9.8.3.5 Detailing Requirements in Composite
Components. Steel anchors shall have at least 25
mm of lateral clear concrete cover. The minimum
center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud
anchors shall be four diameters in any direction.
The maximum center-to-center spacing of steel
headed stud anchors shall not exceed 32 times the
shank diameter. The maximum center-to-center
spacing of steel channel anchors shall be 600 mm.

User Note: Detailing requirements provided in

this section are absolute limits. See Sections
9.8.3.1 , 9.8.3.2 and 9.8.3.3 for additional
limitations required to preclude edge and group
effect considerations.

9.9—Special Cases
When composite construction does not conform to
the requirements of Section 9.1 through Section
9.8, the strength of steel anchors and details of
construction shall be established by testing.

SBC 306-CR-18 97
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

TABLES AND FIGURES OF CHAPTER 9

Table 9-1: Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Compression Steel Elements in Composite Members
Subject to Axial Compression For Use with Section 9.2.2 .

𝜆𝑝 𝝀𝒓
Width-to- Maximum
Description of element Compact/ Noncompact/
Thickness Ratio Permitted
Noncompact Slender
Walls of Rectangular
HSS and Boxes of b/t 𝐸 𝐸 𝐸
2.26 √ 3.00 √ 5.00 √
Uniform Thickness 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦

0.15E 0.19E 0.31E

Round HSS D/t
Fy Fy Fy

Table 9-2: Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Compression Steel Elements in Composite Members
Subject to Flexure For Use with Section 9.3.4 .

𝜆𝑝 𝝀𝒓
Width-to- Maximum
Description of element Compact/ Noncompact/
Thickness Ratio Permitted
Noncompact Slender
Flanges of Rectangular
HSS and Boxes of b/t 𝐸 𝐸 𝐸
2.26 √ 3.00 √ 5.00 √
Uniform Thickness 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦
Webs of Rectangular
HSS and Boxes of h/t 𝐸 𝐸 𝐸
3.00 √ 5.70 √ 5.70 √
Uniform Thickness 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦

0.09 E 0.31E 0.31E

Round HSS
D/t Fy Fy Fy

SBC 306-CR-18 98
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 99
CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

10.1.2 Simple Connections. Simple connections

This chapter addresses connecting elements,
of beams, girders and trusses shall be designed as
connectors and the affected elements of connected
flexible and are permitted to be proportioned for
members not subject to fatigue loads.
the reaction shears only, except as otherwise
The chapter is organized as follows: indicated in the design documents. Flexible beam
10.1 —General Provisions connections shall accommodate end rotations of
simple beams. Some inelastic but self-limiting
10.2 —Welds deformation in the connection is permitted to
10.3 —Bolts and Threaded Parts accommodate the end rotation of a simple beam.

10.4 —Affected Elements of Members and 10.1.3 Moment Connections. End connections of
Connecting Elements restrained beams, girders and trusses shall be
designed for the combined effect of forces resulting
10.5 —Fillers from moment and shear induced by the rigidity of
10.6 —Splices the connections. Response criteria for moment
connections are provided in Section 2.3.5 (b).
10.7 —Bearing Strength
10.8 —Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete User Note: See Chapter 3 and Appendix F for
analysis requirements to establish the required
10.9 —Anchor Rods and Embedments strength for the design of connections.
10.10—Flanges and Webs With Concentrated
Forces 10.1.4 Compression Members with Bearing
Joints. Compression members relying on bearing
for load transfer shall meet the following
requirements:
User Note: For cases not included in this chapter,
the following sections apply: 1. When columns bear on bearing plates or are
finished to bear at splices, there shall be
Chapter 11 Design of HSS and Box Member sufficient connectors to hold all parts
Connections securely in place.
Appendix C Design for Fatigue 2. When compression members other than
columns are finished to bear, the splice
material and its connectors shall be
10.1—General Provisions arranged to hold all parts in line and their
10.1.1 Design Basis. The design strength, ϕRn of required strength shall be the lesser of:
connections shall be determined in accordance An axial tensile force of 50% of the
with the provisions of this chapter and the required compressive strength of the
provisions of Chapter 2. member; or
The required strength of the connections shall be The moment and shear resulting from
determined by structural analysis for the specified a transverse load equal to 2% of the
design loads, consistent with the type of required compressive strength of the
construction specified, or shall be a proportion of member. The transverse load shall be
the required strength of the connected members applied at the location of the splice
when so specified herein. exclusive of other loads that act on the
Where the gravity axes of intersecting axially member. The member shall be taken as
loaded members do not intersect at one point, the pinned for the determination of the
effects of eccentricity shall be considered. shears and moments at the splice.

SBC 306-CR-18 100

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

be permitted to terminate perpendicular to the

User Note: All compression joints should also
flange, providing the weld is terminated at least a
be proportioned to resist any tension
distance equal to the weld size away from the
developed by the load combinations stipulated
access hole.
in Section 2.2.
For heavy sections as defined in Sections 1.3.1.3
10.1.5 Splices in Heavy Sections. When tensile and 1.3.1.4 , the thermally cut surfaces of weld
forces due to applied tension or flexure are to be access holes shall be ground to bright metal and
transmitted through splices in heavy sections, as inspected by either magnetic particle or dye
defined in Sections 1.3.1.3 and 1.3.1.4 , by penetrant methods prior to deposition of splice
complete-joint-penetration groove (CJP) welds, the welds. If the curved transition portion of weld
following provisions apply: (1) material notch- access holes is formed by predrilled or sawed
toughness requirements as given in Sections 1.3.1.3 holes, that portion of the access hole need not be
and 1.3.1.4 ; (2) weld access hole details as given in ground. Weld access holes in other shapes need not
Section 10.1.6 ; (3) filler metal requirements as be ground nor inspected by dye penetrant or
given in Section 10.2.6 ; and (4) thermal cut surface magnetic particle methods.
preparation and inspection requirements as given in
10.1.7 Placement of Welds and Bolts. Groups of
Section 14.2.2 . The foregoing provision is not
welds or bolts at the ends of any member which
applicable to splices of elements of built-up shapes
transmit axial force into that member shall be sized
that are welded prior to assembling the shape.
so that the center of gravity of the group coincides
with the center of gravity of the member, unless
User Note: CJP groove welded splices of heavy
provision is made for the eccentricity. The foregoing
sections can exhibit detrimental effects of weld
provision is not applicable to end connections of
shrinkage. Members that are sized for
single angle, double angle and similar members.
compression that are also subject to tensile
forces may be less susceptible to damage from 10.1.8 Bolts in Combination with Welds. Bolts
shrinkage if they are spliced using partial-joint- shall not be considered as sharing the load in
penetration PJP groove welds on the flanges and combination with welds, except that shear
fillet-welded web plates, or using bolts for some connections with any grade of bolts permitted by
or all of the splice. Section 1.3.3 , installed in standard holes or short
slots transverse to the direction of the load, are
10.1.6 Weld Access Holes. All weld access holes permitted to be considered to share the load with
required to facilitate welding operations shall be longitudinally loaded fillet welds. In such
detailed to provide room for weld backing as connections the design strength of the bolts shall not
needed. The access hole shall have a length from be taken as greater than 50% of the design strength
the toe of the weld preparation not less than 1.5 of bearing-type bolts in the connection.
times the thickness of the material in which the In making welded alterations to structures,
hole is made, nor less than 40 mm. The access hole existing rivets and high-strength bolts tightened to
shall have a height not less than the thickness of the the requirements for slip-critical connections are
material with the access hole, nor less than 20 mm, permitted to be utilized for carrying loads present at
nor does it need to exceed 50 mm. the time of alteration and the welding need only
For sections that are rolled or welded prior to provide the additional required strength.
cutting, the edge of the web shall be sloped or 10.1.9 High-Strength Bolts in Combination
curved from the surface of the flange to the with Rivets. In both new work and alterations, in
reentrant surface of the access hole. In hot-rolled connections designed as slip-critical connections
shapes, and built-up shapes with CJP groove welds in accordance with the provisions of Section 10.3,
that join the web-to-flange, weld access holes shall high-strength bolts are permitted to be considered
be free of notches and sharp reentrant corners. No as sharing the load with existing rivets.
arc of the weld access hole shall have a radius less
than 10 mm. 10.1.10 Limitations on Bolted and Welded
Connections. Joints with pretensioned bolts or
In built-up shapes with fillet or partial-joint- welds shall be used for the following connections:
penetration groove welds that join the web-to-
flange, weld access holes shall be free of notches 1. Column splices in all multi-story structures
and sharp reentrant corners. The access hole shall over 38 m in height

SBC 306-CR-18 101

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

2. Connections of all beams and girders to

columns and any other beams and girders
User Note: The effective throat of a partial-
joint-penetration groove weld is dependent on
on which the bracing of columns is
the process used and the weld position. The
dependent in structures over 38 m in
design drawings should either indicate the
height
effective throat required or the weld strength
3. In all structures carrying cranes of over 50 required, and the fabricator should detail the
kN capacity: roof truss splices and joint based on the weld process and position to
connections of trusses to columns; be used to weld the joint.
column splices; column bracing; knee
braces; and crane supports The effective weld throat for flare groove welds
4. Connections for the support of when filled flush to the surface of a round bar or a
machinery and other live loads that 90bend in a formed section or rectangular HSS,
produce impact or reversal of load shall be as shown in TABLE 10-2, unless other
effective throats are demonstrated by tests. The
Snug-tightened joints or joints with ASTM A307 effective throat of flare groove welds filled less than
bolts shall be permitted except where otherwise flush shall be as shown in TABLE 10-2, less the
specified. greatest perpendicular dimension measured from a
10.2—Welds line flush to the base metal surface to the weld
surface.
All provisions of AWS D1.1/D1.1M apply under
this Code, with the exception that the provisions Larger effective throats than those in TABLE 10-2
of the listed sections apply under this Code in lieu are permitted for a given welding procedure
of the cited AWS provisions as follows: specification (WPS), provided the fabricator can
establish by qualification the consistent production
1. Section 10.1.6 in lieu of AWS of such larger effective throat. Qualification shall
D1.1/D1.1M, Section 5.17.1 consist of sectioning the weld normal to its axis, at
2. Section 10.2.2 a in lieu of AWS mid-length and terminal ends. Such sectioning shall
D1.1/D1.1M, Section 2.3.2 be made on a number of combinations of material
sizes representative of the range to be used in the
3. TABLE 10-2 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, fabrication.
Table 2.1
10.2.1.2 Limitations. The minimum
4. TABLE 10-5 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, effective throat of a partial-joint-penetration groove
Table 2.3 weld shall not be less than the size required to
5. APPENDIX C, TABLE C-1 in lieu of transmit calculated forces nor the size shown in
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Table 2.5 TABLE 10-3. Minimum weld size is determined by
the thinner of the two parts joined.
6. Section 2.3.10 and APPENDIX C in lieu
of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 2, Part C
7. Section 14.2.2 in lieu of AWS 1 0 .2 .2 Fillet Welds
D1.1/D1.1M, Sections 5.15.4.3 and 10.2.2.1 Effective Area. The effective area
5.15.4.4 of a fillet weld shall be the effective length
10.2.1 Groove Welds multiplied by the effective throat. The effective
throat of a fillet weld shall be the shortest distance
10.2.1.1 Effective Area. The effective area from the root to the face of the diagrammatic weld.
of groove welds shall be considered as the length of An increase in effective throat is permitted if
the weld times the effective throat. consistent penetration beyond the root of the
The effective throat of a complete-joint-penetration diagrammatic weld is demonstrated by tests using
(CJP) groove weld shall be the thickness of the the production process and procedure variables.
thinner part joined. For fillet welds in holes and slots, the effective
The effective throat of a partial-joint-penetration length shall be the length of the centerline of the
(PJP) groove weld shall be as shown in TABLE weld along the center of the plane through the
10-1. throat. In the case of overlapping fillets, the
effective area shall not exceed the nominal cross-

SBC 306-CR-18 102

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

sectional area of the hole or slot, in the plane of the surfaces and to join components of built-up
faying surface. members. The length of any segment of intermittent
fillet welding shall be not less than four times the
10.2.2.2 Limitations. The minimum size of
weld size, with a minimum of 40 mm.
fillet welds shall be not less than the size required
to transmit calculated forces, nor the size as shown In lap joints, the minimum amount of lap shall be
in TABLE 10-4. These provisions do not apply to five times the thickness of the thinner part joined,
fillet weld reinforcements of partial- or complete- but not less than 25 mm. Lap joints joining plates
joint-penetration groove welds. or bars subjected to axial stress that utilize
transverse fillet welds only shall be fillet welded
The maximum size of fillet welds of connected parts
along the end of both lapped parts, except where the
shall be:
deflection of the lapped parts is sufficiently
(a) Along edges of material less than 6 mm thick; restrained to prevent opening of the joint under
not greater than the thickness of the material. maximum loading.
(b) Along edges of material 6 mm or more in Fillet weld terminations are permitted to be
thickness; not greater than the thickness of the stopped short or extend to the ends or sides of parts
material minus 2 mm, unless the weld is or be boxed except as limited by the following:
especially designated on the drawings to be
built out to obtain full-throat thickness. In the 1. For overlapping elements of members in
as-welded condition, the distance between the which one connected part extends
edge of the base metal and the toe of the weld beyond an edge of another connected part
is permitted to be less than 2 mm provided the that is subject to calculated tensile stress,
weld size is clearly verifiable. fillet welds shall terminate not less than
the size of the weld from that edge.
The minimum length of fillet welds designed on the
basis of strength shall be not less than four times the 2. For connections where flexibility of the
nominal weld size, or else the effective size of the outstanding elements is required, when
weld shall be considered not to exceed one quarter end returns are used the length of the return
of its length. If longitudinal fillet welds are used shall not exceed four times the nominal
alone in end connections of flat-bar tension size of the weld nor half the width of the
members, the length of each fillet weld shall be not part.
less than the perpendicular distance between them. 3. Fillet welds joining transverse stiffeners
For the effect of longitudinal fillet weld length in to plate girder webs 20 mm thick or less
end connections upon the effective area of the shall end not less than four times nor more
connected member, see Section 4.3. than six times the thickness of the web
For end-loaded fillet welds with a length up to 100 from the web toe of the web-to-flange
times the weld size, it is permitted to take the welds, except where the ends of stiffeners
effective length equal to the actual length. When are welded to the flange.
the length of the end-loaded fillet weld exceeds Fillet welds that occur on opposite sides of a
100 times the weld size, the effective length shall common plane shall be interrupted at the corner
be determined by multiplying the actual length by common to both welds.
the reduction factor, , determined as follows:
User Note: Fillet weld terminations should be
𝛽 = 1.2 − 0.002 (𝑙 ⁄𝑤 ) < 1.0 (10-1) located approximately one weld size from the
edge of the connection to minimize notches in the
where base metal. Fillet welds terminated at the end of
l actual length of end-loaded weld, mm the joint, other than those connecting stiffeners
to girder webs, are not a cause for correction.
w size of weld leg, mm
When the length of the weld exceeds 300 times the Fillet welds in holes or slots are permitted to be
leg size, w, the effective length shall be taken as used to transmit shear and resist loads
180w. perpendicular to the faying surface in lap joints or
to prevent the buckling or separation of lapped
Intermittent fillet welds are permitted to be used to parts and to join components of built-up members.
transfer calculated stress across a joint or faying Such fillet welds may overlap, subject to the

SBC 306-CR-18 103

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

provisions of Section 10.2. Fillet welds in holes or 𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑛𝑤 𝐴𝑤𝑒 (10-3)

slots are not to be considered plug or slot welds.
where
10.2.3 Plug and Slot Welds
FnBM = nominal stress of the base metal,
10.2.3.1 Effective Area. The effective MPa
shearing area of plug and slot welds shall be Fnw = nominal stress of the weld metal,
considered as the nominal cross-sectional area of
the hole or slot in the plane of the faying surface. MPa
ABM = cross-sectional area of the base
10.2.3.2 Limitations. Plug or slot welds are metal, mm2
permitted to be used to transmit shear in lap joints
Awe = effective area of the weld, mm2
or to prevent buckling or separation of lapped parts
and to join component parts of built-up members. The values of , FnBM and Fnw and limitations
The diameter of the holes for a plug weld shall not thereon are given in TABLE 10-5.
be less than the thickness of the part containing it Alternatively, for fillet welds the design strength is
plus 8 mm, rounded to the next larger even mm, permitted to be determined as follows:
nor greater than the minimum diameter plus 3 mm
or 2.25 times the thickness of the weld. 𝜑 = 0.75

The minimum center-to-center spacing of plug (a) For a linear weld group with a uniform leg
welds shall be four times the diameter of the hole. size, loaded through the center of gravity
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑛𝑤 𝐴𝑤𝑒 (10-4)
The length of slot for a slot weld shall not exceed 10
times the thickness of the weld. The width of the where
slot shall be not less than the thickness of the part
𝐹𝑛𝑤 = 0.60𝐹𝐸𝑋𝑋 (1.0 + 0.5 𝑠𝑖𝑛1.5 𝜃) (10-5)
containing it plus 8 mm rounded to the next larger
even mm, nor shall it be larger than 2.25 times the and
thickness of the weld. The ends of the slot shall be
semicircular or shall have the corners rounded to a FEXX filler metal classification strength, MPa
radius of not less than the thickness of the part  angle of loading measured from the weld
containing it, except those ends which extend to the longitudinal axis, degrees
edge of the part.
The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a User Note: A linear weld group is one in which
direction transverse to their length shall be four all elements are in a line or are parallel.
times the width of the slot. The minimum center-to-
(b) For weld elements within a weld group that are
center spacing in a longitudinal direction on any
analyzed using an instantaneous center of
line shall be two times the length of the slot.
rotation method, the components of the
The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 16 nominal strength, Rnx and Rny, and the nominal
mm or less in thickness shall be equal to the moment capacity, Mn, are permitted to be
thickness of the material. In material over 16 mm determined as follows:
thick, the thickness of the weld shall be at least
one-half the thickness of the material but not less 𝑅𝑛𝑥 = ∑ 𝐹𝑛𝑤𝑖𝑥 𝐴𝑤𝑒𝑖 (10-6)
than 16 mm.
𝑅𝑛𝑦 = ∑ 𝐹𝑛𝑤𝑖𝑦 𝐴𝑤𝑒𝑖 (10-7)
10.2.4 Strength. The design strength, Rn of
𝑀𝑛 = ∑[𝐹𝑛𝑤𝑖𝑦 𝐴𝑤𝑒𝑖 (𝑥𝑖 ) − 𝐹𝑛𝑤𝑖𝑥 𝐴𝑤𝑒𝑖 (𝑦𝑖 )] (10-8)
welded joints shall be the lower value of the base
material strength determined according to the limit where
states of tensile rupture and shear rupture and the
Awei effective area of weld throat of the ith
weld metal strength determined according to the
limit state of rupture as follows: weld element, mm2

For the base metal 𝐹𝑛𝑤𝑖 = 0.60𝐹𝐸𝑋𝑋 (1.0 + 0.5 𝑠𝑖𝑛1.5 𝜃𝑖 )𝑓(𝑝𝑖 ) (10-9)
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑛𝐵𝑀 𝐴𝐵𝑀 (10-2) 𝑓(𝑝𝑖 ) = [𝑝𝑖 (1.9 − 0.9𝑝𝑖 )]0.3 10-10)
For the weld metal

SBC 306-CR-18 104

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

Fnwi nominal stress in the ith weld element, Rnwl total nominal strength of longitudinally
MPa loaded fillet welds, as determined in
accordance with TABLE 10-5, N
Fnwix x-component of nominal stress, Fnwi,
MPa Rnwt total nominal strength of transversely
loaded fillet welds, as determined in
Fnwiy y-component of nominal stress, Fnwi,
accordance with TABLE 10-5 without the
MPa alternate in Section 10.2.4 a, N
pi i /mi , ratio of element i 10.2.5 Combination of Welds. If two or more of
deformation to its deformation at the general types of welds (groove, fillet, plug, slot)
maximum stress are combined in a single joint, the strength of each
ri distance from instantaneous center of shall be separately computed with reference to the
rotation to ith weld element, mm axis of the group in order to determine the strength
of the combination.
xi x component of ri
10.2.6 Filler Metal Requirements. The choice
yi y component of ri of filler metal for use with complete-joint-
penetration groove welds subject to tension normal
𝛥𝑖       = 𝑟𝑖 𝛥𝑢𝑐𝑟 ⁄𝑟𝑐𝑟  deformation of the ith to the effective area shall comply with the
weld element at an intermediate requirements for matching filler metals given in
stress level, linearly proportioned to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
the critical deformation based on
distance from the instantaneous Filler metal with a specified minimum Charpy V-
center of rotation, ri, mm notch toughness of 27 J at 4 °C or lower shall be
used in the following joints:
𝛥𝑚𝑖      = 0.209(𝜃𝑖 + 2)−0.32 𝑤, deformation of
the ith weld element at maximum 1. Complete-joint-penetration groove welded
stress, mm T- and corner joints with steel backing left
in place, subject to tension normal to the
ucr deformation of the weld element effective area, unless the joints are
with minimum ui /ri ratio at ultimate designed using the nominal strength and
stress (rupture), usually in the resistance factor or safety factor as
element furthest from instantaneous applicable for a partial-joint-penetration
center of rotation, mm groove weld
𝛥𝑢𝑖       = 1.087(𝜃𝑖 + 6)−0.65 𝑤 ≤ 0.17𝑤 , 2. Complete-joint-penetration groove welded
deformation of the ith weld element splices subject to tension normal to the
at ultimate stress (rupture), mm effective area in heavy sections as defined
in Sections 1.3.1.3 and 1.3.1.4
i angle between the longitudinal axis of
ith weld element and the direction of the The manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance
resultant force acting on the element, shall be sufficient evidence of compliance.
degrees 10.2.7 Mixed Weld Metal. When Charpy V-
(c) For fillet weld groups concentrically loaded notch toughness is specified, the process
and consisting of elements with a uniform leg consumables for all weld metal, tack welds, root
size that are oriented both longitudinally and pass and subsequent passes deposited in a joint shall
transversely to the direction of applied load, be compatible to ensure notch-tough composite
the combined strength, Rn, of the fillet weld weld metal.
group shall be determined as the greater of 10.3—Bolts and Threaded Parts
(i) 𝑅𝑛 = 𝑅𝑛𝑤𝑙 + 𝑅𝑛𝑤𝑡 (10-11) 10.3.1 High-Strength Bolts. Use of high-
strength bolts shall conform to the provisions of
or
the Specification for Structural Joints Using High-
(ii) 𝑅𝑛 = 0.85𝑅𝑛𝑤𝑙 + 1.5𝑅𝑛𝑤𝑡 (10-12) Strength Bolts, hereafter referred to as the RCSC
Specification, as approved by the Research Council
where on Structural Connections, except as otherwise
provided in this Code. High-strength bolts in this

SBC 306-CR-18 105

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

Code are grouped according to material strength as requirements of the RCSC Specification with
follows: modifications as required for the increased
diameter and/or length to provide the design
Group A—ASTM A325, A325M, F1852, A354
pretension.
Grade BC, and A449
10.3.2 Size and Use of Holes. The maximum
Group B—ASTM A490, A490M, F2280, and A354
sizes of holes for bolts are given in TABLE 10-8,
Grade BD
except that larger holes, required for tolerance on
When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those location of anchor rods in concrete foundations, are
adjacent to the washers, shall be free of scale, permitted in column base details.
except tight mill scale.
Standard holes or short-slotted holes transverse to
Bolts are permitted to be installed to the snug-tight the direction of the load shall be provided in
condition when used in: accordance with the provisions of this Code,
(a) bearing-type connections except as noted in unless oversized holes, short-slotted holes parallel
Section 5.6 or Section 10.1.10 to the load, or long-slotted holes are approved by
the engineer of record. Finger shims up to 6 mm
(d) tension or combined shear and tension are permitted in slip- critical connections designed
applications, for Group A bolts only, where on the basis of standard holes without reducing
loosening or fatigue due to vibration or load the nominal shear strength of the fastener to that
fluctuations are not design considerations specified for slotted holes.
The snug-tight condition is defined as the tightness Oversized holes are permitted in any or all plies of
required to bring the connected plies into firm slip-critical connections, but they shall not be used
contact. Bolts to be tightened to a condition other in bearing-type connections. Hardened washers
than snug tight shall be clearly identified on the shall be installed over oversized holes in an outer
design drawings. ply.
All high-strength bolts specified on the design Short-slotted holes are permitted in any or all plies
drawings to be used in pretensioned or slip-critical of slip-critical or bearing-type connections. The
joints shall be tightened to a bolt tension not less slots are permitted without regard to direction of
than that given in TABLE 10-6. Installation shall loading in slip- critical connections, but the length
be by any of the following methods: turn-of-nut shall be normal to the direction of the load in
method, a direct-tension-indicator, twist-off-type bearing-type connections. Washers shall be
tension-control bolt, calibrated wrench, or installed over short-slotted holes in an outer ply;
alternative design bolt. when high-strength bolts are used, such washers
shall be hardened washers conforming to ASTM
User Note: There are no specific minimum or F436.
maximum tension requirements for snug-tight
bolts. Fully pretensioned bolts such as ASTM When Group B bolts over 25 mm in diameter are
F1852 or F2280 are permitted unless specifically used in slotted or oversized holes in external plies,
prohibited on design drawings. a single hardened washer conforming to ASTM
F436, except with 8 mm minimum thickness, shall
When bolt requirements cannot be provided within be used in lieu of the standard washer.
the RCSC Specification limitations because of
requirements for lengths exceeding 12 diameters User Note: Washer requirements are provided
or diameters exceeding 38 mm, bolts or threaded in the RCSC Specification, Section 6.
rods conforming to Group A or Group B materials
are permitted to be used in accordance with the Long-slotted holes are permitted in only one of the
provisions for threaded parts in TABLE 10-7. connected parts of either a slip-critical or bearing-
type connection at an individual faying surface.
When ASTM A354 Grade BC, A354 Grade BD, or Long-slotted holes are permitted without regard
A449 bolts and threaded rods are used in slip- to direction of loading in slip-critical connections,
critical connections, the bolt geometry including but shall be normal to the direction of load in
the thread pitch, thread length, head and nut(s) shall bearing-type connections. Where long-slotted
be equal to or (if larger in diameter) proportional to holes are used in an outer ply, plate washers, or a
that required by the RCSC Specification. continuous bar with standard holes, having a size
Installation shall comply with all applicable

SBC 306-CR-18 106

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

sufficient to completely cover the slot after exceed 24 times the thickness of the thinner part
installation, shall be provided. In high-strength or 300 mm.
bolted connections, such plate washers or (b) For unpainted members of weathering steel
continuous bars shall be not less than 8 mm thick subject to atmospheric corrosion, the spacing
and shall be of structural grade material, but need shall not exceed 14 times the thickness of the
not be hardened. If hardened washers are required thinner part or 180 mm.
for use of high-strength bolts, the hardened
washers shall be placed over the outer surface of User Note: Dimensions in (a) and (b) do not
the plate washer or bar. apply to elements consisting of two shapes in
continuous contact.
10.3.3 Minimum Spacing. The distance between
centers of standard, oversized or slotted holes shall
10.3.6 Tensile and Shear Strength of Bolts and
not be less than 2.67 times the nominal diameter, d,
Threaded Parts. The design tensile or shear
of the fastener; a distance of 3d is preferred.
strength, Rn of a snug-tightened or pretensioned
User Note: ASTM F1554 anchor rods may be high-strength bolt or threaded part shall be
furnished in accordance to product determined according to the limit states of tension
specifications with a body diameter less than rupture and shear rupture as follows:
the nominal diameter. Load effects such as
bending and elongation should be calculated 𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑛 𝐴𝑏 (10-13)
based on minimum diameters permitted by 𝜑 = 0.75
the product specification. See ASTM F1554
and the “Applicable ASTM Specifications where
for Various Types of Structural Fasteners,” Ab = nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or
in CHAPTER 1. threaded part, mm2
10.3.4 Minimum Edge Distance. The distance Fn = nominal tensile stress, Fnt, or shear stress,
from the center of a standard hole to an edge of a Fnv, from TABLE 10-7, MPa
connected part in any direction shall not be less
The required tensile strength shall include any
than either the applicable value from TABLE 10-9,
tension resulting from prying action produced by
or as required in Section 10.3.10 . The distance from
deformation of the connected parts.
the center of an oversized or slotted hole to an edge
of a connected part shall be not less than that
User Note: The force that can be resisted by
required for a standard hole to an edge of a
a snug-tightened or pretensioned high-
connected part plus the applicable increment, C2,
strength bolt or threaded part may be limited
from TABLE 10-10. by the bearing strength at the bolt hole per
Section 10.3.10 . The effective strength of an
User Note: The edge distances in TABLE individual fastener may be taken as the lesser
10-8 are minimum edge distances based on of the fastener shear strength per Section
standard fabrication practices and 10.3.6 or the bearing strength at the bolt hole
workmanship tolerances. The appropriate per Section 10.3.10 . The strength of the bolt
provisions of Sections 10.3.10 and 10.4 must group is taken as the sum of the effective
be satisfied. strengths of the individual fasteners.
10.3.5 Maximum Spacing and Edge Distance. 10.3.7 Combined Tension and Shear in
The maximum distance from the center of any bolt Bearing-Type Connections. The design tensile
to the nearest edge of parts in contact shall be 12 strength of a bolt subjected to combined tension
times the thickness of the connected part under and shear shall be determined according to the
consideration, but shall not exceed 150 mm. The limit states of tension and shear rupture as
longitudinal spacing of fasteners between follows:
elements consisting of a plate and a shape or two
′
plates in continuous contact shall be as follows: 𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑛𝑡 𝐴𝑏 (10-14)
(a) For painted members or unpainted members not 𝜑 = 0.75
subject to corrosion, the spacing shall not where

SBC 306-CR-18 107

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

F nt = nominal tensile stress modified to include 𝜇 = 0.30

the effects of shear stress, MPa For Class B surfaces (unpainted blast-
′
𝐹𝑛𝑡 cleaned steel surfaces or surfaces with Class
𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 1.3𝐹𝑛𝑡 − ( ) 𝑓 ≤ 𝐹𝑛𝑡 (10-15) B coatings on blast-cleaned steel)
𝜑 𝐹𝑛𝑣 𝑟𝑣
Fnt = nominal tensile stress from TABLE 10-7, 𝜇 = 0.50
MPa Du 1.13, a multiplier that reflects the ratio
Fnv = nominal shear stress from TABLE 10-7, of the mean installed bolt pretension to
the specified minimum bolt pretension.
MPa
The use of other values may be approved
frv = required shear stress using LRFD load by the engineer of record.
combinations, MPa
Tb minimum fastener tension given in
The design shear stress of the fastener shall equal TABLE 10-6, kN
or exceed the required shear stress, frv.
hf factor for fillers, determined as follows:
User Note: Note that when the required stress, Where there are no fillers or where bolts have
f, in either shear or tension, is less than or equal been added to distribute loads in the filler
to 30% of the corresponding design stress, the
effects of combined stress need not be ℎ𝑓 = 1.0
investigated. Also note that Eq. (10-15) can be Where bolts have not been added to distribute
rewritten so as to find a nominal shear stress, the load in the filler:
F nv, as a function of the required tensile stress,
ft. (a) For one filler between connected parts
ℎ𝑓 = 1.0
10.3.8 High-Strength Bolts in Slip-Critical (b) For two or more fillers between
Connections. Slip-critical connections shall be connected parts
designed to prevent slip and for the limit states of
bearing-type connections. When slip-critical bolts ℎ𝑓 = 0.85
pass through fillers, all surfaces subject to slip shall
be prepared to achieve design slip resistance. ns number of slip planes required to permit
the connection to slip
The design slip resistance for the limit state of slip
shall be determined as follows: 10.3.9 Combined Tension and Shear in Slip-
Critical Connections. When a slip-critical
𝑅𝑛 = 𝜇 𝐷𝑢  ℎ𝑓  𝑇𝑏  𝑛𝑠 (10-16) connection is subjected to an applied tension that
(a) For standard size and short-slotted holes reduces the net clamping force, the design slip
perpendicular to the direction of the load resistance per bolt, from Section 10.3.8 , shall be
(e) 𝜑 = 1.00 multiplied by the factor, ksc, as follows:
(b) For oversized and short-slotted holes parallel to 𝑘𝑠𝑐 = 1 − (𝑇𝑢 ⁄𝐷𝑢  𝑇𝑏  𝑛𝑏 ) (10-17)
the direction of the load where
(f) 𝜑 = 0.85 Tu required tension force, kN
(c) For long-slotted holes
nb number of bolts carrying the applied
(g) 𝜑 = 0.70
tension
where
10.3.10 Bearing Strength at Bolt Holes. The
μ mean slip coefficient for Class A or B surfaces, design bearing strength, Rn at bolt holes shall be
as applicable, and determined as follows, or as determined for the limit state of bearing as
established by tests: follows:
For Class A surfaces (unpainted clean mill 𝜑 = 0.75
scale steel surfaces or surfaces with Class A
coatings on blast-cleaned steel or hotdipped The nominal bearing strength of the connected
galvanized and roughened surfaces) material, Rn, is determined as follows:

SBC 306-CR-18 108

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

(a) For a bolt in a connection with standard, 10.3.12 Tension Fasteners. When bolts or other
oversized and short-slotted holes, independent fasteners in tension are attached to an unstiffened
of the direction of loading, or a long-slotted box or HSS wall, the strength of the wall shall be
hole with the slot parallel to the direction of the determined by rational analysis.
bearing force
10.4—Affected Elements of Members
When deformation at the bolt hole at service and Connecting Elements
load is a design consideration
This section applies to elements of members at
𝑅𝑛 = 1.2 𝑙𝑐  𝑡 𝐹𝑢 ≤ 2.4 𝑑 𝑡 𝐹𝑢 (10-18) connections and connecting elements, such as
When deformation at the bolt hole at service plates, gussets, angles and brackets.
load is not a design consideration 10.4.1 Strength of Elements in Tension. The
𝑅𝑛 = 1.5 𝑙𝑐  𝑡 𝐹𝑢 ≤ 3.0 𝑑 𝑡 𝐹𝑢 (10-19) design strength, Rn , of affected and connecting
elements loaded in tension shall be the lower value
(b) For a bolt in a connection with long-slotted obtained according to the limit states of tensile
holes with the slot perpendicular to the yielding and tensile rupture.
direction of force
𝑅𝑛 = 1.0 𝑙𝑐  𝑡 𝐹𝑢 ≤ 2.0 𝑑 𝑡 𝐹𝑢 (10-20) (a) For tensile yielding of connecting elements
(c) For connections made using bolts that pass 𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 (10-21)
completely through an unstiffened box 𝜑 = 0.90
member or HSS, see Section 10.7 and Eq. (b) For tensile rupture of connecting elements
(10-27); 𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑒 (10-22)
where 𝜑 = 0.75
Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of the where
connected material, MPa
Ae effective net area as defined in Section
d = nominal bolt diameter, mm 4.3, mm2; for bolted splice plates, 𝐴𝑒 =
lc = clear distance, in the direction of the 𝐴𝑛 ≤ 0.85𝐴𝑔 .
force, between the edge of the hole and
the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of User Note: The effective net area of the
the material, mm connection plate may be limited due to stress
distribution as calculated by methods such as the
t = thickness of connected material, mm Whitmore section.
For connections, the bearing resistance shall be
taken as the sum of the bearing resistances of the 10.4.2 Strength of Elements in Shear. The
individual bolts. design shear strength of affected and connecting
elements in shear shall be the lower value obtained
Bearing strength shall be checked for both bearing- according to the limit states of shear yielding and
type and slip-critical connections. The use of shear rupture:
oversized holes and short- and long-slotted holes
parallel to the line of force is restricted to slip- (a) For shear yielding of the element:
critical connections per Section 10.3.2 . 𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 (10-23)
𝜑 = 1.00
User Note: The effective strength of an
individual fastener is the lesser of the fastener where
shear strength per Section 10.3.6 or the Agv gross area subject to shear, mm2
bearing strength at the bolt hole per Section
10.3.10 . The strength of the bolt group is the (b) For shear rupture of the element:
sum of the effective strengths of the individual 𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 (10-24)
fasteners. 𝜑 = 0.75

10.3.11 Special Fasteners. The nominal strength where

of special fasteners other than the bolts presented in Anv net area subject to shear, mm2
TABLE 10-7 shall be verified by tests.

SBC 306-CR-18 109

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

10.4.3 Block Shear Strength. The design 10.5.1.2 Thick Fillers. When the thickness
strength for the limit state of block shear rupture of the fillers is adequate to transfer the applied
along a shear failure path or paths and a force between the connected parts, the filler shall
perpendicular tension failure path shall be taken as extend beyond the edges of the outside connected
base metal. The welds joining the outside connected
𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 ≤
base metal to the filler shall be sufficient to
0.60𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 (10-25) transmit the force to the filler and the area
subjected to the applied force in the filler shall
𝜑 = 0.75 be adequate to avoid overstressing the filler. The
where welds joining the filler to the inside connected
base metal shall be adequate to transmit the
Ant net area subject to tension, mm2 applied force.
Where the tension stress is uniform, Ubs 1; where 10.5.2 Fillers in Bolted Connections. When a
the tension stress is nonuniform, Ubs 0.5. bolt that carries load passes through fillers that are
equal to or less than 6 mm thick, the shear strength
User Note: Typical cases where Ubs should be shall be used without reduction. When a bolt that
taken equal to 0.5 are illustrated in the carries load passes through fillers that are greater
Commentary. than 6 mm thick, one of the following requirements
shall apply:
10.4.4 Strength of Elements in Compression. (a) The shear strength of the bolts shall be
The design strength of connecting elements in multiplied by the factor 1 − 0.0154 (𝑡 − 6)
compression for the limit states of yielding and but not less than 0.85, where t is the total
buckling shall be determined as follows: thickness of the fillers; mm
(a) When 𝐾𝐿⁄𝑟 ≤ 25 (b) The fillers shall be extended beyond the joint
𝑃𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 (10-26) and the filler extension shall be secured with
𝜑 = 0.90 enough bolts to uniformly distribute the total
force in the connected element over the
(b) When 𝐾𝐿⁄𝑟 > 25, the provisions of Chapter 5 combined cross section of the connected
apply. element and the fillers;
10.4.5 Strength of Elements in Flexure. The (c) The size of the joint shall be increased to
design flexural strength of affected elements shall be accommodate a number of bolts that is
the lower value obtained according to the limit equivalent to the total number required in (b)
states of flexural yielding, local buckling, flexural above; or
lateral- torsional buckling and flexural rupture. (d) The joint shall be designed to prevent slip in
10.5—Fillers accordance with Section 10.3.8 using either
Class B surfaces or Class A surfaces with turn-
10.5.1 Fillers in Welded Connections. of-nut tightening.
Whenever it is necessary to use fillers in joints
required to transfer applied force, the fillers and the 10.6—Splices
connecting welds shall conform to the requirements Groove-welded splices in plate girders and beams
of Section 10.5.1.1 or Section 10.5.1.2 as shall develop the nominal strength of the smaller
applicable. spliced section. Other types of splices in cross
10.5.1.1 Thin Fillers. Fillers less than 6 sections of plate girders and beams shall develop
mm thick shall not be used to transfer stress. When the strength required by the forces at the point of
the thickness of the fillers is less than 6 mm, or the splice.
when the thickness of the filler is 6 mm or greater 10.7—Bearing Strength
but not adequate to transfer the applied force
between the connected parts, the filler shall be kept The design bearing strength, Rn, surfaces in
flush with the edge of the outside connected part, contact shall be determined for the limit state of
and the size of the weld shall be increased over the bearing (local compressive yielding) as follows:
required size by an amount equal to the thickness
𝜑 = 0.75
of the filler.

SBC 306-CR-18 110

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

The nominal bearing strength, Rn, shall be f c = specified compressive strength of

determined as follows: concrete, MPa
(a) For finished surfaces, pins in reamed, drilled, 10.9—Anchor Rods and Embedments
or bored holes, and ends of fitted bearing
stiffeners Anchor rods shall be designed to provide the
required resistance to loads on the completed
𝑅𝑛 = 1.8𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑝𝑏 (10-27) structure at the base of columns including the net
where tensile components of any bending moment that
may result from load combinations stipulated in
Apb projected area in bearing, mm2 Section 2.2. The anchor rods shall be designed in
Fy specified minimum yield stress, MPa accordance with the requirements for threaded parts
in TABLE 10-7.
(b) For expansion rollers and rockers
Design of column bases and anchor rods for the
When d 635 mm transfer of forces to the concrete foundation
including bearing against the concrete elements
𝑅𝑛 = 1.2(𝐹𝑦 − 90) 𝑙𝑏 𝑑 ⁄20 (10-28) shall satisfy the requirements of SBC 304 or ACI
When d > 635 mm 349.

𝑅𝑛 = 30.2(𝐹𝑦 − 90) 𝑙𝑏 √𝑑 ⁄20 (10-29) User Note: When columns are required to resist
where a horizontal force at the base plate, bearing
against the concrete elements should be
d = diameter, mm considered.
lb length of bearing, mm
When anchor rods are used to resist horizontal
forces, hole size, anchor rod setting tolerance, and
the horizontal movement of the column shall be
10.8—Column Bases and Bearing on considered in the design.
Concrete
Larger oversized holes and slotted holes are
Proper provision shall be made to transfer the permitted in base plates when adequate bearing is
column loads and moments to the footings and provided for the nut by using ASTM F844 washers
foundations. or plate washers to bridge the hole.
In the absence of code regulations, the design
bearing strength, cPp, for the limit state of User Note: The permitted hole sizes,
concrete crushing are permitted to be taken as corresponding washer dimensions and nuts are
follows: given in the AISC Steel Construction Manual,
AISC (2005b) and ASTM F1554.
𝜑𝑐 = 0.65
The nominal bearing strength, Pp, is determined as
follows: 10.10—Flanges and Webs With
Concentrated Forces
(a) On the full area of a concrete support:
𝑃𝑝 = 0.85𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1 (10-30) This section applies to single- and double-
concentrated forces applied normal to the flange(s)
(b) On less than the full area of a concrete support: of wide flange sections and similar built-up shapes.
𝑃𝑝 = 0.85𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1 √𝐴2 /𝐴1 ≤ 1.7𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1 (10-31) A single-concentrated force can be either tensile or
compressive. Double-concentrated forces are one
where tensile and one compressive and form a couple on
A1 = area of steel concentrically bearing on a the same side of the loaded member.
concrete support, mm2 When the required strength exceeds the design
A2 = maximum area of the portion of the strength as determined for the limit states listed in
supporting surface that is geometrically this section, stiffeners and/or doublers shall be
similar to and concentric with the provided and shall be sized for the difference
loaded area, mm2 between the required strength and the design

SBC 306-CR-18 111

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

strength for the applicable limit state. Stiffeners (b)When the concentrated force to be resisted is
shall also meet the design requirements in applied at a distance from the member end that is
Section 10.10.8 . Doublers shall also meet the less than or equal to the depth of the member, d.
design requirement in Section 10.10.9 .
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡𝑤 (2.5𝑘 + 𝑙𝑏 ) (10-34)
User Note: See Appendix E.3 for where
requirements for the ends of cantilever
members. Fyw specified minimum yield stress of the
web material, MPa
Stiffeners are required at unframed ends of beams k distance from outer face of the flange to
in accordance with the requirements of Section the web toe of the fillet, mm
10.10.7 .
lb length of bearing (not less than k for end
10.10.1 Flange Local Bending. This section beam reactions), mm
applies to tensile single-concentrated forces and the
tensile component of double-concentrated forces. tw thickness of web, mm
The design strength, Rn, for the limit state of When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners or a
flange local bending shall be determined as doubler plate shall be provided.
follows: 10.10.3 Web Local Crippling. This section
𝑅𝑛 = 6.25𝐹𝑦𝑓 𝑡𝑓2 (10-32) applies to compressive single-concentrated forces
𝜑 = 0.90 or the compressive component of double-
concentrated forces.
where
The design strength for the limit state of web local
Fyf specified minimum yield stress of the crippling shall be determined as follows:
flange, MPa
𝜑 = 0.75
tf thickness of the loaded flange, mm
The nominal strength, Rn, shall be determined as
If the length of loading across the member flange is follows:
less than 0.15bf, where bf is the member flange
(a) When the concentrated compressive force to be
width, Eq. (10-32) need not be checked. resisted is applied at a distance from the
When the concentrated force to be resisted is member end that is greater than or equal to d/ 2:
applied at a distance from the member end that is 𝑙 𝑡
1.5
𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡𝑓
2 [1
less than 10tf, Rn shall be reduced by 50%. 𝑅𝑛 = 0.80𝑡𝑤 + 3 ( 𝑏) ( 𝑤) ]√ (10-35)
𝑑 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑤

When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners shall (b) When the concentrated compressive force to be
be provided resisted is applied at a distance from the
10.10.2 Web Local Yielding. This section applies member end that is less than d/ 2:
to single-concentrated forces and both components For 𝑙𝑏 ⁄𝑑 ≤ 0.2
of double-concentrated forces.
1.5
2 [1 𝑙 𝑡 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡𝑓
The design strength for the limit state of web local 𝑅𝑛 = 0.40𝑡𝑤 + 3 ( 𝑏) ( 𝑤) ]√ (10-36)
𝑑 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑤
yielding shall be determined as follows:
𝜑 = 1.00 For 𝑙𝑏 ⁄𝑑 > 0.2
1.5
The nominal strength, Rn, shall be determined as 2 4𝑙𝑏 𝑡 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.40𝑡𝑤 [1 + ( − 0.2) ( 𝑤) ] √ (10-37)
follows: 𝑑 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑤

(a) When the concentrated force to be resisted is where

applied at a distance from the member end that
is greater than the depth of the member, d, d full nominal depth of the section, mm
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡𝑤 (5𝑘 + 𝑙𝑏 ) (10-33) When required, a transverse stiffener, a pair of
transverse stiffeners, or a doubler plate extending
at least one-half the depth of the web shall be
provided.

SBC 306-CR-18 112

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

10.10.4 Web Sidesway Buckling. This section Mu required flexural strength using LRFD
applies only to compressive single-concentrated load combinations, N-mm
forces applied to members where relative lateral
movement between the loaded compression flange bf width of flange, mm
and the tension flange is not restrained at the point h clear distance between flanges less the
of application of the concentrated force. fillet or corner radius for rolled shapes;
The design strength of the web for the limit state distance between adjacent lines of
of sidesway buckling shall be determined as fasteners or the clear distance between
follows: flanges when welds are used for built-up
shapes, mm
0.85
The nominal strength, Rn, shall be determined as User Note: For determination of adequate
follows: restraint, refer to Appendix E.

(a) If the compression flange is restrained against 10.10.5 Web Compression Buckling. This
rotation section applies to a pair of compressive single-
When (ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 )⁄(𝐿𝑏 ⁄𝑏𝑓 ) ≤ 2.3 concentrated forces or the compressive components
in a pair of double-concentrated forces, applied at
3 3 both flanges of a member at the same location.
𝐶𝑟 𝑡𝑤 𝑡𝑓 h/𝑡𝑤
𝑅𝑛 = [1 + 0.4 ( ) ] (10-38)
h2 𝐿𝑏 /𝑏𝑓 The design strength for the limit state of web local
buckling shall be determined as follows:
When(ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 )⁄(𝐿𝑏 ⁄𝑏𝑓 ) > 2.3, the limit state 3
of web sidesway buckling does not apply. 24𝑡𝑤 √𝐸 𝐹𝑦𝑤
𝑅𝑛 = (10-40)
ℎ
When the required strength of the web exceeds the 𝜑 = 0.90
design strength, local lateral bracing shall be
provided at the tension flange or either a pair of When the pair of concentrated compressive forces
transverse stiffeners or a doubler plate shall be to be resisted is applied at a distance from the
provided. member end that is less than d/2, Rn shall be
reduced by 50%.
(b) If the compression flange is not restrained
against rotation When required, a single transverse stiffener, a pair
of transverse stiffeners, or a doubler plate extending
When (ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 )⁄(𝐿𝑏 ⁄𝑏𝑓 ) ≤ 1.7 the full depth of the web shall be provided.
3 3
𝐶𝑟 𝑡𝑤 𝑡𝑓 h/𝑡𝑤 10.10.6 Web Panel Zone Shear. This section
𝑅𝑛 = [0.4 ( ) ] (10-39) applies to double-concentrated forces applied to
h2 𝐿𝑏 /𝑏𝑓
one or both flanges of a member at the same
When (ℎ⁄𝑡𝑤 )⁄(𝐿𝑏 ⁄𝑏𝑓 ) > 1.7, the limit state location.
of web sidesway buckling does not apply. The design strength of the web panel zone for the
When the required strength of the web exceeds the limit state of shear yielding shall be determined as
design strength, local lateral bracing shall be follows:
provided at both flanges at the point of application 𝜑 = 0.90
of the concentrated forces.
The nominal strength, Rn, shall be determined as
In Eq. (10-38) and (10-39), the following
follows:
definitions apply:
(a) When the effect of panel-zone deformation on
𝐶𝑟       = 6.62 × 106 MPa when Mu My at the
frame stability is not considered in the analysis:
location of the force
For 𝑃𝑟 ≤ 0.4𝑃𝑐
 3.31 × 106 MPa when Mu My at the
location of the force 𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 (10-41)
Lb largest laterally unbraced length along (b) For 𝑃𝑟 > 0.4𝑃𝑐
either flange at the point of load, mm

SBC 306-CR-18 113

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

𝑃𝑟 between the required strength and design strength.

𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 (1.4 − ) (10-42)
𝑃𝑐 The stiffener to web welds shall be sized to transfer
(c) When frame stability, including plastic panel- to the web the algebraic difference in tensile force
zone deformation, is considered in the analysis: at the ends of the stiffener.

For 𝑃𝑟 ≤ 0.75𝑃𝑐 Stiffeners required to resist compressive

concentrated forces shall be designed in
2
3𝑏𝑐𝑓 𝑡𝑐𝑓 accordance with the requirements in Section
𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 (1 + ) (10-43)
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐 𝑡 𝑤 10.4.4 and shall either bear on or be welded to
For 𝑃𝑟 > 0.75𝑃𝑐 the loaded flange and welded to the web. The welds
2
to the flange shall be sized for the difference
3𝑏𝑐𝑓 𝑡𝑐𝑓 1.2𝑃𝑟
𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 (1 + ) (1.9 − ) (10-44) between the required strength and the applicable
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 𝑃𝑐
limit state strength. The weld to the web shall be
In Eq. (10-41) through (10-44), the following sized to transfer to the web the algebraic difference
definitions apply: in compression force at the ends of the stiffener. For
fitted bearing stiffeners, see Section 10.7.
Ag gross cross-sectional area of member,
mm2 Transverse full depth bearing stiffeners for
compressive forces applied to a beam or plate
bcf width of column flange, mm girder flange(s) shall be designed as axially
db depth of beam, mm compressed members (columns) in accordance
with the requirements of Section 5.6.2 and
dc depth of column, mm Section 10.4.4 . The member properties shall be
determined using an effective length of 0.75h and a
Fy specified minimum yield stress of the
cross section composed of two stiffeners, and a strip
column web, MPa of the web having a width of 25tw at interior
Pc Py, N stiffeners and 12tw at the ends of members. The
weld connecting full depth bearing stiffeners to the
Pr required axial strength using load web shall be sized to transmit the difference in
combinations, N compressive force at each of the stiffeners to the
Py Fy Ag, axial yield strength of the column, web.
N Transverse and diagonal stiffeners shall comply
tcf thickness of column flange, mm with the following additional requirements:
1. The width of each stiffener plus one-half
tw thickness of column web, mm
the thickness of the column web shall not
When required, doubler plate(s) or a pair of be less than one-third of the flange or
diagonal stiffeners shall be provided within the moment connection plate width delivering
boundaries of the rigid connection whose webs lie the concentrated force.
in a common plane. 2. The thickness of a stiffener shall not be
See Section 10.10.9 for doubler plate design less than one-half the thickness of the
requirements. flange or moment connection plate
delivering the concentrated load, nor less
10.10.7 Unframed Ends of Beams and Girders.
than the width divided by 16.
At unframed ends of beams and girders not
otherwise restrained against rotation about their 3. Transverse stiffeners shall extend a
longitudinal axes, a pair of transverse stiffeners, minimum of one-half the depth of the
extending the full depth of the web, shall be member except as required in Section
provided. 10.10.5 and Section 10.10.7 .
10.10.8 Additional Stiffener Requirements for
Concentrated Forces. Stiffeners required to resist
10.10.9 Additional Doubler Plate Requirements
tensile concentrated forces shall be designed in
for Concentrated Forces. Doubler plates required
accordance with the requirements of Section 10.4.1
for compression strength shall be designed in
and welded to the loaded flange and the web. The
accordance with the requirements of Chapter 5.
welds to the flange shall be sized for the difference

SBC 306-CR-18 114

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

Doubler plates required for tensile strength shall be

designed in accordance with the requirements of
Chapter 4.
Doubler plates required for shear strength (see
Section 10.10.6 ) shall be designed in accordance
with the provisions of Chapter 7.
Doubler plates shall comply with the following
additional requirements:
1. The thickness and extent of the doubler
plate shall provide the additional material
necessary to equal or exceed the strength
requirements.
2. The doubler plate shall be welded to
develop the proportion of the total force
transmitted to the doubler plate.

SBC 306-CR-18 115

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

TABLES AND FIGURES OF CHAPTER 10

TABLE 10-1 : EFFECTIVE THROAT OF PARTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS

Welding
Position
F (flat), Groove Type (AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
Welding Process H (horizontal), Effective Throat
Figure 3.3)
V (vertical),
OH (overhead)
Shielded metal arc
(SMAW) J or U groove
All
Gas metal arc (GMAW) 60° V depth of groove
Flux cored arc (FCAW)
Submerged arc (SAW) F J or U groove 60° bevel or V
Gas metal arc (GMAW)
F, H 45° bevel depth of groove
Flux cored arc (FCAW)
Shielded metal arc
All
(SMAW) depth of groove minus 3
45° bevel
Gas metal arc (GMAW) mm
V, OH
Flux cored arc (FCAW)

TABLE 10-2 : EFFECTIVE WELD THROATS OF FLARE GROOVE WELDS

Welding Process Flare Bevel Groove [a] Flare V-Groove

GMAW and FCAW-G 5/8 R 3/4 R
SMAW and FCAW-S 5/16 R 5/8 R
SAW 5/16 R 1/2 R
[a]
For flare bevel groove with R < 10 mm, use only reinforcing fillet weld on filled flush joint.
General note: R = radius of joint surface (can be assumed to be 2t for HSS), mm

TABLE 10-3 : MINIMUM EFFECTIVE THROAT OF PARTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE

WELDS

Material Thickness of Minimum Effective

Thinner Part Joined, mm Throat, [a] mm
To 6 inclusive 3
Over 6 to 13 5
Over 13 to 19 6
Over 19 to 38 8
Over 38 to 57 10
Over 57 to 150 13
Over 150 16
[a]
See TABLE 10-1.

TABLE 10-4 : MINIMUM SIZE OF FILLET WELDS

Material Thickness of Minimum Size of

Thinner Part Joined, mm Fillet Weld, [a] mm
To 6 inclusive 3
Over 6 to 13 5
Over 13 to 19 6
Over 19 8
[a]
Leg dimension of fillet welds. Single pass welds must be used.
Note: See Section 10.2.2.2 for maximum size of fillet welds.

SBC 306-CR-18 116

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

TABLE 10-5: DESIGN STRENGTH OF WELDED JOINTS, MPA

Nominal
Effective
Load Type and Stress Required Filler
Pertinent Area (ABM
Direction Relative to ϕ (FnBM or Metal Strength
Metal or Awe)
Weld Axis Fnw) Level [a][b]
mm2
MPa
COMPLETE-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS
Matching filler metal shall be
used. For T- and corner joints
Tension Strength of the joint is controlled
with backing left in place, notch
Normal to weld axis by the base metal
tough filler metal is required.
See Section 10.2.6 .
Filler metal with a strength
Compression Strength of the joint is controlled level equal to or one strength
Normal to weld axis by the base metal level less than matching filler
metal is permitted.
Filler metal with a strength
Tension or Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to level equal to or less than
compression Parallel a weld need not be considered in design
matching filler metal is
to weld axis of welds joining the parts.
permitted.
Strength of the joint is controlled by the base Matching filler metal shall
Shear
metal be used.[c]
PARTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS INCLUDING FLARE V-GROOVE AND
FLARE BEVEL GROOVE WELDS
Tension Base ϕ = 0.75 Fu See 10.4
Normal to weld axis Weld ϕ = 0.80 0.60FEXX See 10.2.1.1
Compression Column to
base plate and column Compressive stress need not be considered in design
splices designed per of welds joining the parts.
Section 10.1.4 (1)
Compression Base ϕ = 0.90 Fy See 10.4
Connections of
members designed to Filler metal with a
bear other than Weld ϕ = 0.80 0.60 FEXX See 10.2.1.1 strength level equal
columns as described in to or less than
Section 10.1.4 (2) matching filler metal
Compression Base ϕ = 0.90 Fy See 10.4 is permitted.
Connections not
Weld ϕ = 0.80 0.90 FEXX See 10.2.1.1
finished-to-bear
Tension or Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to a
compression Parallel weld need not be considered in design
to weld axis of welds joining the parts.
Base Governed by 10.4
Shear
Weld ϕ = 0.75 0.60 FEXX See 10.2.1.1

SBC 306-CR-18 117

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

TABLE 10-5: (CONTINUED) DESIGN STRENGTH OF WELDED JOINTS, MPa

Nominal Effective
Load Type and Stress Area Required Filler
Pertinent
Direction Relative to ϕ (FnBM or (ABM or Metal Strength
Metal
Weld Axis Fnw) Awe) Level [a][b]
MPa mm2
FILLET WELDS INCLUDING FILLETS IN HOLES AND SLOTS AND SKEWED T–JOINTS
Base Governed by 10.4
Shear
ϕ = 0.75 Filler metal with a strength
Weld 0.60 FEXX [d] See 10.2.2.1
level equal to or less than
Tension or compression Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to a matching filler metal is
Parallel to weld axis weld need not be considered in design permitted.
of welds joining the parts.
PLUG AND SLOT WELDS
Base Governed by 10.4 Filler metal with a strength
Shear Parallel to faying
level equal to or less than
surface on the surface
Weld ϕ = 0.75 0.60 FEXX See 10.2.3.1 matching filler metal is
on the effective area
permitted.
[a] For matching weld metal see AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 3.3.
[b] Filler metal with a strength level one strength level greater than matching is permitted.
[c] Filler metals with a strength level less than matching may be used for groove welds between the webs and flanges of built-up

sections transferring shear loads, or in applications where high restraint is a concern. In these applications, the weld joint shall
be detailed and the weld shall be designed using the thickness of the material as the effective throat, where ϕ =0.80 and 0.60
FEXX is the nominal strength.
[d] Alternatively, the provisions of Section 10.2.4 a are permitted provided the deformation compatibility of the various weld

elements is considered. Sections 10.2.4 b and 10.2.4 c are special applications of Section 10.2.4 a, that provide for deformation
compatibility.

TABLE 10-6 : MINIMUM BOLT PRETENSION, KN*

Group A Group B
Bolt Size, mm
( e.g., A325M Bolts) ( e.g., A490M Bolts)
M16 91 114
M20 142 179
M22 176 221
M24 205 257
M27 267 334
M30 326 408
M36 475 595
* Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts, rounded off to nearest kN, as specified in ASTM
specifications for A325M and A490M bolts with UNC threads.

SBC 306-CR-18 118

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

TABLE 10-7 : NOMINAL STRENGTH OF FASTENERS AND THREADED PARTS, MPa

Nominal Tensile Nominal Shear Strength in Bearing-

Description of Fasteners Strength,
Type Connections, Fnv , MPa [b]
Fnt , MPa [a]
A307 bolts 310 188 [c] [d]
Group A (e.g., A325) bolts, when threads are not
620 372
excluded from shear planes
Group A (e.g., A325) bolts, when threads are
620 457
excluded from shear planes
Group B (e.g., A490) bolts, when threads are not
780 457
excluded from shear planes
Group B (e.g., A490) bolts, when threads are
780 579
excluded from shear planes
Threaded parts meeting the requirements of Section
1.3.4 , when threads are not excluded from shear 0.75Fu 0.450Fu
planes
Threaded parts meeting the requirements of Section
0.75Fu 0.563Fu
1.3.4 , when threads are excluded from shear planes
[a] For high-strength bolts subject to tensile fatigue loading, see Appendix C.
[b] For end loaded connections with a fastener pattern length greater than 965 mm, Fnv shall be reduced to 83.3% of the tabulated
values. Fastener pattern length is the maximum distance parallel to the line of force between the centerline of the bolts
connecting two parts with one faying surface.
[c] For A307 bolts the tabulated values shall be reduced by 1% for each 2 mm over 5 diameters of length in the grip.
[d] Threads permitted in shear planes.

TABLE 10-8 : NOMINAL HOLE DIMENSIONS, mm

Bolt Diameter, mm
Bolt Diameter, mm Standard Oversize Short-Slot (Width x Long-Slot
(Dia.) (Dia.) Length) (Width x Length)
M16 18 20 18 x 22 18 x 40
M20 22 24 22 x 26 22 x 50
M22 24 28 24 x 30 24 x 55
M24 27 [a] 30 27 x 32 27 x 60
M27 30 35 30 x 37 30 x 67
M30 33 38 33 x 40 33 x 75
≥ M36 d+3 d+8 (d + 3) x (d + 10) (d + 3) x 2.5d
[a] Clearance provided allows the use of a 25 mm bolt if desirable.

TABLE 10-9 : MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCE [a] FROM CENTER OF STANDARD HOLE [b] TO
EDGE OF CONNECTED PART, mm

Bolt Diameter, mm Minimum Edge Distance

16 22
20 26
22 28
24 30
27 34
30 38
36 46
Over 36 1.25d
[a] If necessary, lesser edge distances are permitted provided the appropriate provisions from Sections 10.3.10 and 10.4 are
satisfied, but edge distances less than one bolt diameter are not permitted without approval from the engineer of record.
[b] For oversized or slotted holes, see TABLE 10-10

SBC 306-CR-18 119

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

TABLE 10-10 : VALUES OF EDGE DISTANCE INCREMENT C2, mm

Slotted Holes
Nominal Diameter of Fastener, Long Axis Perpendicular to
Oversized Holes Long Axis Parallel to
mm Edge
Edge
Short Slots Long Slots[a]
≤22 2 3
24 3 3 0.75d 0
≥ 27 3 5
[a]
When length of slot is less than maximum allowable (see TABLE 10-8), C2 is permitted to be reduced by one-half
the difference between the maximum and actual slot lengths.

SBC 306-CR-18 120

CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 121

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER

CONNECTIONS

This chapter addresses connections to HSS Bp width of plate, measured 90to the
members and box sections of uniform wall plane of the connection, mm
thickness. D outside diameter of round HSS, mm

User Note: Connection strength is often Fy specified minimum yield stress of HSS
governed by the size of HSS members, member material, MPa
especially the wall thickness of truss chords, and Fyp specified minimum yield stress of plate
this must be considered in the initial design. material, MPa
The chapter is organized as follows: Fu specified minimum tensile strength of
HSS member material, MPa
11.1 —Concentrated Forces on HSS
H overall height of rectangular HSS
11.2 —HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections
member, measured in the plane of the
11.3 —HSS-to-HSS Moment Connections connection, mm
11.4 —Welds of Plates and Branches to S elastic section modulus of member, mm3
Rectangular HSS
lb bearing length of the load, measured
parallel to the axis of the HSS member
(or measured across the width of the HSS
User Note: in the case of loaded cap plates), mm
See also Chapter 10 for additional t design wall thickness of HSS member,
requirements for bolting to HSS. See mm
Section 10.3.10 (c) for through-bolts.
tp thickness of plate, mm
Connection parameters must be within the
limits of applicability. Limit states need only 11.1.2 Round HSS.
be checked when connection geometry or The design strength of connections with
loading is within the parameters given in concentrated loads and within the limits in TABLE
the description of the limit state. 11-2 shall be taken as shown in TABLE 11-1.
11.1.3 Rectangular HSS.
11.1—Concentrated Forces on HSS The design strength of connections with
concentrated loads and within the limits in TABLE
The design strength, Rn of connections shall be 11-4 shall be taken as the lowest value of the
determined in accordance with the provisions of applicable limit states shown in TABLE 11-3. The
this chapter and the provisions of Section 2.3.5 . limits of applicability in TABLE 11-2 stem
11.1.1 Definitions of Parameters primarily from limitations on tests conducted to
date.
Ag gross cross-sectional area of member,
mm2
11.2—HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections
The design strength, Pn, of connections shall be
B overall width of rectangular HSS
member, measured 90° to the plane of determined in accordance with the provisions of
the connection, mm this chapter and the provisions of Section 2.3.5 .
HSS-to-HSS truss connections are defined as
connections that consist of one or more branch

SBC 306-CR-18 122

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

members that are directly welded to a continuous B = overall width of rectangular HSS main
chord that passes through the connection and shall member, measured 90° to the plane of the
be classified as follows: connection, mm
(a) When the punching load, Pr sin, in a branch Bb = overall width of rectangular HSS branch
member is equilibrated by beam shear in the member, measured 90° to the plane of the
chord member, the connection shall be connection, mm
classified as a T-connection when the branch is D = outside diameter of round HSS main
perpendicular to the chord, and a Y-connection member, mm
otherwise.
Db = outside diameter of round HSS branch
(b) When the punching load, Pr sin, in a branch
member, mm
member is essentially equilibrated (within
20%) by loads in other branch member(s) on Fy = specified minimum yield stress of HSS
the same side of the connection, the connection main member material, MPa
shall be classified as a K-connection. The Fyb = specified minimum yield stress of HSS
relevant gap is between the primary branch branch member material, MPa
members whose loads equilibrate. An N-
connection can be considered as a type of K- Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of
connection. HSS material, MPa

User Note: A K-connection with one branch H = overall height of rectangular HSS main
perpendicular to the chord is often called an member, measured in the plane of the
N-connection. connection, mm
Hb = overall height of rectangular HSS
(c) When the punching load, Pr sin, is transmitted branch member, measured in the plane of
through the chord member and is equilibrated the connection, mm
by branch member(s) on the opposite side, the 𝑙𝑜𝑣
connection shall be classified as a cross- Ov = ∗ 100 %
𝑙𝑝
connection.
(d) When a connection has more than two primary S = elastic section modulus of member, mm3
branch members, or branch members in more e = eccentricity in a truss connection,
than one plane, the connection shall be positive being away from the branches,
classified as a general or multiplanar mm
connection.
g = gap between toes of branch members in a
When branch members transmit part of their load as gapped K-connection, neglecting the
K-connections and part of their load as T-, Y- or welds, mm
cross-connections, the adequacy of the connections
shall be determined by interpolation on the lb = Hb /sin , mm
proportion of the design strength of each in total. lov = overlap length measured along the
For the purposes of this Code, the centerlines of connecting face of the chord beneath the
branch members and chord members shall lie in a two branches, mm
common plane. Rectangular HSS connections are lp = projected length of the overlapping
further limited to have all members oriented with branch on the chord, mm
walls parallel to the plane. For trusses that are made
t = design wall thickness of HSS main
with HSS that are connected by welding branch
member, mm
members to chord members, eccentricities within
the limits of applicability are permitted without tb = design wall thickness of HSS branch
consideration of the resulting moments for the member, mm
design of the connection.
β = width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter
11.2.1 Definitions of Parameters to chord diameter = Db /D for round HSS;
the ratio of overall branch width to chord
Ag = gross cross-sectional area of member, mm2
width = Bb /B for rectangular HSS

SBC 306-CR-18 123

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

β eff = effective width ratio; the sum of the For the purposes of this Code, the centerlines of the
perimeters of the two branch members in branch member(s) and the chord member shall lie
a K-connection divided by eight times the in a common plane.
chord width
γ = chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-
half the diameter to the wall thickness 11.3.1 Definitions of Parameters

= D/2t for round HSS; the ratio of one-half Ag gross cross-sectional area of member,
the width to wall thickness mm2

= B/2t for rectangular HSS B overall width of rectangular HSS main

member, measured 90 ° to the plane of
η = load length parameter, applicable only to the connection, mm
rectangular HSS; the ratio of the length of
contact of the branch with the chord in the Bb overall width of rectangular HSS branch
plane of the connection to the chord width member, measured 90 ° to the plane of
= lb /B the connection, mm
 = acute angle between the branch and D outside diameter of round HSS main
chord (degrees) member, mm
ζ = gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the Db outside diameter of round HSS branch
branches of a gapped K-connection to the member, mm
width of the chord = g/B for rectangular
HSS. Fy specified minimum yield stress of HSS
main member material, MPa
11.2.2 Round HSS. The design strength of HSS-
to-HSS truss connections within the limits in Table Fyb specified minimum yield stress of HSS
11-6 shall be taken as the lowest value of the branch member material, MPa
applicable limit states shown in TABLE 11-5. Fu specified minimum tensile strength of
11.2.3 Rectangular HSS. The design strength of HSS member material, MPa
HSS-to-HSS truss connections within the limits in
H overall height of rectangular HSS main
TABLE 11-8 shall be taken as the lowest value of
member, measured in the plane of the
the applicable limit states shown in TABLE 11-7.
connection, mm
Hb overall height of rectangular HSS branch
11.3—HSS-to-HSS Moment member, measured in the plane of the
Connections connection, mm
The design strength, Mn, of connections shall be S elastic section modulus of member, mm3
determined in accordance with the provisions of
Zb Plastic section modulus of branch about
this chapter and the provisions of Section 2.3.5 .
the axis of bending, mm3
HSS-to-HSS moment connections are defined as
connections that consist of one or two branch t design wall thickness of HSS main
members that are directly welded to a continuous member, mm
chord that passes through the connection, with the tb design wall thickness of HSS branch
branch or branches loaded by bending moments. member, mm
A connection shall be classified as: β width ratio
(a) A T-connection when there is one branch and it Db/D for round HSS; ratio of branch
is perpendicular to the chord and as a Y- diameter to chord diameter
connection when there is one branch but not
perpendicular to the chord.  Bb/B for rectangular HSS; ratio of overall
(b) A cross-connection when there is a branch on branch width to chord width
each (opposite) side of the chord  chord slenderness ratio

SBC 306-CR-18 124

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

D/2t for round HSS; ratio of one-half Sip = effective elastic section modulus of welds
the diameter to the wall thickness for in-plane bending (TABLE 11-13),
mm3
B/2t for rectangular HSS; ratio of one-
half the width to the wall thickness Sop = effective elastic section modulus of welds
for out-of-plane bending (TABLE 11-13),
η load length parameter, applicable only mm3
to rectangular HSS
le = total effective weld length of groove and
lb/B; the ratio of the length of contact of fillet welds to rectangular HSS for weld
the branch with the chord in the plane of strength calculations, mm
the connection to the chord width,
where lb=Hb /sin θ tw = smallest effective weld throat around the
perimeter of branch or plate, mm
 acute angle between the branch and When an overlapped K-connection has been
chord (degrees) designed in accordance with TABLE 11-7 of this
11.3.2 Round HSS. The design strength of chapter, and the branch member component forces
moment connections within the limits of TABLE normal to the chord are 80% “balanced” (i.e., the
11-10 shall be taken as the lowest value of the branch member forces normal to the chord face
applicable limit states shown in TABLE 11-9. differ by no more than 20%), the “hidden” weld
under an overlapping branch may be omitted if the
11.3.3 Rectangular HSS. The design strength of
remaining welds to the overlapped branch
moment connections within the limits of TABLE
everywhere develop the full capacity of the
11-12 shall be taken as the lowest value of the
overlapped branch member walls.
applicable limit states shown in TABLE 11-11.
The weld checks in TABLE 11-13 are not required
if the welds are capable of developing the full
11.4—Welds of Plates and Branches to strength of the branch member wall along its entire
Rectangular HSS perimeter (or a plate along its entire length).

The design strength, Rn, Mn and Pn, of User Note: The approach used here to allow
connections shall be determined in accordance down-sizing of welds assumes a constant weld
with the provisions of this chapter and the size around the full perimeter of the HSS
provisions of Section 2.3.5 . branch. Special attention is required for equal
The design strength of branch connections shall be width (or near-equal width) connections which
determined for the limit state of nonuniformity of combine partial-joint-penetration groove welds
load transfer along the line of weld, due to along the matched edges of the connection, with
differences in relative stiffness of HSS walls in fillet welds generally across the main member
HSS-to-HSS connections and between elements in face.
transverse plate-to-HSS connections, as follows:
Rn or 𝑃𝑛 = 𝐹𝑛𝑤 𝑡𝑤 𝑙𝑒 (11-1)
𝑀𝑛−𝑖𝑝 = 𝐹𝑛𝑤 𝑆𝑖𝑝 (11-2)
𝑀𝑛−𝑜𝑝 = 𝐹𝑛𝑤 𝑆𝑜𝑝 (11-3)
For interaction, see Eq. (11-71).
(a) For fillet welds
𝜑 = 0.75
(b) For partial-joint-penetration groove welds
𝜑 = 0.80
where
Fnw = nominal stress of weld metal (Chapter
10) with no increase in strength due to
directionality of load, MPa

SBC 306-CR-18 125

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLES AND FIGURES OF CHAPTER 11

TABLE 11-1 : DESIGN STRENGTHS OF PLATE-TO-ROUND HSS CONNECTIONS

Plate Bending
Connection Type Connection Design Strength
In-Plane Out- of-Plane
Transverse Plate T- and Cross- Limit State: HSS Local Yielding Plate
Connections Axial Load
5.5
𝑅𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑡 2 ( 𝐵𝑝 ) 𝑄𝑓
1−0.81
𝐷 - 𝑀𝑛 = 0.5𝐵𝑝 𝑅𝑛
(11-4)

𝜑 = 0.90

Longitudinal Plate T-, Y- and Cross- Limit State: HSS Plastification Plate
Connections Axial Load
𝑙𝑝
𝑅𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 5.5𝐹𝑦 𝑡 2 (1 + 0.25 ) 𝑄𝑓
𝐷 𝑀𝑛 = 0.8𝑙𝑏 𝑅𝑛 -
(11-5)

𝜑 = 0.90

Longitudinal Plate T-Connections Limit States: Plate Limit States and

HSS Punching Shear Plate Shear
Load
For Rn , see Chapter 10. Additionally,
the following relationship shall be met: - -

𝐹𝑢
𝑡𝑝 ≤ 𝑡 (11-6)
𝐹𝑦𝑝

Cap Plate Connections Limit State: Local Yielding of HSS

Axial Load
𝑅𝑛 = 2𝐹𝑦 𝑡(5𝑡𝑝 + 𝑙𝑏 ) ≤ 𝐹𝑦 𝐴
(11-7)
- -

𝜑 = 1.0

FUNCTIONS
Qf = 1 for HSS (connecting surface) in tension
= 1.0 − 0.3𝑈(1 + 𝑈) for HSS (connecting surface) in compression (11-8)
𝑃𝑢 𝑀𝑢
𝑈=| + |
𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 𝐹𝑦 𝑆 (11-9)
where Pu and Mu are determined on the side of the joint that has the lower compression stress.
Pu and Mu refer to required strengths in the HSS

SBC 306-CR-18 126

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-2: LIMITS OF APPLICABILITY OF TABLE 11-1

Plate load angle:  ≥ 30°

HSS wall 𝐷⁄𝑡 ≤ 50 for T-connections under branch plate axial load or bending
slenderness: 𝐷⁄𝑡 ≤ 40 for cross-connections under branch plate axial load or bending
𝐷⁄𝑡 ≤ 0.11 𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 under branch plate shear loading
𝐷⁄𝑡 ≤ 0.11 𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 for cap plate connections in compression
Width ratio: 0.2 < 𝐵𝑝 ⁄𝐷 ≤ 1.0 for transverse branch plate connections
Material strength: Fy ≤ 360 MPa
Ductility: 𝐹𝑦 ⁄𝐹𝑢 ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Grade C is acceptable.

TABLE 11-3 : DESIGN STRENGTHS OF PLATE-TO-RECTANGULAR HSS CONNECTIONS

Connection Type Connection Design Strength

Limit State: Local Yielding of Plate, For All 
10
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹 𝑡𝐵 ≤ 𝐹𝑦𝑝 𝑡𝑝 𝐵𝑝 (11-10)
𝐵⁄𝑡 𝑦 𝑝
𝜑 = 0.95
Limit State: HSS Shear Yielding (Punching),
When 0.85𝐵 ≤ 𝐵𝑝 ≤ 𝐵 − 2𝑡
Transverse Plate T- and Cross-Connections, Under 𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝑡(2𝑡𝑝 + 2𝐵𝑒𝑝 ) (11-11)
Plate Axial Load
𝜑 = 0.95
Limit State: Local Yielding of HSS Sidewalls, When 𝛽 =
1.0
𝑅𝑛 = 2𝐹𝑦 𝑡(5𝑘 + 𝑙𝑏 ) (11-12)
k= outside corner radius of HSS ≥1.5 t
𝜑 = 1.0
Limit State: Local Crippling of HSS Sidewalls, When
=1.0 and Plate is in Compression, for T-Connections
3𝑙𝑏
𝑅𝑛 = 1.6𝑡 2 (1 + ) √𝐸𝐹𝑦 𝑄𝑓 (11-13)
𝐻 − 3𝑡
𝜑 = 0.75
Limit State: Local Crippling of HSS Sidewalls, When
=1.0 and Plate is in Compression, for Cross-
Connections
48𝑡 3
𝑅𝑛 = ( ) √𝐸𝐹𝑦 𝑄𝑓 (11-14)
𝐻 − 3𝑡
𝜑 = 0.95

SBC 306-CR-18 127

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-3 (CONTINUED) DESIGN STRENGTHS OF PLATE-TO-RECTANGULAR HSS

CONNECTIONS

Connection Type Connection Design Strength

Longitudinal Plate T-, Y- and Cross- Connections, Under Plate
Limit State: HSS Plastification
Axial Load

𝐹𝑦 𝑡 2 2𝑙𝑏
𝑅𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝑡𝑝 ( 𝐵
1−
𝐵 (11-15)
𝑡𝑝
+ 4√1 − 𝑄𝑓 )
𝐵
𝜑 = 1.00
Longitudinal Through Plate T- and Limit State: HSS Wall Plastification
Y-Connections, Under Plate Axial Load

2𝐹𝑦 𝑡 2 2𝑙𝑏
𝑅𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝑡𝑝 ( 𝐵
1−
𝐵 (11-16)
𝑡𝑝
+ 4√1 − 𝑄𝑓 )
𝐵

𝜑 = 1.00

Longitudinal Plate T-Connections, Under Plate Shear Load Limit States: Plate Limit States and HSS
Punching Shear
For Rn , see Chapter 10
Additionally, the following relationship
shall be met:

𝐹𝑢
𝑡𝑝 ≤ 𝑡 (11-17)
𝐹𝑦𝑝

SBC 306-CR-18 128

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-3 (CONTINUED) DESIGN STRENGTHS OF PLATE-TO-RECTANGULAR HSS

CONNECTIONS

Connection Type Connection Design Strength

Cap Plate Connections, under Axial Limit State: Local Yielding of Sidewalls
Load 𝑅𝑛 = 2𝐹𝑦 𝑡(5𝑡𝑝 + 𝑙𝑏 ), when (5𝑡𝑝 +
(11-18)
𝑙𝑏 ) < 𝐵
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴, when (5𝑡𝑝 + 𝑙𝑏 ) ≥ 𝐵 (11-19)
𝜑 = 1.00
Limit State: Local Crippling of Sidewalls, When Plate is in
Compression
1.5
6𝑙𝑏 𝑡 𝑡𝑝
𝑅𝑛 = 1.6𝑡 2 [1 + ( ) ] √𝐸𝐹𝑦
𝐵 𝑡𝑝 𝑡 (11-20)
, when (5𝑡𝑝 + 𝑙𝑏 ) < 𝐵

𝜑 = 0.75

FUNCTIONS
Qf = 1 for HSS (connecting surface) in tension
(11-21)
= 1.3 − 0.4 𝑈⁄𝛽 ≤ 1.0 for HSS (connecting surface)
in compression, for transverse plate connections
= √1 − 𝑈 2 for HSS (connecting surface) in
compression, for longitudinal plate and (11-22)
longitudinal through plate connections
𝑃𝑢 𝑀𝑢
𝑈=| + | (11-23)
𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 𝐹𝑦 𝑆
where Pu and Mu are determined on the side of the joint that has the lower compression stress.
Pu and Mu refer to required strengths in the HSS

10𝐵𝑝
𝐵𝑒𝑝 = ≤ 𝐵𝑝 (11-24)
𝐵⁄𝑡
k = outside corner radious of HSS ≥ 1.5t

TABLE 11-4: LIMITS OF APPLICABILITY OF TABLE 11-3

Plate load angle:  ≥ 30°

HSS wall
B /t or H /t 35 for loaded wall, for transverse branch plate connections
slenderness:
40 for loaded wall, for longitudinal branch plate and through plate
B /t or H /t
connections
(𝐵 − 3𝑡)⁄𝑡 or (𝐻 − 3𝑡)⁄𝑡 ≤ 1.40√𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 for loaded wall, for branch plate shear
loading
Width ratio: ⁄
0.25 ≤ 𝐵𝑝 𝐵 ≤ 1.0 for transverse branch plate connections
Material strength: 𝐹𝑦 ≤ 360 MPa
Ductility: 𝐹𝑦 ≤ 360 Note: ASTM A500 Grade C is acceptable.

SBC 306-CR-18 129

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-5 : DESIGN STRENGTHS OF ROUND HSS-TO-HSS TRUSS CONNECTIONS

Connection Type Connection Design Axial Strength

General Check For T-, Y-, Cross- and K- Limit State: Shear Yielding (Punching)
Connections With Gap, When 1 + 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃
𝑃𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝑡𝜋𝐷𝑏 ( ) (11-25)
𝐷𝑏 (𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑠⁄𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝) < (𝐷 − 2𝑡) 2 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝜃
𝜑 = 0.95
T- and Y-Connections Limit State: Chord Plastification

𝑃𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑡 2 (3.1 + 15.6𝛽 2 ) 𝛾 0.2 𝑄𝑓 (11-26)

𝜑 = 0.90

Cross-Connections Limit State: Chord Plastification

5.7
𝑃𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑡 2 ( )𝑄 (11-27)
1 − 0.81𝛽 𝑓

𝜑 = 0.90

K-Connections With Gap or Overlap Limit State: Chord Plastification

(𝑃𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃)𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑐ℎ
𝐷𝑏 𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝
= 𝐹𝑦 𝑡 2 (2.0 + 11.33 ) 𝑄𝑔 𝑄𝑓
𝐷
(11-28)
(𝑃𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃)𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑐ℎ = (𝑃𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃)𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑐ℎ
(11-29)

𝜑 = 0.90

SBC 306-CR-18 130

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-5 (continued): Design Strengths of Round HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections

FUNCTIONS
Qf = 1 for chord (connecting surface) in tension (11-30)
= 1.0 − 0.3𝑈(1 + 𝑈) for HSS (connecting surface) in
(11-31)
compression
𝑃𝑢 𝑀𝑢
𝑈=| + | (11-32)
𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 𝐹𝑦 𝑆
where Pu and Mu are determined on the side of the joint that has the lower compression stress. Pu and Mu
refer to required strengths in the HSS
[𝑎]
1.2
0.024𝛾
𝑄𝑔 = 𝛾 0.2 [1 + ] (11-33)
0.5𝑔
𝑒𝑥𝑝 ( − 1.33) + 1
𝑡
[a] Note that exp(x) is equal to ex, where e = 2.71828 is the base of the natural logarithm.

Table 11-6: Limits of Applicability of TABLE 11-5

Joint eccentricity: −0.55 ≤ 𝑒⁄𝐷 ≤ 0.25 for K-connections

Branch angle:  ≥ 30°
Chord wall slenderness: 𝐷⁄𝑡 ≤ 50 for T-, Y- and K-connections
𝐷⁄𝑡 ≤ 40 for cross-connections Branch wall
Branch wall slenderness: 𝐷𝑏 ⁄𝑡 𝑏 ≤ 50 for compression branch
𝐷𝑏 ⁄𝑡 𝑏 ≤ 0.05 𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦𝑏 for compression branch
Width ratio: 0.2 < 𝐷𝑏 ⁄𝐷 ≤ 1.0 for T-, Y-, cross- and overlapped K-connections
0.4 ≤ 𝐷𝑏 ⁄𝐷 ≤ 1.0 for gapped K-connections
Gap: 𝑔 ≥ 𝑡𝑏 𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝 + 𝑡𝑏 𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑠 for gapped K-connections
Overlap: 25% ≤ 𝑂𝑣 ≤ 100% for overlapped K-connections
Branch thickness: 𝑡𝑏 𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑙𝑎𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑛𝑔 ≤ 𝑡𝑏 𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑙𝑎𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑑 for branches in overlapped K-connections
Material strength: 𝐹𝑦 and 𝐹𝑦𝑏 ≤ 360
Ductility: 𝐹𝑦 ⁄𝐹𝑢 and 𝐹𝑦𝑏 ⁄𝐹𝑢𝑏 ≤ 0.8

SBC 306-CR-18 131

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-7 : DESIGN STRENGTHS OF RECTANGULAR HSS-TO-HSS TRUSS CONNECTIONS

Connection Type Connection Design Axial Strength

T-, Y- and Cross-Connections Limit State: Chord Wall Plastification, When 𝛽 ≤ 0.85
2𝜂 4
𝑃𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑡 2 [(1−𝛽) + ] 𝑄𝑓 (11-34)
√1−𝛽
𝜑 = 1.00
Limit State: Shear Yielding (Punching), When 0.85 <
𝛽 ≤ 1 − 1⁄𝛾 or 𝐵⁄𝑡 < 10
𝑃𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝑡𝐵(2𝜂 + 2𝛽𝑒𝑜𝑝 ) (11-35)
𝜑 = 0.95
Limit State: Local Yielding of Chord Sidewalls,
When 𝛽 = 1.0
𝑃𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 2𝐹𝑦 𝑡(5𝑘 + 𝑙𝑏 ) (11-36)
Case for checking limit state of shear of 𝜑 = 1.00
chord side walls Limit State: Local Crippling of Chord Sidewalls, When
𝛽 = 1.0 and Branch is in Compression, for T- or Y-
Connections
3𝑙𝑏
𝑃𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 1.6𝑡 2 (1 + ) √𝐸𝐹𝑦 𝑄𝑓 (11-37)
𝐻−3𝑡
𝜑 = 0.75
Limit State: Local Crippling of Chord Sidewalls, When
 = 1.0 and Branches are in Compression, for Cross-
Connections
48𝑡 3
𝑃𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = ( ) √𝐸𝐹𝑦 𝑄𝑓 (11-38)
𝐻 − 3𝑡
𝜑 = 0.90
Limit State: Local Yielding of Branch/Branches Due
to Uneven Load Distribution, When 𝑏 > 0.85
𝑃𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦𝑏 𝑡𝑏 (2𝐻𝑏 + 2𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 − 4𝑡𝑏 ) (11-39)
𝜑 = 0.95
where
10 𝐹𝑦 𝑡
𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 = ( ) 𝐵 ≤ 𝐵𝑏 (11-40)
𝐵⁄𝑡 𝐹𝑦𝑏 𝑡𝑏 𝑏

SBC 306-CR-18 132

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-7 (CONTINUED): DESIGN STRENGTHS OF RECTANGULAR HSS-TO-HSS TRUSS

CONNECTIONS

Connection Type Connection Design Axial Strength

Limit State: Shear of Chord Sidewalls For Cross-Connections
With  < 90° and Where a Projected Gap is Created (See
T-, Y- and Cross-Connections
Figure).
Determine Pn sin  in accordance with Section 7.5.
Gapped K-Connections
Limit State: Chord Wall Plastification, for All 
𝑃𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑡 2 (9.8𝛽𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝛾 0.5 ) 𝑄𝑓 (11-41)
𝜑 = 0.90
Limit State: Shear Yielding (Punching), when 𝐵𝑏 < 𝐵 − 2𝑡
Do not check for square branches.
𝑃𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝑡𝐵(2𝜂 + 𝛽 + 𝛽𝑒𝑜𝑝 ) (11-42)
𝜑 = 0.95
Limit State: Shear of Chord Sidewalls, in the Gap Region
Determine Pn sin in accordance with Section 7.5.
Do not check for square chords.
Limit State: Local Yielding of Branch /Branches Due to
Uneven Load Distribution.
Do not check for square branches or if 𝐵⁄𝑡 ≥ 15.
𝑃𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦𝑏 𝑡𝑏 (2𝐻𝑏 + 𝐵𝑏 + 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 − 4𝑡𝑏 ) (11-43)
𝜑 = 0.95
where
10 𝐹𝑦 𝑡
𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 = ( ) 𝐵 ≤ 𝐵𝑏 (11-44)
𝐵⁄𝑡 𝐹𝑦𝑏 𝑡𝑏 𝑏

SBC 306-CR-18 133

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-7 (CONTINUED): DESIGN STRENGTHS OF RECTANGULAR HSS-TO-HSS TRUSS

CONNECTIONS

Connection Type Connection Design Axial Strength

Overlapped K-Connections Limit State: Local Yielding of Branch /Branches
Due to Uneven Load Distribution
𝜑 = 0.95
When 25% < 𝑂𝑣 < 50%:
𝑂𝑣
𝑃𝑛,𝑖 = 𝐹𝑦𝑏𝑖 𝑡𝑏𝑖 [ (2𝐻𝑏𝑖 − 4𝑡𝑏𝑖 ) + 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖
50 (11-45)
+ 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑣 ]
When 50% ≤ 𝑂𝑣 < 80%:
𝑃𝑛,𝑖 = 𝐹𝑦𝑏𝑖 𝑡𝑏𝑖 (2𝐻𝑏𝑖 − 4𝑡𝑏𝑖 + 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 + 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑣 ) (11-46)
Note that the force arrows shown for overlapped
When 80% ≤ 𝑂𝑣 < 100%:
K-connections may be reversed;
𝑃𝑛,𝑖 = 𝐹𝑦𝑏𝑖 𝑡𝑏𝑖 (2𝐻𝑏𝑖 − 4𝑡𝑏𝑖 + 𝐵𝑏𝑖 + 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑣 ) (11-47)
i and j control member identification.
10 𝐹𝑦 𝑡
𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 = ( ) 𝐵 ≤ 𝐵𝑏𝑖 (11-48)
𝐵⁄𝑡 𝐹𝑦𝑏𝑖 𝑡𝑏𝑖 𝑏𝑖
10 𝐹𝑦𝑏𝑗 𝑡𝑏𝑗
𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑣 = ( ) 𝐵𝑏𝑖 ≤ 𝐵𝑏𝑖 (11-49)
𝐵𝑏𝑗 ⁄𝑡𝑏𝑗 𝐹𝑦𝑏𝑖 𝑡𝑏𝑖
Subscript i refers to the overlapping branch
Subscript j refers to the overlapped branch
𝐹𝑦𝑏𝑗 𝐴𝑏𝑗
𝑃𝑛,𝑗 = 𝑃𝑛,𝑖 ( ) (11-50)
𝐹𝑦𝑏𝑖 𝐴𝑏𝑖
FUNCTIONS
Qf = 1 for chord (connecting surface) in tension (11-51)
𝑈 for chord (connecting surface) in
= 1.3 − 0.4 ≤ 1 compression, for T-, Y- and K-cross- (11-52)
𝛽 connections
𝑈 for chord (connecting surface) in
= 1.3 − 0.4 ≤ 1.0 (11-53)
𝛽𝑒𝑓𝑓 compression, for gapped K-connections
𝑃𝑢 𝑀𝑢
𝑈=| + | (11-54)
𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 𝐹𝑦 𝑆
where Pu and Mu are determined on the side of the joint that has the higher compression stress. Pu and
Mu refer to required strengths in the HSS.
𝛽𝑒𝑓𝑓 = [(𝐵𝑏 + 𝐻𝑏 )𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑐ℎ + (𝐵𝑏 + 𝐻𝑏 )𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑐ℎ ]/4𝐵 (11-55)
5𝛽
𝛽𝑒𝑜𝑝 = ≤𝛽 (11-56)
𝛾

SBC 306-CR-18 134

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-8: LIMITS OF APPLICABILITY OF TABLE 11-7

Joint eccentricity: −0.55 ≤ 𝑒⁄𝐻 ≤ 0.25 for K connections

Branch angle:  ≥ 30°
Chord wall 𝐵⁄𝑡 and 𝐻 ⁄𝑡 ≤ 35 for gapped K-connections and T-, Y- and cross-connections
slenderness:
Branch wall 𝐵⁄𝑡 ≤ 30 for overlapped K-connections
slenderness:
𝐻 ⁄𝑡 ≤ 35 for overlapped K-connections
𝐵𝑏 ⁄𝑡 𝑏 and 𝐻𝑏 ⁄𝑡 𝑏 ≤ 35 for tension branch
𝐸 For compression branch of gapped K-, T-, Y- and cross-
≤ 1.25√
𝐹𝑦𝑏 connections
≤ 35 for compression branch of gapped K-, T-, Y- and cross-connections
𝐸
≤ 1.1√ For compression branch of overlapped K-connections
𝐹𝑦𝑏
Width ratio: 𝐵𝑏 ⁄𝐵 and 𝐻𝑏 ⁄𝐵 ≥ 0.25 for T-, Y- cross- and overlapped K-connections
Aspect ratio: 0.5 ≤ 𝐻𝑏 ⁄𝐵𝑏 ≤ 2.0 and 0.5 ≤ H /B ≤ 2.0
Overlap: 25% ≤ 𝑂𝑣 ≤ 100% for overlapped K-connections
Branch width 𝐵𝑏𝑖 ⁄𝐵𝑏𝑗 ≤ 0.75 for overlapped K-connections, where subscript i refers to the
ratio: overlapping branch and subscript j refers to the overlapped branch
Branch thickness 𝑡𝑏𝑖 ⁄𝑡𝑏𝑗 ≤ 1.0 for overlapped K-connections, where subscript i refers to the
ratio: overlapping branch and subscript j refers to the overlapped branch
Material strength: Fy and 𝐹𝑦𝑏 ≤ 360MPa
Ductility: 𝐹𝑦 ⁄𝐹𝑢 and 𝐹𝑦𝑏 ⁄𝐹𝑢𝑏 ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Grade C is acceptable
ADDITIONAL LIMITS FOR GAPPED K-CONNECTIONS
𝐵𝑏 𝐻𝑏 𝛾
Width ratio: and ≥ 0.1 +
𝐵 𝐵 50
eff ≥ 0.35
Gap ratio: 𝜁 = 𝑔⁄𝐵 ≥ 0.5(1 − 𝛽𝑒𝑓𝑓 )
Gap: 𝑔 ≥ 𝑡𝑏(𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛  𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑐ℎ) + 𝑡𝑏(𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛  𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑐ℎ)
Branch size: smaller 𝐵𝑏 ≥ 0.63 ( larger Bb ), if both branches are square
Note: Maximum gap size will be controlled by the e /H limit. If gap is large, treat as two Y-connections.

SBC 306-CR-18 135

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-9 : DESIGN STRENGTHS OF ROUND HSS-TO-HSS MOMENT CONNECTIONS

Connection Type Connection Design Flexural Strength

Branch(es) under In-Plane Bending T-, Y- Limit State: Chord Plastification
and Cross-Connections 𝑀𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 5.39𝐹𝑦 𝑡 2 𝛾 0.5 𝛽𝐷𝑏 𝑄𝑓 (11-57)
𝜑 = 0.90
Limit State: Shear Yielding (Punching), When 𝐷𝑏 <
(𝐷 − 2𝑡)
1 + 3 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃
𝑀𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝑡𝐷𝑏2 ( ) (11-58)
4 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝜃

𝜑 = 0.95

Branch(es) under Out-of-Plane Bending T-

Limit State: Chord Plastification
, Y- and Cross-Connections 3.0
𝑀𝑛 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑡 2 𝐷𝑏 ( )𝑄 (11-59)
1 − 0.81𝛽 𝑓
𝜑 = 0.90
Limit State: Shear Yielding (Punching), When 𝐷𝑏 <
(𝐷 − 2𝑡)
3 + 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃
𝑀𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝑡𝐷𝑏2 ( ) (11-60)
4 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝜃

𝜑 = 0.95

For T-, Y- and cross-connections, with branch(es) under combined axial load, in-plane bending and
out-of-plane bending, or any combination of these load effects:
2
𝑃𝑟 𝑀𝑟−𝑖𝑝 𝑀𝑟−𝑜𝑝
+( ) +( ) ≤ 1.0 (11-61)
𝑃𝑐 𝑀𝑐−𝑖𝑝 𝑀𝑐−𝑜𝑝
𝑀𝑐−𝑖𝑝 = 𝜑𝑀𝑛 = design flexural strength for in-plane bending from TABLE 11-9, N-mm
𝑀𝑐−𝑜𝑝 = 𝜑𝑀𝑛 = design flexural strength for out-of-plane bending from TABLE 11-9, N-mm
M r-ip = required flexural strength for in-plane bending, N-mm
M r-op = required flexural strength for out-of-plane bending, N-mm
𝑃𝑐        = 𝜑𝑃𝑛 = design axial strength from TABLE 11-5, N
Pr = required axial strength, N

SBC 306-CR-18 136

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-9 (CONTINUED): DESIGN STRENGTHS OF ROUND HSS-TO-HSS MOMENT

CONNECTIONS

FUNCTIONS
Qf = 1 for chord (connecting surface) in tension
(11-62)
= 1.0 − 0.3𝑈(1 + 𝑈) for HSS (connecting surface) in compression
𝑃𝑢 𝑀𝑢
𝑈=| + | (11-63)
𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 𝐹𝑦 𝑆
where Pu and Mu are determined on the side of the joint that has the lower compression stress. Pu and Mu
refer to required strengths in the HSS.

TABLE 11-10: LIMITS OF APPLICABILITY OF TABLE 11-9

Branch angle:  ≥ 30°

Chord wall slenderness: 𝐷⁄𝑡 ≤ 50 for T- and Y-connections
𝐷⁄𝑡 ≤ 40 for cross connections
Branch wall slenderness: 𝐷𝑏 ⁄𝑡 𝑏 ≤ 50
𝐷𝑏 ⁄𝑡𝑏 ≤ 0.05 𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦𝑏
Width ratio: 0.2 < 𝐷𝑏 ⁄𝐷 ≤ 1.0
Material strength: Fy and 𝐹𝑦𝑏 ≤ 360 MPa
Ductility: 𝐹𝑦 ⁄𝐹𝑢 and 𝐹𝑦𝑏 ⁄𝐹𝑢𝑏 ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Grade C is acceptable

SBC 306-CR-18 137

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-11 : DESIGN STRENGTHS OF RECTANGULAR HSS-TO-HSS MOMENT

CONNECTIONS

Connection Type Connection Design Flexural Strength

Branch(es) under In-Plane Bending T- Limit State: Chord Wall Plastification, When 𝛽 ≤ 0.85
and Cross-Connections 1 2 𝜂
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑡 2 𝐻𝑏 [ + + (1−𝛽)] 𝑄𝑓 (11-64)
2𝜂 √1−𝛽
𝜑 = 1.00
Limit State: Sidewall Local Yielding,
When 𝛽 > 0.85
𝑀𝑛 = 0.5𝐹𝑦 𝑡(𝐻𝑏 + 5𝑡)2
∗
(11-65)
𝜑 = 1.00

Limit State: Local Yielding of Branch/Branches Due to

Uneven Load Distribution, When 𝛽 > 0.85
𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦𝑏 [𝑍𝑏 − (1 − ) 𝐵𝑏 𝐻𝑏 𝑡𝑏 ] (11-66)
𝐵𝑏
𝜑 = 0.95
Limit State: Chord Wall Plastification,
Branch(es) under Out-of-Plane Bending
T- and Cross-Connections When 𝛽 ≤ 0.85
0.5𝐻𝑏 (1 + 𝛽) 2𝐵𝐵𝑏 (1 + 𝛽)
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑡 2 [ +√ ] 𝑄𝑓
(1 − 𝛽) (1 − 𝛽)
(11-67)
𝜑 = 1.00
Limit State: Sidewall Local Yielding,When 𝛽 > 0.85
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦∗ 𝑡(𝐵 − 𝑡) (𝐻𝑏 + 5𝑡) (11-68)
𝜑 = 1.00
Limit State: Local Yielding of Branch/Branches Due to
Uneven Load Distribution, When 𝛽 > 0.85
𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 2
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦𝑏 [𝑍𝑏 − 0.5 (1 − ) 𝐵𝑏2 𝑡𝑏 ] (11-69)
𝐵𝑏

𝜑 = 0.95

SBC 306-CR-18 138

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-11 (CONTINUED): DESIGN STRENGTHS OF RECTANGULAR HSS-TO-HSS

MOMENT CONNECTIONS

Connection Type Connection Design Flexural Strength

Branch(es) under Out-of-Plane Bending
Limit State: Chord Distortional Failure, for
T- and Cross-Connections (continued)
T-Connections and Unbalanced Cross-Connections
𝑀𝑛 = 2𝐹𝑦 𝑡 [𝐻𝑏 𝑡 + √𝐵𝐻𝑡(𝐵 + 𝐻)] (11-70)
𝜑 = 1.00
For T- and cross-connections, with branch(es) under combined axial load, in-plane bending and out-
of-plane bending, or any combination of these load effects:
𝑃𝑟 𝑀𝑟−𝑖𝑝 𝑀𝑟−𝑜𝑝
+( )+( ) ≤ 1.0 (11-71)
𝑃𝑐 𝑀𝑐−𝑖𝑝 𝑀𝑐−𝑜𝑝
𝑀𝑐−𝑖𝑝 = 𝜑𝑀𝑛 = design flexural strength for in-plane bending from TABLE 11-11, N-mm
𝑀𝑐−𝑜𝑝 = 𝜑𝑀𝑛 = design flexural strength for out-of-plane bending from TABLE 11-11, N-mm
Mr-ip = required flexural strength for in-plane bending, N-mm
Mr-op = required flexural strength for out-of-plane bending, N-mm
𝑃𝑐       = 𝜑𝑃𝑛 = design axial strength from TABLE 11-7, N
Pr = required axial strength, N
FUNCTIONS
Qf = 1 for chord (connecting surface) in tension (11-72)
𝑈
= 1.3 − 0.4 ≤ 1.0 for chord (connecting surface) in compression (11-73)
𝛽
𝑃𝑢 𝑀𝑢
𝑈   = | + |
𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 𝐹𝑦 𝑆 (11-9)(11-74)
where Pu and Mu are determined on the side of the joint that , has the lower compression stress. Pu and
Mu refer to required strengths in the HSS.
𝐹𝑦∗ = 𝐹𝑦 for T-connections and = 0.8𝐹𝑦 for cross-connections
10 𝐹𝑦 𝑡
𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 = ( ) 𝐵 ≤ 𝐵𝑏 (11-75)
𝐵⁄𝑡 𝐹𝑦𝑏 𝑡𝑏 𝑏

TABLE 11-12: LIMITS OF APPLICABILITY OF TABLE 11-11

Branch angle: 𝜃 ≅ 90𝑜

Chord wall slenderness: 𝐵⁄𝑡 and 𝐻 ⁄𝑡 ≤ 35
Branch wall slenderness: B b /tb and 𝐻𝑏 ⁄𝑡𝑏 ≤ 35
𝐸
≤ 1.25√
𝐹𝑦𝑏
Width ratio: 𝐵𝑏 ⁄𝐵 ≥ 0.25
Aspect ratio: 0.5 ≤ 𝐻𝑏 ⁄𝐵𝑏 ≤ 2.0 and 0.5 ≤ 𝐻 ⁄𝐵 ≤ 2.0
Material strength: Fy and 𝐹𝑦𝑏 ≤ 360MPa
Ductility: 𝐹𝑦 ⁄𝐹𝑢 and 𝐹𝑦𝑏 ⁄𝐹𝑢𝑏 ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Grade C is acceptable

SBC 306-CR-18 139

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-13 : EFFECTIVE WELD PROPERTIES FOR CONNECTIONS TO RECTANGULAR

HSS

Connection Type Connection Weld Strength

Transverse Plate T- and Cross- Connections
Effective Weld Properties
Under Plate Axial Load
10 𝐹𝑦 𝑡
𝑙𝑒 = 2 ( )( ) 𝐵 ≤ 2𝐵𝑝 (11-76)
𝐵⁄𝑡 𝐹𝑦𝑝 𝑡𝑝 𝑝

where le = total effective weld length for welds on both

sides of the transverse plate

T-, Y- and Cross-Connections Under Branch Effective Weld Properties

Axial Load or Bending 2𝐻𝑏
𝑙𝑒 = + 2𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 (11-77)
𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃
𝑡𝑤 𝐻𝑏 2 𝐻𝑏
𝑆𝑖𝑝 = ( ) + 𝑡𝑤 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 ( ) (11-78)
3 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃
𝐻𝑏 𝑡𝑤 (𝑡𝑤 ⁄3)(𝐵𝑏 − 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 )3
𝑆𝑜𝑝 = 𝑡𝑤 ( ) 𝐵𝑏 + (𝐵𝑏2 ) −
𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 3 𝐵𝑏
(11-79)
10 𝐹𝑦 𝑡
𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 = ( ) 𝐵 ≤ 𝐵𝑏 (11-80)
𝐵⁄𝑡 𝐹𝑦𝑏 𝑡𝑏 𝑏

When 𝛽 > 0.85 or 𝜃 > 50𝑜 , beoi/2 shall not exceed 2t.

Gapped K-Connections Under Branch Effective Weld Properties

Axial Load When 𝜃 ≤ 50𝑜 :
2(𝐻𝑏 − 1.2𝑡𝑏 )
𝑙𝑒 = + 2(𝐵𝑏 − 1.2𝑡𝑏 ) (11-81)
𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃
When 𝜃 ≥ 60𝑜 ,
2(𝐻𝑏 − 1.2𝑡𝑏 )
𝑙𝑒 = + (𝐵𝑏 − 1.2𝑡𝑏 ) (11-82)
𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃

When 50° <  < 60 linear interpolation shall be used to

determine le .

SBC 306-CR-18 140

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

TABLE 11-13 (CONTINUED): EFFECTIVE WELD PROPERTIES FOR CONNECTIONS TO

RECTANGULAR HSS

Connection Type Connection Weld Strength

Overlapped K-Connections under Branch Overlapping Member Effective Weld Properties (all
Axial Load dimensions are for the overlapping branch, i )
When 25% ≤ Ov < 50%:
2𝑂𝑣 𝑂𝑣 𝐻𝑏𝑖 𝑂𝑣 𝐻𝑏𝑖
𝑙𝑒,𝑖 = [(1 − )( )+ ( )]
50 100 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃𝑖 100 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜃𝑖 + 𝜃𝑗 )
+ 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 + 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑣
(11-83)
When 50% ≤ Ov < 80%:
𝑂𝑣 𝐻𝑏𝑖
𝑙𝑒,𝑖 = 2 [(1 − )( )
100 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃𝑖
𝑂𝑣 𝐻𝑏𝑖 (11-84)
+ ( )] + 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖
100 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜃𝑖 + 𝜃𝑗 )
Note that the force arrows shown for + 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑣
overlapped K-connections may be reversed; When 80% ≤ Ov ≤ 100%:
i and j control member identification 𝑂𝑣 𝐻𝑏𝑖
𝑙𝑒,𝑖 = 2 [(1 − )( )
100 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃𝑖
𝑂𝑣 𝐻𝑏𝑖 (11-85)
+ ( )] + 𝐵𝑏𝑖
100 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜃𝑖 + 𝜃𝑗 )
+ 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑣
10 𝐹𝑦 𝑡
𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑖 = ( ) 𝐵 ≤ 𝐵𝑏𝑖 (11-86)
Effective Weld: Eq. (11-88) 𝐵⁄𝑡 𝐹𝑦𝑏𝑖 𝑡𝑏𝑖 𝑏𝑖
10 𝐹𝑦𝑏𝑗 𝑡𝑏𝑗
When 𝐵𝑏𝑗 ⁄𝐵 ≤ 0.85 and 𝜃𝑗 ≤ 50𝑜 𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑣 = ( ) 𝐵𝑏𝑖 ≤ 𝐵𝑏𝑖 (11-87)
𝐵𝑏𝑗 ⁄𝑡𝑏𝑗 𝐹𝑦𝑏𝑖 𝑡𝑏𝑖
when Bbi /Bb > 0.85 or i > 50°, beoi /2 shall not
exceed 2t and when Bbi /Bbj > 0.85 or
(180 − 𝜃𝑖 − 𝜃𝑗 ) > 50𝑜 , beov /2 shall not exceed 2tbj

Subscript i refers to the overlapping branch

Subscript j refers to the overlapped branch
2𝐻𝑏𝑗
𝑙𝑒,𝑗 = + 2𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑗 (11-88)
𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃𝑗
10 𝐹𝑦 𝑡
𝑏𝑒𝑜𝑗 = ( ) 𝐵 ≤ 𝐵𝑏𝑗 (11-89)
When 𝐵𝑏𝑗 ⁄𝐵 > 0.85 and 𝜃𝑗 > 50𝑜 𝐵⁄𝑡 𝐹𝑦𝑏𝑗 𝑡𝑏𝑗 𝑏𝑗
When Bbj /B > 0.85 or j > 50°,
𝑙𝑒,𝑗 = 2 (𝐻𝑏𝑗 − 1.2𝑡𝑏𝑗 )⁄𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃𝑗

SBC 306-CR-18 141

CHAPTER 11—DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 142

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL

STEEL BUILDINGS

2. ordinary concentrically braced frames

This chapter governs the design of earthquake-
resistant steel structures. The chapter is organized 3. eccentrically braced frames
as follows:
4. composite ordinary moment frames
12.1 —General Requirements
5. composite intermediate moment frames
12.2 —General Seismic Design Requirements
6. composite ordinary braced frames
12.3 —Moment-Frame and Braced-Frame
For other SFRSs refer to ANSI/AISC 341.
Systems
Saudi Building Code requirements for Concrete
12.4 —Composite Moment-Frame and Braced-
Structures (SBC 304), as modified in this chapter,
Frame Systems
shall be used for the design and construction of
12.5 —Fabrication and Erection reinforced concrete components in composite
construction.
12.6 —Quality Control and Quality Assurance
12.7 Prequalification and cyclic qualification User Note: SBC 301 (Table 12-1) specifically
testing provisions exempts structural steel systems assigned to
SDCs B and C, but not composite systems,
from the provision of this chapter if the seismic
12.1—General Requirements loads are computed using a response
modification coefficient, R of 3. For Seismic
The provisions of this chapter shall be applied in Design Category A, SBC 301 specifies lateral
conjunction with applicable requirements of this forces to be used as the seismic loads and
code.
effects that do not involve the use of a response
12.1.1 Scope. The seismic provisions in this modification coefficient. Thus for Seismic
chapter shall apply to the design, fabrication and Design Category A it is not necessary to define
erection of steel structures in Seismic Design a seismic force resisting system that meets any
Categories (SDC) B through D. Structures assigned special requirements and the provisions of this
to Seismic Design Category E or F shall be designed chapter do not apply.
and detailed in accordance with ANSI/AISC 341.
SBC 301 (Table 15-1) permits certain non-
Where, applicable, the provisions in this chapter
building structures to be designed in
shall apply to the design of structural steel members
accordance with the applicable requirements of
and connections in the seismic force resisting this Code with an appropriately reduced R
systems (SFRS), and splices and bases of columns factor and are not required to satisfy the
in gravity framing systems of buildings and other
provisions of this chapter.
structures with moment frames, braced frames and
composite systems. Other structures are defined as
those structures designed, fabricated and erected in
User Note: Composite seismic force resisting
a manner similar to buildings, with building-like
systems include those systems with members
vertical and lateral force-resisting-elements. The
of structural steel acting compositely with
seismic force resisting systems shall be of structural
reinforced concrete, as well as systems in
steel or of structural steel acting compositely with
which structural steel members and reinforced
reinforced concrete, unless specifically exempted
concrete members act together to form a
by other Saudi building codes. The provisions in
seismic force resisting system.
this chapter covers only the following types of
SFRSs: ordinary and intermediate moment frames
1. ordinary column cantilever systems 12.1.2 Materials

SBC 306-CR-18 143

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

12.1.2.1 Material Specifications. 12.1.2.2 Expected Material Strength.

Structural steel used in SFRS shall satisfy the When required in this chapter, the required strength
requirements of Section 1.3.1 , except as modified of an element (a member or a connection of a
in this chapter. The specified minimum yield stress member) shall be determined from the expected
of steel to be used for members in which inelastic yield stress, RyFy, of the member or an adjoining
behavior is expected shall not exceed 345 MPa for member, as applicable, where Fy is the specified
systems defined in Sections 12.3.2 , 12.3.3 and minimum yield stress of the steel to be used in the
12.4.2 . For systems defined in Sections 12.3.1 , member and Ry is the ratio of the expected yield
12.3.4 , 12.4.1 and 12.4.3 such limits shall not stress to the specified minimum yield stress, Fy , of
exceed 380 MPa. Either of these specified that material.
minimum yield stress limits are permitted to be
When required to determine the nominal strength,
exceeded when the suitability of the material is
Rn, for limit states within the same member from
determined by testing or other rational criteria.
which the required strength is determined, the
Exception: Specified minimum yield stress of expected yield stress, RyFy, and the expected tensile
structural steel shall not exceed 450 MPa for strength, RtFu, are permitted to be used in lieu of Fy
columns in systems defined in Sections 12.3.4 and and Fu, respectively, where Fu is the specified
12.4.3 . minimum tensile strength and Rt is the ratio of the
expected tensile strength to the specified minimum
The structural steel used in the SFRS described in
tensile strength, Fu, of that material.
Sections 12.3 and 12.4 shall meet one of the
following ASTM Specifications: The values of Ry and Rt for various steel and steel
reinforcement materials are given in TABLE 12-1.
1. A36/A36M
Other values of Ry and Rt are permitted if the values
2. A53/A53M are determined by testing of specimens, similar in
3. A500/A500M (Gr. B or C) size and source to the materials to be used,
conducted in accordance with the testing
4. A501 requirements per the ASTM Specifications for the
5. A529/A529M specified grade of steel.

6. A572/A572M [Gr. 42 (290), 50 (345) or 55 User Note: The expected compressive strength
(380)] of concrete may be estimated using values from
7. A588/A588M Seismic Rehabilitation of Existing Buildings,
ASCE/SEI 41-06.
8. A913/A913M [Gr. 50 (345), 60 (415) or 65
(450)]
9. A992/A992M 12.1.2.3 Heavy Sections. For structural
steel in the SFRS, in addition to the requirements of
10. A1011/A1011M HSLAS Gr. 55 (380) Section 1.3.1.3 , hot rolled shapes with flanges 38
11. (A1043/A1043M mm thick and thicker shall have a minimum Charpy
V-notch toughness of 27 J at 21 °C, tested in the
The structural steel used for column base plates alternate core location as described in ASTM A6
shall meet one of the preceding ASTM Supplementary Requirement S30. Plates 50 mm
Specifications or ASTM A283/A283M Grade D. thick and thicker shall have a minimum Charpy V-
notch toughness of 27 J at 21 °C, measured at any
User Note: This section only covers material location permitted by ASTM A673, Frequency P,
properties for structural steel used in the SFRS where the plate is used for the following:
and included in the definition of structural steel
given in Section 2.1 of the AISC Code of (a) Members built up from plate
Standard Practice, AISC (2010a). Other steel, (b) Connection plates where inelastic strain under
such as cables for permanent bracing, is not seismic loading is expected
covered. Steel reinforcement used in (c) The steel core of buckling-restrained braces.
components in composite SFRS is covered in
Section 12.1.2.5 . 12.1.2.4 Consumables for Welding
12.1.2.4.1 Seismic Force Resisting System
Welds. All welds used in members and connections

SBC 306-CR-18 144

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

in the SFRS shall be made with filler metals

Mechanical Properties for Demand Critical
meeting the requirements specified in clause 6.3 of
Welds
Structural Welding Code—Seismic Supplement
(AWS D1.8/D1.8M), hereafter referred to as AWS
Classification
D1.8/D1.8M.
Property
480 MPa 550 MPa
User Note: AWS D1.8/D1.8M sub-clauses
6.3.5, 6.3.6, 6.3.7 and 6.3.8 apply only to
Yield 400 min. 470 min.
demand critical welds.
Strength, MPa
12.1.2.4.2 Demand Critical Welds. Welds
Tensile 480 min. 550 min.
designated as demand critical shall be made with
Strength, MPa
filler metals meeting the requirements specified in
AWS D1.8/D1.8M clause 6.3.
Elongation, % 22 min. 19 min.
User Note: AWS D1.8/D1.8M requires that all
CVN 54 min. @ 20 °Cb, c
seismic force resisting system welds are to be
Toughness,
made with filler metals classified using AWS
(J)
A5 standards that achieve the following
mechanical properties: b
For LAST of +10 °C. For LAST less than
+10 °C, see AWS D1.8/D1.8M sub-clause
6.3.6.
Filler Metal Classification Properties for c
Tests conducted in accordance with AWS
Seismic Force Resisting System Welds
D1.8/D1.8M Annex A meeting 54 J min. at
a temperature lower than +20 °C also meet
Classification
this requirement.
Property
480 MPa 550 MPa
12.1.2.5 Concrete and Steel
Yield Strength, 400 min. 470 min. Reinforcement. Concrete and steel reinforcement
MPa used in composite components in composite
intermediate SFRS of Section 12.4.2 shall satisfy
Tensile Strength, 480 min. 550 min. the requirements of SBC 304, Chapter 18. Concrete
MPa and steel reinforcement used in composite
components in composite ordinary SFRS of
Elongation, % 22 min. 19 min. Sections 12.4.1 and 12.4.3 shall satisfy the
requirements of SBC 304, Section 18.2.1.4.
CVN Toughness, 27 min. @ -18 °Ca 12.1.3 Structural Design Drawings and
(J) Specifications
a
Filler metals classified as meeting 27 J min. 12.1.3.1 General. Structural design
at a temperature lower than drawings and specifications shall indicate the work
to be performed, and include items required by this
−18 °C also meet this requirement. Code, the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges, AISC (2010a), and SBC
201, in addition to the followings, as applicable:
User Note: In addition to the above 1. Designation of the SFRS
requirements, AWS D1.8/D1.8M requires,
unless otherwise exempted from testing, that 2. Identification of the members and
all demand critical welds are to be made with connections that are part of the SFRS
filler metals receiving Heat Input Envelope 3. Locations and dimensions of protected
Testing that achieve the following mechanical zones
properties in the weld metal:

SBC 306-CR-18 145

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

4. Connection details between concrete floor for the steel components of reinforced concrete or
diaphragms and the structural steel composite elements, structural design drawings and
elements of the SFRS specifications for composite construction shall
indicate the following items, as applicable:
5. Shop drawing and erection drawing
requirements not addressed in Section 1. Bar placement, cutoffs, lap and mechanical
12.5.1 splices, hooks and mechanical anchorage,
placement of ties and other transverse
12.1.3.2 Steel Construction. In addition to
reinforcement
the requirements of Section 12.1.3.1 , structural
design drawings and specifications for steel 2. Requirements for dimensional changes
construction shall indicate the following items, as resulting from temperature changes, creep
applicable: and shrinkage
1. Configuration of the connections 3. Location, magnitude and sequencing of
any prestressing or post-tensioning present
2. Connection material specifications and
sizes 4. Location of steel headed stud anchors and
welded reinforcing bar anchors
3. Locations of demand critical welds
4. Locations where gusset plates are to be 12.2—General Seismic Design
detailed to accommodate inelastic rotation Requirements
5. Locations of connection plates requiring The required strength and other seismic design
Charpy V-notch (CVN) toughness in requirements for seismic design categories (SDCs),
accordance with Section 12.1.2.3 risk categories, and the limitations on height and
irregularity shall be as specified in SBC 301.
6. Lowest anticipated service temperature
(LAST) of the steel structure, if the The design story drift and the limitations on story
structure is not enclosed and maintained at drift shall be determined as required in SBC 301.
a temperature of 10 °C or higher 12.2.1 Loads and Load Combinations. The
7. Locations where weld backing is required loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated
to be removed by SBC 301. Unless otherwise defined in these
provisions, where amplified seismic loads are
8. Locations where fillet welds are required required by this chapter, the seismic load effect
when weld backing is permitted to remain including the system overstrength factor Ωo shall be
9. Locations where fillet welds are required applied as prescribed by SBC 301. Where the
to reinforce groove welds or to improve effects of horizontal forces including overstrength,
connection geometry Emh, are defined in this chapter they shall be
combined with the vertical seismic load effect as
10. Locations where weld tabs are required to required by SBC 301.
be removed
11. Splice locations where tapered transitions User Note: The seismic load effect including
are required the system overstrength factor is defined in
SBC 301 Section 12.4.3. Where Emh is defined
12. The shape of weld access holes, if a shape in this chapter, it is intended to replace Emh in
other than those provided in the Code are SBC 301 Section 12.4.3.
required
13. Joints or groups of joints in which a In composite construction, incorporating reinforced
specific assembly order, welding concrete components designed in accordance with
sequence, welding technique or other the requirements of SBC 304, the requirements of
special precautions where such items are Section 2.3.3 shall be used for the seismic force
designated to be submitted to the engineer resisting system (SFRS).
of record
User Note: Ωo should be determined in
12.1.3.3 Composite Construction. In accordance with SBC 301.
addition to the requirements of Section 12.1.3.1 and
the requirements of Section 12.1.3.2 as applicable 12.2.2 Design Basis

SBC 306-CR-18 146

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

12.2.2.1 Required Strength. The required members shall have flanges continuously connected
strength of structural members and connections to the web or webs.
shall be the greater of:
Encased composite columns shall comply with the
1. The required strength as determined by requirements of Section 12.2.5.4.2.1 for moderately
structural analysis for the appropriate load ductile members and Section 12.2.5.4.2.2 for highly
combinations, as stipulated in SBC 301 ductile members.
and in Section 12.2.4
Filled composite columns shall comply with the
2. The required strength given in Sections requirements of Section 12.2.5.4.3 for both
12.3 and 12.4 moderately and highly ductile members.
12.2.2.2 Design Strength. The design Concrete sections shall comply with the
strength of systems, members and connections, requirements of SBC 304 Section 18.4 for
stipulated as the design strength 𝜑 𝑅𝑛 , shall be moderately ductile members and SBC 304 Section
determined in accordance with applicable 18.7 for highly ductile members.
requirements of this Code, except as modified
12.2.5.1.2 Width-to-Thickness Limitations
throughout the provisions of this chapter.
of Steel and Composite Sections. For members
12.2.3 System Type. The seismic force resisting designated as moderately ductile members, the
system (SFRS) shall contain one or more moment width-to-thickness ratios of compression elements
frame, braced frame or composite system shall not exceed the limiting width-to-thickness
conforming to the requirements of one of the ratios, λmd, from TABLE 12-2.
seismic systems designated in Sections 12.3 and
For members designated as highly ductile members,
12.4.
the width-to-thickness ratios of compression
12.2.4 Analysis. An analysis conforming to the elements shall not exceed the limiting width-to-
requirements of the SBC 301 and this Code shall be thickness ratios, λhd, from TABLE 12-2.
performed for design of the system. When the
12.2.5.2 Stability Bracing of Beams.
design is based upon elastic analysis, the stiffness
When required in Sections 12.3 and 12.4, stability
properties of component members of steel systems
bracing shall be provided as required in this section
shall be based on elastic sections and those of
to restrain lateral-torsional buckling of structural
composite systems shall include the effects of
steel or concrete-encased beams subject to flexure
cracked sections. Additional analysis shall be
and designated as moderately ductile members or
performed as specified in Sections 12.3 and 12.4.
highly ductile members.
When nonlinear analysis is required it shall be
performed in accordance with Chapter 12 of SBC 12.2.5.2.1 Moderately Ductile Members
301. i. The bracing of moderately ductile steel
12.2.5 Member Requirements. Members of beams shall satisfy the following
moment frames and braced frames in the seismic requirements:
force resisting system (SFRS) shall comply with 1. Both flanges of beams shall be laterally
applicable requirements of this Code and this braced or the beam cross section shall be
section. Certain members of the SFRS that are torsionally braced
expected to undergo inelastic deformation under the
design earthquake are designated in this chapter as 2. Beam bracing shall meet the requirements
moderately ductile members or highly ductile of Appendix E of the Code for lateral or
members. torsional bracing of beams, where the
required flexural strength of the member,
12.2.5.1 Classification of Sections for Mr, shall be:
Ductility. When required for the systems defined
in Sections 12.3, 12.4 and 12.2.5.5 , members 𝑀𝑟 = 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝑍 (12-1)
designated as moderately ductile members or highly
ductile members shall comply with this section. where

12.2.5.1.1 Section Requirements for Ry = ratio of the expected yield stress to the
Ductile Members. Structural steel sections for both specified minimum yield Stress
moderately ductile members and highly ductile Z = plastic section modulus, mm3

SBC 306-CR-18 147

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

3. Beam bracing shall have a maximum 2. The required strength of lateral bracing of
spacing of each flange provided adjacent to plastic
hinges shall be:
𝐿𝑏 = 0.17𝑟𝑦 𝐸/𝐹𝑦 (12-2)
𝑃𝑢 = 0.06𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝑍/ℎ𝑜 (12-4)
ii. The bracing of moderately ductile concrete-
encased composite beams shall satisfy the where
following requirements:
ho = distance between flange centroids, mm
1. Both flanges of members shall be laterally
The required strength of torsional bracing provided
braced or the beam cross section shall be
adjacent to plastic hinges shall be:
torsionally braced
2. Lateral bracing shall meet the 𝑀𝑢 = 0.06𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝑍 (12-5)
requirements of Appendix E for lateral or 3. The required bracing stiffness shall satisfy
torsional bracing of beams, where Mr = the requirements of Appendix E for lateral
Mp,exp and or torsional bracing of beams with Cd = 1.0
Mp,exp = expected flexural strength of and where the expected flexural strength of
beams, N-mm. For concrete-encased or the beam shall be:
composite beams, Mp,exp shall be calculated 𝑀𝑟 = 𝑀𝑢 = 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝑍 (12-6)
using the plastic stress distribution or the
strain compatibility method. Appropriate For concrete-encased composite beams, such
Ry factors shall be used for different bracing shall satisfy the following
elements of the cross-section while requirements:
establishing section force equilibrium and 1. Both flanges of beams shall be laterally
calculating the flexural strength. braced or the beam cross section shall be
3. Member bracing shall have a maximum torsionally braced
spacing of 2. The required strength of lateral bracing
𝐿𝑏 = 0.17𝑟𝑦 𝐸/𝐹𝑦 (12-3) provided adjacent to plastic hinges shall be

4. using the material properties of the steel 𝑃𝑢 = 0.06𝑀𝑜𝑝,𝑒𝑥𝑝 (12-7)

section and ry in the plane of buckling of the beam, where Mp,exp is determined
calculated based on the elastic transformed in accordance with Section 12.2.5.2.1
section. (ii)(2).
12.2.5.2.2 Highly Ductile Members. In The required strength for torsional bracing
addition to the requirements of Sections 12.2.5.2.1 provided adjacent to plastic hinges shall be
(i) (1) and (2), and 12.2.5.2.1 (ii) (1) and (2), the Mu = 0.06Mp, exp of the beam.
bracing of highly ductile beam members shall have
a maximum spacing of Lb = 0.086ryE/Fy. For 3. The required bracing stiffness shall satisfy
concrete-encased composite beams, the material the requirements of Appendix E for lateral
properties of the steel section shall be used and the or torsional bracing of beams where Mr =
calculation for ry in the plane of buckling shall be Mu = Mp, exp of the beam is determined in
based on the elastic transformed section. accordance with Section 12.2.5.2.1 (ii)(2)
and Cd = 1.0
12.2.5.2.3 Special Bracing at Plastic Hinge
Locations. Special bracing shall be located 12.2.5.3 Protected Zones. Discontinuities
adjacent to expected plastic hinge locations where specified in Section 12.5.2.1 resulting from
required by Sections 12.3 and 12.4. fabrication and erection procedures and from other
attachments are prohibited in the area of a member
For structural steel beams, such bracing shall or a connection element designated as a protected
satisfy the following requirements: zone by the provision of this chapter or ANSI/AISC
1. Both flanges of beams shall be laterally 358.
braced or the member cross section shall be Exception: Welded steel headed stud anchors and
torsionally braced other connections are permitted in protected zones
when designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or as

SBC 306-CR-18 148

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

otherwise determined with a connection i. One-half the least dimension of the

prequalification or as determined in a program of section
qualification testing in accordance with Section
ii. 8 longitudinal bar diameters
12.7.
iii. 24 tie bar diameters
12.2.5.4 Columns. Columns in moment
frames, braced frames and shear walls shall satisfy iv. 300 mm
the requirements of this section. 2. This spacing shall be maintained over a
12.2.5.4.1 Required Strength. The required vertical distance equal to the greatest of the
strength of columns in the SFRS shall be following lengths, measured from each
determined from the following: joint face and on both sides of any section
where flexural yielding is expected to
1. The load effect resulting from the analysis
occur:
requirements for the applicable system per
Sections 12.3 and 12.4. Exception: Section i. One-sixth the vertical clear height of
12.2.5.4.1 need not apply to Sections the column
12.4.1 or 12.4.3 ii. The maximum cross-sectional
2. The compressive axial strength and tensile dimension
strength as determined using the load iii. 450 mm
combinations stipulated in SBC 301
including the amplified seismic load. It is 3. Tie spacing over the remaining column
permitted to neglect applied moments in length shall not exceed twice the spacing
this determination unless the moment defined in Section 12.2.5.4.2.1 (1)
results from a load applied to the column 4. Splices and end bearing details for encased
between points of lateral support. The composite columns in composite ordinary
required axial compressive strength and SFRS of sections 12.4.1 and 12.4.3 shall
tensile strength need not exceed either of satisfy the requirements of this Code and
the following: SBC 304 Section 10.7.5.3.2. The design
(a) The maximum load transferred to the shall comply with SBC 304 Sections 18.2.7
column by the system, including the and 18.2.8. The design shall consider any
effects of material overstrength and adverse behavioral effects due to abrupt
strain hardening in those members changes in either the member stiffness or
where yielding is expected the nominal tensile strength. Transitions to
reinforced concrete sections without
(b) The forces corresponding to the embedded structural steel members,
resistance of the foundation to over transitions to bare structural steel sections,
turning uplift and column bases shall be considered
12.2.5.4.2 Encased Composite abrupt changes
Columns. Encased composite columns shall 5. Welded wire fabric shall be prohibited as
satisfy the requirements of Chapter 9, in addition to transverse reinforcement in moderately
the requirements of this section. Additional ductile members
requirements, as specified for moderately ductile
members and highly ductile members in Sections 12.2.5.4.2.2 Highly Ductile Members.
12.2.5.4.2.1 and 12.2.5.4.2.2 , shall apply as Encased composite columns used as highly ductile
required in the descriptions of the composite members shall satisfy Section 12.2.5.4.2.1 in
seismic systems in Section 12.4. addition to the following requirements:
12.2.5.4.2.1 Moderately Ductile Members. 1. Longitudinal load-carrying
Encased composite columns used as moderately reinforcement shall satisfy the
ductile members shall satisfy the following requirements of SBC 304 Section 18.7.4
requirements: 2. Transverse reinforcement shall be hoop
1. The maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement as defined in SBC 304 Chapter
reinforcement at the top and bottom shall 18 and shall satisfy the following
be the least of the following: requirements:

SBC 306-CR-18 149

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

The minimum area of tie reinforcement, 3. Encased composite columns in braced frames
Ash, shall be: with required compressive strengths, without
consideration of the amplified seismic loads,
𝐹𝑦  𝐴𝑠 𝑓𝑐′
𝐴𝑠ℎ = 0.09 ℎ𝑐𝑐  𝑠  (1 − ) ( ) (12-8) greater than 0.2Pn shall have transverse
𝑃𝑛 𝐹𝑦𝑠𝑟 reinforcement as specified in Section
where 12.2.5.4.2.2 (2)(iii) over the total element
length. This requirement need not be satisfied
As = cross-sectional area of the structural if the nominal strength of the concrete-
steel core, mm2 encased steel section alone is greater than the
Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the load effect from a load combination of 1.0D
structural steel core, MPa + 0.5L

Fysr = specified minimum yield stress of the 4. Composite columns supporting reactions
ties, MPa from discontinued stiff members, such as
walls or braced frames, shall have transverse
Pn = nominal compressive strength of the reinforcement as specified in Section
composite column calculated in 12.2.5.4.2.2 (2)(iii) over the full length
accordance with this Code, N beneath the level at which the discontinuity
hcc = cross-sectional dimension of the occurs if the required compressive strengths,
confined core measured center-to-center without consideration of the amplified
of the tie reinforcement, mm seismic loads, exceeds 0.1Pn. Transverse
reinforcement shall extend into the
f ′c = specified compressive strength of discontinued member for at least the length
concrete, MPa required to develop full yielding in the
s = spacing of transverse reinforcement concrete-encased steel section and
measured along the longitudinal axis of longitudinal reinforcement. This requirement
the structural member, mm need not be satisfied if the nominal strength
of the concrete-encased steel section alone is
Equation (12-8) need not be satisfied if the greater than the load effect from a load
nominal strength of the concrete-encased combination of 1.0D + 0.5L
structural steel section alone is greater than the
load effect from a load combination of 1.0D + 5. When the column terminates on a footing or
0.5L mat foundation, the transverse reinforcement
as specified in this section shall extend into
where the footing or mat at least 300 mm. When the
D = dead load due to the weight of the column terminates on a wall, the transverse
structural elements and permanent reinforcement shall extend into the wall for
features on the building, N at least the length required to develop full
yielding in the concrete-encased shape and
L = live load due to occupancy and longitudinal reinforcement
moveable equipment, N
12.2.5.4.3 Filled Composite Columns. This
The maximum spacing of transverse section applies to columns that meet the limitations
reinforcement along the length of the of Section 9.2.2 . Such columns shall be designed to
column shall be the lesser of six satisfy the requirements of Chapter 9, except that
longitudinal load-carrying bar diameters the nominal shear strength of the composite column
or 150 mm. shall be the nominal shear strength of the structural
When specified in Sections 12.2.5.4.2.2 steel section alone, based on its effective shear area.
(3) and (4), the maximum spacing of 12.2.5.5 H-PILES. Design of H-piles shall
transverse reinforcement along the comply with the requirements of this Code
member length shall be the lesser of one- regarding design of members subjected to
fourth the least member dimension or 100 combined loads. H-piles shall satisfy the
mm. Confining reinforcement shall be requirements for highly ductile members of Section
spaced not more than 350 mm on center 12.2.5.1 . If battered (sloped) and vertical piles are
in the transverse direction. used in a pile group, the vertical piles shall be
designed to support the combined effects of the

SBC 306-CR-18 150

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

dead and live loads without the participation of the 2. Bolts and welds shall not be designed to
battered piles. share force in a joint or the same force
component in a connection
Tension in each pile shall be transferred to the pile
cap by mechanical means such as shear keys,
User Note: A member force, such as a diagonal
reinforcing bars, or studs welded to the embedded
brace axial force, must be resisted at the
portion of the pile.
connection entirely by one type of joint (in other
At each pile, the length equal to the depth of the pile words, either entirely by bolts or entirely by
cross section located directly below the bottom of welds). A connection in which bolts resist a force
the pile cap shall be designated as a protected zone that is normal to the force resisted by welds, such
meeting the requirements of Sections 12.2.5.3 and as a moment connection in which welded flanges
12.5.2.1 . transmit flexure and a bolted web transmits
shear, is not considered to be sharing the force.
12.2.5.6 Composite Slab Diaphragms.
The design of composite floor and roof slab
3. Bolt holes shall be standard holes or short-
diaphragms for seismic effects shall meet the
slotted holes perpendicular to the applied
following requirements.
load
12.2.5.6.1 Load Transfer. Details shall be
Exception: For diagonal braces specified in Section
provided to transfer loads between the diaphragm
12.4, oversized holes are permitted in one
and boundary members, collector elements, and
connection ply only when the connection is
elements of the horizontal framing system.
designed as a slip-critical joint for the required
12.2.5.6.2 Nominal Shear Strength. The brace connection strength in this Section.
nominal in-plane shear strength of composite
diaphragms and concrete slab on steel deck User Note: Diagonal brace connections with
diaphragms shall be taken as the nominal shear oversized holes must also satisfy other limit
strength of the reinforced concrete above the top of states including bolt bearing and bolt shear for
the steel deck ribs in accordance with SBC 304 the required strength of the connection as
excluding Chapter 14. Alternatively, the composite defined in Section 12.4. Alternative hole types
diaphragm nominal shear strength shall be are permitted if designated in ANSI/AISC 358,
determined by in-plane shear tests of concrete-filled or if otherwise determined in a connection
diaphragms. prequalification in accordance with Section
12.2.6 Connection Requirements. Connections, 12.7.1 or if determined in a program of
joints and fasteners that are part of the SFRS shall qualification testing in accordance with
comply with Chapter 10, and with the additional Section 12.7.2 .
requirements of this section.
4. All bolts shall be installed as pretensioned
Splices and bases of columns that are not designated high-strength bolts. Faying surfaces shall
as part of the SFRS shall satisfy the requirements of satisfy the requirements for slip-critical
Sections 12.2.6.4.1 , 12.2.6.4.3 and 12.2.6.5 . connections in accordance with Section
Where protected zones are designated in connection 10.3.8 with a faying surface with a Class
elements by this chapter or ANSI/AISC 358, they A slip coefficient or higher
shall satisfy the requirements of Sections 12.2.5.3 Exceptions: Connection surfaces are permitted to
and 12.5.2.1 . have coatings with a slip coefficient less than that
12.2.6.1 Bolted Joints. Bolted joints shall of a Class A faying surface for the following:
satisfy the following requirements: (a) End plate moment connections conforming to
1. The design shear strength of bolted joints the requirements of Section 12.3.1 , or
using standard holes shall be calculated as ANSI/AISC 358
that for bearing-type joints in accordance (b) Bolted joints where the load effects due to
with Sections 10.3.6 and 10.3.10 . The seismic are transferred either by tension in bolts
nominal bearing strength at bolt holes shall or by compression bearing but not by shear in
not be taken greater than 2.4dtFu bolts
12.2.6.2 Welded Joints. Welded joints
shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 10.

SBC 306-CR-18 151

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

12.2.6.3 Continuity Plates and Stiffeners. 1. The design strength of partial-joint-

The design of continuity plates and stiffeners penetration (PJP) groove welded joints, if
located in the webs of rolled shapes shall allow for used, shall be at least equal to 200% of the
the reduced contact lengths to the member flanges required strength
and web based on the corner clip sizes in Section
2. The design strength for each flange splice
12.5.2.4 .
shall be at least equal to 0.5RyFybf tf , as
12.2.6.4 Column Splices applicable, where RyFy is the expected
yield stress of the column material and bf
12.2.6.4.1 Location of Splices. For all
tf is the area of one flange of the smaller
building columns, including those not designated as
column connected
part of the SFRS, column splices shall be located
1.2 m or more away from the beam-to-column 3. Where butt joints in column splices are
flange connections. made with complete-joint-penetration
(CJP) groove welds, when tension stress at
Exceptions:
any location in the smaller flange exceeds
1. When the column clear height between 0.30Fy, tapered transitions are required
beam-to-column flange connections is less between flanges of unequal thickness or
than 2.4 m, splices shall be at half the clear width. Such transitions shall be in
height accordance with AWS D1.8/D1.8M clause
2. Column splices with webs and flanges 4.2
joined by complete-joint-penetration 12.2.6.4.3 Required Shear Strength. For all
groove welds are permitted to be located building columns including those not designated as
closer to the beam-to-column flange part of the SFRS, the required shear strength of
connections, but not less than the depth of column splices with respect to both orthogonal axes
the column of the column shall be Mpc/H, as applicable, where
3. Splices in composite columns Mpc is the lesser nominal plastic flexural strength of
the column sections for the direction in question,
User Note: Where possible, splices should be and H is the height of the story.
located at least 1.2 m above the finished floor The required shear strength of splices of columns in
elevation to permit installation of perimeter the SFRS shall be the greater of the above
safety cables prior to erection of the next tier and requirement or the required shear strength
to improve accessibility. determined per Section 12.2.6.4.2 (a) and (b).
12.2.6.4.4 Structural Steel Splice
12.2.6.4.2 Required Strength. The required
Configurations. Structural steel column splices are
strength of column splices in the SFRS shall be the
permitted to be either bolted or welded, or welded
greater of:
to one column and bolted to the other. Splice
(a) The required strength of the columns, including configurations shall meet all specific requirements
that determined from Sections 12.3 and 12.4 in Sections 12.3 and 12.4.
and sub-section 12.2.5.4.1 ; or,
Splice plates or channels used for making web
(b) The required strength determined using the load splices in SFRS columns shall be placed on both
combinations stipulated in the SBC 301 sides of the column web.
including the amplified seismic load. The
required strength need not exceed the For welded butt joint splices made with groove
maximum loads that can be transferred to the welds, weld tabs shall be removed in accordance
splice by the system with AWS D1.8/D1.8M clause 6.11. Steel backing
of groove welds need not be removed.
In addition, welded column splices in which any
portion of the column is subject to a calculated net 12.2.6.4.5 Splices in Encased Composite
tensile load effect determined using the load Columns. For encased composite columns, column
combinations stipulated in SBC 301, including the splices shall conform to Section 12.2.5.4.2 and SBC
amplified seismic load, shall satisfy all of the 304 Section 18.7.4.3.
following requirements: 12.2.6.5 Column Bases. The required
strength of column bases, including those that are

SBC 306-CR-18 152

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

not designated as part of the SFRS, shall be 12.2.6.5.2 Required Shear Strength. The
calculated in accordance with this section. required shear strength of column bases, including
those not designated as part of the SFRS, and their
The design strength of steel elements at the column
attachments to the foundations, shall be the
base, including base plates, anchor rods, stiffening
summation of the horizontal component of the
plates, and shear lug elements shall be in
required connection strengths of the steel elements
accordance with this Code.
that are connected to the column base as follows:
Where columns are welded to base plates with
1. For diagonal braces, the horizontal
groove welds, weld tabs and weld backing shall be
component shall be determined from the
removed, except that weld backing located on the
required strength of diagonal brace
inside of flanges and weld backing on the web of I-
connections for the SFRS.
shaped sections need not be removed if backing is
attached to the column base plate with a continuous 2. For columns, the horizontal component
8 mm fillet weld. Fillet welds of backing to the shall be equal to the required shear strength
inside of column flanges are prohibited. for column splices prescribed in Section
12.2.6.4.3 .
The design strength of concrete elements at the
column base, including anchor rod embedment and Exception: Single story columns with simple
reinforcing steel, shall be in accordance with SBC connections at both ends need not comply with
304 Chapter 17. Section 12.2.6.5.2 (2).

User Note: When using concrete reinforcing User Note: The horizontal components can
steel as part of the anchorage embedment include the shear load from columns and the
design, it is important to consider the anchor horizontal component of the axial load from
failure modes and provide reinforcement that is diagonal members framing into the column
developed on both sides of the expected failure base. Section 12.2.6.4 includes references to
surface. See SBC 304 Chapter 17, including Section 12.2.5.4.1 (a) and Sections 12.3 and
Commentary. 12.4.

12.2.6.5.3 Required Flexural Strength.

12.2.6.5.1 Required Axial Strength. The Where column bases are designed as moment
required axial strength of column bases that are connections to the foundation, the required flexural
designated as part of the SFRS, including their strength of column bases that are designated as part
attachment to the foundation, shall be the of the SFRS, including their attachment to the
summation of the vertical components of the foundation, shall be the summation of the required
required connection strengths of the steel elements connection strengths of the steel elements that are
that are connected to the column base, but not less connected to the column base as follows:
than the greater of: 1. For diagonal braces, the required flexural
1. The column axial load calculated using the strength shall be at least equal to the
load combinations of SBC 301, including required flexural strength of diagonal
the amplified seismic load brace connections.
2. The required axial strength for column 2. For columns, the required flexural strength
splices, as prescribed in Section 12.2.6.4 shall be at least equal to the lesser of the
following:
User Note: The vertical components can 1.1RyFyZ, as applicable, of the column,
include both the axial load from columns and or
the vertical component of the axial load from
diagonal members framing into the column The moment calculated using the load
base. Section 12.2.6.4 includes references to combinations of the SBC 301, including
Section 12.2.5.4.1 and Sections 12.3 and 12.4. the amplified seismic load.
Where diagonal braces frame to both sides of a
column, the effects of compression brace User Note: Moments at column to column base
buckling should be considered in the connections designed as simple connections may
summation of vertical components. be ignored.

SBC 306-CR-18 153

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

12.2.6.6 Composite Connections. This beyond the point at which it is no longer

section applies to connections in buildings that required to resist the forces. Development
utilize composite steel and concrete systems lengths shall be determined in accordance
wherein seismic load is transferred between with SBC 304 Chapter 25
structural steel and reinforced concrete
6. Composite connections shall satisfy the
components. Methods for calculating the
following additional requirements:
connection strength shall satisfy the requirements in
this section. Unless the connection strength is When the slab transfers horizontal
determined by analysis or testing, the models used diaphragm forces, the slab
for design of connections shall satisfy the following reinforcement shall be designed and
requirements: anchored to carry the in-plane tensile
forces at all critical sections in the slab,
1. Force shall be transferred between
including connections to collector
structural steel and reinforced concrete
beams, columns, diagonal braces and
through:
walls
(a) direct bearing from internal bearing
For connections between structural steel
mechanisms;
or composite beams and reinforced
(b) shear connection; concrete or encased composite columns,
(c) shear friction with the necessary transverse hoop reinforcement shall be
clamping force provided by provided in the connection region of the
reinforcement normal to the plane of column to satisfy the requirements of
shear transfer; or SBC 304 Section 18.8, except for the
(d) a combination of these means. following modifications:
The contribution of different mechanisms is (a) Structural steel sections framing into
permitted to be combined only if the stiffness the connections are considered to
and deformation capacity of the mechanisms provide confinement over a width
are compatible. Any potential bond strength equal to that of face bearing plates
between structural steel and reinforced welded to the beams between the
concrete shall be ignored for the purpose of the flanges.
connection force transfer mechanism. (b) Lap splices are permitted for
perimeter ties when confinement of
2. The nominal bearing and shear-friction
the splice is provided by face bearing
strengths shall meet the requirements of
plates or other means that prevents
SBC 304 Chapter 22
spalling of the concrete cover in the
3. Face bearing plates consisting of stiffeners systems in Sections 12.4.1 , 12.4.2
between the flanges of steel beams shall be and 12.4.3 .
provided when beams are embedded in (c) The longitudinal bar sizes and layout
reinforced concrete columns or walls. in reinforced concrete and composite
4. The nominal shear strength of concrete- columns shall be detailed to
encased steel panel zones in beam-to minimize slippage of the bars
column connections shall be calculated as through the beam-to-column
the sum of the nominal strengths of the connection due to high force transfer
structural steel and confined reinforced associated with the change in column
concrete shear elements as determined in moments over the height of the
Section 10.10.6 and SBC 304 Section connection.
18.8, respectively. 12.2.6.7 Steel Anchors. Where steel
5. Reinforcement shall be provided to resist headed stud anchors or welded reinforcing bar
all tensile forces in reinforced concrete anchors are part of the intermediate moment frame
components of the connections. of Section 12.4.2 , their shear and tensile strength
Additionally, the concrete shall be shall be reduced by 25% from the specified
confined with transverse reinforcement. strengths given in Chapter 9.
All reinforcement shall be fully developed
in tension or compression, as applicable,

SBC 306-CR-18 154

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

12.3.1.1 Scope. Ordinary moment frames

User Note: The 25% reduction is not necessary
(OMF) of structural steel shall be designed in
for gravity and collector components in
conformance with this section.
structures with intermediate or special seismic
force resisting systems designed for the amplified 12.3.1.2 Basis of Design. OMF designed in
seismic load. accordance with these provisions are expected to
provide minimal inelastic deformation capacity in
12.2.7 Deformation Compatibility of Non- their members and connections.
SFRS Members and Connections. Where
12.3.1.3 Analysis. There are no additional
deformation compatibility of members and
analysis requirements.
connections that are not part of the seismic force
resisting system (SFRS) is required by SBC 301, 12.3.1.4 System Requirements. There are
these elements shall be designed to resist the no additional system requirements.
combination of gravity load effects and the effects 12.3.1.5 Members
of deformations occurring at the design story drift
calculated in accordance with SBC 301. 12.3.1.5.1 Basic Requirements. There are
no limitations on width-to-thickness ratios of
User Note: SBC 301 stipulates the above members for OMF, beyond those in the Code .
requirement for both structural steel and There are no requirements for stability bracing of
composite members and connections. Flexible beams or joints in OMF, beyond those in the Code.
shear connections that allow member end Structural steel beams in OMF are permitted to be
rotations per Section 10.1.2 of this Code composite with a reinforced concrete slab to resist
should be considered to meet these gravity loads.
requirements. Inelastic deformations are 12.3.1.5.2 Protected Zones. There are no
permitted in connections or members provided designated protected zones for OMF members.
they are self-limiting and do not create
instability in the member. See the Commentary 12.3.1.6 Connections. Beam-to-column
for further discussion. connections are permitted to be fully restrained
(FR) or partially restrained (PR) moment
connections in accordance with this section.
12.3—Moment-Frame and Braced- 12.3.1.6.1 Demand Critical Welds.
Frame Systems Complete-joint-penetration (CJP) groove welds of
This section provides the basis of design, the beam flanges to columns are demand critical welds,
requirements for analysis, and the requirements for and shall satisfy the requirements of Section
the system, members and connections for steel 12.1.2.4.2 and 12.5.2.3 .
moment-frame and braced-frame systems. 12.3.1.6.2 FR Moment Connections. FR
The section is organized as follows: moment connections that are part of the seismic
force resisting system (SFRS) shall satisfy at least
12.3.1 Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF) one of the following requirements:
12.3.2 Intermediate Moment Frames (IMF) (a) FR moment connections shall be designed for a
12.3.3 Ordinary Cantilever Column Systems required flexural strength that is equal to the
(OCCS) expected beam flexural strength multiplied by
1.1. The expected beam flexural strength shall
12.3.4 Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames be determined as Ry Mp
(OCBF)
The required shear strength, Vu, of the connection
12.3.5 Eccentrically Braced Frames (EBF) shall be based on the load combinations in SBC 301
that include the amplified seismic load. In
User Note: The requirements of this section are determining the amplified seismic load the effect of
in addition to those required by this Code and horizontal forces including overstrength, Emh, shall
SBC 301. be taken as:

12.3.1 Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF) 𝐸𝑚ℎ = 2[1.1𝑅𝑦 𝑀𝑝 ]/𝐿𝑐𝑓 (12-9)

where

SBC 306-CR-18 155

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

Lcf = clear length of beam, mm reinforcement, or two-sided fillet welds.

The required strength of these joints shall
Mp = FyZ, N-mm
not be less than the design strength of the
Ry = ratio of expected yield stress to the contact area of the plate with the column
specified minimum yield stress, Fy flange.
(b) FR moment connections shall be designed for a 5. The beam web shall be connected to the
required flexural strength and a required shear column flange using either a CJP groove
strength equal to the maximum moment and weld extending between weld access holes,
corresponding shear that can be transferred to or using a bolted single plate shear
the connection by the system, including the connection designed for required shear
effects of material over-strength and strain strength per Eq. (12-9).
hardening
User Note: For FR moment connections,
User Note: Factors that may limit the maximum panel zone shear strength should be checked
moment and corresponding shear that can be in accordance with Section 10.10.6 . The
transferred to the connection include: required shear strength of the panel zone
(1) the strength of the columns, and should be based on the beam end moments
computed from the load combinations
(2) the resistance of the foundations to uplift. stipulated by SBC 301, not including the
amplified seismic load.
For options (a) and (b) in Section 12.3.1.6.2 ,
continuity plates should be provided as required by 12.3.1.6.3 PR Moment Connections. PR
Sections 10.10.1 , 10.10.2 and 10.10.3 . The moment connections shall satisfy the following
bending moment used to check for continuity plates requirements:
should be the same bending moment used to design
the beam-to-column connection; in other words, 1. Connections shall be designed for the
either 1.1RyMp or the maximum moment that can be maximum moment and shear from the
transferred to the connection by the system. applicable load combinations as described
in Sections 12.2.1 and 12.2.2
(c) FR moment connections between wide flange
beams and the flange of wide flange columns 2. The stiffness, strength and deformation
shall either satisfy the requirements of Section capacity of PR moment connections shall
12.3.2.6 or shall satisfy the following be considered in the design, including the
requirements: effect on overall frame stability
1. All welds at the beam-to-column 3. The nominal flexural strength of the
connection shall satisfy the requirements connection, Mn,PR, shall be no less than
of Chapter 3 of ANSI/AISC 358 50% of Mp of the connected beam
2. Beam flanges shall be connected to column Exception: For one-story structures, Mn,PR
flanges using complete-joint penetration shall be no less than 50% of Mp of the
(CJP) groove welds connected column.
3. The shape of weld access holes shall be in 4. Vu, shall be determined per Section
accordance with sub-clause 6.10.1.2 of 12.3.1.6.2 (a) with Mp in Eq. (12-9) taken
AWS D1.8/D1.8M. Weld access hole as Mn,PR
quality requirements shall be in 12.3.2 Intermediate Moment Frames (IMF)
accordance with sub-clause 6.10.2 of AWS
D1.8/D1.8M 12.3.2.1 Scope. Intermediate moment
frames (IMF) of structural steel shall be designed in
4. Continuity plates shall satisfy the conformance with this section.
requirements of Section 12.3.2.6.6 .
12.3.2.2 Basis of Design. IMF designed in
Exception: The welded joints of the accordance with these provisions are expected to
continuity plates to the column flanges are provide limited inelastic deformation capacity
permitted to be complete-joint-penetration through flexural yielding of the IMF beams and
groove welds, two-sided partial-joint- columns, and shear yielding of the column panel
penetration groove welds with

SBC 306-CR-18 156

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

zones. Design of connections of beams to columns, 12.3.2.5.3 Protected Zones

including panel zones and continuity plates, shall be
The region at each end of the beam subject to
based on connection tests that provide the
inelastic straining shall be designated as a protected
performance required by Section 12.3.2.6.2 , and
zone, and shall satisfy the requirements of Section
demonstrate this conformance as required by
12.2.5.3 . The extent of the protected zone shall be
Section 12.3.2.6.3 .
as designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise
12.3.2.3 Analysis. There are no additional determined in a connection prequalification in
analysis requirements. accordance with Section 12.7.1 , or as determined
in a program of qualification testing in accordance
12.3.2.4 System Requirements
with Section 12.7.2 .
12.3.2.4.1 Stability Bracing of Beams.
12.3.2.6 Connections
Beams shall be braced to satisfy the requirements
for moderately ductile members in Section 12.2.5.2 12.3.2.6.1 Demand Critical Welds. The
a. following welds are demand critical welds, and
shall satisfy the requirements of Section 12.1.2.4.2
In addition, unless otherwise indicated by testing,
and 12.5.2.3 :
beam braces shall be placed near concentrated
forces, changes in cross section, and other locations 1. Groove welds at column splices
where analysis indicates that a plastic hinge will
2. Welds at column-to-base plate connections
form during inelastic deformations of the IMF. The
placement of stability bracing shall be consistent Exception: Where it can be shown that
with that documented for a prequalified connection column hinging at, or near, the base plate
designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise is precluded by conditions of restraint, and
determined in a connection prequalification in in the absence of net tension under load
accordance with Section 12.7.1 , or in a program of combinations including the amplified
qualification testing in accordance with Section seismic load, demand critical welds are not
12.7.2 . required
The required strength of lateral bracing provided 3. Complete-joint-penetration groove welds
adjacent to plastic hinges shall be as required by of beam flanges and beam webs to
Section 12.2.5.2.3 . columns, unless otherwise designated by
ANSI/AISC 358, or otherwise determined
12.3.2.5 Members
in a connection prequalification in
12.3.2.5.1 Basic Requirements. Beam and accordance with Section 12.7.1 , or as
column members shall satisfy the requirements of determined in a program of qualification
Section 12.2.5 for moderately ductile members, testing in accordance with Section 12.7.2 .
unless otherwise qualified by tests.
User Note: For the designation of demand
Structural steel beams in IMF are permitted to be
critical welds, standards such as ANSI/AISC 358
composite with a reinforced concrete slab to resist
and tests addressing specific connections and
gravity loads.
joints should be used in lieu of the more general
12.3.2.5.2 Beam Flanges. Abrupt changes in terms of these Provisions. Where these
beam flange area shall not be permitted in plastic Provisions indicate that a particular weld is
hinge regions. The drilling of flange holes or designated demand critical, but the more specific
trimming of beam flange width shall not be standard or test does not make such a
permitted unless testing or qualification designation, the more specific standard or test
demonstrates that the resulting configuration can should govern. Likewise, these standards and
develop stable plastic hinges to accommodate the tests may designate welds as demand critical that
required story drift angle. The configuration shall are not identified as such by these Provisions.
be consistent with a prequalified connection
designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise 12.3.2.6.2 Beam-to-Column Connection
determined in a connection prequalification in Requirements. Beam-to-column connections used
accordance with Section 12.7.1 , or in a program of in the SFRS shall satisfy the following
qualification testing in accordance with Section requirements:
12.7.2 .

SBC 306-CR-18 157

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

1. The connection shall be capable of Exception: In lieu of Eq. (12-10), the required shear
accommodating a story drift angle of at strength of the connection shall be as specified in
least 0.02 rad ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a
connection prequalification in accordance with
2. The measured flexural resistance of the
Section 12.7.1 , or in a program of qualification
connection, determined at the column face,
testing in accordance with Section 12.7.2.
shall equal at least 0.80Mp of the connected
beam at a story drift angle of 0.02 rad 12.3.2.6.5 Panel Zone. There are no
additional panel zone requirements.
12.3.2.6.3 Conformance Demonstration.
Beam-to-column connections used in the SFRS
User Note: Panel zone shear strength should be
shall satisfy the requirements of Section 12.3.2.6 b
by one of the following: checked in accordance with Section 10.10.6. The
required shear strength of the panel zone should
1. Use of IMF connections designed in be based on the beam end moments computed
accordance with ANSI/AISC 358 from the load combinations stipulated by the
2. Use of a connection prequalified for IMF applicable building code, not including the
in accordance with Section 12.7.1 . amplified seismic load.

3. Provision of qualifying cyclic test results 12.3.2.6.6 Continuity Plates. Continuity

in accordance with Section 12.7.2 . Results plates shall be provided in accordance with the
of at least two cyclic connection tests shall following:
be provided and are permitted to be based
on one of the following: 12.3.2.6.6.1 Continuity Plate Requirements.
Continuity plates shall be provided with the
Tests reported in the research literature exception of the following conditions:
or documented tests performed for
other projects that represent the project (a) When otherwise determined in a connection
conditions, within the limits specified prequalification in accordance with Section
in Section 12.7.2. 12.7.1 , or as determined in a program of
qualification testing in accordance with Section
Tests that are conducted specifically 12.7.2 .
for the project and are representative (b) When the beam flange is welded to the flange
of project member sizes, material of a wide-flange or built-up I-shaped column
strengths, connection configurations, having a thickness that satisfies Eqs. (12-11)
and matching connection processes, and (12-12), continuity plates need not be
within the limits specified in Section provided:
12.7.2.
𝑅𝑦𝑏  𝐹𝑦𝑏
12.3.2.6.4 Required Shear Strength. The 𝑡𝑐𝑓 ≥ 0.4√1.8𝑏𝑏𝑓  𝑡𝑏𝑓 (12-11)
𝑅𝑦𝑐  𝐹𝑦𝑐
required shear strength of the connection shall be
𝑏𝑏𝑓
based on the load combinations in the SBC 301 that 𝑡𝑐𝑓 ≥ (12-12)
include the amplified seismic load. In determining 6
the amplified seismic load the effect of horizontal where
forces including overstrength, Emh, shall be taken
as: Fyb = specified minimum yield stress of the
beam flange, MPa
Emh 2[1.1RyMp]/Lh (12-10)
Fyc = specified minimum yield stress of the
where column flange, MPa
Lh distance between beam plastic hinge Ryb = ratio of the expected yield stress of the
locations as defined within the test report or beam material to the specified minimum
ANSI/AISC 358, mm yield stress
Mp FyZ nominal plastic flexural strength, N- Ryc = ratio of the expected yield stress of the
mm column material to the specified
minimum yield stress
Ry ratio of the expected yield stress to the
specified minimum yield stress, Fy bbf = beam flange width, mm

SBC 306-CR-18 158

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

tbf = beam flange thickness, mm they shall be complete-joint-penetration groove

welds. When bolted column splices are used, they
tcf = minimum required thickness of column
shall have a required flexural strength that is at least
flange when no continuity plates are
equal to RyFyZx of the smaller column, where Zx is
provided, mm
the plastic section modulus about the x-axis. The
(c) When the beam flange is welded to the flange required shear strength of column web splices shall
of the I-shape in a boxed wide flange column be at least equal to ΣMpc /H, where ΣMpc is the sum
having a thickness that satisfies Eqs. (12-13) of the nominal plastic flexural strengths of the
and (12-14), continuity plates need not be columns above and below the splice.
provided:
Exception: The required strength of the column
𝑏𝑏𝑓 𝑏𝑏𝑓 𝐹𝑦𝑏  𝑅𝑦𝑏 splice considering appropriate stress concentration
𝑡𝑐𝑓 ≥ 0.4√[1 − 2 (𝑏𝑐𝑓 − )] 1.8𝑏𝑏𝑓  𝑡𝑏𝑓 (12-13)
𝑏𝑐𝑓 4 𝐹𝑦𝑐  𝑅𝑦𝑐 factors or fracture mechanics stress intensity factors
need not exceed that determined by a nonlinear
𝑏𝑏𝑓
𝑡𝑐𝑓 ≥ (12-14) analysis as specified in section 12.2.4 .
12
(d) For bolted connections, the continuity plate
provisions of ANSI/AISC 358 for the specific 12.3.3 Ordinary Cantilever Column Systems
connection type shall apply (OCCS)
12.3.2.6.6.2 Continuity Plate Thickness. 12.3.3.1 Scope. Ordinary cantilever
Where continuity plates are required, the thickness column systems (OCCS) of structural steel shall be
of the plates shall be determined as follows: designed in conformance with this section.
(a) For one-sided connections, continuity plate 12.3.3.2 Basis of Design. OCCS designed
thickness shall be at least one half of the in accordance with these provisions are expected to
thickness of the beam flange provide minimal inelastic drift capacity through
(d) For two-sided connections, the continuity flexural yielding of the columns.
plate thickness shall be at least equal to the 12.3.3.3 Analysis. There are no additional
thicker of the two beam flanges on either side analysis requirements.
of the column. Continuity plates shall also
conform to the requirements of Section 10.10 12.3.3.4 System Requirements
12.3.2.6.6.3 Continuity Plate Welding. 12.3.3.4.1 Columns. Columns shall be
Continuity plates shall be welded to column flanges designed using the load combinations including the
using CJP groove welds. amplified seismic load. The required axial strength,
Prc , shall not exceed 15% of the design axial
Continuity plates shall be welded to column webs strength, Pc, for these load combinations only.
using groove welds or fillet welds. The required
strength of the sum of the welded joints of the 12.3.3.4.2 Stability Bracing of Columns.
continuity plates to the column web shall be the There are no additional stability bracing
smallest of the following: requirements for columns.
a) The sum of the design strengths in tension 12.3.3.5 Members
of the contact areas of the continuity plates 12.3.3.5.1 Basic Requirements. There are
to the column flanges that have attached no additional requirements.
beam flanges
b) The design strength in shear of the contact 12.3.3.5.2 Column Flanges. There are no
area of the plate with the column web additional column flange requirements.
c) The design strength in shear of the column 12.3.3.5.3 Protected Zones. There are no
panel zone designated protected zones.
d) The sum of the expected yield strengths of 12.3.3.6 Connections
the beam flanges transmitting force to the
12.3.3.6.1 Demand Critical Welds. No
continuity plates
demand critical welds are required for this system.
12.3.2.6.7 Column Splices. Column splices
12.3.3.6.2 Column Bases. There are no
shall comply with the requirements of Section
additional column base requirements.
12.2.6 . Where welds are used to make the splice,

SBC 306-CR-18 159

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

12.3.4 Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames 12.3.4.5 Members

(OCBF)
12.3.4.5.1 Basic Requirements. Braces shall
12.3.4.1 Scope. Ordinary concentrically satisfy the requirements of Section 12.2.5.1 for
braced frames (OCBF) of structural steel shall be moderately ductile members.
designed in conformance with this section.
12.3.4.5.2 Slenderness. Braces in V or
12.3.4.2 Basis of Design. This section is inverted-V configurations shall have𝐾𝐿/𝑟 ≤
applicable to braced frames that consist of 4√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 .
concentrically connected members. Eccentricities
less than the beam depth are permitted if they are 12.3.4.6 Connections
accounted for in the member design by 12.3.4.6.1 Diagonal Brace Connections.
determination of eccentric moments using the The required strength of diagonal brace
amplified seismic load. connections is the load effect based upon the
OCBF designed in accordance with these amplified seismic load.
provisions are expected to provide limited inelastic Exception: The required strength of the brace
deformation capacity in their members and connection need not exceed the following:
connections
1. In tension, the expected yield strength of
12.3.4.3 Analysis. There are no additional the brace. The expected yield strength shall
analysis requirements. be determined as RyFyAg
12.3.4.4 System Requirements 2. In compression, the expected brace
12.3.4.4.1 V-Braced and Inverted V- strength in compression The expected
Braced Frames. Beams in V-type and inverted V- brace strength in compression is permitted
type OCBF shall be continuous at brace to be taken as the lesser of RyFyAg and
connections away from the beam-column 1.14FcreAg where Fcre is determined from
connection and shall satisfy the following Chapter 5 using the equations for Fcr
requirements: except that the expected yield stress RyFy is
used in lieu of Fy. The brace length used
1. The required strength shall be determined for the determination of Fcre shall not
based on the load combinations of the SBC exceed the distance from brace end to
301 assuming that the braces provide no brace end
support of dead and live loads. For load
combinations that include earthquake effects, 3. When oversized holes are used, the
the seismic load effect, E, on the member shall required strength for the limit state of bolt
be determined as follows: slip need not exceed a load effect based
upon using the load combinations
The forces in braces in tension shall be stipulated by the applicable building code,
assumed to be the least of the following: not including the amplified seismic load.
a) The expected yield strength of the 12.3.5 Eccentrically Braced Frames (EBF)
brace in tension, RyFyAg
12.3.5.1 Scope. Eccentrically braced
b) The load effect based upon the
frames (EBF) of structural steel shall be designed in
amplified seismic load
conformance with this section.
c) The maximum force that can be
developed by the system 12.3.5.2 Basis of Design. This section is
applicable to braced frames for which one end of
The forces in braces in compression shall each brace intersects a beam at an eccentricity from
be assumed to be equal to 0.3Pn the intersection of the centerlines of the beam and
2. As a minimum, one set of lateral braces is an adjacent brace or column, forming a link that is
required at the point of intersection of the subject to shear and flexure. Eccentricities less than
braces, unless the member has sufficient out- the beam depth are permitted in the brace
of-plane strength and stiffness to ensure connection away from the link if the resulting
stability between adjacent brace points member and connection forces are addressed in the
design and do not change the expected source of
12.3.4.4.2 K-Braced Frames. K-type braced inelastic deformation capacity.
frames are not permitted for OCBF.

SBC 306-CR-18 160

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

EBF designed in accordance with these provisions axial strength used in the equations in Section
are expected to provide significant inelastic 12.3.5.5, should be calculated from the analysis
deformation capacity primarily through shear or above.
flexural yielding in the links.
12.3.5.4 System Requirements
Where links connect directly to columns, design of
their connections to columns shall provide the 12.3.5.4.1 Link Rotation Angle. The link
performance required by Section 12.3.5.6.5.1 and rotation angle is the inelastic angle between the link
demonstrate this conformance as required by and the beam outside of the link when the total story
Section 12.3.5.6.5.2 . drift is equal to the design story drift, Δ. The link
rotation angle shall not exceed the following values:
12.3.5.3 Analysis. The required strength of
diagonal braces and their connections, beams a) For links of length 1.6Mp/Vp or less: 0.08
outside links, and columns shall be based on the rad
load combinations in SBC 301 that include the b) For links of length 2.6Mp/Vp or greater: 0.02
amplified seismic load. In determining the rad
amplified seismic load, the effect of horizontal
forces including overstrength, Emh, shall be taken as where
the forces developed in the member assuming the Mp= nominal plastic flexural strength, N-mm
forces at the ends of the links correspond to the
adjusted link shear strength. The adjusted link shear Vp = nominal shear strength of an active link,
strength shall be taken as Ry times the link nominal N
shear strength, Vn, given in Section 12.3.5.5.2.2 Linear interpolation between the above values shall
multiplied by 1.25 for I-shaped links and 1.4 for box be used for links of length between 1.6Mp/Vp and
links. 2.6Mp/Vp.
Exceptions: 12.3.5.4.2 Bracing of Link. Bracing shall be
1. The effect of horizontal forces including provided at both the top and bottom link flanges at
overstrength, Emh, is permitted to be taken the ends of the link for I-shaped sections. Bracing
as 0.88 times the forces determined above shall have an available strength and stiffness as
for the design of the following members: required for expected plastic hinge locations by
Section 12.2.5.2.3.
(a) The portions of beams outside links
12.3.5.5 Members
(b) Columns in frames of three or more
stories of bracing 12.3.5.5.1 Basic Requirements
2. It is permitted to neglect flexural forces Brace members shall satisfy width-to-thickness
resulting from seismic drift in this limitations in Section 12.2.5.1 for moderately
determination. Moment resulting from a ductile members.
load applied to the column between points Column members shall satisfy width-to-thickness
of lateral support must be considered. limitations in Section 12.2.5.1.2 for highly ductile
3. The required strength of columns need not members.
exceed the lesser of the following: Where the beam outside of the link is a different
(a) Forces corresponding to the resistance section from the link, the beam shall satisfy the
of the foundation to over turning uplift width-to-thickness limitations in Section 12.2.5.1
(b) Forces as determined from nonlinear for moderately ductile members.
analysis as defined in Section 12.2.4.
User Note: The diagonal brace and beam
The inelastic link rotation angle shall be determined segment outside of the link are intended to
from the inelastic portion of the design story drift. remain essentially elastic under the forces
Alternatively, the inelastic link rotation angle is generated by the fully yielded and strain
permitted to be determined from nonlinear analysis hardened link. Both the diagonal brace and beam
as defined in Section 12.2.4. segment outside of the link are typically subject
to a combination of large axial force and bending
User Note: The seismic load effect, E, used in moment, and therefore should be treated as
the design of EBF members, such as the required beam-columns in design, where the available

SBC 306-CR-18 161

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

strength is defined by Chapter 8. Where the beam 𝑉𝑝 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑙𝑤 √1 − (𝑃𝑢 /𝑃𝑦 )2 for 𝑃𝑢 /𝑃𝑦 > 0.15
outside the link is the same member as the link,
(12-17)
its strength may be determined using expected
material properties as permitted by Section For I shaped Link Sections
12.1.2.2.
𝐴𝑙𝑤 = (𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑓 )𝑡𝑤 (12-18)
12.3.5.5.2 Links
Links subject to shear and flexure due to For Box link sections
eccentricity between the intersections of brace = 2(𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑓 )𝑡𝑤 (12-19)
centerlines and the beam centerline (or between the
intersection of the brace and beam centerlines and 𝑃𝑢 = required axial strength, N
the column centerline for links attached to columns) 𝑃𝑦 = nominal axial yield strength
shall be provided. The link shall be considered to
extend from brace connection to brace connection = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 (12-20)
for center links and from brace connection to
column face for link-to-column connections except
as permitted by Section 12.3.5.6.5. (b) For flexural yielding:
12.3.5.5.2.1 Limitations. Links shall be I- 𝑉𝑛 = 2𝑀𝑝 /𝑒 (12-21)
shaped cross sections (rolled wide-flange sections
or built-up sections), or built-up box sections. HSS where
sections shall not be used as links. Links shall 𝑀𝑝 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍 for 𝑃𝑢 /𝑃𝑦 ≤ 0.15 (12-22)
satisfy the requirements of Section 12.2.5.1 for 𝑃
1− 𝑢
highly ductile members. 𝑀𝑝 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍 (
𝑃𝑦
) for 𝑃𝑢 /𝑃𝑦 > 0.15 (12-23)
0.85
Exception: Flanges of links with I-shaped sections
with link lengths, 𝑒 ≤ 1.6𝑀𝑝 /𝑉𝑝 , are permitted to e = link length, defined as the clear dist ance
satisfy the requirements for moderately ductile between the ends of two diagonal braces or
members. between the diagonal brace and the column
face, mm
The web or webs of a link shall be single thickness.
Doubler-plate reinforcement and web penetrations 12.3.5.5.2.3 Link Length. If Pu/Py > 0.15, the
are not permitted. For links made of built-up cross length of the link shall be limited as follows:
sections, complete-joint-penetration groove welds
When ρ′ ≤ 0.5
shall be used to connect the web (or webs) to the
flanges. 1.6𝑀𝑝
𝑒≤ (12-24)
𝑉𝑝
Links of built-up box sections shall have a moment
of inertia, Iy, about an axis in the plane of the EBF When ρ′ > 0.5
limited to Iy > 0.67Ix, where Ix is the moment of 1.6𝑀𝑝
inertia about an axis perpendicular to the plane of 𝑒≤ (1.15 − 0.3𝜌′ ) (12-25)
𝑉𝑝
the EBF.
where
12.3.5.5.2.2 Shear Strength. The link design 𝑃𝑢 /𝑃𝑦
shear strength, vVn, shall be the lower value 𝜌′ =
𝑉𝑢 /𝑉𝑦
(12-26)
obtained in accordance with the limit states of shear
yielding in the web and flexural yielding in the 𝑉𝑢 = required shear strength, N
gross section. For both limit states:
𝑉𝑦 = nominal shear yield strength, N
v = 0.90
= 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑙𝑤 (12-27)
(a) For shear yielding:
User Note: For links with low axial force
𝑉𝑛 = 𝑉𝑝 (12-15) there is no upper limit on link length. The
where limitations on link rotation angle in Section
12.3.5.4.1 result in a practical lower limit on
𝑉𝑝 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑙𝑤 for 𝑃𝑢 /𝑃𝑦 ≤ 0.15 (12-16)
link length.

SBC 306-CR-18 162

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

12.3.5.5.2.4 Link Stiffeners for I-Shaped Box links shall be provided with intermediate
Cross Sections. Full-depth web stiffeners shall be web stiffeners as follows:
provided on both sides of the link web at the (a) For links of length 1.6Mp/Vp or less and with
diagonal brace ends of the link. These stiffeners web depth-to-thickness ratio, h/tw, greater than
shall have a combined width not less than (bf − 2tw)
or equal to 0.64√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 , full-depth web
and a thickness not less than the larger of 0.75tw or
10 mm, where bf and tw are the link flange width and stiffeners shall be provided on one side of each
link web thickness, respectively. link web, spaced at intervals not exceeding 20tw
− (d − 2tf)/8.
Links shall be provided with intermediate web (b) For links of length 1.6Mp/Vp or less and with
stiffeners as follows: web depth-to-thickness ratio, h/tw, less than
(a) Links of lengths 1.6Mp/Vp or less shall be 0.64√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 , no intermediate web stiffeners are
provided with intermediate web stiffeners required.
spaced at intervals not exceeding (30tw − d/5)
(c) For links of length greater than 1.6Mp/Vp, no
for a link rotation angle of 0.08 rad or (52tw −
intermediate web stiffeners are required.
d/5) for link rotation angles of 0.02 rad or less.
Linear interpolation shall be used for values Intermediate web stiffeners shall be full depth, and
between 0.08 and 0.02 rad. are permitted to be welded to the outside or inside
(b) Links of length greater than or equal to face of the link webs.
2.6Mp/Vp and less than 5Mp/Vp shall be provided The required strength of fillet welds connecting a
with intermediate web stiffeners placed at a link stiffener to the link web is FyAst, where Ast is
distance of 1.5 times bf from each end of the the horizontal cross-sectional area of the link
link. stiffener.
(c) Links of length between 1.6Mp/Vp and 2.6Mp/Vp
shall be provided with intermediate web User Note: Stiffeners of box links need not be
stiffeners meeting the requirements of (a) and welded to link flanges.
(b) above.
12.3.5.5.3 Protected Zones. Links in EBFs
Intermediate web stiffeners are not required in links
are a protected zone, and shall satisfy the
of length greater than 5Mp/Vp.
requirements of Section 12.2.5.3.
Intermediate web stiffeners shall be full depth. For
12.3.5.6 Connections
links that are less than 635 mm in depth, stiffeners
are required on only one side of the link web. The 12.3.5.6.1 Demand Critical Welds. The
thickness of one-sided stiffeners shall not be less following welds are demand critical welds and shall
than tw or 10 mm, whichever is larger, and the width satisfy the requirements of Sections 12.1.2.4.2 and
shall be not less than (bf/2) − tw. For links that are 12.5.2.3:
635 mm in depth or greater, similar intermediate
1. Groove welds at column splices
stiffeners are required on both sides of the web.
2. Welds at column-to-base plate connections
The required strength of fillet welds connecting a
link stiffener to the link web is FyAst, where Ast is Exception: Where it can be shown that
the horizontal cross-sectional area of the link column hinging at, or near, the base plate
stiffener and Fy is the yield stress of the stiffener. is precluded by conditions of restraint, and
The required strength of fillet welds connecting the in the absence of net tension under load
stiffener to the link flanges is FyAst/4. combinations including the amplified
seismic load, demand critical welds are not
12.3.5.5.2.5 Link Stiffeners for Box Sections.
required.
Full-depth web stiffeners shall be provided on one
side of each link web at the diagonal brace 3. Welds at beam-to-column connections
connection. These stiffeners are permitted to be conforming to Section 12.3.5.6.2(2).
welded to the outside or inside face of the link webs. 4. Welds attaching the link flanges and the
These stiffeners shall each have a width not less link web to the column where links connect
than b/2, where b is the inside width of the box. to columns
These stiffeners shall each have a thickness not less
than the larger of 0.75tw or 13 mm. 5. Welds connecting the webs to the flanges
in built-up beams within the link.

SBC 306-CR-18 163

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

12.3.5.6.2 Beam-to-Column Connections. 12.3.5.6.5 Link-to-Column Connections

Where a brace or gusset plate connects to both
12.3.5.6.5.1 Requirements. Link-to-column
members at a beam-to-column connection, the
connections shall be fully restrained (FR) moment
connection shall conform to one of the following:
connections and shall satisfy the following
1. The connection shall be a simple requirements:
connection meeting the requirements of
1. The connection shall be capable of
Section 2.3.5a where the required rotation
sustaining the link rotation angle specified
is taken to be 0.025 radians; or
in Section 12.3.5.4.1.
2. The connection shall be designed to resist
2. The shear resistance of the connection,
a moment equal to the lesser of the
measured at the required link rotation
following:
angle, shall be at least equal to the expected
A moment corresponding to the shear strength of the link, RyVn, as defined
expected beam flexural strength in Section 12.3.5.5.2.2.
multiplied by 1.1. The expected beam
3. The flexural resistance of the connection,
flexural strength shall be determined as
measured at the required link rotation
RyMp.
angle, shall be at least equal to the moment
A moment corresponding to the sum of corresponding to the nominal shear
expected column flexural strengths strength of the link, Vn, as defined in
multiplied by 1.1. The sum of expected Section 12.3.5.5.2.2.
column flexural strengths shall be
12.3.5.6.5.2 Conformance Demonstration.
Σ(RyFyZ).
Link-to-column connections shall satisfy the above
This moment shall be considered in combination requirements by one of the following:
with the required strength of the brace connection
(a) Use a connection prequalified for EBF in
and beam connection, including the amplified
accordance with Section 12.7.1.
diaphragm collector forces.
12.3.5.6.3 Diagonal Brace Connections. User Note: There are no prequalified link-to-
When oversized holes are used, the required column connections..
strength for the limit state of bolt slip need not
(b) Provide qualifying cyclic test results in
exceed a load effect based upon using the load
accordance with Section 12.7.2. Results of at
combinations stipulated by the applicable building
least two cyclic connection tests shall be
code, including the amplified seismic load.
provided and are permitted to be based on one
Connections of braces designed to resist a portion of the following:
of the link end moment shall be designed as fully
Tests reported in research literature or
restrained.
documented tests performed for other projects
12.3.5.6.4 Column Splices. Column splices that are representative of project conditions,
shall comply with the requirements of Section within the limits specified in Section 12.7.2.
12.2.6.4. Where groove welds are used to make the
Tests that are conducted specifically for the
splice, they shall be complete-joint-penetration
project and are representative of project
groove welds. Column splices shall be designed to
member sizes, material strengths, connection
develop at least 50% of the lesser available flexural
configurations, and matching connection
strength of the connected members.
material properties, within the limits specified
The required shear strength shall be ΣMpc/Hc, in Section 12.7.2.
where Exception: Cyclic testing of the
connection is not required if the
Hc = clear height of the column between beam
following conditions are met:
connections, including a structural slab,
if present, mm 1. Reinforcement at the beam-to-
column connection at the link end
ΣMpc = sum of the nominal plastic flexural
precludes yielding of the beam
strengths, FycZc,of the columns above and
over the reinforced length.
below the splice, N-mm.

SBC 306-CR-18 164

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

2. The available strength of the

User Note: Composite ordinary moment
reinforced section and the
frames, comparable to reinforced concrete
connection equals or exceeds the
ordinary moment frames, are only permitted in
required strength calculated based
seismic design categories B or below in SBC
upon adjusted link shear strength as
301. This is in contrast to steel ordinary
described in Section 12.3.5.3.
moment frames, which are permitted in higher
3. The link length (taken as the beam seismic design categories. The design
segment from the end of the requirements are commensurate with
reinforcement to the brace providing minimal ductility in the members
connection) does not exceed and connections.
1.6Mp/Vp.
12.4.1.3 Analysis. There are no additional
4. Full depth stiffeners as required in
analysis requirements.
Section 12.3.5.5.2.4 are placed at
the link-toreinforcement interface. 12.4.1.4 System Requirements. There are
no additional system requirements.
12.4.1.5 Members. There are no additional
12.4—Composite Moment-Frame and requirements for steel or composite members
Braced-Frame Systems beyond those in the Code. Reinforced concrete
This section provides the basis of design, the columns shall satisfy the requirements of SBC 304,
requirements for analysis, and the requirements for excluding Chapter 18.
the system, members and connections for 12.4.1.5.1 Protected Zones. There are no
composite moment frame and braced-frame designated protected zones.
systems.
12.4.1.6 Connections. Connections shall
The section is organized as follows: be fully restrained (FR). Connections shall be
12.4.1 Composite Ordinary Moment Frames (C- designed for the applicable load combinations as
OMF) described in Sections 12.2.1 and 12.2.2 Beam-to-
column connection design strengths shall be
12.4.2 Composite Intermediate Moment Frames determined in accordance with this Code and
(C-IMF) Section 12.2.6.6 .
12.4.3 Composite Ordinary Braced Frames (C- 12.4.1.6.1 Demand Critical Welds. There
OBF) are no requirements for demand critical welds.
User Note: The requirements of this section 12.4.2 Composite Intermediate Moment
are in addition to those required by this Code Frames (C-IMF)
and SBC 301. 12.4.2.1 Scope. Composite intermediate
moment frames (C-IMF) shall be designed in
12.4.1 Composite Ordinary Moment Frames conformance with this section. This section is
(C-OMF) applicable to moment frames with fully restrained
12.4.1.1 Scope. Composite ordinary (FR) connections that consist of composite or
moment frames (C-OMF) shall be designed in reinforced concrete columns and structural steel,
conformance with this section. This section is concrete-encased composite or composite beams.
applicable to moment frames with fully restrained 12.4.2.2 Basis of Design. C-IMF designed
(FR) connections that consist of either composite or in accordance with these provisions are expected to
reinforced concrete columns and structural steel, provide limited inelastic deformation capacity
concrete-encased composite, or composite beams. through flexural yielding of the C-IMF beams and
12.4.1.2 Basis of Design. C-OMF designed columns, and shear yielding of the column panel
in accordance with these provisions are expected to zones. Design of connections of beams to columns,
provide minimal inelastic deformation capacity in including panel zones, continuity plates and
their members and connections. diaphragms shall provide the performance required
by Section 12.4.2.6.2 , and demonstrate this
conformance as required by Section 12.4.2.6.3 .

SBC 306-CR-18 165

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

12.4.2.6 Connections. Connections shall

User Note: Composite intermediate moment
be fully restrained (FR) and shall satisfy the
frames, comparable to reinforced concrete
requirements of Sections 12.2.6 and this section.
intermediate moment frames, are only
permitted in seismic design categories C or 12.4.2.6.1 Demand Critical Welds. There
below in SBC 301. This is in contrast to steel are no requirements for demand critical welds.
intermediate moment frames, which are
12.4.2.6.2 Beam-to-Column Connection
permitted in higher seismic design categories.
Requirements. Beam-to-composite column
The design requirements are commensurate
connections used in the SFRS shall satisfy the
with providing limited ductility in the members
following requirements:
and connections.
1. The connection shall be capable of
12.4.2.3 Analysis. There are no additional accommodating a story drift angle of at
analysis requirements. least 0.02 rad
12.4.2.4 System Requirements 2. The measured flexural resistance of the
connection, determined at the column face,
12.4.2.4.1 Stability Bracing of Beams.
shall equal at least 0.80Mp of the connected
Beams shall be braced to satisfy the requirements
beam at a story drift angle of 0.02 rad.
for moderately ductile members in Section
where Mp is defined as the nominal flexural
12.2.5.2.1 .
strength of the steel, concrete-encased or
In addition, unless otherwise indicated by testing, composite beams and shall satisfy the
beam braces shall be placed near concentrated requirements, Chapter 9
forces, changes in cross section, and other locations
12.4.2.6.3 Conformance Demonstration.
where analysis indicates that a plastic hinge will
Beam-to-column connections used in the SFRS
form during inelastic deformations of the C-IMF.
shall satisfy the requirements of Section 12.4.2.6.2
The required strength of stability bracing provided by connection testing or calculations that are
adjacent to plastic hinges shall be as required by substantiated by mechanistic models and
Section 12.2.5.2.3 . component limit state design criteria consistent with
these provisions.
12.4.2.5 Members
12.4.2.6.4 Required Shear Strength. The
12.4.2.5.1 Basic Requirements. Steel and
required shear strength of the connection shall be
composite members shall satisfy the requirements
based on the load combinations in the SBC 301 that
of Sections 12.2.5 for moderately ductile members.
include the amplified seismic load. In determining
12.4.2.5.2 Beam Flanges. Abrupt changes in the amplified seismic load the effect of horizontal
the beam flange area are prohibited in plastic hinge forces including overstrength, Emh, shall be taken
regions. The drilling of flange holes or trimming of as:
beam flange width is prohibited unless testing or
qualification demonstrates that the resulting Emh 2[1.1RyMp, exp]/Lh (12-28)
configuration can develop stable plastic hinges. where Mp,exp is the expected flexural strength of the
12.4.2.5.3 Protected Zones. The region at steel, concrete-encased or composite beams, N-mm.
each end of the beam subject to inelastic straining For concrete-encased or composite beams, Mp, exp
shall be designated as a protected zone, and shall shall be calculated using the plastic stress
satisfy the requirements of Section 12.2.5.3 . distribution or the strain compatibility method.
Appropriate Ry factors shall be used for different
User Note: The plastic hinge zones at the ends of elements of the cross-section while establishing
C-IMF beams should be treated as protected section force equilibrium and calculating the
zones. In general, the protected zone will extend flexural strength. Lh shall be equal to the distance
from the face of the composite column to one- between beam plastic hinge locations, mm.
half of the beam depth beyond the plastic hinge
point. User Note: For steel beams, Mp, exp in Eq
(12-28) may be taken as RyMp of the beam.

12.4.2.6.5 Connection Diaphragm Plates.

Connection diaphragm plates are permitted for

SBC 306-CR-18 166

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

filled composite columns both external to the deformations in their members and connections. C-
column and internal to the column. OBF shall satisfy the requirements of Section 12.3.4
, except as modified in this section.
Where diaphragm plates are used, the thickness of
the plates shall be at least the thickness of the beam
User Note: Composite ordinary braced frames,
flange.
comparable to other steel braced frames
The diaphragm plates shall be welded around the designed per this Code using R = 3, are only
full perimeter of the column using either complete- permitted in seismic design categories C or
joint-penetration welds or two sided fillet welds. below in SBC 301. This is in contrast to steel
The required strength of these joints shall not be ordinary braced frames, which are permitted in
less than the design strength of the contact area of higher seismic design categories. The design
the plate with the column sides. requirements are commensurate with
providing minimal ductility in the members
Internal diaphragms shall have circular openings
and connections.
sufficient for placing the concrete.
12.4.2.6.6 Column Splices. In addition to the 12.4.3.3 Analysis. There are no additional
requirements of Section 12.2.6.4 , column splices analysis requirements.
shall comply with the requirements of this section.
12.4.3.4 System Requirements. There are
Where groove welds are used to make the splice,
no additional system requirements.
they shall be complete-joint-penetration groove
welds. When column splices are not made with 12.4.3.5 Members
groove welds, they shall have a required flexural
12.4.3.5.1 Basic Requirements. There are no
strength that is at least equal to the nominal flexural
additional requirements.
strength, Mpcc, of the smaller composite column.
The required shear strength of column web splices 12.4.3.5.2 Columns. There are no additional
shall be at least equal to ΣMpcc /H, where ΣMpcc is requirements for structural steel and composite
the sum of the nominal flexural strengths of the columns. Reinforced concrete columns shall satisfy
composite columns above and below the splice. For the requirements of SBC 304, excluding Chapter
composite columns, the nominal flexural strength 18.
shall satisfy the requirements of Chapter 9 with
12.4.3.5.3 Braces. There are no additional
consideration of the required axial strength, Prc.
requirements for structural steel and filled
12.4.3 Composite Ordinary Braced Frames (C- composite braces.
OBF)
12.4.3.5.4 Protected Zones. There are no
12.4.3.1 Scope. Composite ordinary designated protected zones.
braced frames (C-OBF) shall be designed in
12.4.3.6 Connections. Connections shall
conformance with this section. Columns shall be
satisfy the requirements of Section 12.2.6.6 .
structural steel, encased composite, filled
composite or reinforced concrete members. Beams 12.4.3.6.1 Demand Critical Welds. There
shall be either structural steel or composite beams. are no requirements for demand critical welds.
Braces shall be structural steel or filled composite
12.5—Fabrication and Erection
members. This section is applicable to braced
frames that consist of concentrically connected This section addresses requirements for fabrication
members where at least one of the elements and erection.
(columns, beams or braces) is a composite or
reinforced concrete member. User Note: All requirements of Chapter 14
also apply, unless specifically modified by
12.4.3.2 Basis of Design. This section is
these Provisions.
applicable to braced frames that consist of
concentrically connected members. Eccentricities
The section is organized as follows:
less than the beam depth are permitted if they are
accounted for in the member design by 12.5.1 Shop and Erection Drawings
determination of eccentric moments. 12.5.2 Fabrication and Erection
C-OBF designed in accordance with these 12.5.1 Shop and Erection Drawings
provisions are expected to provide limited inelastic

SBC 306-CR-18 167

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

12.5.1.1 Shop Drawings for Steel 1. Within the protected zone, holes, tack
Construction. Shop drawings shall indicate the welds, erection aids, air-arc gouging, and
work to be performed, and include items required unspecified thermal cutting from
by the Code, the AISC Code of Standard Practice fabrication or erection operations shall be
for Steel Buildings and Bridges, SBC 301, the repaired as required by the engineer of
requirements of Sections 12.1.3.1 and 12.1.3.2 , record.
and the following, as applicable:
2. Steel headed stud anchors and decking
1. Locations of pretensioned bolts attachments that penetrate the beam flange
shall not be placed on beam flanges within
2. Locations of Class A, or higher, faying
the protected zone. Arc spot welds as
surfaces
required to secure decking shall be
3. Gusset plates drawn to scale when they are permitted.
designed to accommodate inelastic
3. Welded, bolted, screwed or shot-in
rotation
attachments for perimeter edge angles,
4. Weld access hole dimensions, surface exterior facades, partitions, duct work,
profile and finish requirements piping or other construction shall not be
5. Nondestructive testing (NDT) where placed within the protected zone.
performed by the fabricator Exception: Other attachments are
12.5.1.2 Erection Drawings for Steel permitted where designated or approved
Construction. Erection drawings shall indicate the by the engineer of record. See Section
work to be performed, and include items required 12.2.3 .
by the Code, the AISC Code of Standard Practice
User Note: AWS D1.8/D1.8M clause 6.15
for Steel Buildings and Bridges, SBC 301, the
contains requirements for weld removal and
requirements of Sections 12.1.3.1 and 12.1.3.2 ,
the repair of gouges and notches in the
and the following, as applicable:
protected zone.
1. Locations of pretensioned bolts
2. Those joints or groups of joints in which a 12.5.2.2 Bolted Joints. Bolted joints shall
specific assembly order, welding satisfy the requirements of Section 12.2.6.1 .
sequence, welding technique or other 12.5.2.3 Welded Joints. Welding and
special precautions are required welded connections shall be in accordance with
12.5.1.3 Shop and Erection Drawings for Structural Welding Code-Steel (AWS
Composite Construction. Shop drawings and D1.1/D1.1M), hereafter referred to as AWS
erection drawings for the steel components of D1.1/D1.1M, and AWS D1.8/D1.8M.
composite steel concrete construction shall satisfy Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) shall be
the requirements of Sections 12.5.1.1 and 12.5.1.2 approved by the engineer of record.
. The shop drawings and erection drawings shall
Weld tabs shall be in accordance with AWS
also satisfy the requirements of Section 12.1.3.3 .
D1.8/D1.8M clause 6.10, except at the outboard
ends of continuity-plate-to-column welds, weld
User Note: For reinforced concrete and
tabs and weld metal need not be removed closer
composite steel-concrete construction, the
provisions of ACI 315 Details and Detailing of than 6 mm from the continuity plate edge.
Concrete Reinforcement and ACI 315-R Manual AWS D1.8/D1.8M clauses relating to fabrication
of Engineering and Placing Drawings for shall apply equally to shop fabrication welding and
Reinforced Concrete Structures apply. to field erection welding.

12.5.2 Fabrication and Erection User Note: AWS D1.8/D1.8M was

specifically written to provide additional
12.5.2.1 Protected Zone. A protected zone
requirements for the welding of seismic force
designated by these Provisions or ANSI/AISC 358
shall comply with the following requirements: resisting systems, and has been coordinated
wherever possible with these Provisions. AWS
D1.8/D1.8M requirements related to

SBC 306-CR-18 168

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

fabrication and erection are organized as 12.7—Prequalification and Cyclic

follows, including normative (mandatory) Qualification Testing Provisions
annexes:
This section addresses requirements for
1. General Requirements qualification and prequalification testing.
2. Reference Documents This section is organized as follows:
3. Definitions 12.7.1. Prequalification of Beam-to-Column and
4. Welded Connection Details Link-to-Column Connections

5. Welder Qualification 12.7.2. Cyclic Tests for Qualification of Beam-to-

Column and Link-to-Column Connections
6. Fabrication
12.7.1 Prequalification of Beam-to-Column
Annex A. WPS Heat Input Envelope Testing of and Link-to-Column Connections
Filler Metals for Demand Critical Welds
12.7.1.1 Scope. This section contains
Annex B. Intermix CVN Testing of Filler minimum requirements for prequalification of
Metal Combinations (where one of the filler beam-to-column moment connections intermediate
metals is FCAW-S) moment frames (IMF), and link-to-column
Annex C. Supplemental Welder Qualification connections in eccentrically braced frames (EBF).
for Restricted Access Welding Prequalified connections are permitted to be used,
within the applicable limits of prequalification,
Annex D. Supplemental Testing for Extended without the need for further qualifying cyclic tests.
Exposure Limits for FCAW Filler Metals When the limits of prequalification or design
AWS D1.8/D1.8M requires the complete requirements for prequalified connections conflict
removal of all weld tab material, leaving only with the requirements of these Provisions, the limits
base metal and weld metal at the edge of the of prequalification and design requirements for
joint. This is to remove any weld prequalified connections shall govern.
discontinuities at the weld ends, as well as 12.7.1.2 General Requirements
facilitate magnetic particle testing (MT) of this
area. At continuity plates, these Provisions 12.7.1.2.1 Basis for Prequalification.
permit a limited amount of weld tab material to Connections shall be prequalified based on test data
remain because of the reduced strains at satisfying Section 12.7.1.3, supported by analytical
continuity plates, and any remaining weld studies and design models. The combined body of
discontinuities in this weld end region would evidence for prequalification must be sufficient to
likely be of little significance. Also, weld tab assure that the connection can supply the required
removal sites at continuity plates are not story drift angle for IMF systems, or the required
subjected to MT. link rotation angle for EBF, on a consistent and
reliable basis within the specified limits of
AWS D1.8/D1.8M clause 6 is entitled prequalification. All applicable limit states for the
“Fabrication,” but the intent of AWS is that all connection that affect the stiffness, strength and
provisions of AWS D1.8/D1.8M apply deformation capacity of the connection and the
equally to fabrication and erection activities as seismic force resisting system (SFRS) must be
described in the Specification and in these identified. These include rupture related limit states,
Provisions. stability related limit states, and all other limit states
pertinent for the connection under con-sideration.
12.5.2.4 Continuity Plates and Stiffeners. The effect of design variables listed in Section
Corners of continuity plates and stiffeners placed in 12.7.1.4 shall be addressed for connection
the webs of rolled shapes shall be detailed in prequalification.
accordance with AWS D1.8/D1.8M clause 4.1.
12.7.1.2.2 Authority for Prequalification.
12.6—Quality Control and Quality Prequalification of a connection and the associated
Assurance limits of prequalification shall be established by a
All requirements of Chapter 15 shall apply. connection prequalification review panel (CPRP)
approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

SBC 306-CR-18 169

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

12.7.1.3 Testing Requirements. Data used to column web, beams or links are
to support connection prequalification shall be connected to both the column flange and
based on tests conducted in accordance with web, or other
Section 12.7.2. The CPRP shall determine the
4. Depth
number of tests and the variables considered by the
tests for connection prequalification. The CPRP 5. Weight per foot
shall also provide the same information when limits 6. Flange thickness
are to be changed for a previously prequalified
connection. A sufficient number of tests shall be 7. Material specification
performed on a sufficient number of nonidentical 8. Width-to-thickness ratio of cross-section
specimens to demonstrate that the connection has elements
the ability and reliability to undergo the required
story drift angle for IMF and the required link 9. Lateral bracing
rotation angle for EBF, where the link is adjacent to 10. Other parameters pertinent to the specific
columns. The limits on member sizes for connection under consideration
prequalification shall not exceed the limits specified
in Section 12.7.2.3.2. 12.7.1.4.3 Beam-to-Column or Link-to-
Column Relations
12.7.1.4 Prequalification Variables. In
order to be prequalified, the effect of the following 1. Panel zone strength
variables on connection performance shall be 2. Doubler plate attachment details
considered. Limits on the permissible values for
each variable shall be established by the CPRP for 3. Column-to-beam (or column-to-link)
the prequalified connection. moment ratio
12.7.1.4.1 Beam or Link Parameters 12.7.1.4.4 Continuity Plates
1. Cross-section shape: wide flange, box or 1. Identification of conditions under which
other continuity plates are required
2. Cross-section fabrication method: rolled 2. Thickness, width and depth
shape, welded shape or other 3. Attachment details
3. Depth 12.7.1.4.5 Welds
4. Weight per foot 1. Location, extent (including returns), type
5. Flange thickness (CJP, PJP, fillet, etc.) and any rein-
forcement or contouring required
6. Material specification
2. Filler metal classification strength and
7. Span-to-depth ratio (for IMF), or link notch toughness
length (for EBF)
3. Details and treatment of weld backing and
8. Width-to-thickness ratio of cross-section weld tabs
elements
4. Weld access holes: size, geometry and
9. Lateral bracing finish
10. Other parameters pertinent to the specific 5. Welding quality control and quality
connection under consideration assurance beyond that described in Section
12.7.1.4.2 Column Parameters 15.9, including NDT method, inspection
frequency, acceptance criteria and
1. Cross-section shape: wide flange, box, or documentation requirements
other
12.7.1.4.6 Bolts
2. Cross-section fabrication method: rolled
shape, welded shape or other 1. Bolt diameter
3. Column orientation with respect to beam 2. Bolt grade: ASTM A325, A325M, A490,
or link: beam or link is connected to A490M or other
column flange, beam or link is connected

SBC 306-CR-18 170

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

3. Installation requirements: pretensioned, 7. Detailed description of the design

snug-tight or other procedure for the connection, as required
in Section 12.7.1.5
4. Hole type: standard, oversize, short-slot,
long-slot or other 8. List of references of test reports, research
reports and other publications that
5. Hole fabrication method: drilling,
provided the basis for prequalification
punching, sub-punching and reaming or
other 9. Summary of quality control and quality
assurance procedures
6. Other parameters pertinent to the specific
connection under consideration 12.7.2 Cyclic Tests for Qualification of Beam-
to-Column and Link-to-Column Connections
12.7.1.4.7 Workmanship. All workmanship
parameters that exceed the Code, RCSC and AWS 12.7.2.1 Scope. This section includes
requirements, pertinent to specific connection under requirements for qualifying cyclic tests of beam-to-
consideration, as follows: column moment connections in special and
intermediate moment frames and link-to-column
1. Surface roughness of thermal cut or ground
connections in eccentrically braced frames, when
edges
required in provisions of this chapter. The purpose
2. Cutting tolerances of the testing described in this section is to provide
3. Presence of holes, fasteners or welds for evidence that a beam-to-column connection or a
attachments link-to-column connection satisfies the
requirements for strength and story drift angle or
12.7.1.4.8 Additional Connection Details. link rotation angle in the provisions of this chapter.
All variables pertinent to the specific connection Alternative testing requirements are permitted when
under consideration, as established by the CPRP. approved by the engineer of record and the
12.7.1.5 Design Procedure. A authority having jurisdiction.
comprehensive design procedure must be available This section provides minimum recommendaions
for a prequalified connection. The design procedure for simplified test conditions.
must address all applicable limit states within the
limits of prequalification. 12.7.2.2 Test Subassemblage
Requirements. The test subassemblage shall
12.7.1.6 Prequalification Record. A replicate as closely as is practical the conditions that
prequalified connection shall be provided with a will occur in the prototype during earthquake
written prequalification record with the following loading. The test subassemblage shall include the
information: following features:
1. General description of the prequalified 1. The test specimen shall consist of at least a
connection and drawings that clearly single column with beams or links attached
identify key features and components of to one or both sides of the column.
the connection
2. Points of inflection in the test assemblage
2. Description of the expected behavior of the shall coincide approximately with the
connection in the elastic and inelastic anticipated points of inflection in the
ranges of behavior, intended location(s) of prototype under earthquake loading.
inelastic action, and a description of limit
states controlling the strength and 3. Lateral bracing of the test subassemblage
deformation capacity of the connection is permitted near load application or
reaction points as needed to provide lateral
3. Listing of systems for which connection is stability of the test subassemblage.
prequalified: IMF or EBF Additional lateral bracing of the test
4. Listing of limits for all prequalification subassemblage is not permitted, unless it
variables listed in Section 12.7.1.4. replicates lateral bracing to be used in the
prototype.
5. Listing of demand critical welds
12.7.2.3 Essential Test Variables. The test
6. Definition of the region of the connection specimen shall replicate as closely as is practical the
that comprises the protected zone pertinent design, detailing, construction features,

SBC 306-CR-18 171

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

and material properties of the prototype. The Extrapolation beyond the limitations stated in this
following variables shall be replicated in the test section is permitted subject to qualified peer review
specimen. and approval by the authority having jurisdiction.
12.7.2.3.1 Sources of Inelastic Rotation.
User Note: Based upon the above criteria, beam
The inelastic rotation shall be computed based on
or link depth and column depths up to and
an analysis of test specimen deformations. Sources
including 11% greater than that tested should be
of inelastic rotation include yielding of members,
permitted for the prototype. Weight per foot of
yielding of connection elements and connectors,
the beam or link up to and including 33% greater
and slip between members and connection
than that tested should be permitted for the
elements. For beam-to-column moment
prototype.
connections in special and intermediate moment
frames, inelastic rotation is computed based upon
12.7.2.3.3 Connection Details. The
the assumption that inelastic action is concentrated
connection details used in the test specimen shall
at a single point located at the intersection of the
represent the prototype connection details as closely
centerline of the beam with the centerline of the
as possible. The connection elements used in the
column. For link-to-column connections in
test specimen shall be a full-scale representation of
eccentrically braced frames, inelastic rotation shall
the connection elements used in the prototype, for
be computed based upon the assumption that
the member sizes being tested.
inelastic action is concentrated at a single point
located at the inter-section of the centerline of the 12.7.2.3.4 Continuity Plates. The size and
link with the face of the column. connection details of continuity plates used in the
test specimen shall be proportioned to match the
Inelastic rotation shall be developed in the test
size and connection details of continuity plates used
specimen by inelastic action in the same members
in the prototype connection as closely as possible.
and connection elements as anticipated in the
prototype (in other words, in the beam or link, in the 12.7.2.3.5 Steel Strength. The following
column panel zone, in the column outside of the additional requirements shall be satisfied for each
panel zone, or in connection elements) within the member or connection element of the test specimen
limits described below. The percentage of the total that supplies inelastic rotation by yielding:
inelastic rotation in the test specimen that is
1. The yield strength shall be determined as
developed in each member or connection element
specified in Section 12.7.2.6.1. The use of
shall be within 25% of the anticipated percentage of
yield stress values that are reported on
the total inelastic rotation in the prototype that is
certified material test reports in lieu of
developed in the corresponding member or
physical testing is prohibited for the
connection element.
purposes of this section.
12.7.2.3.2 Size of Members. The size of the
2. The yield strength of the beam flange as
beam or link used in the test specimen shall be
tested in accordance with Section
within the following limits:
12.7.2.6.1 shall not be more than 15%
1. The depth of the test beam or link shall be below RyFy for the grade of steel to be used
no less than 90% of the depth of the for the corresponding elements of the
prototype beam or link. prototype.
2. The weight per foot of the test beam or link 3. The yield strength of the columns and
shall be no less than 75% of the weight per connection elements shall not be more than
foot of the prototype beam or link. 15% above or below RyFy for the grade of
steel to be used for the corre-sponding
The size of the column used in the test specimen
elements of the prototype. RyFy shall be
shall properly represent the inelastic action in the
determined in accordance with Section
column, as per the requirements in Section
12.1.2.2.
12.7.2.3.1. In addition, the depth of the test column
shall be no less than 90% of the depth of the
User Note: Based upon the above criteria, steel
prototype column.
of the specified grade with a specified minimum
yield stress, Fy, of up to and including 1.15 times
the RyFy for the steel tested should be permitted

SBC 306-CR-18 172

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

in the prototype. In production, this limit should shall not exceed that to be used for the
be checked using the values stated on the steel welds on the corresponding prototype. The
manufacturer’s material test reports. tested CVN toughness of the weld as tested
in accordance with Section 12.7.2.6.3 shall
12.7.2.3.6 Welded Joints. Welds on the test not exceed the minimum CVN toughness
specimen shall satisfy the following requirements: specified for the prototype by more than
50%, nor 34 J, whichever is greater.
1. Welding shall be performed in
conformance with Welding Procedure
User Note: Based upon the criteria in (3) above,
Specifications (WPS) as required in AWS
should the tested CVN tough-ness of the weld
D1.1/D1.1M. The WPS essential variables
metal in the material test specimen exceed the
shall satisfy the requirements in AWS
specified CVN toughness for the test specimen
D1.1/D1.1M and shall be within the
by 34 J or 50%, whichever is greater, the
parameters established by the filler-metal
prototype weld should be made with a filler metal
manufacturer. The tensile strength and
and WPS that will provide a CVN toughness that
Charpy V-notch (CVN) toughness of the
is no less than 34 J or 33% lower, whichever is
welds used in the test assembly shall be
lower, below the CVN toughness measured in the
determined by tests as specified in Section
weld metal material test plate. When this is the
12.7.2.6.3, made using the same filler
case, the weld properties resulting from the filler
metal classification, manufacturer, brand
metal and WPS to be used in the prototype should
or trade name, diameter, and average heat
be determined using five CVN test specimens.
input for the WPS used on the test
The test plate is described in AWS D1.8/D1.8M
specimen. The use of tensile strength and
clause A6 and shown in AWS D1.8/D1.8M
CVN toughness values that are reported on
Figure A.1.
the manufacturer’s typical certificate of
conformance in lieu of physical testing is
4. The welding positions used to make the
prohibited for purposes of this section.
welds on the test specimen shall be the
2. The specified minimum tensile strength of same as those to be used for the prototype
the filler metal used for the test specimen welds.
shall be the same as that to be used for the
5. Details of weld backing, weld tabs, access
welds on the corresponding prototype. The
holes and similar items used for the test
tensile strength of the deposited weld as
specimen welds shall be the same as those
tested in accordance with Section
to be used for the corresponding prototype
12.7.2.6.3 shall not exceed the tensile
welds. Weld backing and weld tabs shall
strength classification of the filler metal
not be removed from the test specimen
specified for the prototype by more than
welds unless the corresponding weld
172 MPa.
backing and weld tabs are removed from
the prototype welds.
User Note: Based upon the criteria in (2) above,
should the tested tensile strength of the weld 6. Methods of inspection and nondestructive
metal exceed 172 MPa above the specified testing and standards of acceptance used
minimum tensile strength, the prototype weld for test specimen welds shall be the same
should be made with a filler metal and WPS that as those to be used for the prototype welds.
will provide a tensile strength no less than 172
MPa below the tensile strength measured in the User Note: The filler metal used for production
material test plate. When this is the case, the of the prototype is permitted to be of a different
tensile strength of welds resulting from use of the classification, manufacturer, brand or trade
filler metal and the WPS to be used in the name, and diameter, provided that Sections
prototype should be determined by using an all- 12.7.2.3.6(2) and 12.7.2.3.6(3) are satisfied. To
weld-metal tension specimen. The test plate is qualify alternate filler metals, the tests as
described in AWS D1.8/D1.8M clause A6 and prescribed in Section 12.7.2.6.3 should be
shown in AWS D1.8/D1.8M Figure A.1. conducted.

3. The specified minimum CVN toughness of 12.7.2.3.7 Bolted Joints. The bolted portions
the filler metal used for the test spec-imen of the test specimen shall replicate the bolted

SBC 306-CR-18 173

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

portions of the prototype connection as closely as 1. 6 cycles at θ = 0.00375 rad

possible. Additionally, bolted portions of the test
2. 6 cycles at θ = 0.005 rad
specimen shall satisfy the following requirements:
3. 6 cycles at θ = 0.0075 rad
1. The bolt grade (for example, ASTM A325,
A325M, ASTM A490, A490M, ASTM 4. 4 cycles at θ = 0.01 rad
F1852, ASTM F2280) used in the test 5. 2 cycles at θ = 0.015 rad
specimen shall be the same as that to be
used for the prototype, except that heavy 6. 2 cycles at θ = 0.02 rad
hex bolts are permitted to be substituted for 7. 2 cycles at θ = 0.03 rad
twist-off-type tension control bolts of
equal minimum specified tensile strength, 8. 2 cycles at θ = 0.04 rad
and vice versa. Continue loading at increments of θ = 0.01 rad, with
2. The type and orientation of bolt holes two cycles of loading at each step.
(standard, oversize, short slot, long slot or 12.7.2.4.3 Loading Sequence for Link-to-
other) used in the test specimen shall be the Column Connections. Qualifying cyclic tests of
same as those to be used for the link-to-column moment connections in
corresponding bolt holes in the prototype. eccentrically braced frames shall be conducted by
3. When inelastic rotation is to be developed controlling the total link rotation angle, total,
either by yielding or by slip within a bolted imposed on the test specimen, as follows:
portion of the connection, the method used
1. 6 cycles at total = 0.00375 rad
to make the bolt holes (drilling, sub-
punching and reaming, or other) in the test 2. 6 cycles at total = 0.005 rad
specimen shall be the same as that to be
3. 6 cycles at total = 0.0075 rad
used in the corresponding bolt holes in the
prototype. 4. 6 cycles at total = 0.01 rad
4. Bolts in the test specimen shall have the 5. 4 cycles at total = 0.015 rad
same installation (pretensioned or other)
and faying surface preparation (no 6. 4 cycles at total = 0.02 rad
specified slip resistance, Class A or B slip 7. 2 cycles at total = 0.03 rad
resistance, or other) as that to be used for
the corresponding bolts in the prototype. 8. 1 cycle at total = 0.04 rad
12.7.2.4 Loading History 9. 1 cycle at total = 0.05 rad
12.7.2.4.1 General Requirements. The test 10. 1 cycle at total = 0.07 rad
specimen shall be subjected to cyclic loads in 11. 1 cycle at total = 0.09 rad
accordance with the requirements prescribed in
Section 12.7.2.4.2 for beam-to-column moment Continue loading at increments of total = 0.02 rad,
connections in special and intermediate moment with one cycle of loading at each step.
frames, and in accordance with the requirements
12.7.2.5 Instrumentation. Sufficient
prescribed in Section 12.7.2.4.3 for link-to-column
instrumentation shall be provided on the test
connections in eccentrically braced frames.
specimen to permit measurement or calculation of
Loading sequences other than those specified in the quantities listed in Section 12.7.2.7.
Sections 12.7.2.4.2 and 12.7.2.4.3 are permitted to
12.7.2.6 Testing Requirements for
be used when they are demonstrated to be of
Material Specimens
equivalent or greater severity.
12.7.2.6.1 Tension Testing Requirements
12.7.2.4.2 Loading Sequence for Beam-to-
for Structural Steel Material Specimens. Tension
Column Moment Connections. Qualifying cyclic
testing shall be conducted on samples taken from
tests of beam-to-column moment connections in
material test plates in accordance with Section
special and intermediate moment frames shall be
12.7.2.6.2. The material test plates shall be taken
conducted by controlling the story drift angle, θ,
from the steel of the same heat as used in the test
imposed on the test specimen, as specified below:
specimen. Tension-test results from certified

SBC 306-CR-18 174

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

material test reports shall be reported, but shall not document all key features and results of the test.
be used in lieu of physical testing for the purposes The report shall include the following information:
of this section. Tension testing shall be conducted
1. A drawing or clear description of the test
and reported for the following portions of the test
subassemblage, including key dimen-
specimen:
sions, boundary conditions at loading and
1. Flange(s) and web(s) of beams and reaction points, and location of lateral
columns at standard locations braces.
2. Any element of the connection that 2. A drawing of the connection detail
supplies inelastic rotation by yielding showing member sizes, grades of steel, the
sizes of all connection elements, welding
12.7.2.6.2 Methods of Tension Testing for
details including filler metal, the size and
Structural Steel Material Specimens. Tension
location of bolt holes, the size and grade of
testing shall be conducted in accordance with
bolts, and all other pertinent details of the
ASTM A6/A6M, ASTM A370, and ASTM E8,
connection.
with the following exceptions:
3. A listing of all other essential variables for
1. The yield strength, Fy, that is reported from
the test specimen, as listed in Section
the test shall be based upon the yield
12.7.2.3.
strength definition in ASTM A370, using
the offset method at 0.002 strain. 4. A listing or plot showing the applied load
or displacement history of the test
2. The loading rate for the tension test shall
specimen.
replicate, as closely as practical, the
loading rate to be used for the test 5. A listing of all welds to be designated
specimen. demand critical.
12.7.2.6.3 Testing Requirements for Weld 6. Definition of the region of the member and
Metal Material Specimens. Weld metal testing connection to be designated a protected
shall be conducted on samples extracted from the zone.
material test plate, made using the same filler metal
7. A plot of the applied load versus the
classification, manufacturer, brand or trade name
displacement of the test specimen. The
and diameter, and using the same average heat input
displacement reported in this plot shall be
as used in the welding of the test specimen. The
measured at or near the point of load
tensile strength and CVN toughness of weld
application. The locations on the test
material specimens shall be determined in
specimen where the loads and
accordance with Standard Methods for Mechanical
displacements were measured shall be
Testing of Welds (AWS B4.0/B4.0M). The use of
clearly indicated.
tensile strength and CVN toughness values that are
reported on the manufacturer’s typical certificate of 8. A plot of beam moment versus story drift
conformance in lieu of physical testing is prohibited angle for beam-to-column moment
for use for purposes of this section. connections; or a plot of link shear force
versus link rotation angle for link-to-
The same WPS shall be used to make the test
column connections. For beam-to-column
specimen and the material test plate. The material
connections, the beam moment and the
test plate shall use base metal of the same grade and
story drift angle shall be computed with
type as was used for the test specimen, although the
respect to the centerline of the column.
same heat need not be used. If the average heat input
used for making the material test plate is not within 9. The story drift angle and the total inelastic
20% of that used for the test specimen, a new rotation developed by the test specimen.
material test plate shall be made and tested. The components of the test specimen
contributing to the total inelastic rotation
12.7.2.7 Test Reporting Requirements. due to yielding or slip shall be identified.
For each test specimen, a written test report meeting The portion of the total inelastic rotation
the requirements of the author-ity having contributed by each component of the test
jurisdiction and the requirements of this section specimen shall be reported. The method
shall be prepared. The report shall thoroughly

SBC 306-CR-18 175

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

used to compute inelastic rotations shall be

clearly shown.
10. A chronological listing of significant test
observations, including observations of
yielding, slip, instability, and rupture of
any portion of the test specimen as
applicable.
11. The controlling failure mode for the test
specimen. If the test is terminated prior to
failure, the reason for terminating the test
shall be clearly indicated.
12. The results of the material specimen tests
specified in Section 12.7.2.6.
13. The welding procedure specifications
(WPS) and welding inspection reports.
14. Additional drawings, data, and discussion
of the test specimen or test results are
permitted to be included in the report.
12.7.2.8 Acceptance Criteria. The test
specimen must satisfy the strength and story drift
angle or link rotation angle requirements of the
provisions of this chapter for the special moment
frame, intermediate moment frame, or eccentrically
braced frame connection, as applicable. The test
specimen must sustain the required story drift angle
or link rotation angle for at least one complete
loading cycle.

SBC 306-CR-18 176

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

TABLES AND FIGURES OF CHAPTER 12

TABLE 12-1 : Ry AND Rt VALUES FOR STEEL AND STEEL REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS

Application Ry Rt
Hot-rolled structural shapes and bars:
• ASTM A36/A36M 1.5 1.2
• ASTM A1043/1043M Gr. 36 (250) 1.3 1.1
• ASTM A572/572M Gr. 50 (345) or 55 (380), 1.1 1.1
ASTM A913/A913M Gr. 50 (345), 60 (415), or 65 (450),
ASTM A588/A588M, ASTM A992/A992M
• ASTM A1043/A1043M Gr. 50 (345) 1.2 1.1
• ASTM A529 Gr. 50 (345) 1.2 1.2
• ASTM A529 Gr. 55 (380) 1.1 1.2
Hollow structural sections (HSS):
• ASTM A500/A500M (Gr. B or C), ASTM A501 1.4 1.3
Pipe:
• ASTM A53/A53M 1.6 1.2
Plates, Strips and Sheets:
• ASTM A36/A36M 1.3 1.2
• ASTM A1043/1043M Gr. 36 (250) 1.3 1.1
• A1011/A1011M HSLAS Gr. 55 (380) 1.1 1.1
• ASTM A572/A572M Gr. 42 (290) 1.3 1.0
• ASTM A572/A572M Gr. 50 (345), Gr. 55 (380), ASTM A588/A588M 1.1 1.2
• ASTM 1043/1043M Gr. 50 (345)
1.2 1.1
Steel Reinforcement:
• ASTM A615, ASTM A706 1.25 1.25

SBC 306-CR-18 177

 CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

TABLE 12-2 : LIMITING WIDTH-TO-THICKNESS RATIOS FOR COMPRESSION ELEMENTS

FOR MODERATELY DUCTILE AND HIGHLY DUCTILE MEMBERS

Limiting Width-to-Thickness
Width-to- Ratios
Description of
Thickness 𝝀𝒉𝒅 𝝀𝒎𝒅 Example
Elements
Ratio Highly Ductile Moderately
Members Ductile Members

Flanges of rolled or
built-up I-shaped
sections, channels and
tees; legs of single
angle or double angle 𝑏/𝑡 0.3√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 0.38√𝐸/𝐹𝑦
members with
separators; outstanding
Unstiffened Elements

legs of pairs of angles

in continuous contact

Flanges of H-pile
sections per section 𝑏/𝑡 0.45√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 not Applicable
12.2.5.5

[𝑎]
Stems of tees 𝑑/𝑡 0.3√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 0.38√𝐸/𝐹𝑦

Walls of rectangular 𝑏/𝑡

HSS

Flanges of boxed I-
shaped sections and 𝑏/𝑡
built-up box sections
[𝑏] [𝑐]
Stiffened Elements

Side plates of boxed I- 0.55√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 0.64√𝐸/𝐹𝑦

shaped sections and ℎ/𝑡
walls of built-up box
shapes used as diagonal
braces

Webs of rolled or built-

up I-shaped sections ℎ/𝑡𝑤 1.49√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 1.49√𝐸/𝐹𝑦
used as diagonal braces

SBC 306-CR-18 178

 CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

TABLE 12-2 (CONTINOUED): LIMITING WIDTH-TO-THICKNESS RATIOS FOR

COMPRESSION ELEMENTS FOR MODERATELY DUCTILE AND HIGHLY DUCTILE
MEMBERS

Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios

Width-to-
Description of 𝝀𝒉𝒅 𝝀𝒎𝒅
Thickness Example
Elements Highly Ductile Moderately Ductile
Ratio
Members Members
Webs of rolled or 𝑓𝑜𝑟  𝐶𝑎 ≤ 0.125
built-up I-shaped
ℎ/𝑡𝑤 2.45√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 (1
sections used as 𝑓𝑜𝑟  𝐶𝑎 ≤ 0.125
beams or columns [d] − 0.93𝐶𝑎 )
𝑓𝑜𝑟  𝐶𝑎 > 0.125 3.76√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 (1 − 2.75𝐶𝑎 )
Side plates of boxed
I-shaped sections 0.77√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 (2.93 − 𝐶𝑎 ) 𝑓𝑜𝑟  𝐶𝑎 > 0.125
ℎ/𝑡
used as beams or 1.12√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 (2.33 − 𝐶𝑎 )
columns ≥ 1.49√𝐸/𝐹𝑦
where ≥ 1.49√𝐸/𝐹𝑦
Stiffened Elements

𝑃𝑢 where
Webs of built-up 𝐶𝑎 =
box sections used as ℎ/𝑡 𝜑𝑐  𝑃𝑦 𝑃𝑢
𝐶𝑎 =
beams or column 𝜑𝑐  𝑃𝑦

Webs of H-pile
ℎ/𝑡𝑤 0.94√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 not Applicable
sections

[𝑎]
Walls of round HSS 𝐷/𝑡 0.038𝐸/𝐹𝑦 0.044√𝐸/𝐹𝑦

Walls of rectangular
Composite Elements

filled composite 𝑏/𝑡 1.4√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 2.26√𝐸/𝐹𝑦

members

Walls of round filled

𝐷/𝑡 0.076𝐸/𝐹𝑦 0.15𝐸/𝐹𝑦
composite members

[a] for tee shaped compression members, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for highly ductile members for the stem of the tee can be increased to
0.38√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 if either of the following conditions are satisfied:
(1) bukling of the compression member occurs about the plane of the stem
(2) the axial compression is transferred at end connections to only the outside face of the flange of the tee resulting in an eccentric connection that
reduces the compression stresses at the tip of the stem
[b] the limiting width-to-thickness ratio of flanges of boxed I-shaped sections and built-up box sections of columns in SMF systems shall not exceed
0.6√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 .
[c] the limiting width-to thickness ratio of walls of rectangular HSS members, flanges of boxed I-shaped sections and falnges of built-up box sections
used as beams or columns shall not exceed 1.12√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 .
[d] for I-shaped beams in SMF systems, where Ca is less than or equal to 0.125, the limiting ratio ℎ/𝑡𝑤 shall not exceed 2.45√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 . For I-shaped
beams in IMF systems, where Ca is less than or equal to 0.125, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio shall not exceed 3.76√𝐸/𝐹𝑦 .
[e] the limiting diameter-to-thickness ratio of round HSS members used as beams or column shall not exceed 0.07 𝐸/𝐹𝑦 .

SBC 306-CR-18 179

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 180

CHAPTER 13—DESIGN FOR SERVICEABLILITY

CHAPTER 13—DESIGN FOR SERVICEABLILITY

This chapter addresses serviceability design 13.3—Deflection

requirements. The chapter is organized as follows:
Deflections in structural members and structural
13.1 —General Provisions systems under appropriate service load
13.2 —Camber combinations shall not impair the serviceability of
the structure.
13.3 —Deflection
User Note: Conditions to be considered
13.4 —Drift
include levelness of floors, alignment of
13.5 —Vibration structural members, integrity of building
13.6 —Wind-Induced Motion finishes, and other factors that affect the
13.7 —Expansion and Contraction normal usage and function of the structure.
For composite members, the additional
13.8 —Connection Slip
deflections due to the shrinkage and creep of
the concrete should be considered.
13.1—General Provisions
Serviceability is a state in which the function of a 13.4—Drift
building, its appearance, maintainability, durability
and comfort of its occupants are preserved under Drift of a structure shall be evaluated under service
normal usage. Limiting values of structural loads to provide for serviceability of the structure,
behavior for serviceability (such as maximum including the integrity of interior partitions and
deflections and accelerations) shall be chosen with exterior cladding. Drift under strength load
due regard to the intended function of the structure. combinations shall not cause collision with adjacent
Serviceability shall be evaluated using appropriate structures or exceed the limiting values of such
load combinations for the serviceability limit states drifts that may be specified by the applicable Saudi
identified. building code.
13.5—Vibration
User Note: Serviceability limit states, service
loads, and appropriate load combinations for The effect of vibration on the comfort of the
serviceability requirements can be found in SBC occupants and the function of the structure shall be
301, Appendix C and Commentary to Appendix considered. The sources of vibration to be
C. The performance requirements for considered include pedestrian loading, vibrating
serviceability in this chapter are consistent with machinery and others identified for the structure.
those requirements. Service loads, as stipulated 13.6—Wind-Induced Motion
herein, are those that act on the structure at an
arbitrary point in time and are not usually taken The effect of wind-induced motion of buildings on
as the nominal loads. the comfort of occupants shall be considered.
13.7—Expansion and Contraction

13.2—Camber The effects of thermal expansion and contraction of

a building shall be considered. Damage to building
Where camber is used to achieve proper position cladding can cause water penetration and may lead
and location of the structure, the magnitude, to corrosion.
direction and location of camber shall be specified
in the structural drawings.

SBC 306-CR-18 181

CHAPTER 13—DESIGN FOR SERVICEABLILITY

13.8—Connection Slip
The effects of connection slip shall be included in
the design where slip at bolted connections may
cause deformations that impair the serviceability of
the structure. Where appropriate, the connection
shall be designed to preclude slip.

User Note: For the design of slip-critical

connections, see Sections 10.3.8 and 10.3.9 .
For more information on connection slip, refer
to the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints
Using High-Strength Bolts.

SBC 306-CR-18 182

CHAPTER 13—DESIGN FOR SERVICEABLILITY

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 183

CHAPTER 14—FABRICATION AND ERECTION

CHAPTER 14—FABRICATION AND ERECTION

shall be removed by grinding or repaired by

This chapter addresses requirements for shop
welding.
drawings, fabrication, shop painting and erection.
Reentrant corners shall be formed with a curved
The chapter is organized as follows:
transition. The radius need not exceed that
14.1 —Shop and Erection Drawings required to fit the connection. The surface
14.2 —Fabrication resulting from two straight torch cuts meeting at a
point is not considered to be curved. Discontinuous
14.3 —Shop Painting corners are permitted where the material on both
14.4 —Erection sides of the discontinuous reentrant corner are
connected to a mating piece to prevent
deformation and associated stress concentration at
the corner.
14.1—Shop and Erection Drawings
Shop and erection drawings are permitted to be User Note: Reentrant corners with a radius of
prepared in stages. Shop drawings shall be 13 to 10 mm are acceptable for statically loaded
prepared in advance of fabrication and give work. Where pieces need to fit tightly together, a
complete information necessary for the fabrication discontinuous reentrant corner is acceptable if
of the component parts of the structure, including the pieces are connected close to the corner on
the location, type and size of welds and bolts. both sides of the discontinuous corner. Slots in
Erection drawings shall be prepared in advance of HSS for gussets may be made with semicircular
erection and give information necessary for erection ends or with curved corners. Square ends are
of the structure. Shop and erection drawings shall acceptable provided the edge of the gusset is
clearly distinguish between shop and field welds welded to the HSS.
and bolts and shall clearly identify pretensioned
and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. Weld access holes shall meet the geometrical
Shop and erection drawings shall be made with due requirements of Section 10.1.6 . Beam copes and
regard to speed and economy in fabrication and weld access holes in shapes that are to be
erection. galvanized shall be ground to bright metal. For
shapes with a flange thickness not exceeding 50
mm, the roughness of thermally cut surfaces of
14.2—Fabrication copes shall be no greater than a surface roughness
value of 50 m as defined in ASME B46.1. For
14.2.1 Cambering, Curving and Straightening.
beam copes and weld access holes in which the
Local application of heat or mechanical means is
curved part of the access hole is thermally cut in
permitted to be used to introduce or correct camber,
ASTM A6/A6M hot-rolled shapes with a flange
curvature and straightness. The temperature of
thickness exceeding 50 mm and welded built-up
heated areas shall not exceed 593 C for ASTM shapes with material thickness greater than 50 mm,
A514/A514M and ASTM A852/A852M steel nor
a preheat temperature of not less than 66 C shall
649 C for other steels. be applied prior to thermal cutting. The thermally
14.2.2 Thermal Cutting. Thermally cut edges cut surface of access holes in ASTM A6/A6M
shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, hot-rolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding
sub clauses 5.15.1.2, 5.15.4.3 and 5.15.4.4 with the 50 mm and built-up shapes with a material
exception that thermally cut free edges that will not thickness greater than 50 mm shall be ground.
be subject to fatigue shall be free of round-bottom
gouges greater than 5 mm deep and sharp V-shaped User Note: The AWS Surface Roughness Guide
notches. Gouges deeper than 5 mm and notches for Oxygen Cutting (AWS C4.1-77) Sample 2
may be used as a guide for evaluating the surface

SBC 306-CR-18 184

CHAPTER 14—FABRICATION AND ERECTION

roughness of copes in shapes with flanges not Buildings and Bridges, hereafter referred to as the
exceeding 50 mm thick. Code of Standard Practice, AISC 303-10 (2010).
14.2.8 Finish of Column Bases. Column bases
14.2.3 Planning of Edges. Planning or finishing
and base plates shall be finished in accordance
of sheared or thermally cut edges of plates or
with the following requirements:
shapes is not required unless specifically called for
in the construction documents or included in a 1. Steel bearing plates 50 mm or less in
stipulated edge preparation for welding. thickness are permitted without milling
provided a satisfactory contact bearing is
14.2.4 Welded Construction. The technique of
obtained. Steel bearing plates over 50 mm
welding, the workmanship, appearance, and quality
but not over 100 mm in thickness are
of welds, and the methods used in correcting
permitted to be straightened by pressing
nonconforming work shall be in accordance with
or, if presses are not available, by milling
AWS D1.1/D1.1M except as modified in Section
for bearing surfaces, except as noted in
10.2.
subparagraphs 2 and 3 of this section,
14.2.5 Bolted Construction. Parts of bolted to obtain a satisfactory contact bearing.
members shall be pinned or bolted and rigidly held Steel bearing plates over 100 mm in
together during assembly. Use of a drift pin in bolt thickness shall be milled for bearing
holes during assembly shall not distort the metal or surfaces, except as noted in subparagraphs
enlarge the holes. Poor matching of holes shall be 2 and 3 of this section.
cause for rejection.
2. Bottom surfaces of bearing plates and
Bolt holes shall comply with the provisions of the column bases that are grouted to ensure
RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using full bearing contact on foundations need
High-Strength Bolts, hereafter referred to as the not be milled.
RCSC Specification, Section 3.3 except that
3. Top surfaces of bearing plates need not be
thermally cut holes are permitted with a surface
milled when complete-joint-penetration
roughness profile not exceeding 25 m as defined groove welds are provided between the
in ASME B46.1. Gouges shall not exceed a depth column and the bearing plate.
of 2 mm. Water jet cut holes are also permitted.
14.2.9 Holes for Anchor Rods. Holes for anchor
User Note: The AWS Surface Roughness rods are permitted to be thermally cut in
Guide for Oxygen Cutting (AWS C4.1- 77) accordance with the provisions of Section 14.2.2 .
sample 3 may be used as a guide for 14.2.10 Drain Holes. When water can collect
evaluating the surface roughness of thermally inside HSS or box members, either during
cut holes. construction or during service, the member shall be
sealed, provided with a drain hole at the base, or
Fully inserted finger shims, with a total thickness protected by other suitable means.
of not more than 6 mm within a joint, are permitted
without changing the strength (based upon hole 14.2.11 Requirements for Galvanized Members.
type) for the design of connections. The orientation Members and parts to be galvanized shall be
of such shims is independent of the direction of designed, detailed and fabricated to provide for flow
application of the load. and drainage of pickling fluids and zinc and to
prevent pressure buildup in enclosed parts.
The use of high-strength bolts shall conform to
the requirements of the RCSC Specification, User Note: See The Design of Products to be
except as modified in Section 10.3. Hot-Dip Galvanized After Fabrication,
14.2.6 Compression Joints. Compression joints American Galvanizer’s Association, and
that depend on contact bearing as part of the splice ASTM A123, A153, A384 and A780 for useful
strength shall have the bearing surfaces of information on design and detailing of
individual fabricated pieces prepared by milling, galvanized members. See Section 14.2 for
sawing or other suitable means. requirements for copes of members to be
galvanized.
14.2.7 Dimensional Tolerances. Dimensional
tolerances shall be in accordance with Chapter 6 of
the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel

SBC 306-CR-18 185

CHAPTER 14—FABRICATION AND ERECTION

14.3—Shop Painting 14.4.4 Fit of Column Compression Joints and

Base Plates. Lack of contact bearing not exceeding
14.3.1 General Requirements. Shop painting
a gap of 2 mm, regardless of the type of splice used
and surface preparation shall be in accordance with (partial-joint-penetration groove welded or bolted),
the provisions in Chapter 6 of the Code of Standard is permitted. If the gap exceeds 2 mm, but is equal
Practice, AISC 303-10 (2010).
to or less than 6 mm, and if an engineering
Shop paint is not required unless specified by the investigation shows that sufficient contact area
contract documents. does not exist, the gap shall be packed out with
nontapered steel shims. Shims need not be other
14.3.2 Inaccessible Surfaces. Except for contact
than mild steel, regardless of the grade of the main
surfaces, surfaces inaccessible after shop assembly
material.
shall be cleaned and painted prior to assembly, if
required by the construction documents. 14.4.5 Field Welding. Surfaces in and adjacent
to joints to be field welded shall be prepared as
14.3.3 Contact Surfaces. Paint is permitted in
necessary to assure weld quality. This preparation
bearing-type connections. For slip-critical
shall include surface preparation necessary to
connections, the faying surface requirements shall
correct for damage or contamination occurring
be in accordance with the RCSC Specification,
subsequent to fabrication.
Section 3.2.2.2 .
14.4.6 Field Painting. Responsibility for touch-
14.3.4 Finished Surfaces. Machine-finished
up painting, cleaning and field painting shall be
surfaces shall be protected against corrosion by a
allocated in accordance with accepted local
rust inhibitive coating that can be removed prior to
practices, and this allocation shall be set forth
erection, or which has characteristics that make
explicitly in the contract documents.
removal prior to erection unnecessary.
14.3.5 Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds.
Unless otherwise specified in the design
documents, surfaces within 50 mm of any field
weld location shall be free of materials that would
prevent proper welding or produce objectionable
fumes during welding.
14.4—Erection
14.4.1 Column Base Setting. Column bases shall
be set level and to correct elevation with full bearing
on concrete or masonry as defined in Chapter 7 of
the AISC Code of Standard Practice.
14.4.2 Stability and Connections. The frame of
structural steel buildings shall be carried up true
and plumb within the limits defined in Chapter 7 of
the AISC Code of Standard Practice. As erection
progresses, the structure shall be secured to support
dead, erection and other loads anticipated to occur
during the period of erection. Temporary bracing
shall be provided, in accordance with the
requirements of the AISC Code of Standard
Practice, wherever necessary to support the loads
to which the structure may be subjected,
including equipment and the operation of same.
Such bracing shall be left in place as long as
required for safety.
14.4.3 Alignment. No permanent bolting or
welding shall be performed until the adjacent
affected portions of the structure have been properly
aligned.

SBC 306-CR-18 186

CHAPTER 14—FABRICATION AND ERECTION

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 187

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

This chapter addresses minimum requirements for User Note: The QA/QC requirements in
quality control, quality assurance and Chapter 15 are considered adequate and
nondestructive testing for structural steel systems effective for most steel structures and are
and composite members for buildings and other strongly encouraged without modification.
structures. When the ABC and AHJ requires the use of
a quality assurance plan, this chapter outlines
User Note: This chapter does not address
the minimum requirements deemed effective
quality control or quality assurance for surface
to provide satisfactory results in steel building
preparation or coatings.
construction. There may be cases where
supplemental inspections are advisable.
Additionally, where the contractor’s quality
User Note: The inspection of steel (open-web) control program has demonstrated the
joists and joist girders, tanks, pressure vessels, capability to perform some tasks this plan has
cables, cold-formed steel products, or gage assigned to quality assurance, modification of
metal products is not addressed in this Code. the plan could be considered.
The Chapter is organized as follows:
15.1 —Scope User Note: The producers of materials
manufactured in accordance with standard
15.2—Fabricator and Erector Quality Control
specifications referenced in Section 1.3 in this
Program
Code, and steel deck manufacturers, are not
15.3 —Fabricator and Erector Documents considered to be fabricators or erectors.
15.4 —Inspection and Nondestrective Testing
Personnel
15.2—Fabricator and Erector Quality
15.5 —Minimum Requirements for Control Program
Inspection of Structural Steel Bulidings
The fabricator and erector shall establish and
15.6 —Minimum Requirements for maintain quality control procedures and perform
Inspection of Composite Construction inspections to ensure that their work is performed
in accordance with this Specification and the
15.7 —Approved Fabricators and Erectors
construction documents.
15.8 —Nonconforming Material and
Material identification procedures shall comply
Workmanship
with Section 15.2.1 and shall be monitored by the
fabricator’s quality control inspector (QCI).
15.1—Scope The fabricator’s QCI shall inspect the following as
a minimum, as applicable:
Quality control (QC) as specified in this chapter
shall be provided by the fabricator and erector. 1. Shop welding, high-strength bolting, and
Quality assurance (QA) as specified in this chapter details in accordance with Section 15.5.
shall be provided by others when required by the 2. Shop cut and finished surfaces in
authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), applicable accordance with Section 14.2.
building code (ABC), purchaser, owner, or engineer
of record (EOR). Nondestructive testing (NDT) 3. Shop heating for straightening,
shall be performed by the agency or firm cambering and curving in accordance
responsible for quality assurance, except as with Section 14.2.1 .
permitted in accordance with Section 15.7.

SBC 306-CR-18 188

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

4. Tolerances for shop fabrication in 5. For demand critical welds, applicable

accordance with Section 6 of the Code manufacturer’s certifications that the filler
of Standard Practice, AISC 303-10. metal meets the supplemental notch
toughness requirements, as applicable.
The erector’s QCI shall inspect the following as a Should the filler metal manufacturer not
minimum, as applicable: supply such supplemental certifications,
1. Field welding, high-strength bolting, and the fabricator or erector, as applicable,
details in accordance with Section 15.5. shall have the necessary testing performed
and provide the applicable test reports
2. Steel deck and headed steel stud anchor
placement and attachment in accordance 6. Manufacturer’s product data sheets or
with Section 15.6. catalog data for shielded metal arc welding
(SMAW), flux cored arc welding (FCAW)
3. Field cut surfaces in accordance with
and gas metal arc welding (GMAW)
Section 14.2.2 .
composite (cored) filler metals to be used
4. Field heating for straightening in
7. Bolt installation procedures
accordance with Section 14.2.1 .
8. Specific assembly order, welding
5. Tolerances for field erection in sequence, welding technique, or other
accordance with Section 7.13 of the special precautions for joints or groups of
Code of Standard Practice, AISC 303-10 . joints where such items are designated to
15.2.1 Identification of Steel. The fabricator be submitted to the engineer of record
shall be able to demonstrate by written procedure For composite construction, the following
and actual practice a method of material documents shall be submitted by the responsible
identification, visible up to the point of assembling contractor for review by the EOR or the EOR’s
members. Identification procedures shall comply designee, prior to concrete production or placement,
with the requirements of Section 6.16.1 of the Code as applicable:
of Standard Practice, AISC 303-10.
1. Concrete mix design and test reports for
the mix design
15.3—Fabricator and Erector 2. Reinforcing steel shop drawings
Documents
3. Concrete placement sequences, techniques
15.3.1 Submittals for Steel Construction. The and restriction
fabricator or erector shall submit the following
15.3.2 Available Documents for Steel
documents for review by the engineer of record
Construction. The following documents shall be
(EOR) or the EOR’s designee, in accordance with
available in electronic or printed form for review
Section 4 or A4.4 of the Code of Standard Practice,
by the EOR or the EOR’s designee prior to
AISC 303-10, prior to fabrication or erection, as
fabrication or erection, as applicable, unless
applicable:
otherwise required in the contract documents to be
1. Shop drawings, unless shop drawings have submitted:
been furnished by others
1. For main structural steel elements, copies
2. Erection drawings, unless erection of material test reports in accordance with
drawings have been furnished by others Section 1.3.1 .
For seismic force resisting systems, the following 2. For steel castings and forgings, copies of
additional documents shall be submitted, as material test reports in accordance with
applicable: Section 1.3.2 .
3. Welding procedure specifications (WPS) 3. For fasteners, copies of manufacturer’s
certifications in accordance with Section
4. Copies of the manufacturer’s typical
1.3.3 .
certificate of conformance for all
electrodes, fluxes and shielding gasses to 4. For deck fasteners, copies of
be used manufacturer’s product data sheets or
catalog data. The data sheets shall describe

SBC 306-CR-18 189

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

the product, limitations of use, and 15.3.4 Available Documents for Composite
recommended or typical installation Construction. For composite construction, the
instructions. following documents shall be available from the
responsible contractor for review by the EOR or the
5. For anchor rods and threaded rods, copies
EOR’s designee prior to fabrication or erection, as
of material test reports in accordance with
applicable, unless specified to be submitted:
Section 1.3.4 .
1. Material test reports for reinforcing steel
6. For welding consumables, copies of
manufacturer’s certifications in 2. Inspection procedures
accordance with Section 1.3.5 .
3. Nonconformance procedure
7. For headed stud anchors, copies of
4. Material control procedure
manufacturer’s certifications in
accordance with Section 1.3.6 . 5. Welder performance qualification records
(WPQR) as required by AWS D1.4/D1.4M.
8. Manufacturer’s product data sheets or
catalog data for welding filler metals and 6. QC Inspector qualifications
fluxes to be used. The data sheets shall
The responsible contractor shall retain their
describe the product, limitations of use,
document(s) for at least one year after substantial
recommended or typical welding
completion of construction.
parameters, and storage and exposure
requirements, including baking, if
applicable.
15.4—Inspection and Nondestrective
9. Welding procedure specifications (WPSs). Testing Personnel
10. Procedure qualification records (PQRs) 15.4.1 Quality Control Inspector
for WPSs that are not prequalified in Qualifications. Quality control (QC) welding
accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M or inspection personnel shall be qualified to the
AWS D1.3/D1.3M, as applicable. satisfaction of the fabricator’s or erector’s QC
11. Welding personnel performance program, as applicable, and in accordance with
qualification records (WPQR) and either of the following:
continuity records. (a) Associate welding inspectors (AWI) or higher
12. Fabricator’s or erector’s, as applicable, as defined in AWS B5.1, Standard for the
written quality control manual that shall Qualification of Welding Inspectors, or
include, as a minimum: (b) Qualified under the provisions of AWS
D1.1/D1.1M sub clause 6.1.4 QC bolting
Material control procedures
inspection personnel shall be qualified on the
Inspection procedures basis of documented training and experience in
structural bolting inspection.
Nonconformance procedures
15.4.2 Quality Assurance Inspector
13. Fabricator’s or erector’s, as applicable, QC
Qualifications. Quality assurance (QA) welding
inspector qualifications.
inspectors shall be qualified to the satisfaction of
15.3.3 Submittals for Composite Construction. the QA agency’s written practice, and in accordance
For composite construction, the following with either of the following:
documents shall be submitted by the responsible
(a) Welding inspectors (WIs) or senior welding
contractor for review by the EOR or the EOR’s
inspectors (SWIs), as defined in AWS B5.1,
designee, prior to concrete production or placement,
Standard for the Qualification of Welding
as applicable:
Inspectors, except associate welding inspectors
1. Concrete mix design and test reports for (AWIs) are permitted to be used under the
the mix design direct supervision of WIs, who are on the
premises and available when weld inspection
2. Reinforcing steel shop drawings
is being conducted, or
3. Concrete placement sequences, techniques (b) Qualified under the provisions of AWS
and restriction D1.1/D1.1M, sub clause 6.1.4. QA bolting

SBC 306-CR-18 190

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

inspection personnel shall be qualified on the 15.4.4.2 Inspection and Nondestructive

basis of documented training and experience in Testing Personnel. In addition to the requirements
structural bolting inspection. of Sections 15.4.1 and 15.4.2, visual welding
15.4.3 NDT Personnel Qualifications. inspection and non-destructive testing (NDT) shall
Nondestructive testing personnel, for NDT other be conducted by personnel qualified in accordance
than visual, shall be qualified in accordance with with AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 7.2. In addition to the
their employer’s written practice, which shall meet requirements of Section 15.4.3, ultrasonic testing
or exceed the criteria of AWS D1.1/D1.1M technicians shall be qualified in accordance with
Structural Welding Code—Steel, sub clause 6.14.6, AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 7.2.4.
and:
User Note: The recommendations of the
(a) American Society for Nondestructive Testing International Code Council Model Program for
(ASNT) SNT-TC-1A, Recommended Practice Special Inspection should be considered a
for the Qualification and Certification of minimum requirement to establish the
Nondestructive Testing Personnel, or qualifications of a bolting inspector.
(b) ASNT CP-189, Standard for the Qualification
and Certification of Nondestructive Testing
Personnel.
15.5—Minimum Requirements for
Inspection of Structural Steel
15.4.4 Additional Requirements for Seismic
Force Resisting Systems (SFRS) Bulidings
15.4.4.1 Quality Assurance Agency 15.5.1 Quality Control. QC inspection tasks
Documents. The agency responsible for quality shall be performed by the fabricator’s or erector’s
assurance shall submit the following documents to quality control inspector (QCI), as applicable, in
the authority having jurisdiction, the engineer of accordance with Sections 15.5.4 , 15.5.5, 15.5.6
record, and the owner or owner’s designee: and 15.5.7 .

1. QA agency’s written practices for the Tasks in TABLE 15-1 through TABLE 15-3 and
monitoring and control of the agency’s TABLE 15-4 through TABLE 15-6 listed for QC
operations. The written practice shall are those inspections performed by the QCI to
include: ensure that the work is performed in accordance
with the construction documents.
The agency’s procedures for the
selection and administration of For QC inspection, the applicable construction
inspection personnel, describing the documents are the shop drawings and the erection
training, experience and examination drawings, and the applicable referenced
requirements for qualification and specifications, codes and standards.
certification of inspection personnel, 15.5.2 Quality Assurance. Quality assurance
and (QA) inspection of fabricated items shall be made
The agency’s inspection procedures, at the fabricator’s plant. The quality assurance
including general inspection, material inspector (QAI) shall schedule this work to
controls, and visual welding inspection minimize interruption to the work of the fabricator.

2. Qualifications of management and QA QA inspection of the erected steel system shall be

personnel designated for the project made at the project site. The QAI shall schedule this
work to minimize interruption to the work of the
3. Qualification records for inspectors and erector.
NDT technicians designated for the project
The QAI shall review the material test reports and
4. NDT procedures and equipment certifications as listed in Section 15.3.2 for
calibration records for NDT to be compliance with the construction documents.
performed and equipment to be used for
the project QA inspection tasks shall be performed by the
QAI, in accordance with Sections 15.5.4 , 15.5.5,
5. For composite construction, concrete 15.5.6 and 15.5.7 .
testing procedures and equipment

SBC 306-CR-18 191

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

P – Perform these tasks for each welded joint or

User Note: The QCI need not refer to the design
member.
drawings and project specifications. The Code
of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and 15.5.4.2 Nondestructive Testing of
Bridges, AISC 303-10, Section 4.2(a), requires Welded Joints
the transfer of information from the Contract 15.5.4.2.1 Procedures. Ultrasonic testing
Documents (design drawings and project
(UT), magnetic particle testing (MT), penetrant
specification) into accurate and complete shop
testing (PT) and radiographic testing (RT), where
and erection drawings, allowing QC inspection
required, shall be performed by QA in accordance
to be based upon shop and erection drawings
with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Acceptance criteria shall
alone. be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for
statically loaded structures, unless otherwise
Tasks in TABLE 15-1 through TABLE 15-3 and
designated in the design drawings or project
TABLE 15-4 through TABLE 15-6 listed for QA
specifications.
are those inspections performed by the QAI to
ensure that the work is performed in accordance 15.5.4.2.2 CJP Groove Weld NDT. For
with the construction documents. structures in Risk Category III or IV of Table 1-1,
Risk Category of Buildings and Other Structures
Concurrent with the submittal of such reports to
for Flood, Wind and Earthquake Loads, of SBC
the AHJ, EOR or owner, the QA agency shall
301, UT shall be performed by QA on all CJP
submit to the fabricator and erector:
groove welds subject to transversely applied
1. Inspection reports tension loading in butt, T- and corner joints, in
materials 8 mm thick or greater. For structures in
2. Nondestructive testing reports
Risk Category II, UT shall be performed by QA on
15.5.3 Coordinated Inspection. Where a task is 10% of CJP groove welds in butt, T- and corner
noted to be performed by both QC and QA, it is joints subject to transversely applied tension
permitted to coordinate the inspection function loading, in materials 8 mm thick or greater.
between the QCI and QAI so that the inspection
functions are performed by only one party. Where User Note: For structures in Risk Category I,
QA relies upon inspection functions performed by NDT of CJP groove welds is not required. For
QC, the approval of the engineer of record and all structures in all Risk Categories, NDT of CJP
the authority having jurisdiction is required. groove welds in materials less than 8 mm thick
is not required.
15.5.4 Welding Inspection and Nondestructive
Testing
15.5.4.2.3 Access Hole NDT. Thermally cut
15.5.4.1 Visual Welding Inspection. surfaces of access holes shall be tested by QA using
Observation of welding operations and visual MT or PT, when the flange thickness exceeds 50
inspection of in-process and completed welds shall mm for rolled shapes, or when the web thickness
be the primary method to confirm that the exceeds 50 mm for built-up shapes. Any crack
materials, procedures and workmanship are in shall be deemed unacceptable regardless of size or
conformance with the construction documents. For location.
structural steel, all provisions of AWS
15.5.4.2.4 Welded Joints Subjected to
D1.1/D1.1M Structural Welding Code—Steel for
Fatigue. When required by Appendix C, TABLE
statically loaded structures shall apply.
C-1, welded joints requiring weld soundness to be
established by radiographic or ultrasonic
User Note: Section 10.2 of this Code contains
inspection shall be tested by QA as prescribed.
exceptions to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
Reduction in the rate of UT is prohibited.
As a minimum, welding inspection tasks shall be in 15.5.4.2.5 Reduction of Rate of Ultrasonic
accordance with TABLE 15-1, TABLE 15-2 and Testing. The rate of UT is permitted to be reduced
TABLE 15-3. In these tables, the inspection tasks if approved by the EOR and the AHJ. Where the
are as follows: initial rate for UT is 100%, the NDT rate for an
individual welder or welding operator is permitted
O – Observe these items on a random basis.
to be reduced to 25%, provided the reject rate, the
Operations need not be delayed pending these
number of welds containing unacceptable defects
inspections.

SBC 306-CR-18 192

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

divided by the number of welds completed, is the welding of seismic force resisting systems,
demonstrated to be 5% or less of the welds tested and has been coordinated when possible with
for the welder or welding operator. A sampling these provisions. AWS D1.1/D1.1M
of at least 40 completed welds for a job shall be requirements related to inspection and non-
made for such reduction evaluation. For destructive testing are organized as follows,
evaluating the reject rate of continuous welds over including normative (mandatory) annexes:
1 m in length where the effective throat is 25 mm
1. General Requirements
or less, each 300 mm increment or fraction thereof
shall be considered as one weld. For evaluating the 7. Inspection
reject rate on continuous welds over 1 m in length
Annex F. Supplemental Ultrasonic Technician
where the effective throat is greater than 25 mm,
Testing
each 150 mm of length or fraction thereof shall be
considered one weld. Annex G. Supplemental Magnetic Particle
Testing Procedures
15.5.4.2.6 Increase in Rate of Ultrasonic
Testing. For structures in Risk Category II, where Annex H. Flaw Sizing by Ultrasonic Testing
the initial rate for UT is 10%, the NDT rate for an
individual welder or welding operator shall be 15.5.5.1 Visual Welding Inspection. All
increased to 100% should the reject rate, the requirements of the Section 15.5.4.1 shall apply,
number of welds containing unacceptable defects except as specifically modified by AWS
divided by the number of welds completed, exceeds D1.1/D1.1M.
5% of the welds tested for the welder or welding Visual welding inspection shall be performed by
operator. A sampling of at least 20 completed both quality control and quality assurance
welds for a job shall be made prior to personnel. As a minimum, tasks shall be as listed
implementing such an increase. When the reject in TABLE 15-1, TABLE 15-2 and TABLE 15-3.
rate for the welder or welding operator, after a
sampling of at least 40 completed welds, has fallen 15.5.5.2 NDT of Welded Joints. In
to 5% or less, the rate of UT shall be returned to addition to the requirements of Section 15.5.4.2,
10%. For evaluating the reject rate of continuous nondestructive testing of welded joints shall be as
welds over 1 m in length where the effective throat required in this section:
is 25 mm or less, each 300 mm increment or 15.5.5.2.1 k-Area NDT. Where welding of
fraction thereof shall be considered as one weld. doubler plates, continuity plates or stiffeners has
For evaluating the reject rate on continuous welds been performed in the k-area, the web shall be tested
over 1 m in length where the effective throat is for cracks using magnetic particle testing (MT). The
greater than 25 mm, each 150 mm of length or MT inspection area shall include the k-area base
fraction thereof shall be considered one weld. metal within 75 mm of the weld. The MT shall be
15.5.4.2.7 Documentation. All NDT performed no sooner than 48 hours following
performed shall be documented. For shop completion of the welding.
fabrication, the NDT report shall identify the tested 15.5.5.2.2 CJP Groove Weld NDT .
weld by piece mark and location in the piece. For Ultrasonic testing (UT) shall be performed on 100%
field work, the NDT report shall identify the tested of CJP groove welds in materials 8 mm thick or
weld by location in the structure, piece mark, and greater. Ultrasonic testing in materials less than 8
location in the piece. mm thick is not required. Weld discontinuities shall
When a weld is rejected on the basis of NDT, the be accepted or rejected on the basis of criteria of
NDT record shall indicate the location of the defect AWS D1.1/D1.1M Table 6.2. Magnetic particle
and the basis of rejection. testing shall be performed on 25% of all beam-to-
column CJP groove welds. The rate of UT and MT
15.5.5 Additional Requirements for Seismic is permitted to be reduced in accordance with
Force Resisting Systems (SFRS). Welding Sections 15.5.5.2.7 and 15.5.5.2.8, respectively.
inspection and nondestructive testing shall satisfy
the requirements of Section 15.5.4, this Section and Exception: For ordinary moment frames, UT and
AWS D1.1/D1.1M. MT of CJP groove welds are required only for
demand critical welds.
User Note: AWS D1.1/D1.1M was specifically
written to provide additional requirements for

SBC 306-CR-18 193

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

15.5.5.2.3 Base Metal NDT for Lamellar reduction is prohibited on welds in the k-area, at
Tearing and Laminations. After joint completion, repair sites, backing removal sites, and access holes.
base metal thicker than 38 mm loaded in tension in
15.5.6 Inspection of High-Strength Bolting.
the through-thickness direction in tee and corner
Observation of bolting operations shall be the
joints, where the connected material is greater than
primary method used to confirm that the
19 mm and contains CJP groove welds, shall be
materials, procedures and workmanship
ultrasonically tested for discontinuities behind and
incorporated in construction are in conformance
adjacent to the fusion line of such welds. Any base
with the construction documents and the
metal discontinuities found within t/4 of the steel
provisions of the RCSC Specification.
surface shall be accepted or rejected on the basis of
criteria of AWS D1.1/D1.1M Table 6.2, where t is 1. For snug-tight joints, pre-installation
the thickness of the part subjected to the through- verification testing as specified in TABLE
thickness strain. 15-4 and monitoring of the installation
procedures as specified in TABLE 15-5
15.5.5.2.4 Beam Cope and Access Hole
are not applicable. The QCI and QAI
NDT. At welded splices and connections, thermally
need not be present during the installation
cut surfaces of beam copes and access holes shall
of fasteners in snug-tight joints.
be tested using magnetic particle testing or
penetrant testing, when the flange thickness 2. For pretensioned joints and slip-critical
exceeds 38 mm for rolled shapes, or when the web joints, when the installer is using the
thickness exceeds 38 mm for built-up shapes. turn-of-nut method with match marking
techniques, the direct-tension-indicator
15.5.5.2.5 Reduced Beam Section Repair
method, or the twist-off-type tension
NDT. Magnetic particle testing shall be performed
control bolt method, monitoring of bolt
on any weld and adjacent area of the reduced beam
pretensioning procedures shall be as
section (RBS) cut surface that has been repaired by
specified in TABLE 15-5. The QCI and
welding, or on the base metal of the RBS cut surface
QAI need not be present during the
if a sharp notch has been removed by grinding.
installation of fasteners when these
15.5.5.2.6 Weld Tab Removal Sites. At the methods are used by the installer.
end of welds where weld tabs have been removed,
3. For pretensioned joints and slip-critical
magnetic particle testing shall be performed on the
joints, when the installer is using the
same beam-to-column joints receiving UT as
calibrated wrench method or the turn-of-
required under Section 15.5.5.2.2 . The rate of MT
nut method without match marking,
is permitted to be reduced in accordance with
monitoring of bolt pretensioning
Section 15.5.5.2.8 . MT of continuity plate weld
procedures shall be as specified in
tabs removal sites is not required.
TABLE 15-5. The QCI and QAI shall be
15.5.5.2.7 Reduction of Percentage of engaged in their assigned inspection
Ultrasonic Testing. The reduction of percentage of duties during installation of fasteners
UT is permitted to be reduced in accordance with when these methods are used by the
Section 15.5.4.2.5, except no reduction is permitted installer.
for demand critical welds.
As a minimum, bolting inspection tasks shall be in
15.5.5.2.8 Reduction of Percentage of accordance with TABLE 15-4, TABLE 15-5 and
Magnetic Particle Testing. The amount of MT on TABLE 15-6. In these tables, the inspection tasks
CJP groove welds is permitted to be reduced if are as follows:
approved by the engineer of record and the
O – Observe these items on a random basis.
authority having jurisdiction. The MT rate for an
Operations need not be delayed pending these
individual welder or welding operator is permitted
inspections.
to be reduced to 10%, provided the reject rate is
demonstrated to be 5% or less of the welds tested P – Perform these tasks for each bolted connection.
for the welder or welding operator. A sampling of 15.5.7 Other Inspection Tasks. The fabricator’s
at least 20 completed welds for a job shall be made QCI shall inspect the fabricated steel to verify
for such reduction evaluation. Reject rate is the compliance with the details shown on the shop
number of welds containing rejectable defects drawings, such as proper application of joint details
divided by the number of welds completed. This at each connection. The erector’s QCI shall inspect

SBC 306-CR-18 194

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

the erected steel frame to verify compliance with For those items for quality control (QC) in TABLE
the details shown on the erection drawings, such 15-8 that contain an observe designation, the QC
as braces, stiffeners, member locations and proper inspection shall be performed by the erector’s
application of joint details at each connection. quality control inspector (QCI). In TABLE 15-8,
the inspection tasks are as follows:
The QAI shall be on the premises for inspection
during the placement of anchor rods and other O – Observe these items on a random basis.
embedments supporting structural steel for Operations need not be delayed pending these
compliance with the construction documents. As a inspections.
minimum, the diameter, grade, type and length of
P – Perform these tasks for each steel element.
the anchor rod or embedded item, and the extent or
depth of embedment into the concrete, shall be Where applicable, inspections of the composite
verified prior to placement of concrete. structures shall satisfy the requirements of this
Section. These inspections shall be performed by the
The QAI shall inspect the fabricated steel or
responsible contractor’s quality control personnel
erected steel frame, as appropriate, to verify
and by quality assurance personnel.
compliance with the details shown on the
construction documents, such as braces, stiffeners, Where applicable, inspection of reinforced concrete
member locations and proper application of joint shall comply with the requirements of SBC 304, and
details at each connection. inspection of welded reinforcing steel shall comply
with the applicable requirements of Section 15.4.
For SFRS, where applicable, the inspection tasks
listed in TABLE 15-7 shall be performed. Where applicable to the type of composite
construction, the minimum inspection tasks shall be
as listed in Table 15-9, TABLE 15-10, and TABLE
15.6—Minimum Requirements for 15-11.
Inspection of Composite Construction
Inspection of structural steel and steel deck used
15.7—Approved Fabricators and
in composite construction shall comply with the
requirements of this Chapter.
Erectors
Quality assurance (QA) inspections, except
For welding of steel headed stud anchors, the
nondestructive testing (NDT), may be waived
provisions of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural
Welding Code—Steel, apply. when the work is performed in a fabricating shop
or by an erector approved by the authority having
For welding of steel deck, observation of welding jurisdiction (AHJ) to perform the work without QA.
operations and visual inspection of in-process and NDT of welds completed in an approved
completed welds shall be the primary method to fabricator’s shop may be performed by that
confirm that the materials, procedures and fabricator when approved by the AHJ. When the
workmanship are in conformance with the fabricator performs the NDT, the QA agency shall
construction documents. All applicable provisions review the fabricator’s NDT reports.
of AWS D1.3/D1.3M, Structural Welding Code—
At completion of fabrication, the approved
Sheet Steel, shall apply. Deck welding inspection
fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance
shall include verification of the welding
consumables, welding procedure specifications to the AHJ stating that the materials supplied and
and qualifications of welding personnel prior to the work performed by the fabricator are in accordance
with the construction documents. At completion of
start of the work, observations of the work in
erection, the approved erector shall submit a
progress, and a visual inspection of all completed
certificate of compliance to the AHJ stating that the
welds. For steel deck attached by fastening systems
materials supplied and work performed by the
other than welding, inspection shall include
verification of the fasteners to be used prior to the erector are in accordance with the construction
start of the work, observations of the work in documents.
progress to confirm installation in conformance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations, and a
visual inspection of the completed installation.

SBC 306-CR-18 195

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

15.8—Nonconforming Material and

Workmanship
Identification and rejection of material or
workmanship that is not in conformance with the
construction documents shall be permitted at any
time during the progress of the work. However,
this provision shall not relieve the owner or the
inspector of the obligation for timely, in-
sequence inspections. Nonconforming material
and workmanship shall be brought to the
immediate attention of the fabricator or erector, as
applicable.
Nonconforming material or workmanship shall be
brought into conformance, or made suitable for its
intended purpose as determined by the engineer of
record.
Concurrent with the submittal of such reports to
the AHJ, EOR or owner, the QA agency shall
submit to the fabricator and erector:
1. Nonconformance reports
2. Reports of repair, replacement or
acceptance of nonconforming items

SBC 306-CR-18 196

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

TABLES AND FIGURES OF CHAPTER 15

TABLE 15-1 : INSPECTION TASKS PRIOR TO WELDING

Inspection Tasks Prior to Welding QC QA

Welding procedure specifications (WPSs) available P P

Manufacturer certifications for welding consumables available P P

Material identification (type/grade) O O

Welder identification system1 O O

Fit-up of groove welds (including joint geometry)

• Joint preparation
O
• Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, bevel)
(P/O for O
• Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces) SFRS)**
• Tacking (tack weld quality and location)
• Backing type and fit (if applicable)

Configuration and finish of access holes O O

Fit-up of fillet welds

O
• Dimensions (alignment, gaps at root)
(P/O for O
• Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces)
SFRS)**
• Tacking (tack weld quality and location)

Check welding equipment O —

1
The fabricator or erector, as applicable, shall maintain a system by which a welder who has welded a joint or member
can be identified. Stamps, if used, shall be the low-stress type.
** Following performance of this inspection task for ten welds to be made by a given welder, with the welder
demonstrating understanding of requirements and possession of skills and tools to verify these items, the Perform
designation of this task shall be reduced to Observe, and the welder shall perform this task. Should the inspector
determine that the welder has discontinued performance of this task, the task shall be returned to Perform until such
time as the Inspector has re-established adequate assurance that the welder will perform the inspection tasks listed.

SBC 306-CR-18 197

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

TABLE 15-2 : INSPECTION TASKS DURING WELDING

Inspection Tasks During Welding QC QA

Use of qualified welders O O

Control and handling of welding consumables

• Packaging O O
• Exposure control

No welding over cracked tack welds O O

Environmental conditions
• Wind speed within limits O O
• Precipitation and temperature

WPS followed
• Settings on welding equipment
• Travel speed
• Selected welding materials O O
• Shielding gas type/flow rate
• Preheat applied
• Interpass temperature maintained (min./max.)
• Proper position (F, V, H, OH)

Welding techniques
• Interpass and final cleaning
O O
• Each pass within profile limitations
• Each pass meets quality requirements

SBC 306-CR-18 198

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

TABLE 15-3 : INSPECTION TASKS AFTER WELDING

Inspection Tasks After Welding QC QA

Welds cleaned O O

Size, length and location of welds P P

Welds meet visual acceptance criteria

• Crack prohibition
• Weld/base-metal fusion
• Crater cross section P P
• Weld profiles
• Weld size
• Undercut
• Porosity

Arc strikes P P

k-area1 P P

Placement of reinforcing or contouring fillet welds (if required)2 P** P**

Backing removed and weld tabs removed (if required) P** P**

Repair activities P P**

Document acceptance or rejection of welded joint or member P P

1
When welding of doubler plates, continuity plates or stiffeners has been performed in the k-area, visually inspect
the web k-area for cracks within 75 mm of the weld.
2
Apply only for SFRS
**
For SFRS, the inspector shall prepare reports indicating that the work has been performed in accordance with the
contract documents. The report need not provide detailed measurements for joint fit-up, WPS settings, completed
welds, or other individual items listed in the table. For shop fabrication, the report shall indicate the piece mark of the
piece inspected. For field work, the report shall indicate the reference grid lines and floor or elevation inspected.
Work not in compliance with the contract documents and whether the noncompliance has been satisfactorily repaired
shall be noted in the inspection report.

SBC 306-CR-18 199

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

TABLE 15-4 : INSPECTION TASKS PRIOR TO BOLTING

Inspection Tasks Prior to Bolting QC QA

Manufacturer’s certifications available for fastener materials O P

Fasteners marked in accordance with ASTM requirements O O

Proper fasteners selected for the joint detail (grade, type, bolt length if threads are to be O O
excluded from shear plane)

Proper bolting procedure selected for joint detail O O

Connecting elements, including the appropriate faying surface condition and hole O O
preparation, if specified, meet applicable requirements

Pre-installation verification testing by installation personnel observed and documented P** O**
for fastener assemblies and methods used

Proper storage provided for bolts, nuts, washers and other fastener components O O

** For SFRS, the inspector shall prepare reports indicating that the work has been performed in accordance with the
contract documents. For shop fabrication, the report shall indicate the piece mark of the piece inspected. For field work,
the report shall indicate the reference grid lines and floor or elevation inspected. Work not in compliance with the
contract documents and whether the noncompliance has been satisfactorily repaired shall be noted in the inspection
report.

TABLE 15-5 : INSPECTION TASKS DURING BOLTING

Inspection Tasks During Bolting QC QA

Fastener assemblies, of suitable condition, placed in all holes and washers (if required) O O
are positioned as required
Joint brought to the snug-tight condition prior to the pretensioning operation O O

Fastener component not turned by the wrench prevented from rotating O O

Fasteners are pretensioned in accordance with the RCSC Specification, progressing
systematically from the most rigid point toward the O O
free edges

TABLE 15-6 : INSPECTION TASKS AFTER BOLTING

Inspection Tasks After Bolting QC QA

**
Document acceptance or rejection of bolted connections P P**
** For SFRS, the inspector shall prepare report indicating that the work has been performed in accordance with the
contract documents. For shop fabrication, the report shall indicate the piece mark of the piece inspected. For field work,
the report shall indicate the reference grid lines and floor or elevation inspected. Work not in compliance with the contract
documents and whether the noncompliance has been satisfactorily repaired shall be noted in the inspection report.

SBC 306-CR-18 200

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

TABLE 15-7 : OTHER INSPECTION TASKS FOR SFRS

Other Inspection Tasks QC QA

RBS requirements, if applicable
– Contour and finish P** P**
– Dimensional tolerances
Protected zone—no holes and unapproved attachments made by fabricator or erector, as applicable P** P**
** The inspector shall prepare reports indicating that the work has been performed in accordance with the contract
documents. For shop fabrication, the report shall indicate the piece mark of the piece inspected. For field work, the report
shall indicate the reference grid lines and floor or elevation inspected. Work not in compliance with the contract
documents and whether the noncompliance has been satisfactorily repaired shall be noted in the inspection report.

TABLE 15-8 : INSPECTION OF STEEL ELEMENTS OF COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION PRIOR

TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT

Inspection of Steel Elements of Composite Construction Prior to Concrete

QC QA
Placement

Placement and installation of steel deck P P

Placement and installation of steel headed stud anchors P P

Document acceptance or rejection of steel elements P P

Table 15-9 Inspection of Composite Structures Prior to Concrete Placement

Inspection of Composite Structures Prior to Concrete Placement QC QA

Material identification of reinforcing steel (Type/Grade) O O

Determination of carbon equivalent for reinforcing steel other than ASTM A706 O O

Proper reinforcing steel size, spacing and orientation O O

Reinforcing steel has not been rebent in the field O O

Reinforcing steel has been tied and supported as required O O

Required reinforcing steel clearances have been provided O O

Composite member has required size O O

SBC 306-CR-18 201

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

TABLE 15-10 : INSPECTION OF COMPOSITE STRUCTURES DURING CONCRETE

PLACEMENT

Inspection of Composite Structures during Concrete Placement QC QA

Concrete: Material identification (mix design, compressive strength, maximum large

aggregate size, maximum slump) O** O**

Limits on water added at the truck or pump O** O**

Proper placement techniques to limit segregation O O

** The inspector shall prepare reports indicating that the work has been performed in accordance with the contract
documents. Work not in compliance with the contract documents and whether the noncompliance has been satisfactorily
repaired shall be noted in the inspection report.

TABLE 15-11 : INSPECTION OF COMPOSITE STRUCTURES AFTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT

Inspection of Composite Structures After Concrete Placement QC QA

Achievement of minimum specified concrete compressive strength at specified age -** -**

** The inspector shall prepare reports indicating that the work has been performed in accordance with the contract
documents. Work not in compliance with the contract documents and whether the noncompliance has been
satisfactorily repaired shall be noted in the inspection report.
P

SBC 306-CR-18 202

CHAPTER 15—QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 203

CHAPTER 16—EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

CHAPTER 16—EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

(Section 16.4). Such properties shall include the

This chapter applies to the evaluation of the
yield stress, tensile strength and percent
strength and stiffness under static vertical (gravity)
elongation. Where available, certified material test
loads of existing structures by structural analysis,
reports or certified reports of tests made by the
by load tests or by a combination of structural
fabricator or a testing laboratory in accordance with
analysis and load tests when specified by the
ASTM A6/A6M or A568/A568M, as applicable,
engineer of record or in the contract documents.
shall be permitted for this purpose. Otherwise,
For such evaluation, the steel grades are not limited
tensile tests shall be conducted in accordance with
to those listed in Section 1.3.1 . This chapter does
ASTM A370 from samples cut from components of
not address load testing for the effects of seismic
the structure.
loads or moving loads (vibrations).
16.2.3 Chemical Composition. Where welding
The chapter is organized as follows:
is anticipated for repair or modification of existing
16.1 —General Provisions structures, the chemical composition of the steel
16.2 —Material Properties shall be determined for use in preparing a welding
procedure specification (WPS). Where available,
16.3 —Evaluation by Structural Analysis results from certified material test reports or
16.4 —Evaluation by Load Tests certified reports of tests made by the fabricator or
a testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM
16.5 —Evaluation Report procedures shall be permitted for this purpose.
Otherwise, analyses shall be conducted in
accordance with ASTM A751 from the samples
16.1—General Provisions used to determine tensile properties, or from
These provisions shall be applicable when the samples taken from the same locations.
evaluation of an existing steel structure is 16.2.4 Base Metal Notch Toughness. Where
specified for (a) verification of a specific set of welded tension splices in heavy shapes and plates as
design loadings or (b) determination of the design defined in Section 1.3.1.4 are critical to the
strength of a force resisting member or system. The performance of the structure, the Charpy V-notch
evaluation shall be performed by structural toughness shall be determined in accordance with
analysis (Section 16.3), by load tests (Section the provisions of Section 1.3.1.4. If the notch
16.4), or by a combination of structural analysis and toughness so determined does not meet the
load tests, as specified in the contract documents. provisions of Section 1.3.1.4, the engineer of record
Where load tests are used, the engineer of record shall determine if remedial actions are required.
shall first analyze the applicable parts of the
structure, prepare a testing plan, and develop a 16.2.5 Weld Metal. Where structural
written procedure to prevent excessive permanent performance is dependent on existing welded
deformation or catastrophic collapse during testing. connections, representative samples of weld metal
shall be obtained. Chemical analysis and
16.2—Material Properties mechanical tests shall be made to characterize the
weld metal. A determination shall be made of the
16.2.1 Determination of Required Tests. The
magnitude and consequences of imperfections. If
engineer of record shall determine the specific
the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M are not
tests that are required from Sections 16.2.2
met, the engineer of record shall determine if
through 16.2.6 and specify the locations where
remedial actions are required.
they are required. Where available, the use of
applicable project records shall be permitted to 16.2.6 Bolts and Rivets. Representative samples
reduce or eliminate the need for testing. of bolts shall be inspected to determine markings
and classifications. Where bolts cannot be properly
16.2.2 Tensile Properties. Tensile properties of
identified visually, representative samples shall
members shall be considered in evaluation by
be removed and tested to determine tensile
structural analysis (Section 16.3) or load tests

SBC 306-CR-18 204

CHAPTER 16—EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

strength in accordance with ASTM F606 or in SBC 301, shall be substituted for L. More severe
ASTM F606M and the bolt classified load combinations shall be used where required
accordingly. Alternatively, the assumption that by applicable Saudi building codes.
the bolts are ASTM A307 shall be permitted.
Periodic unloading shall be considered once the
Rivets shall be assumed to be ASTM A502, Grade
service load level is attained and after the onset
1, unless a higher grade is established through
of inelastic structural behavior is identified to
documentation or testing.
document the amount of permanent set and the
16.3—Evaluation b y Structural magnitude of the inelastic deformations.
Analysis Deformations of the structure, such as member
deflections, shall be monitored at critical locations
16.3.1 Dimensional Data. All dimensions used during the test, referenced to the initial position
in the evaluation, such as spans, column heights, before loading. It shall be demonstrated that the
member spacings, bracing locations, cross section deformation of the structure does not increase by
dimensions, thicknesses, and connection details, more than 10% during a one-hour holding period
shall be determined from a field survey. under sustained, maximum test load. It is
Alternatively, when available, it shall be permitted permissible to repeat the sequence if necessary to
to determine such dimensions from applicable demonstrate compliance.
project design or shop drawings with field
verification of critical values. Deformations of the structure shall also be recorded
24 hours after the test loading is removed to
16.3.2 Strength Evaluation. Forces (load effects) determine the amount of permanent set. Because
in members and connections shall be determined the amount of acceptable permanent deformation
by structural analysis applicable to the type of depends on the specific structure, no limit is
structure evaluated. The load effects shall be specified for permanent deformation at maximum
determined for the static vertical (gravity) loads loading. Where it is not feasible to load test the
and factored load combinations stipulated in entire structure, a segment or zone of not less than
Section 2.2. one complete bay, representative of the most critical
The design strength of members and connections conditions, shall be selected.
shall be determined from applicable provisions of 16.4.2 Serviceability Evaluation. When load
Chapters 2 through 10 of this Code. tests are prescribed, the structure shall be loaded
16.3.3 Serviceability Evaluation. Where incrementally to the service load level.
required, the deformations at service loads shall be Deformations shall be monitored during a one hour
calculated and reported. holding period under sustained service test load.
The structure shall then be unloaded and the
16.4—Evaluation by Load Tests deformation recorded.
16.4.1 Determination of Load Rating by 16.5—Evaluation Report
Testing. To determine the load rating of an existing
floor or roof structure by testing, a test load shall After the evaluation of an existing structure has
be applied incrementally in accordance with the been completed, the engineer of record shall
engineer of record’s plan. The structure shall be prepare a report documenting the evaluation. The
visually inspected for signs of distress or imminent report shall indicate whether the evaluation was
failure at each load level. Appropriate measures performed by structural analysis, by load testing,
shall be taken if these or any other unusual or by a combination of structural analysis and load
conditions are encountered. testing. Furthermore, when testing is performed,
the report shall include the loads and load
The tested strength of the structure shall be taken as combination used and the load- deformation and
the maximum applied test load plus the in-situ time-deformation relationships observed. All
dead load. The live load rating of a floor structure relevant information obtained from design
shall be determined by setting the tested strength drawings, material test reports, and auxiliary
equal to 1.2D 1.6L, where D is the nominal dead material testing shall also be reported. Finally, the
load and L is the nominal live load rating for the report shall indicate whether the structure, including
structure. The nominal live load rating of the floor all members and connections, is adequate to
structure shall not exceed that which can be withstand the load effects.
calculated using applicable provisions of the
specification. For roof structures, Lr or R as defined

SBC 306-CR-18 205

CHAPTER 16—EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 206

APPENDIX A —DESIGN BY INELASTIC ANALYSIS

APPENDIX A—Design by Inelastic Analysis

ductility consistent with the intended behavior of

This appendix addresses design by inelastic
the structural system. Force redistribution due to
analysis, in which consideration of the
rupture of a member or connection is not permitted.
redistribution of member and connection forces
and moments as a result of localized yielding is Any method that uses inelastic analysis to
permitted. proportion members and connections to satisfy
these general requirements is permitted. A design
The appendix is organized as follows:
method based on inelastic analysis that meets the
A.1 — General Requirements above strength requirements, the ductility
A.2 — Ductility Requirements requirements of Section A.2 , and the analysis
requirements of Section A.3 satisfies these
A.3 — Analysis Requirements. general requirements.

A.1— General Requirements A.2— Ductility Requirements.

Design by inelastic analysis shall be conducted in Members and connections with elements subject
accordance with Section 2.3.3 using load and to yielding, shall be proportioned such that all
resistance factor design (LRFD). The design inelastic deformation demands are less than or
strength of the structural system and its members equal to their inelastic deformation capacities. In
and connections shall equal or exceed the required lieu of explicitly, ensuring that the inelastic
strength as determined by the inelastic analysis. The deformation demands are less than or equal to their
provisions of this Appendix do not apply to seismic inelastic deformation capacities. The following
design. requirements shall be satisfied for steel members
The inelastic analysis shall take into account: (1) subject to plastic hinging.
flexural, shear and axial member deformations, A.2.1 Material. The specified minimum yield
and all other component and connection stress, Fy, of members subject to plastic hinging
deformations that contribute to the displacements shall not exceed 450 MPa.
of the structure; (2) second-order effects
A.2.2 Cross Section. The cross section of
(including P -Δ and P-effects); (3) geometric
members at plastic hinge locations shall be doubly
imperfections; (4) stiffness reductions due to
symmetric with width-to-thickness ratios of their
inelasticity, including the effect of residual stresses
and partial yielding of the cross section; and (5) compression elements not exceeding pd, where
uncertainty in system, member, and connection pd is equal to p from Table 2-2 except as modified
strength and stiffness. below:
Strength limit states detected by an inelastic (a) For the width-to-thickness ratio, h/tw, of webs
analysis that incorporates all of the above of I-shaped sections, rectangular HSS, and box-
requirements are not subject to the corresponding shaped sections subject to combined flexure
provisions of the Code when a comparable or and compression
higher level of reliability is provided by the
When Pu /cPy 0.125
analysis. Strength limit states not detected by the
inelastic analysis shall be evaluated using the 𝐸 2.75𝑃𝑢
corresponding provisions of Chapters 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 𝜆𝑝𝑑 = 3.76√ (1 − ) (A-1)
9, 10 and 11. Connections shall meet the 𝐹𝑦 𝜑𝑐 𝑃𝑦
requirements of Section 2.3.6 .
When Pu /cPy 0.125
Members and connections subject to inelastic
deformations, shall be shown to have adequate

SBC 306-CR-18 207

APPENDIX A —DESIGN BY INELASTIC ANALYSIS

𝐸 𝑃𝑢 𝐸 When the magnitude of the bending

𝜆𝑝𝑑 = 1.12√ (2.33 − ) ≥ 1.49√ (A-2) moment at any location within the unbraced
𝐹𝑦 𝜑𝑐 𝑃𝑦 𝐹𝑦
length exceeds M2
where 𝑀1′ ⁄𝑀2 = +1 (A-6)
h as defined in section 2.4.1 , mm Otherwise:
tw web thickness, mm 𝑀1 +𝑀2
When 𝑀𝑚𝑖𝑑 ≤
2
Pu required axial strength in compression, N
𝑀1′ = 𝑀1 (A-7)
Py FyAg axial yield strength, N 𝑀1 +𝑀2
When 𝑀𝑚𝑖𝑑 >
2
c resistance factor for compression 0.85
𝑀1′ = 2𝑀𝑚𝑖𝑑 − 𝑀2 < 𝑀2 (A-8)
(b) For the width-to-thickness ratio, b/t, of flanges
of rectangular HSS and box-shaped sections, where
and for flange cover plates, and diaphragm M1 = smaller moment at end of unbraced
plates between lines of fasteners or welds length, N-mm
𝜆𝑝𝑑 = 0.94√𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 (A-3) M2 = larger moment at end of unbraced length,
N-mm. M2 shall be taken as positive in
where all cases.
b as defined in section 2.4.1 , mm Mmid = moment at middle of unbraced length, N-
t as defined in section 2.4.1 , mm mm
M1 = effective moment at end of unbraced
(c) For the diameter-to-thickness ratio, D/t, of length opposite from M2, N-mm
circular HSS in flexure The moments M1 and Mmid are individually taken as
𝜆𝑝𝑑 = 0.045 𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 (A-4) positive when they cause compression in the same
flange as the moment M2 and negative otherwise.
where
(b) For solid rectangular bars and for rectangular
D outside diameter of round HSS, mm
HSS and box-shaped members bent about their
A.2.3 Unbraced Length. In prismatic member major axis
segments that contain plastic hinges, the laterally 𝑀1′ 𝐸 𝐸
unbraced length, Lb, shall not exceed Lpd, 𝐿𝑝𝑑 = [0.17 − 0.10 ] 𝑟𝑦 ≥ 0.10 𝑟𝑦 (A-9)
𝑀2 𝐹𝑦 𝐹𝑦
determined as follows. For members subject to
flexure only, or to flexure and axial tension, Lb For all types of members subject to axial
shall be taken as the length between points braced compression and containing plastic hinges, the
against lateral displacement of the compression laterally unbraced lengths about the cross section
flange, or between points braced to prevent twist major and minor axes shall not exceed
of the cross section. For members subject to 4.71 𝑟𝑥 √𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 and 4.71 𝑟𝑦 √𝐸 ⁄𝐹𝑦 , respectively.
flexure and axial compression, Lb shall be taken as
the length between points braced against both There is no Lpd limit for member segments
lateral displacement in the minor axis direction and containing plastic hinges in the following cases:
twist of the cross section. 1. Members with circular or square cross
(a) For I-shaped members bent about their major sections subject only to flexure or to
axis: combined flexure and tension
𝑀1′ 𝐸 2. Members subject only to flexure about
𝐿𝑝𝑑 = [0.12 − 0.076 ] 𝑟 (A-5) their minor axis or combined tension and
𝑀2 𝐹𝑦 𝑦
flexure about their minor axis
where
3. Members subject only to tension
ry radius of gyration about minor axis, mm.

SBC 306-CR-18 208

APPENDIX A —DESIGN BY INELASTIC ANALYSIS

A.2.4 Axial Force. To assure adequate ductility 2. The elastic-perfectly-plastic yield

in compression members with plastic hinges, criterion, expressed in terms of the axial
the design strength in compression shall not exceed force, major axis bending moment, and
0.75𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 . minor axis bending moment, shall satisfy
the cross section strength limit defined
by Eqs. (8-1) and (8-2) using 𝑃𝑐 = 0.9𝑃𝑦 ,
A.3— Analysis Requirements. 𝑀𝑐𝑥 = 0.9𝑀𝑝𝑥 and 𝑀𝑐𝑦 = 0.9𝑀𝑝𝑦 .
The structural analysis shall satisfy the general
requirements of Section A.1. These requirements
are permitted to be satisfied by a second-order
inelastic analysis meeting the requirements of this
Section.
Exception:
For continuous beams not subject to axial
compression, a first-order inelastic or plastic
analysis is permitted and the requirements of
Sections A.3.2 and A.3.3 are waived.
A.3.1 Material Properties and Yield Criteria.
The specified minimum yield stress, Fy, and the
stiffness of all steel members and connections shall
be reduced by a factor of 0.90 for the analysis,
except as noted below in Section A.3.3.
The influence of axial force, major axis bending
moment, and minor axis bending moment shall be
included in the calculation of the inelastic response.
The plastic strength of the member cross section
shall be represented in the analysis either by an
elastic-perfectly-plastic yield criterion expressed
in terms of the axial force, major axis bending
moment, and minor axis bending moment, or by
explicit modeling of the material stress-strain
response as elastic-perfectly-plastic.
A.3.2 Geometric Imperfections. The analysis
shall include the effects of initial geometric
imperfections. This shall be done by explicitly
modeling the imperfections as specified in Section
3.2.2.1 or by the equivalent notional loads as
specified in Section 3.2.2.2 .
A.3.3 Residual Stress and Partial Yielding
Effects. The analysis shall include the influence of
residual stresses and partial yielding. This shall be
done by explicitly modeling these effects in the
analysis or by reducing the stiffness of all structural
components as specified in Section 3.2.3 .
If the provisions of Section 3.2.3 are used, then:
1. The 0.9 stiffness reduction factor specified
in Section A.3.1 shall be replaced by the
reduction of the elastic modulus E by 0.8
as specified in Section 3.2.3 , and

SBC 306-CR-18 209

APPENDIX A —DESIGN BY INELASTIC ANALYSIS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 210

APPENDIX B —DESIGN FOR PONDING

APPENDIX B—Design for Ponding

This appendix provides methods for determining A steel deck shall be considered a secondary
whether a roof system has adequate strength and member when it is directly supported by the
stiffness to resist ponding. primary members.
The appendix is organized as follows:
B.1 —Simplified Design for Ponding B.2— Improved Design for Ponding
B.2 — Improved Design for Ponding The provisions given below are to be used when a
more accurate evaluation of framing stiffness is
needed than that given by Eqs. (B-1) and (B-2).
B.1—Simplified Design for Ponding
Define the stress indexes
The roof system shall be considered stable for
0.8𝐹𝑦 − 𝑓𝑜
ponding and no further investigation is needed if 𝑈𝑝 = ( ) (B-5)
both of the following two conditions are met: 𝑓𝑜 𝑝

𝐶𝑝 + 0.9𝐶𝑠 ≤ 0.25 0.8𝐹𝑦 − 𝑓𝑜

(B-1) 𝑈𝑠 = ( ) (B-6)
𝐼𝑑 ≥ 3,940𝑆 4 (B-2) 𝑓𝑜 𝑠

where where
504𝐿𝑠 𝐿4𝑝 Up = stress index for the primary member
𝐶𝑝 = (B-3)
𝐼𝑝 Us = stress index for the secondary member
504𝑆𝐿4𝑠
𝐶𝑠 = (B-4) fo =stress due to D R (D nominal dead load,
𝐼𝑠 R nominal load due to rainwater
Id = moment of inertia of the steel deck exclusive of the ponding contribution),
supported on secondary members, mm4 MPa.
per m For roof framing consisting of primary and
Ip = moment of inertia of primary members, secondary members, evaluate the combined
mm4 stiffness as follows. Enter FIGURE B-1 at the
level of the computed stress index, U p, determined
Is = moment of inertia of secondary members, for the primary beam; move horizontally to the
mm4 computed Cs value of the secondary beams and
Lp = length of primary members, m then downward to the abscissa scale. The
combined stiffness of the primary and secondary
Ls = length of secondary members, m framing is sufficient to prevent ponding if the
S = spacing of secondary members, m flexibility coefficient read from this latter scale is
more than the value of Cp computed for the given
For trusses and steel joists, the calculation of the
primary member; if not, a stiffer primary or
moments of inertia, Ip and Is, shall include the
secondary beam, or combination of both, is
effects of web member strain when used in the
required.
above equation.
A similar procedure must be followed FIGURE
User Note: When the moment of inertia is B-2.
calculated using only the truss or joist chord For roof framing consisting of a series of equally
areas, the reduction in the moment of inertia due spaced wall bearing beams, evaluate the stiffness as
to web strain can typically be taken as 15%. follows. The beams are considered as secondary
members supported on an infinitely stiff primary

SBC 306-CR-18 211

APPENDIX B —DESIGN FOR PONDING

member. For this case, enter FIGURE B-2. with

the computed stress index, Us. The limiting value
of Cs is determined by the intercept of a horizontal
line representing the Us value and the curve for Cp
0.

User Note: The ponding deflection contributed

by a metal deck is usually such a small part of
the total ponding deflection of a roof panel that it
is sufficient merely to limit its moment of inertia
[per meter of width normal to its span] to 3940
times the fourth power of its span length.

Evaluate the stability against ponding of a roof

consisting of a metal roof deck of relatively slender
depth-to-span ratio, spanning between beams
supported directly on columns, as follows. Use
FIGURE B-1 or FIGURE B-2, using as Cs the
flexibility coefficient for a one-meter width of the
roof deck (S 1.0).

SBC 306-CR-18 212

APPENDIX B —DESIGN FOR PONDING

TABLES AND FIGURES OF APPENDIX B

Upper Limit
Upper ofLimit
Flexibility coefficient Cp
of Flexibility
Coefficient C
FIGURE B-1. LIMITING FLEXIBILITY COEFFICIENT FOR THE PRIMARY SYSTEMS

SBC 306-CR-18 213

APPENDIX B —DESIGN FOR PONDING

Upper Upper
Limit ofLimit
Flexibility coefficient Cs
of Flexibility
Coefficient C
FIGURE B-2. LIMITING FLEXIBILITY COEFFICIENT FOR THE SECONDARY SYSTEMS

SBC 306-CR-18 214

APPENDIX B —DESIGN FOR PONDING

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 215

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

APPENDIX C—DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

structures subject to code mandated wind loads is

This appendix applies to members and connections
required.
subject to high cycle loading within the elastic
range of stresses of frequency and magnitude The cyclic load resistance determined by the
sufficient to initiate cracking and progressive provisions of this Appendix is applicable to
failure, which defines the limit state of fatigue. structures with suitable corrosion protection or
subject only to mildly corrosive atmospheres,
The appendix is organized as follows:
such as normal atmospheric conditions.
C.1— General Provisions
The cyclic load resistance determined by the
C.2 provisions of this Appendix is applicable only to
— Calculation of Maximum Stresses and Stress structures subject to temperatures not exceeding
Ranges 150 C.

C.3— Design Stress Range The engineer of record shall provide either
complete details including weld sizes or shall
C.4— Special Fabrication and Erection specify the planned cycle life and the maximum
Requirements range of moments, shears and reactions for the
connections.

C.1— General Provisions

The provisions of this Appendix apply to stresses C.2— Calculation of Maximum Stresses
calculated on the basis of service loads. The and Stress Ranges
maximum permitted stress due to service loads is Calculated stresses shall be based upon elastic
0.66Fy . analysis. Stresses shall not be amplified by stress
Stress range is defined as the magnitude of the concentration factors for geometrical
change in stress due to the application or removal discontinuities.
of the service live load. In the case of a stress For bolts and threaded rods subject to axial
reversal, the stress range shall be computed as the tension, the calculated stresses shall include the
numerical sum of maximum repeated tensile and effects of prying action, if any. In the case of axial
compressive stresses or the numerical sum of stress combined with bending, the maximum
maximum shearing stresses of opposite direction at stresses, of each kind, shall be those determined for
the point of probable crack initiation. concurrent arrangements of the applied load.
In the case of complete-joint-penetration groove For members having symmetric cross sections,
welds, the maximum allowable stress range the fasteners and welds shall be arranged
calculated by Eq. (C-1) applies only to welds symmetrically about the axis of the member, or the
that have been ultrasonically or radiographically total stresses including those due to eccentricity
tested and meet the acceptance requirements of shall be included in the calculation of the stress
Sections 6.12.2 or 6.13.2 of AWS D1.1/D1.1M. range.
No evaluation of fatigue resistance is required if the For axially loaded angle members where the
live load stress range is less than the threshold center of gravity of the connecting welds lies
allowable stress range, FTH. See TABLE C-1. between the line of the center of gravity of the angle
cross section and the center of the connected leg,
No evaluation of fatigue resistance of members the effects of eccentricity shall be ignored. If the
consisting of shapes or plate is required if the center of gravity of the connecting welds lies
number of cycles of application of live load is less outside this zone, the total stresses, including those
than 20,000. No evaluation of fatigue resistance of due to joint eccentricity, shall be included in the
members consisting of HSS in building-type calculation of stress range.

SBC 306-CR-18 216

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

C.3— Design Stress Range section at the root of the weld shall be
determined by Eq. (C-4), for stress category
The range of stress at service loads shall not
Cas follows:
exceed the stress range as given in Sections C.3.1
0.333
and C.3.2. 14.41011
𝐹𝑆𝑅 = 𝑅𝑃𝐽𝑃 ( ) (C-4)
C.3.1 Plain Material and Welded Joints. 𝑛𝑆𝑅
(a) For stress categories A, B, B, C, D, E and Ethe where
allowable stress range, FSR, shall be determined
RPJP, the reduction factor for reinforced or non-
as follows: reinforced transverse PJP groove welds, is
𝐶𝑓 329 0.333 determined as follows;
𝐹𝑆𝑅 = ( ) ≥ 𝐹𝑇𝐻 (C-1)
𝑛𝑆𝑅 1.12−1.01(
2𝑎 𝑤
)+1.24( )
𝑡𝑝 𝑡𝑝
where 𝑅𝑃𝐽𝑃 = ( ) ≤ 1.0 (C-5)
𝑡𝑝0.167

Cf = constant from TABLE C-1 for the fatigue

category If RPJP 1.0, use stress category C.

FSR = allowable stress range, MPa 2a = length of the non-welded root face in the
direction of the thickness of the tension-
FTH = threshold allowable stress range, loaded plate, mm
maximum stress range for indefinite
design life from TABLE C-1, MPa w = leg size of the reinforcing or contouring
fillet, if any, in the direction of the
nSR = number of stress range fluctuations in thickness of the tension-loaded plate, mm
design life
tp = thickness of tension loaded plate, mm
= number of stress range fluctuations per
day 365 years of design life Based upon crack initiation from the roots of
a pair of transverse fillet welds on opposite
(b) For stress category F, the allowable stress sides of the tension loaded plate element, the
range, FSR, shall be determined as follows: allowable stress range, FSR, on the cross
0.167
𝐶𝑓 11104 section at the root of the welds shall be
𝐹𝑆𝑅 =( ) ≥ 𝐹𝑇𝐻 (C-2) determined by Eq. (C-6) for stress category
𝑛𝑆𝑅
Cas follows:
(c) For tension-loaded plate elements connected 0.333
at their end by cruciform, T or corner details 14.41011
𝐹𝑆𝑅 = 𝑅𝐹𝐼𝐿 ( ) (C-6)
with complete-joint-penetration (CJP) groove 𝑛𝑆𝑅
welds or partial-joint-penetration (PJP) groove
welds, fillet welds, or combinations of the where
preceding, transverse to the direction of stress, RFIL is the reduction factor for joints using a pair of
the allowable stress range on the cross section transverse fillet welds only.
of the tension-loaded plate element shall be
determined as follows: 𝑤
0.10 + 1.24 ( )
𝑡𝑝
Based upon crack initiation from the toe of the 𝑅𝐹𝐼𝐿 =( ) ≤ 1.0 (C-7)
𝑡𝑝0.167
weld on the tension loaded plate element (i.e.,
when RPJP = 1.0), the allowable stress range,
FSR, shall be determined by Eq. (C-3) for If RFIL = 1.0, use stress category C.
stress category C as follows:
0.333
14.41011 C.3.2 Bolts and Threaded Parts. In bolts and
𝐹𝑆𝑅 =( ) ≥ 68.9 (C-3)
𝑛𝑆𝑅 threaded parts, the range of stress at service loads
Based upon crack initiation from the root of shall not exceed the allowable stress range
the weld on the tension loaded plate element computed as follows:
using transverse PJP groove welds, with or (a) For mechanically fastened connections loaded
without reinforcing or contouring fillet welds, in shear, the maximum range of stress in the
the allowable stress range on the cross connected material at service loads shall not

SBC 306-CR-18 217

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

exceed the allowable stress range computed In transverse joints subject to tension, backing bars,
using Eq. (C-1) where Cf and FTH are taken from if used, shall be removed and the joint back gouged
Section 2 of TABLE C-1. and welded.
(b) For high-strength bolts, common bolts and In transverse complete-joint-penetration T and
threaded anchor rods with cut, ground or rolled corner joints, a reinforcing fillet weld, not less than
threads, the maximum range of tensile stress on 6 mm in size shall be added at reentrant corners.
the net tensile area from applied axial load and
The surface roughness of thermally cut edges
moment plus load due to prying action shall not
subject to cyclic stress ranges, that include tension,
exceed the allowable stress range computed
shall not exceed 25 m, where ASME B46.1 is the
using Eq. (C-8) (stress category G). The net
reference standard.
area in tension, At , is given by Eq. (C-9).
0.333
1.281011 User Note: AWS C4.1 Sample 3 may be used
𝐹𝑆𝑅 = ( ) ≥ 48 (C-8) to evaluate compliance with this requirement.
𝑛𝑆𝑅
𝜋
𝐴𝑡 = (𝑑𝑏 − 0.9382𝑝)2 (C-9) Reentrant corners at cuts, copes and weld access
4
 holes shall form a radius of not less than 10 mm by
where predrilling or subpunching and reaming a hole, or
db = the nominal diameter (body or shank by thermal cutting to form the radius of the cut. If
diameter), mm the radius portion is formed by thermal cutting, the
cut surface shall be ground to a bright metal surface.
p = pitch (mm per thread)
For transverse butt joints in regions of tensile stress,
For joints in which the material within the grip is weld tabs shall be used to provide for cascading the
not limited to steel or joints which are not tensioned weld termination outside the finished joint. End
to the requirements of TABLE 10-6, all axial load dams shall not be used. Run-off tabs shall be
and moment applied to the joint plus effects of any removed and the end of the weld finished flush
prying action shall be assumed to be carried with the edge of the member.
exclusively by the bolts or rods.
See Section 10.2.2.2 for requirements for end
For joints in which the material within the grip is returns on certain fillet welds subject to cyclic
limited to steel and which are pretensioned to the service loading.
requirements of TABLE 10-6, an analysis of the
relative stiffness of the connected parts and bolts
shall be permitted to be used to determine the
tensile stress range in the pretensioned bolts due to
the total service live load and moment plus effects
of any prying action. Alternatively, the stress range
in the bolts shall be assumed to be equal to the stress
on the net tensile area due to 20% of the absolute
value of the service load axial load and moment
from dead, live and other loads.

C.4— Special Fabrication and Erection

Requirements
Longitudinal backing bars are permitted to remain
in place, and if used, shall be continuous. If splicing
is necessary for long joints, the bar shall be joined
with complete penetration butt joints and the
reinforcement ground prior to assembly in the
joint. Longitudinal backing, if left in place, shall be
attached with continuous fillet welds.

SBC 306-CR-18 218

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLES AND FIGURES OF APPENDIX C

TABLE C-1: FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Threshold
Stress Constant Potential Crack
Description FTH
Category Cf Initiation Point
(MPa)
SECTION 1 – PLAIN MATERIAL AWAY FROM ANY WELDING
1.1 Base metal, except noncoated
weathering steel, with rolled or cleaned Away from all welds
surface. Flame-cut edges with surface A 250 x 108 165 or structural
roughness value of 25 μm or less, but connections
without reentrant corners.
1.2 Noncoated weathering steel base
metal with rolled or cleaned surface. Away from all welds
Flame-cut edges with surface B 120 x 108 110 or structural
roughness value of 25 μm or less, but connections
without reentrant corners.
1.3 Member with drilled or reamed
holes. Member with re-entrant corners
at copes, cuts, block-outs or other At any external edge
B 120 x 108 110
geometrical discontinuities made to or at hole perimeter
requirements of t h i s Appendix,
Section C.4, except weld access holes.
1.4 Rolled cross sections with weld
access holes made to requirements At reentrant corner of
of Section 10.1.6 and this Appendix, weld access hole or at
Section C.4. Members with drilled or
C 44 x 108 69 any small hole (may
reamed holes containing bolts for
contain bolt for
attachment of light bracing where there
is a small longitudinal component of minor connections)
brace force.
SECTION 2 – CONNECTED MATERIAL IN MECHANICALLY FASTENED JOINTS
2.1 Gross area of base metal in lap Through gross section
joints connected by high-strength bolts near hole
in joints satisfying all requirements B 120 x 108 110
for slip-critical connections.

2.2 Base metal at net section of high- In net section

strength bolted joints, designed on the originating at side of
basis of bearing resistance, but hole
B 120 x 108 110
fabricated and installed to all
requirements for slip-critical
connections.
2.3 Base metal at the net section of In net section
other mechanically fastened joints D 22 x 108 48 originating at side of
except eye bars and pin plates. hole
2.4 Base metal at net section of eyebar In net section
head or pin plate. E 11 x 108 31 originating at side of
hole

SBC 306-CR-18 219

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Illustrative Typical Examples

SECTION 1 – PLAIN MATERIAL AWAY FROM ANY WELDING
1.1 and 1.2

1.3

1.4

SECTION 2 – CONNECTED MATERIAL IN MECHANICALLY FASTENED JOINTS

2.1

(Note: figures are for slip-critical bolted connections)

2.2

(Note: figures are for bolted connections designed to bear, meeting the requirements of slip-critical connections)
2.3

(Note: figures are for snug-tightened bolts, rivets, or other mechanical fasteners)
2.4

SBC 306-CR-18 220

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Threshold
Stress Constant Potential Crack
Description FTH
Category Cf Initiation Point
(MPa)
SECTION 3 – WELDED JOINTS JOINING COMPONENTS OF BUILT-UP MEMBERS
3.1 Base metal and weld metal in From surface or
members without attachments built up of internal discontinuities
plates or shapes connected by in weld away from
continuous longitudinal complete-joint- B 120 x 108 110 end of weld
penetration groove welds, back gouged
and welded from second side, or by
continuous fillet welds.
3.2 Base metal and weld metal in From surface or
members without attachments built up of internal discontinuities
plates or shapes, connected by in weld, including weld
continuous longitudinal complete-joint- B’ 61 x 108 83 attaching backing bars
penetration groove welds with backing
bars not removed, or by continuous
partial- joint-penetration groove welds.
3.3 Base metal at weld metal From the weld
terminations of longitudinal welds at weld 8
48 termination into the
D 22 x 10
access holes in connected built-up web or flange
members.
3.4 Base metal at ends of longitudinal In connected mate rial
intermittent fillet weld segments. at start and stop
E 11 x 108 31
locations of any weld
deposit
3.5 Base metal at ends of partial length In flange at toe of
welded coverplates narrower than the end weld or in flange
flange having square or tapered ends, with at termination of
or without welds across the ends; and longitudinal weld or in
coverplates wider than the flange with edge of flange with
welds across the ends. wide coverplates
Flange thickness (tf) ≤ 20 mm E 11 x 108 31
Flange thickness (tf) > 20 mm E’ 3.9 x 10 8 18
3.6 Base metal at ends of partial length In edge of flange at
welded coverplates wider than the flange E’ 3.9 x 108 18 end of cover- plate
without welds across the ends. weld
SECTION 4 – LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELDED END CONNECTIONS
4.1 Base metal at junction of axially Initiating from end
loaded members with longitudinally of any weld termi-
welded end connections. Welds shall be
nation extending
on each side of the axis of the member to
balance weld stresses. into the base metal
T ≤ 12 mm E 11 x 108 31
T > 12 mm E’ 3.9 x 108 18

SBC 306-CR-18 221

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Illustrative Typical Examples

SECTION 3 – WELDED JOINTS JOINING COMPONENTS OF BUILT-UP MEMBERS
3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

3.6

SECTION 4 – LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELDED END CONNECTIONS

4.1

SBC 306-CR-18 222

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Threshold
Stress Constant Potential Crack
Description FTH
Category Cf Initiation Point
(MPa)
SECTION 5 – WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS
5.1 Weld metal and base metal in or From internal dis-
adjacent to complete-joint-penetration continuities in weld
groove welded splices in rolled or metal or along the
welded cross sections with welds fusion boundary
ground essentially parallel to the
direction of stress and with soundness B 120 x 108 110
established by radiographic or
ultrasonic inspection in accordance
with the requirements of subclauses
6.12 or 6.13 of AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
6.13 of AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

5.2 Weld metal and base metal in or From internal

adjacent to complete-joint-penetration discontinuities in
groove welded splices with welds ground filler metal or along
essentially parallel to the direction of stress
at transitions in thickness or width made fusion boundary or at
on a slope no greater than 1:21/2 and with start of transition
weld soundness established by when Fy ≥ 620 MPa
radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in
accordance with the requirements of
subclauses 6.12 or 6.13 of AWS
D1.1/D1.1M.
Fy < 620 MPa
B 120 x 108 110
Fy ≥ 620 MPa B’ 61 x 108 83
5.3 Base metal with Fy equal to or From internal dis-
greater than 620 MPa and weld metal continuities in filler
in or adjacent to complete-joint- metal or
penetration groove welded splices
discontinuities along
with welds ground essentially parallel
to the direction of stress at transitions the fusion boundary
in width made on a radius of not less than
600 mm with the point of tangency at the B 120 x 108 110
end of the groove weld and with weld
sound- ness established by
radiographic or ultrasonic inspection
in accordance with the requirements of
subclauses 6.12 or 6.13 of AWS
D1.1/D1.1M.

5.4 Weld metal and base metal in or From surface dis-

adjacent to the toe of complete-joint- continuity at toe of
penetration groove welds in T or
weld extending into
corner joints or splices, with or
without transitions in thickness having base metal or into
weld metal.
slopes no greater than 1:21/2, when
weld reinforcement is not removed and C 44 x 108 69
with weld soundness established by
radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in
accordance with the requirements of
subclauses 6.12 or 6.13 of AWS
D1.1/D1.1M.

SBC 306-CR-18 223

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Illustrative Typical Examples

SECTION 5 – WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS
5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

SBC 306-CR-18 224

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Threshold
Stress Constant Potential Crack
Description FTH
Category Cf Initiation Point
(MPa)
SECTION 5 – WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS (continued)
5.5 Base metal and weld metal at Initiating from
transverse end connections of tension- geometrical
loaded plate elements using partial- discontinuity at toe of
joint-penetration groove welds in butt weld extending into
or T- or corner joints, with reinforcing
base metal.
or contouring fillets, FSR shall be the
smaller of the toe crack or root crack
allowable stress range.
Crack initiating from weld toe: C 44 x 108 69
Initiating at weld
root subject to
Crack initiating from weld root: C’ Eqn. (C-4) None provided tension extending
into and through
weld.
5.6 Base metal and weld metal at Initiating from
transverse end connections of geometrical
tension-loaded plate elements using a discontinuity at toe of
pair of fillet welds on opposite sides of weld extending into
the plate. FSR shall be the smaller of the
base metal.
toe crack or root crack allowable stress
range.
Crack initiating from weld toe: C 44 x 108 69
Initiating at weld
root subject to
Crack initiating from weld root: C’’ Eqn.(C-6) None provided tension extending
into and through
weld
5.7 Base metal of tension loaded plate From geometrical
elements and on girders and rolled discontinuity at toe
beam webs or flanges at toe of C 44 x 108 69 of fillet extending
transverse fillet welds adjacent to into base metal
welded transverse stiffeners.

SBC 306-CR-18 225

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Illustrative Typical Examples

SECTION 5 – WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS (continued)
5.5

5.6

5.7

SBC 306-CR-18 226

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Threshold
Stress Constant Potential Crack
Description FTH
Category Cf Initiation Point
(MPa)
SECTION 6 – BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS
6.1 Base metal at details attached by Near point of
complete-joint-penetration groove welds tangency of radius at
subject to longitudinal loading only edge of member
when the detail embodies a transition
radius, R, with the weld termination
ground smooth and with weld soundness
established by radiographic or
ultrasonic inspection in accordance with
the requirements of subclauses 6.12 or
6.13 of AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

R ≥ 600 mm B 120 x 108 110

600 mm > R ≥ 150 mm C 44 x 10 8 69
150 mm > R ≥ 50 mm D 22 x 108 48
50 mm > R E 11 x 108 31

6.2 Base metal at details of equal

thickness attached by complete-joint-
penetration groove welds subject to
transverse loading with or without
longitudinal loading when the detail
embodies a transition radius, R, with the
weld termination ground smooth and with
weld soundness established by
radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in
accordance with the requirements of
subclauses 6.12 or 6.13 of AWS
D1.1/D1.1M: When weld reinforcement is
removed:

R ≥ 600 mm B 120 x 108 110

600 mm > R ≥ 150 mm C 44 x 10 8 69
Near points of
150 mm > R ≥ 50 mm D 22 x 108 48 tangency of radius or
50 mm > R E 11 x 108 31 in the weld or at
When weld reinforcement is not fusion boundary or
C 44 x 108 69 member or attachment
removed: R ≥ 600 mm
600 mm > R ≥ 150 mm C 44 x 108 69
At toe of the weld
150 mm > R ≥ 50 mm D 22 x 108 48
either along edge of
50 mm > R member or the
E 11 x 108 31 attachment

SBC 306-CR-18 227

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Illustrative Typical Examples

SECTION 6 – BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS
6.1

6.2

SBC 306-CR-18 228

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Threshold
Stress Constant Potential Crack
Description FTH
Category Cf Initiation Point
(MPa)
SECTION 6 – BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS (cont’d)

6.3 Base metal at details of unequal

thickness attached by complete-joint-
penetration groove welds subject to
transverse loading with or without
longitudinal loading when the detail
embodies a transition radius, R, with
the weld termination ground smooth
and with weld soundness established
by radiographic or ultrasonic
inspection in accordance with the
requirements of subclauses 6.12 or
6.13 of AWS D1.1/D1.1M. When
weld reinforcement is removed:
R > 50 mm D 22 x 108 48 At toe of weld along
edge of thinner
material In weld
R ≤ 50 mm E 11 x 108 31
termination in small
radius.
At toe of weld along
When reinforcement is not removed:
E 11 x 108 31 edge of thinner
Any radius
material
6.4 Base metal subject to longitudinal Initiating in base
stress at transverse members, with or metal at the weld
without transverse stress, attached by termination or at
fillet or partial-joint-penetration the toe of the weld
groove welds parallel to direction of extending into the
stress when the detail embodies a base metal
transition radius, R, with weld
termination ground smooth:
R > 50 mm D 22 x 108 48
R ≤ 50 mm E 11 x 10 8 31

SBC 306-CR-18 229

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Illustrative Typical Examples

SECTION 6 – BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS
6.3

6.4

SBC 306-CR-18 230

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Threshold
Stress Constant Potential Crack
Description FTH
Category Cf Initiation Point
(MPa)
SECTION 7 – BASE METAL AT SHORT ATTACHMENTS1
7.1 Base metal subject to longitudinal Initiating in base
loading at details with welds parallel or metal at the weld
transverse to the direction of stress termination or at the
where the detail embodies no toe of the weld
transition radius and with detail length extending into the
in direction of stress, a, and thickness base metal.
of the attachment, b:
a < 50 mm C 44 x 108 69
50 mm ≤ a ≤ lesser of 12b or 100 mm D 22 x 10 8 48
a > 100 mm
E 11 x 108 31
when b > 20 mm
a > lesser of 12b or 100 mm
E’ 3.9 x 108 18
when b ≤ 20 mm
7.2 Base metal subject to longitudinal Initiating in base
stress at details attached by fillet or metal at the weld
partial-joint-penetration groove welds, termination,
with or without transverse load on extending into the
detail, when the detail embodies a base metal
transition radius, R, with weld
termination ground smooth:
R > 50 mm D 22 x 108 48
R ≤ 50 mm E 11 x 108 31
1
“Attachment” as used herein is defined as any steel detail welded to a member by its mere presence and independent
of its loading, causes a discontinuity in the stress flow in the member and thus reduces the fatigue resistance.

SBC 306-CR-18 231

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Illustrative Typical Examples

SECTION 7 – BASE METAL AT SHORT ATTACHMENTS1
7.1

7.2

SBC 306-CR-18 232

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Threshold
Stress Constant Potential Crack
Description FTH
Category Cf Initiation Point
(MPa)
SECTION 8 - MISCELLANEOUS
8.1 Base metal at steel headed stud
At toe of weld in
anchors attached by fillet or C 44 x 108 69
base metal
automatic stud welding.
Initiating at the root
8.2 Shear on throat of continuous or
150 x 1010 of the fillet weld,
intermittent longitudinal or transverse F 55
Eqn. (C-2) extending into the
fillet welds.
weld
Initiating in the base
metal at the end of
8.3 Base metal at plug or slot welds. E 120 x 108 31 the plug or slot
weld, extending into
the base metal
Initiating in the
150 x 1010 weld at the faying
8.4 Shear on plug or slot welds. F 55
Eqn. (C-2) surface, extending
into the weld
8.5 Snug-tightened high-strength bolts,
common bolts, threaded anchor rods, Initiating at the root
and hanger rods with cut, ground or of the threads,
G 3.9 x 108 48
rolled threads. Stress range on tensile extending into the
stress area due to live load plus prying fastener
action when applicable.

SBC 306-CR-18 233

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

TABLE C-1 (CONTINUED): FATIGUE DESIGN PARAMETERS

Illustrative Typical Examples

SECTION 8 - MISCELLANEOUS

8.1

8.2

8.3

8.4

8.5

SBC 306-CR-18 234

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

FIGURE CC-1. FATIGUE RESISTANCE CURVES.

SBC 306-CR-18 235

APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 236

APPENDIX D —STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS

APPENDIX D—STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS

alternative material or method, as permitted by the

This appendix provides criteria for the design and
applicable Saudi building code.
evaluation of structural steel components, systems
and frames for fire conditions. These criteria Structural design for fire conditions using Section
provide for the determination of the heat input, D.2 shall be performed using the load and resistance
thermal expansion and degradation in mechanical factor design method in accordance with the
properties of materials at elevated temperatures that provisions of Section 2.3.3 .
cause progressive decrease in strength and stiffness
D.1.3 Design by Qualification Testing. The
of structural components and systems at elevated
qualification testing methods in Section D.3 are
temperatures.
permitted to be used to document the fire resistance
The appendix is organized as follows: of steel framing subject to the standardized fire
testing protocols required by the applicable Saudi
D.1 — General Provisions
building code.
D.2 — Structural Design for Fire Conditions
D.1.4 Load Combinations and Required
by Analysis
Strength. The required strength of the structure
D.3 — Design by Qualification Testing and its elements shall be determined from the
gravity load combination as follows:
[0.9 or 1.2] 𝐷 + 𝑇 + 0.5𝐿 (D-1)
D.1— General Provisions
where
The methods contained in this appendix provide
regulatory evidence of compliance in accordance D = nominal dead load
with the design applications outlined in this section. L = nominal occupancy live load
D.1.1 Performance Objective. Structural T = nominal forces and deformations due to
components, members and building frame systems
the design-basis fire defined in Section
shall be designed so as to maintain their load-
D.2.1
bearing function during the design-basis fire and to
satisfy other performance requirements specified A notional load, Ni = 0.002Yi, as defined in Section
for the building occupancy. 3.2.2 , where Ni = notional load applied at framing
level i and Yi = gravity load from combination D.1
Deformation criteria shall be applied where the
acting on framing level i, shall be applied in
means of providing structural fire resistance, or the
combination with the loads stipulated in Eq. (D-1).
design criteria for fire barriers, requires
consideration of the deformation of the load-
carrying structure.
D.2— Structural Design for Fire
Within the compartment of fire origin, forces and Conditions by Analysis
deformations from the design-basis fire shall not
cause a breach of horizontal or vertical. It is permitted to design structural members,
components and building frames for elevated
D.1.2 Design by Engineering Analysis. The temperatures in accordance with the requirements
analysis methods in Section D.2 are permitted to be of this section.
used to document the anticipated performance of
steel framing when subjected to design-basis fire D.2.1 Design-Basis Fire. A design-basis fire
scenarios. Methods in Section D.2 provide evidence shall be identified to describe the heating conditions
of compliance with performance objectives for the structure. These heating conditions shall
established in Section D.1.1. relate to the fuel commodities and compartment
characteristics present in the assumed fire area. The
The analysis methods in Section D.2 are permitted fuel load density based on the occupancy of the
to be used to demonstrate an equivalency for an

SBC 306-CR-18 237

APPENDIX D —STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS

space shall be considered when determining the D.2.2 Temperatures in Structural Systems
total fuel load. Heating conditions shall be specified under Fire Conditions. Temperatures within
either in terms of a heat flux or temperature of the structural members, components and frames due to
upper gas layer created by the fire. The variation of the heating conditions posed by the design-basis
the heating conditions with time shall be fire shall be determined by a heat transfer analysis.
determined for the duration of the fire.
D.2.3 Material Strengths at Elevated
When the analysis methods in this Section are used Temperatures. Material properties at elevated
to demonstrate an equivalency as an alternative temperatures shall be determined from test data. In
material or method as permitted by the applicable the absence of such data, it is permitted to use the
Saudi building code, the design-basis fire shall be material properties stipulated in this section. These
determined in accordance with ASTM E119. relationships do not apply for steels with yield
strengths in excess of 450 MPa or concretes with
D2.1.1 Localized Fire. Where the heat release
specified compression strength in excess of 55
rate from the fire is insufficient to cause flashover,
MPa.
a localized fire exposure shall be assumed. In such
cases, the fuel composition, arrangement of the fuel D2.3.1 Thermal Elongation. The coefficients of
array and floor area occupied by the fuel shall be expansion shall be taken as follows:
used to determine the radiant heat flux from the
(a) For structural and reinforcing steels: For
flame and smoke plume to the structure.
calculations at temperatures above 65 °C, the
D2.1.2 Post-Flashover Compartment Fires. coefficient of thermal expansion shall be 1.4
Where the heat release rate from the fire is sufficient x10-5/oC.
to cause flashover, a post-flashover compartment (b) For normal weight concrete: For calculations at
fire shall be assumed. The determination of the temperatures above 65 °C, the coefficient of
temperature versus time profile resulting from the thermal expansion shall be 1.8 x 10-5/oC.
fire shall include fuel load, ventilation
(c) For lightweight concrete: For calculations at
characteristics of the space (natural and
temperatures above 65 °C, the coefficient of
mechanical), compartment dimensions and thermal
thermal expansion shall be 7.9 x10-6/oC.
characteristics of the compartment boundary.
D2.3.2 Mechanical Properties at Elevated
The fire duration in a particular area shall be
Temperatures. The deterioration in strength and
determined by considering the total combustible
stiffness of structural members, components and
mass, or fuel load available in the space. In the case
systems shall be taken into account in the structural
of either a localized fire or a post-flashover
analysis of the frame. The values Fy (T), Fp (T), Fu
compartment fire, the fire duration shall be
(T), E(T), G(T), fc’(T), Ec (T) and cu(T) at elevated
determined as the total combustible mass divided
temperature to be used in structural analysis,
by the mass loss rate.
expressed as the ratio with respect to the property at
D2.1.3 Exterior Fires. The exposure of exterior ambient, assumed to be 20 °C, shall be defined as
structure to flames projecting from windows or in TABLE D-1 and TABLE D-2. Fp(T) is the
other wall openings as a result of a post-flashover proportional limit at elevated temperatures, which
compartment fire shall be considered along with the is calculated as a ratio to yield strength as specified
radiation from the interior fire through the opening. in TABLE D-1. It is permitted to interpolate
The shape and length of the flame projection shall between these values.
be used along with the distance between the flame
and the exterior steelwork to determine the heat flux For lightweight concrete, values of cu shall be
to the steel. The method identified in Section D2.1.2 obtained from tests.
shall be used for describing the characteristics of the D.2.4 Structural Design Requirements
interior compartment fire.
D2.4.1 General Structural Integrity. The
D2.1.4 Active Fire Protection Systems. The structural frame shall be capable of providing
effects of active fire protection systems shall be adequate strength and deformation capacity to
considered when describing the design-basis fire. withstand, as a system, the structural actions
Where automatic smoke and heat vents are installed developed during the fire within the prescribed
in non-sprinklered spaces, the resulting smoke limits of deformation. The structural system shall
temperature shall be determined from calculation.

SBC 306-CR-18 238

APPENDIX D —STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS

be designed to sustain local damage with the represent the proposed structural design. Material
structural system, as a whole, remaining stable. properties shall be defined as per Section D.2.3.
Continuous load paths shall be provided to transfer The resulting analysis shall consider all relevant
all forces from the exposed region to the final point limit states, such as excessive deflections,
of resistance. The foundation shall be designed to connection fractures, and overall or local buckling.
resist the forces and to accommodate the
D.2.4.3.2 Simple Methods of Analysis. The
deformations developed during the design- basis
methods of analysis in this section are permitted to
fire.
be used for the evaluation of the performance of
D2.4.2 Strength Requirements and Deformation individual members at elevated temperatures
Limits. Conformance of the structural system to during exposure to fire.
these requirements shall be demonstrated by
The support and restraint conditions (forces,
constructing a mathematical model of the structure
moments and boundary conditions) applicable at
based on principles of structural mechanics and
normal temperatures are permitted to be assumed to
evaluating this model for the internal forces and
remain unchanged throughout the fire exposure.
deformations in the members of the structure
developed by the temperatures from the design- For steel temperatures less than or equal to 200 oC,
basis fire. the member and connection design strengths shall
be determined without consideration of temperature
Individual members shall be provided with
effects.
adequate strength to resist the shears, axial forces
and moments determined in accordance with these
User Note: At temperatures below 200 C, the
provisions.
degradation in steel properties need not be
Connections shall develop the strength of the considered in calculating member strengths for
connected members or the forces indicated above. the simple method of analysis; however, forces
Where the means of providing fire resistance and deformations induced by elevated
requires the consideration of deformation criteria, temperatures must be considered.
the deformation of the structural system, or
members thereof, under the design-basis fire shall 1. Tension Members
not exceed the prescribed limits.
It is permitted to model the thermal response of a
D2.4.3 Methods of Analysis tension element using a one- dimensional heat
transfer equation with heat input as determined by
D.2.4.3.1 Advanced Methods of Analysis. The
methods of analysis in this section are permitted for the design-basis fire defined in Section D.2.1.
the design of all steel building structures for fire The design strength of a tension member shall be
conditions. The design-basis fire exposure shall be determined using the provisions of Chapter 4, with
that determined in Section D.2.1. The analysis shall steel properties as stipulated in Section D.2.3 and
include both a thermal response and the mechanical assuming a uniform temperature over the cross
response to the design-basis fire. section using the temperature equal to the
The thermal response shall produce a temperature maximum steel temperature.
field in each structural element as a result of the 2. Compression Members
design-basis fire and shall incorporate temperature-
It is permitted to model the thermal response of a
dependent thermal properties of the structural
compression element using a one-dimensional heat
elements and fire-resistive materials, as per Section
transfer equation with heat input as determined by
D.2.2.
the design-basis fire defined in Section D.2.1.
The mechanical response results in forces and
The design strength of a compression member shall
deformations in the structural system subjected to
be determined using the provisions of Chapter 5
the thermal response calculated from the design-
with steel properties as stipulated in Section D2.3.2
basis fire. The mechanical response shall take into
and Eq. (D-2) used in lieu of Eqs. (5-2) and (5-3) in
account explicitly the deterioration in strength and
Chapter 5 to calculate the nominal compressive
stiffness with increasing temperature, the effects of
strength for flexural buckling:
thermal expansions, and large deformations.
Boundary conditions and connection fixity must

SBC 306-CR-18 239

APPENDIX D —STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS

𝐹 (𝑇) calculated in accordance with TABLE D-1, and

√ 𝑦
𝐹𝑒 (𝑇) other terms are as defined in Chapter 6.
𝐹𝑐𝑟 (𝑇) = [0.42 ] 𝐹𝑦 (𝑇) (D-2)
4. Composite Floor Members
It is permitted to model the thermal response of
Where Fy (T) is the yield stress at elevated
flexural elements supporting a concrete slab using a
temperature and Fe (T) is the critical elastic
one-dimensional heat transfer equation to calculate
buckling stress calculated from Eq. (5-4) in Chapter
bottom flange temperature. That temperature shall
5 with the elastic modulus E(T) at elevated
be taken as constant between the bottom flange and
temperature. Fy (T) and E(T) are obtained using
mid-depth of the web and shall decrease linearly by
coefficients from TABLE D-1.
no more than 25% from the mid-depth of the web
3. Flexural Members to the top flange of the beam.
It is permitted to model the thermal response of The design strength of a composite flexural member
flexural elements using a one-dimensional heat shall be determined using the provisions of Chapter
transfer equation to calculate bottom flange 9, with reduced yield stresses in the steel consistent
temperature and to assume that this bottom flange with the temperature variation described under
temperature is constant over the depth of the thermal response.
member.
D2.4.4 Design Strength. The design strength shall
The design strength of a flexural member shall be be determined as in Section 2.3.3 in Chapter 2. The
determined using the provisions of Chapter 6 with nominal strength, Rn, shall be calculated using
steel properties as stipulated in Section D2.3.2 and material properties, as provided in Section D.2.3, at
Eqs. (D-3) through (D-10) used in lieu of Eqs. (6-3) the temperature developed by the design-basis fire,
through (6-7) in CHAPTER 6 to calculate the and as stipulated in this appendix.
nominal flexural strength for lateral-torsional
buckling of laterally unbraced doubly symmetric
members: D.3— Design by Qualification Testing
(a) When 𝐿𝑏 ≤ 𝐿𝑟 (𝑇) D.3.1 Qualification Standards. Structural
𝑀𝑛 (𝑇) = 𝐶𝑏 [𝑀𝑟 (𝑇) + {𝑀𝑝 (𝑇) − members and components in steel buildings shall be
𝐿
𝑀𝑟 (𝑇)}[1 − 𝑏 ]𝐶𝑥
(D-3) qualified for the rating period in conformance with
𝐿𝑟 (𝑇) ASTM E119. Demonstration of compliance with
(d) When 𝐿𝑏 > 𝐿𝑟 (𝑇) these requirements using the procedures specified
𝑀𝑛 (𝑇) = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 (𝑇)𝑆𝑥 (D-4) for steel construction in Chapter 5 of
SEI/ASCE/SFPE Standard 29-05, Standard
where Calculation Methods for Structural Fire
Protection, is permitted.
𝐶𝑏 𝜋2 𝐸(𝑇) 𝐽𝑐 𝐿
𝐹𝑐𝑟 (𝑇) = 𝐿 √1 + 0.078 𝑆 ( 𝑏 )2 (D-5)
( 𝑏 )2
𝑟𝑡𝑠
𝑥 ℎ𝑜 𝑟𝑡𝑠 D.3.2 Restrained Construction. For floor and
roof assemblies and individual beams in buildings,
𝐸(𝑇)
𝐿𝑟 (𝑇) = 1.95𝑟𝑡𝑠 √𝐴 + √(𝐴)2 + 6.76(𝐵)2 (D-6) a restrained condition exists when the surrounding
𝐹𝐿 (𝑇)
or supporting structure is capable of resisting forces
Where, and accommodating deformations caused by
𝐽𝑐 thermal expansion throughout the range of
𝐴= anticipated elevated temperatures.
𝑆𝑥 ℎ𝑜
𝐹𝐿 (𝑇) Steel beams, girders and frames supporting
𝐵=
𝐸(𝑇) concrete slabs that are welded or bolted to integral
𝑀𝑟 (𝑇) = 𝑆𝑥 𝐹𝐿 (𝑇) (D-7) framing members shall be considered restrained
𝐹𝐿 (𝑇) = 𝐹𝑦 (𝑘𝑝 − 0.3𝑘𝑦 ) (D-8) construction.
𝑀𝑝 (𝑇) = 𝑍𝑥 𝐹𝑦 (𝑇) (D-9) D.3.3 Unrestrained Construction. Steel beams,
𝑇 girders and frames that do not support a concrete
𝑐𝑥 = 0.6 + ≤ 3.0 where T is in C° (D-10)
250
slab shall be considered unrestrained unless the
The material properties at elevated temperatures, members are bolted or welded to surrounding
𝐸(𝑇) and 𝐹𝑦 (𝑇), and the kp and ky coefficients are construction that has been specifically designed and
detailed to resist effects of elevated temperatures.

SBC 306-CR-18 240

APPENDIX D —STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS

A steel member bearing on a wall in a single span

or at the end span of multiple spans shall be
considered unrestrained unless the wall has been
designed and detailed to resist effects of thermal
expansion.

SBC 306-CR-18 241

APPENDIX D —STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS

BIBLIOGRAPHY Culver, C.G. (1978), “Characteristics of Fire Loads

in Office Buildings,” Fire Technology, Vol. 1,491,
The following references provide further
pp. 51–60.
information on key issues related to fire-resistant
design of steel building systems and components, Huang, Z., Burgess, I.W. and Plank, R.J. (2000),
and are representative of the extensive literature on “Three-Dimensional Analysis of Composite Steel-
the topic. The references were selected because they Framed Buildings in Fire,” Journal of Structural
are archival in nature or otherwise easily accessible Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 126, No. 3, pp. 389–397.
by engineers seeking to design fire-resistance into Jeanes, D.C. (1985), “Application of the Computer
building structures. in Modeling Fire Endurance of Structural Steel
AISI (1980), Designing Fire Protection for Steel Floor Systems,” Fire Safety Journal, Vol. 9, pp.
Columns, American Iron and Steel Institute, 119–135.
Washington, DC. Kruppa, J. (2000), “Recent Developments in Fire
Bailey, C.G. (2000), “The Influence of the Thermal Design,” Progress in Structures Engineering and
Expansion of Beams on the Structural Behavior of Materials, Vol. 2, No. 1, pp. 6–15.
Columns in Steel-Framed Structures During a Lane, B. (2000), “Performance-Based Design for
Fire,” Engineering Structures, Vol. 22, No. 7, pp. Fire Resistance,” Modern Steel Construction,
755–768. AISC, December, pp. 54–61.
Bennetts, I.D. and Thomas, I.R. (2002), “Design of Lawson, R.M. (2001), “Fire Engineering Design of
Steel Structures under Fire Conditions,” Steel and Composite Buildings,”Journal of
Progress in Structural Engineering and Materials, Constructional Steel Research, Vol. 57, pp. 1,233–
Vol. 4, No. 1, pp. 6–17. 1,247.
Boring, D.F., Spence, J.C. and Wells, W.G. (1981), Lie, T.T. (1978), “Fire Resistance of Structural
Fire Protection Through Modern Building Codes, Steel,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 15, No. 4,
5th Ed., American Iron and Steel Institute, pp. 116–125.
Washington, DC. Lie, T.T. and Almand, K.H. (1990), “A Method to
Brozzetti, J., Law, M., Pettersson, O. and Predict the Fire Resistance of Steel Building
Witteveen, J. (1983), “Safety Concepts and Design Columns,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 27, pp.
for Fire Resistance of Steel Structures,” IABSE 158–167.
Surveys S-22/83, IABSE Periodica 1/1983, ETH- Magnusson, S.E. and Thelandersson, S. (1974), “A
Honggerberg, Zurich, Switzerland. Discussion of Compartment Fires,” Fire
Chalk, P.L. and Corotis, R.B. (1980), “Probability Technology, Vol. 10, No. 4, pp. 228–246.
Model for Design Live Loads,” Journal of the Milke, J.A. (1985), “Overview of Existing
Structures Division, ASCE, Vol. 106, No. ST10, pp. Analytical Methods for the Determination of Fire
2,017–2,033. Resistance,” Fire Technology, Vol. 21, No. 1, pp.
Chan, S.L. and Chan, B.H.M. (2001), “Refined 59–65.
Plastic Hinge Analysis of Steel Frames under Fire,” Milke, J.A. (1992), “Software Review:
Steel and Composite Structures, Vol. 1, No. 1, pp. Temperature Analysis of Structures Exposed to
111–130. Fire,” Fire Technology, Vol. 28, No. 2, pp. 184–
CIB W14 (1983), “A Conceptual Approach 189.
Towards a Probability Based Design Guide on Newman, G. (1999), “The Cardington Fire Tests,”
Structural Fire Safety,” Fire Safety Journal, Vol. 6, Proceedings of the North American Steel
No. 1, pp. 1–79. Construction Conference, Toronto, Canada, AISC,
CIB W14 (2001), “Rational Safety Engineering Chicago, IL, pp. 28.1–28.22.
Approach to Fire Resistance of Buildings,” CIB Nwosu, D.I. and Kodur, V.K.R. (1999), “Behavior
Report No. 269, International Council for Research of Steel Frames Under Fire Conditions,”Canadian
and Innovation in Building and Construction, Journal of Civil Engineering, Vol. 26, pp. 156–167.
Rotterdam, the Netherlands.
Sakumoto, Y. (1992), “High-Temperature
Properties of Fire-Resistant Steel for

SBC 306-CR-18 242

APPENDIX D —STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS

Buildings,”Journal of Structural Engineering,

ASCE, Vol. 18, No. 2, pp. 392–407.
Sakumoto, Y. (1999), “Research on New Fire-
Protection Materials and Fire-Safe Design,”Journal
of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 125, No. 12,
pp. 1,415–1,422.
Toh, W.S., Tan, K.H. and Fung, T.C. (2001),
“Strength and Stability of Steel Frames in Fire:
Rankine Approach,” Journal of Structural
Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 127, No. 4, pp. 461–468.
Usmani, A.S., Rotter, J.M., Lamont, S., Sanad,
A.M. and Gillie, M. (2001), “Fundamental
Principles of Structural Behavior under Thermal
Effects,” Fire Safety Journal, Vol. 36, No. 8.
Wang, Y.C. and Moore, D.B. (1995), “Steel Frames
in Fire: Analysis,” Engineering Structures, Vol. 17,
No. 6, pp. 462–472.
Wang, Y.C. and Kodur, V.K.R. (2000), “Research
Toward Use of Unprotected Steel Structures,”
Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol.
120, No. 12, pp. 1,442–1,450.
Wang, Y.C. (2000), “An Analysis of the Global
Structural Behavior of the Cardington Steel-
Framed Building during the Two BRE Fire Tests,”
Engineering Structures, Vol. 22, pp. 401–412.

SBC 306-CR-18 243

APPENDIX D —STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS

TABLES AND FIGURES OF APPENDIX D

TABLE D-1: PROPERTIES OF STEEL AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURES

kE = E (T)/E
Steel Temperature, °C kp= Fp (T)/Fy ky = Fy (T)/Fy ku= Fu (T)/Fy
= G (T)/G
20 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.25
100 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.25
200 0.90 0.807 1.00 1.25
300 0.80 0.613 1.00 1.25
400 0.70 0.42 1.00 1.00
500 0.60 0.36 0.78 0.78
600 0.31 0.18 0.47 0.47
700 0.13 0.075 0.23 0.23
800 0.09 0.05 0.11 0.11
900 0.0675 0.0375 0.06 0.06
1000 0.045 0.025 0.04 0.04
1100 0.0225 0.0125 0.02 0.02
1200 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

TABLE D-2: PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURES

Concrete kc = fc’ (T )/fc’

cu (T ), % Normal
Temperature Normal weight Lightweight
Ec (T )/Ec weight concrete
°C concrete concrete
20 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.25
100 1.00 1.00 0.92 0.40
200 0.95 1.00 0.76 0.55
300 0.85 1.00 0.59 0.70
400 0.75 0.88 0.43 1.0
500 0.60 0.76 0.26 1.5
600 0.45 0.64 0.14 2.5
700 0.30 0.52 0.083 2.5
800 0.15 0.40 0.067 2.5
900 0.08 0.28 0.050 2.5
1000 0.04 0.16 0.033 2.5
1100 0.01 0.04 0.017 2.5
1200 0.00 0.00 0.000 0.00

TABLE CD-1: GUIDELINES FOR ESTIMATING F

Type of Assembly F
Column, exposed on all sides 0.7
Floor beam: Embedded in concrete floor slab, with only bottom flange of beam exposed to
0.5
fire
Floor beam, with concrete slab resting on top flange of beam
Flange width-to-beam depth ratio ≥ 0.5 0.5
Flange width-to-beam depth ratio < 0.5 0.7
Box girder and lattice girder 0.7

SBC 306-CR-18 244

APPENDIX D —STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 245

APPENDIX E —STABILITY BRACING FOR COLUMNS AND BEAMS

APPENDIX E—Stability Bracing for Columns and Beams

A relative brace controls the movement of the

This appendix addresses the minimum strength and
stiffness necessary to provide a braced point in a braced point with respect to adjacent braced
column, beam or beam-column. points. A nodal brace controls the movement at
the braced point without direct interaction with
The appendix is organized as follows: adjacent braced points. A continuous bracing
E.1 — General Provisions system consists of bracing that is attached along
the entire member length; however, nodal
E.2 — Column Bracing bracing systems with a regular spacing can also
E.3 — Beam Bracing be modeled as a continuous system.

E.4 — Beam-Column Bracing The design strength and stiffness of the bracing
members and connections shall equal or exceed the
required strength and stiffness, respectively, unless
User Note: The stability requirements for analysis indicates that smaller values are justified.
braced-frame systems are provided in Chapter A second-order analysis that includes the initial
3. The provisions in this appendix apply to out-of-straightness of the member to obtain brace
bracing that is provided to stabilize individual strength and stiffness requirements is permitted in
columns, beams and beam-columns. lieu of the requirements of this appendix.

E.1— General Provisions E.2— Column Bracing

Columns with end and intermediate braced points It is permitted to brace an individual column at end
designed to meet the requirements in Section E.2 and intermediate points along the length using
are permitted to be designed based on the unbraced either relative or nodal bracing.
length, L, between the braced points with an
effective length factor, K= 1.0. Beams with
intermediate braced points designed to meet the E.2.1 Relative Bracing. The required strength is
requirements in Section E.3 are permitted to be 𝑃𝑟𝑏 = 0.004𝑃𝑟 (E-1)
designed based on the unbraced length, Lb, between
the braced points. The required stiffness is
1 2𝑃𝑟
When bracing is perpendicular to the members to 𝛽𝑏𝑟 = ( ) (E-2)
be braced, the equations in Sections E.2 and E.3 𝜑 𝐿𝑏
shall be used directly. When bracing is oriented at where
an angle to the member to be braced, these
equations shall be adjusted for the angle of 𝜑 = 0.75
inclination. The evaluation of the stiffness furnished Lb = unbraced length, mm
by a brace shall include its member and geometric
properties, as well as the effects of connections and Pr = required strength in axial compression, N
anchoring details.

User Note: In this appendix, relative and nodal E.2.2 Nodal Bracing. The required strength is
bracing systems are addressed for columns and
𝑃𝑟𝑏 = 0.01𝑃𝑟 (E-3)
for beams with lateral bracing. For beams with
torsional bracing, nodal and continuous bracing The required stiffness is
systems are addressed. 1 8𝑃𝑟
𝛽𝑏𝑟 = ( ) (E-4)
𝜑 𝐿𝑏

SBC 306-CR-18 246

APPENDIX E —STABILITY BRACING FOR COLUMNS AND BEAMS

= 2.0 for the brace closest to the inflection

point in a beam subject to double
User Note: These equations correspond to curvature bending
the assumption that nodal braces are
ho = distance between flange centroids, mm
equally spaced along the column.
Mr = required flexural strength, N-mm
where
𝜑 = 0.75
Lb E3.1.2 Nodal Bracing. The required strength is
= unbraced length, mm
𝑃𝑟𝑏 = 0.02𝑀𝑟 𝐶𝑑 /ℎ0 (E-7)
Pr = required strength in axial compression,
N The required stiffness is
In Eq. (E-4), Lb need not be taken less than the 1 10𝑀𝑟 𝐶𝑑
𝛽𝑏𝑟 = ( ) (E-8)
maximum effective length, KL, permitted for the 𝜑 𝐿𝑏 ℎ𝑜
column based upon the required axial strength, Pr . where
𝜑 = 0.75
E.3— Beam Bracing Mr = required flexural strength, N-mm
Beams and trusses shall be restrained against In Eq. (E-8), Lb need not be taken less than the
rotation about their longitudinal axis at points of maximum unbraced length permitted for the beam
support. When a braced point is assumed in the based upon the flexural required strength, Mr.
design between points of support, lateral bracing,
torsional bracing, or a combination of the two shall E.3.2 Torsional Bracing. It is permitted to
be provided to prevent the relative displacement attach torsional bracing at any cross-sectional
of the top and bottom flanges (i.e., to prevent location, and it need not be attached near the
twist). In members subject to double curvature compression flange.
bending, the inflection point shall not be considered
a braced point unless bracing is provided at that User Note: Torsional bracing can be provided
location. with a moment-connected beam, cross-frame,
or other diaphragm element.
E.3.1 Lateral Bracing. Lateral bracing shall be
attached at or near the beam compression flange,
E3.2.1 Nodal Bracing. The required strength is
except as follows:
0.024𝑀𝑟 𝐿
1. At the free end of a cantilevered beam, 𝑀𝑟𝑏 = (E-9)
lateral bracing shall be attached at or near 𝑛𝐶𝑏 𝐿𝑏
the top (tension) flange. The required stiffness of the brace is
2. For braced beams subject to double 𝛽𝑇
curvature bending, lateral bracing shall be 𝛽𝑇𝑏 =
𝛽 (E-10)
attached to both flanges at the braced point (1 − 𝑇 )
𝛽𝑠𝑒𝑐
nearest the inflection point.
where
E3.1.1 Relative Bracing. The required strength is
1 2.4𝐿𝑀𝑟2
𝑃𝑟𝑏 = 0.008𝑀𝑟 𝐶𝑑 /ℎ0 (E-5) 𝛽𝑇 = ( ) (E-11)
𝜑 𝑛𝐸𝐼𝑦 𝐶𝑏2
The required stiffness is 3
3.3𝐸 1.5 ℎ0 𝑡𝑤 𝑡𝑠𝑡 𝑏𝑠3
𝛽𝑠𝑒𝑐 = ( + ) (E-12)
ℎ0 12 12
1 4𝑀𝑟 𝐶𝑑
𝛽𝑏𝑟 = ( ) (E-6) Cb = modification factor defined in Chapter 6
𝜑 𝐿𝑏 ℎ𝑜
where E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 200 000
MPa
𝜑 = 0.75 4
Iy = out-of-plane moment of inertia, mm
Cd = 1.0 except in the following case;
L = length of span, mm

SBC 306-CR-18 247

APPENDIX E —STABILITY BRACING FOR COLUMNS AND BEAMS

bs = stiffener width for one-sided stiffeners, as specified in Section E.2, and the required
mm strength and stiffness for the flexure shall be
determined as specified in Section E.3. The values
= twice the individual stiffener width for so determined shall be combined as follows:
pairs of stiffeners, mm
(a) When relative lateral bracing is used, the
n = number of nodal braced points within the required strength shall be taken as the sum of
span the values determined using Eqs. (E-1) and
tw = thickness of beam web, mm (E-5), and the required stiffness shall be
taken as the sum of the values determined
tst = thickness of web stiffener, mm using Eqs. (E-2) and (E-6).
𝛽𝑇 = overall brace system stiffness, N-mm/rad (b) When nodal lateral bracing is used, the
required strength shall be taken as the sum of
𝛽𝑠𝑒𝑐 = web distortional stiffness, including the the values determined using Eqs. (E-3) and
effect of web transverse stiffeners, if (E-7), and the required stiffness shall be
any, N-mm/rad taken as the sum of the values determined
using Eqs. (E-4) and (E-8). In Eqs. (E-4) and
User Note: If sec  T, Eq. (E-10) is negative, (E-8), Lb for beam- columns shall be taken as
which indicates that torsional beam bracing the actual unbraced length; the provisions in
will not be effective due to inadequate web Sections E.2.2 and E3.1.2 that Lb need not be
distortional stiffness. taken less than the maximum permitted
effective length based upon Pr and Mr shall not
Mr = required flexural strength, N-mm
be applied.
When required, the web stiffener shall extend the (c) When torsional bracing is provided for flexure
full depth of the braced member and shall be in combination with relative or nodal bracing
attached to the flange if the torsional brace is also for the axial force, the required strength and
attached to the flange. Alternatively, it shall be stiffness shall be combined or distributed in a
permissible to stop the stiffener short by a distance manner that is consistent with the resistance
equal to 4tw from any beam flange that is not provided by the element(s) of the actual bracing
directly attached to the torsional brace. details.
In Eq. (E-9), Lb need not be taken less than the
maximum unbraced length permitted for the beam
based upon the required flexural strength, Mr.
E3.2.2 Continuous Bracing. For continuous
bracing, Eqs. (E-9) and (E-10) shall be used with
the following modifications:
1. L/n = 1.0
2. Lb shall be taken equal to the maximum
unbraced length permitted for the beam
based upon the required flexural strength,
Mr
3. The web distortional stiffness shall be
taken as:
3
3.3𝐸𝑡𝑤
𝛽𝑠𝑒𝑐 = (E-13)
12ℎ0

E.4— Beam-Column Bracing

For bracing of beam-columns, the required strength
and stiffness for the axial force shall be determined

SBC 306-CR-18 248

APPENDIX E —STABILITY BRACING FOR COLUMNS AND BEAMS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 249

APPENDIX F —ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF DESIGN FOR STABILITY

APPENDIX F—ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF DESIGN FOR

STABILITY

of Section 3.2.1 , except that the stiffness

This appendix presents alternatives to the direct
reduction indicated in Section 3.2.3 shall not be
analysis method of design for stability defined in
applied; the nominal stiffnesses of all structural
Chapter 3. The two alternative methods covered are
steel components shall be used. Notional loads
the effective length method and the first-order
shall be applied in the analysis in accordance with
analysis method.
Section 3.2.2.2 .
The appendix is organized as follows:
User Note: Since the condition specified in
F.1 — General Stability Requirements
Section 3.2.2.2 (4) will be satisfied in all cases
F.2 — Effective Length Method where the effective length method is
F.3 — First-Order Analysis Method applicable, the notional load need only be
applied in gravity-only load cases.

F.1— General Stability Requirements F.2.3 Design Strengths. The design strengths of
members and connections shall be calculated in
The general requirements of Section 3.1 shall accordance with the provisions of Chapter 4,
apply. As an alternative to the direct analysis Chapter 5, Chapter 6, Chapter 7, Chapter 8, Chapter
method (defined in Sections 3.1 and 3.2), it is 9, Chapter 10 and Chapter 11, as applicable.
permissible to design structures for stability in
The effective length factor, K, of members subject
accordance with either the effective length method,
specified in Section F.2, or the first-order analysis to compression shall be taken as specified in (a) or
method, specified in Section F.3, subject to the (b), below, as applicable.
limitations indicated in those sections. (a) In braced frame systems, shear wall
systems, and other structural systems where
lateral stability and resistance to lateral loads
F.2— Effective Length Method does not rely on the flexural stiffness of
columns, the effective length factor, K, of
F.2.1 Limitations. The use of the effective length members subject to compression shall be
method shall be limited to the following conditions: taken as 1.0, unless rational analysis indicates
1. The structure supports gravity loads that a lower value is appropriate.
primarily through nominally vertical (b) In moment frame systems and other structural
columns, walls or frames. systems in which the flexural stiffnesses of
2. The ratio of maximum second-order drift columns are considered to contribute to lateral
to maximum first-order drift (both stability and resistance to lateral loads, the
determined for LRFD load combinations, effective length factor, K, or elastic critical
based on nominal unreduced stiffnesses) in buckling stress, Fe, of those columns whose
all stories is equal to or less than 1.5. flexural stiffnesses are considered to contribute
to lateral stability and resistance to lateral
User Note: The ratio of second-order drift loads shall be determined from a sidesway
to first-order drift in a story may be taken buckling analysis of the structure; K shall be
taken as 1.0 for columns whose flexural
as the B2 multiplier, calculated as specified stiffnesses are not considered to contribute to
in Appendix G. lateral stability and resistance to lateral loads
such as leaning columns.
F.2.2 Required Strengths. The required
strengths of components shall be determined from Exception: It is permitted to use K 1.0 in the
structural analysis conforming to the requirements design of all columns if the ratio of maximum

SBC 306-CR-18 250

APPENDIX F —ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF DESIGN FOR STABILITY

second-order drift to maximum first-order drift all other deformations that contribute to
(both determined for LRFD load combinations, displacements of the structure.
based on nominal unreduced stiffnesses) in all
1. All load combinations shall include an
stories is equal to or less than 1.1.
additional lateral load, Ni, applied in
Bracing intended to define the unbraced lengths combination with other loads at each level
of members shall have sufficient stiffness and of the structure:
strength to control member movement at the braced
points. 𝑁𝑖 = 2.1(𝛥⁄𝐿)𝑌𝑖 ≥ 0.0042 𝑌𝑖 (F-2)
where
User Note: Methods of satisfying the bracing
requirement are provided in Appendix E. The Yi gravity load applied at level i from
requirements of Appendix E are not applicable the LRFD load combinations, as
to bracing that is included in the analysis of the applicable, N
overall structure as part of the overall force- /L maximum ratio of  to L for all stories in
resisting system. the structure
  first-order interstory drift due to the LRFD
F.3— First-Order Analysis Method combination, mm. Where varies over
the plan area of the structure, shall be
F.3.1 Limitations. The use of the first-order the average drift weighted in proportion to
analysis method shall be limited to the following vertical load or, alternatively, the
conditions: maximum drift.
1. The structure supports gravity loads L height of story, mm
primarily through nominally vertical
columns, walls or frames. The additional lateral load at any level, Ni, shall be
distributed over that level in the same manner as the
2. The ratio of maximum second-order drift gravity load at the level. The additional lateral loads
to maximum first-order drift (both shall be applied in the direction that provides the
determined for LRFD load combinations, greatest destabilizing effect.
based on nominal unreduced stiffnesses) in
all stories is equal to or less than 1.5. User Note: For most building structures, the
requirement regarding the direction of Ni may
User Note: The ratio of second-order drift to
be satisfied as follows: For load combinations
first-order drift in a story may be taken as the
that do not include lateral loading, consider two
B2 multiplier, calculated as specified in
alternative orthogonal directions for the
Appendix G. additional lateral load, in a positive and a
negative sense in each of the two directions,
3. The required axial compressive strengths same direction at all levels; for load
of all members whose flexural stiffnesses combinations that include lateral loading, apply
are considered to contribute to the lateral all the additional lateral loads in the direction
stability of the structure satisfy the of the resultant of all lateral loads in the
limitation: combination.
𝑃𝑟 ≤ 0.5𝑃𝑦 (F-1)
2. The nonsway amplification of beam-
where column moments shall be considered by
Pr required axial compressive strength applying the B1 amplifier of Appendix G to
under LRFD load combinations. the total member moments.

Py Fy A axial yield strength. F.3.3 Design Strengths. The design strengths of
members and connections shall be calculated in
F.3.2 Required Strength. The required accordance with the provisions of Chapters 4, 5, 6,
strengths of components shall be determined from 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11, as applicable.
a first-order analysis, with additional requirements
(1) and (2) below. The analysis shall consider The effective length factor, K, of all members shall
flexural, shear and axial member deformations, and be taken as unity.

SBC 306-CR-18 251

APPENDIX F —ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF DESIGN FOR STABILITY

Bracing intended to define the unbraced lengths

of members shall have sufficient stiffness and
strength to control member movement at the braced
points.

User Note: Methods of satisfying this

requirement are provided in Appendix E. The
requirements of Appendix E are not applicable
to bracing that is included in the analysis of
the overall structure as part of the overall
force-resisting system.

SBC 306-CR-18 252

APPENDIX F —ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF DESIGN FOR STABILITY

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 253

APPENDIX G —APPROXIMATE SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS

APPENDIX G—APPROXIMATE SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS

Mnt = first-order moment using LRFD load

This appendix provides, as an alternative to a
rigorous second-order analysis, a procedure to combinations, with the structure
account for second-order effects in structures by restrained against lateral translation.
amplifying the required strengths indicated by a Mr = required second-order flexural strength
first-order analysis. using LRFD load combinations
The appendix is organized as follows: Plt = first-order axial force using LRFD load
G.1 — Limitations combinations, due to lateral translation
of the structure only.
G.2 — Calculation Procedure
Pnt = first-order axial force using LRFD load
combinations, with the structure
G.1— Limitations restrained against lateral translation.
The use of this procedure is limited to structures that Pr = required second-order axial strength
support gravity loads primarily through nominally using LRFD load combinations.
vertical columns, walls or frames, except that it is
permissible to use the procedure specified for User Note: Eqs. (G-1) and (G-2) are applicable
determining P-effects for any individual to all members in all structures. It should be
compression member. noted that B1 values other than unity apply
only to moments in beam-columns; B2 applies
to moments and axial forces in components of
G.2— Calculation Procedure the lateral force resisting system (including
columns, beams, bracing members and
The required second-order flexural strength, Mr, shear walls).
and axial strength, Pr, of all members shall be
determined as follows: G.2.1 Multiplier B1 for P-Effects. The B1
𝑀𝑟 = 𝐵1  𝑀𝑛𝑡 + 𝐵2  𝑀𝑙𝑡 (G-1) multiplier for each member subject to
𝑃𝑟 = 𝑃𝑛𝑡 + 𝐵2  𝑃𝑙𝑡 (G-2) compression and each direction of bending of the
member is calculated as follows:
where
𝐶𝑚
B1 = multiplier to account for P-effects, 𝐵1 =   ≥  1 (G-3)
(1 − 𝑃𝑟 /𝑃𝑒1 )
determined for each member subject to
compression and flexure, and each where
direction of bending of the member in Cm coefficient assuming no lateral translation
accordance with Section G.2.1. B1 shall of the frame determined as follows:
be taken as 1.0 for members not subject
to compression. (a) For beam-columns not subject to transverse
loading between supports in the plane of
B2 = multiplier to account for P-effects, bending
determined for each story of the
𝐶𝑚 = 0.6 − 0.4(𝑀1 ⁄𝑀2 ) (G-4)
structure and each direction of lateral
translation of the story in accordance where M1 and M2, calculated from a first-order
with Section G.2.2. analysis, are the smaller and larger moments,
Mlt = first-order moment using LRFD load respectively, at the ends of that portion of the
member unbraced in the plane of bending under
combinations, due to lateral translation
consideration. M1/M2 is positive when the member
of the structure only.

SBC 306-CR-18 254

APPENDIX G —APPROXIMATE SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS

is bent in reverse curvature, and negative when Pe story = elastic critical buckling strength for the
bent in single curvature. story in the direction of translation being
(b) For beam-columns subject to transverse considered, N , determined by sidesway
loading between supports, the value of Cm buckling analysis or as:
shall be determined either by analysis or 𝐻𝐿
conservatively taken as 1.0 for all cases. 𝑃𝑒−𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑦 = 𝑅𝑀 (G-7)
𝛥𝐻
Pe1 = elastic critical buckling strength of the where
member in the plane of bending, calculated
based on the assumption of no lateral 𝑃𝑚𝑓
𝑅𝑀 = 1 − 0.15 (G-8)
translation at the member ends, N 𝑃𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑦
𝜋 2 𝐸𝐼 ∗ L height of story, mm
𝑃𝑒1 = (G-5)
(𝐾1 𝐿)2
Pmf total vertical load in columns in the story
where that are part of moment frames, if any, in
EI* flexural rigidity required to be used in the the direction of translation being
analysis considered (= 0 for braced frame
systems), N
= 0.8𝜏𝑏 𝐸𝐼 when used in the direct
H first-order interstory drift, in the
analysis method where b is as defined in
direction of translation being considered,
Chapter 3;
due to lateral forces, mm, computed
EI for the effective length and first-order using the stiffness required to be used in
analysis methods) the analysis. Where H varies over the
E modulus of elasticity of steel plan area of the structure, it shall be the
average drift weighted in proportion to
200000 MPa vertical load or, alternatively, the
maximum drift.
I moment of inertia in the plane of
bending, mm4 H story shear, in the direction of translation
being considered, produced by the lateral
L =length of member, mm
forces used to compute H , N
K1 effective length factor in the plane of
bending, calculated based on the User Note: H and H in Eq. (G-7) may be
assumption of no lateral translation at the based on any lateral loading that provides a
member ends, set equal to 1.0 unless representative value of story lateral stiffness,
analysis justifies a smaller value H/H.
It is permitted to use the first-order estimate of Pr
(i.e., 𝑃𝑟 = 𝑃𝑛𝑡 + 𝑃𝑙𝑡 ) in Eq. (G-3).
G.2.2 Multiplier B2 for P-Effects. The B2
multiplier for each story and each direction of lateral
translation is calculated as follows:
1
𝐵2 =
𝑃𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑦 (G-6)
1−
𝑃𝑒−𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑦
where
Pstory = total vertical load supported by the story
using LRFD load combinations, including
loads in columns that are not part of the
lateral force resisting system, N

SBC 306-CR-18 255

APPENDIX G —APPROXIMATE SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 256

REFERENCES

REFERENCES

AASHTO (2002), Standard Specifications for Institute, Farmington Hills, MI.

Highway Bridges, 17th Ed., American
ACI (2006), Code Requirements for Nuclear
Association of State Highway and
Safety-Related Concrete Structures
Transportation Officials, Washington, DC.
&Commentary, ACI 349-06, American
AASHTO (2010), LRFD Bridge Design Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI.
Specifications, 5th Ed., American
ACI (2006), Specifications for Tolerances for
Association of State Highway and
Concrete Construction and Materials, ACI
Transportation Officials, Washington, DC.
117-06, American Concrete Institute,
ACI (1997), Prediction of Creep, Shrinkage and Farmington Hills, MI.
Temperature Effects in Concrete Structures,
ACI (2008), Building Code Requirements for
ACI 209R-92, American Concrete
Structural Concrete, ACI 318-08 and ACI
Institute, Farmington Hills, MI.
318M-08, American Concrete Institute,
ACI (1999), “Details and Detailing of Concrete Farmington Hills, MI.
Reinforcement,” ACI 315-99, contained
AISC (1969), Specification for the Design,
within ACI Detailing Manual, SP-66(04),
Fabrication, and Erection of Structural
American Concrete Institute,
Steel for Buildings, American Institute of
FarmingtonHills, MI.
Steel Construction, Chicago, IL.
ACI (2001), Code Requirements for Nuclear AISC (1973), “Commentary on Highly
Safety Related Concrete Structures, ACI Restrained Welded Connections,”
349- 01, American Concrete Institute, Engineering Journal, American Institute of
Farmington Hills, MI. Steel Construction, Vol. 10, No. 3, 3rd
ACI (2002), Building Code Requirements for Quarter, pp. 61–73.
Structural Concrete, ACI 318-02 and ACI AISC (1975), Australian Standard AS1250,
318M-02, American Concrete Institute, Australian Institute of Steel Construction,
Farmington Hills, MI. Sydney, Australia.
ACI (2002), “Recommendations for the AISC (1978), Specification for the Design,
Design of Beam Column Joints in Fabrication, and Erection of Structural
Monolithic Concrete Structures,” ACI Steel for Buildings, American Institute of
352R-02, American Concrete Institute, Steel Construction, Chicago, IL.
Farmington Hills, MI.
AISC (1986), Load and Resistance Factor
ACI (2004a), Manual of Structural and Design Specification for Structural Steel
Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Buildings, American Institute of Steel
Structures, ACI 315R-04, contained within Construction, Chicago, IL.
ACI Detailing Manual, SP-66(04),
AmericanConcrete Institute, Farmington AISC (1989), Specification for Structural
Hills, MI. Steel Buildings—Allowable Stress Design
and Plastic Design, American Institute of
ACI (2004b) ACI Detailing Manual, ACI SP- Steel Construction, Chicago, IL.
66(04), American Concrete
Institute,Farmington Hills, MI. AISC (1993), Load and Resistance Factor
Design Specification for Structural Steel
ACI (2005), Specification for Structural Buildings, American Institute of Steel
Concrete, ACI 301-05, American Concrete Construction, Chicago, IL.

SBC 306-CR-18 257

REFERENCES

AISC (1997a), A Guide to Engineering and AISC (2006a), Seismic Design Manual,
Quality Criteria for Steel Structures, American Institute of Steel Construction,
American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL.
Chicago, IL.
AISC (2006b), Standard for Steel Building
AISC (1997b), “AISC Advisory Statement Structures, AISC 201-06, Certification
on Mechanical Properties Near the Fillet Program for Structural Steel Fabricators,
of Wide Flange Shapes and Interim American Institute of Steel Construction,
Recommendations, January 10, 1997,” Chicago, IL.
Modern Steel Construction, American
AISC (2010a), Code of Standard Practice for
Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago,
Steel Buildings and Bridges, AISC 303-10,
IL, February, p. 18.
American Institute of Steel Construction,
AISC (1997c), Seismic Provisions for Chicago, IL.
Structural Steel Buildings, April 15,
AISC (2010b), Seismic Provisions for
AmericanInstitute of Steel Construction,
Structural Steel Buildings, ANSI/AISC
Chicago, IL.
341-10, American Institute of Steel
AISC (2000a), Specification for the Design of Construction, Chicago, IL.
Steel Hollow Structural Sections, American
Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, AISC (2010c), Prequalified Connections for
IL. Special and Intermediate Steel Moment
Frames for Seismic Applications,
AISC (2000b), Load and Resistance Factor ANSI/AISC 358-10, American Institute of
Design Specification for Structural Steel Steel Construction, Chicago, IL.
Buildings, December 27, 1999, American
Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL. AISC (2010d) Design Guide 1, Base Plate and
Anchor Rod Design, 2nd Edition,
AISC (2002), Seismic Provisions for American Institute of Steel Construction,
Structural Steel Buildings, May 21, Chicago, IL
American Instituteof Steel Construction,
Chicago, IL. AISC (2012), “Specification for Safety-
Related Steel Strucutres for Nuclear
AISC (2003), “Load and Resistance Factored Facilities”, ANSI/AISC N690, American
Design of W-shapes Encased in Concrete” Institute of Steel Constuction, Chicago, IL.
Design Guide 6, American Institute of Steel
Construction, Chicago, IL. AISC-SSRC (2003a), “Basic Design for
Stability: Lecture 3—Frame Stability—
AISC (2005a), Specification for Structural Alignment Charts and Modifications,”
Steel Buildings, ANSI/AISC 360-05, American Institute of Steel Construction
American Institute of Steel Construction, and Structural Stability Research Council,
Chicago, IL. Chicago, IL.
AISC (2005b), Steel Construction Manual, AISC-SSRC (2003b), “Background and
13th Ed., American Institute of Steel Illustrative Examples on Proposed Direct
Construction, Chicago, IL. Analysis Method for Stability Design of
AISC (2005c), Seismic Provisions for Moment Frames,” Technical White Paper,
Structural Steel Buildings, ANSI/AISC AISC Technical Committee 10, AISC-
341-05, SSRC Ad Hoc Committee on Frame
American Institute of Steel Construction, Stability, American Institute of Steel
Chicago, IL. Construction, Chicago, IL.

AISC (2005d), Design Examples, V13.1, AISI (1969), Specification for the Design of
www.aisc.org. Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members,

SBC 306-CR-18 258

REFERENCES

American Iron and Steel Institute, Petroleum Institute, Washington, DC, July.
Washington, DC.
Arce, G. (2002), “Impact of Higher Strength
AISI (1970), “Interior Corrosion of Structural Steels on Local Buckling and Overstrength in
Steel Closed Sections,” Bulletin 18, EBFs,” Master’s Thesis, Department of Civil
February, American Iron and Steel Engineering, University of Texas at Austin,
Institute, Washington, DC. Austin, TX.
AISI (1979), Fire-Safe Structural Design A ASCE (1971), Plastic Design in Steel, A
Design Guide, American Iron and Steel Guide and a Commentary, ASCE Manuals
Institute, Washington, DC. and Reports on Engineering Practice No.
41, American Society of Civil Engineers,
AISI (2001), North American Specification for
New York, NY.
the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members, American Iron and Steel ASCE (1979), Structural Design of Tall Steel
Institute, Washington, DC. Buildings, American Society of Civil
Engineers, New York, NY.
AISI (2007), North American Specification for
the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural ASCE (1981), “Planning and Environmental
Members, ANSI/AISI Standard S100 2007, Criteria for Tall Buildings, A Monograph
Washington, DC. on Planning and Design of Tall
Buildings,” Vol. PC, Chapter PC-13,
AISI (2007), North American Specification for
American Society of Civil Engineers,
the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
New York, NY.
StructuralMembers, American Iron and
Steel Institute, Washington, DC. ASCE (1991a), Standard for the Structural
Design of Composite Slabs, ANSI/ASCE
Allan, R.N. and Fisher, J.W. (1968), “Bolted
3-91,American Society of Civil
Joints with Oversize and Slotted Holes”,
Engineers, Reston, VA.
Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE,
Vol. 94, No. ST9, September, pp. 2061– ASCE (1991b), Standard Practice for
2080. Construction and Inspection of
Composite Slabs, ANSI/ASCE 9-91,
Amrine, J.J. and Swanson, J.A. (2004), “Effects American Society of Civil Engineers,
of Variable Pretension on Bolted Reston, VA.
Connection Behavior,” Engineering
Journal, AISC, Vol. 41, No. 3, 3rd Quarter, ASCE (1994), “Guidelines for Design of
pp. 107–116. Joints between Steel Beams and
Ang, A.H-S. and Tang, H.T. (1984), Reinforced Concrete Columns,” Journal
Probability Concepts in Engineering of Structural Engineering, American
Planning and Design,Vol.II: Decision, Risk Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 120,
and Reliability, John Wiley & Sons Inc., No. 8, August, pp. 2330–2357, Reston,
New York, NY. VA.
Ang, K.M. and Morris, G.A. (1984), “Analysis ASCE (1999), Specification for Structural Steel
of Three-Dimensional Frames with Beams with Web Openings, ASCE/SEI 23-
Flexible Beam-Column Connections,” 97, American Society of Civil Engineers,
Canadian Journal of Civil Engineering, Reston, VA.
Vol. 11, No. 2, pp. 245–254. ASCE (2000), Design of Latticed Steel
API (1993), Recommended Practice for Transmission Structures, ASCE 10-97,
Planning, Designing and Constructing Fixed American Society of Civil Engineers,
Offshore Platforms—Load and Resistance Reston, VA.
Factor Design, 1st Ed., American ASCE (2003), Seismic Evaluation of Existing

SBC 306-CR-18 259

REFERENCES

Buildings, ASCE/SEI 31-03, American Steel Building Structures (1988), “Wind

Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA. Drift Design of Steel-Framed Buildings:
State of the Art,” Journal of the Structural
ASCE (2005a), Standard Calculation Methods
Division, ASCE, Vol. 114, No. 9, pp.
for Structural Fire Protection, ASCE/SEI/
2,085–2,108.
SFPE 29-05, American Society of Civil
Engineers, Reston, VA. ASCE Task Committee on Effective Length
(1997), Effective Length and Notional
ASCE (2005b), Minimum Design Loads for
Load Approaches for Assessing Frame
Buildings and Other Structures,
Stability: Implications for American Steel
ASCE/SEI 7-05, American Society of Civil
Design, American Society of Civil
Engineers, Reston, VA.
Engineers, New York, NY.
ASCE (2006a). Seismic Rehabilitation of
Aschheim, M. (2002), “Seismic Design Based
Existing Buildings, ASCE 41-06,
on the Yield Displacement,” Earthquake
American Society of Civil Engineers,
Spectra, EERI, Volume 18, No. 4, pp. 581–
Reston, VA.
600.
ASCE (2006b). Seismic Rehabilitation of
Aslani, F. and Goel, S.C. (1991), “An
Existing Buildings: Supplement No.1,
Analytical Criteria for Buckling Strength
ASCE 41-06, American Society of Civil
of Built- Up Compression Members,”
Engineers, Reston, VA.
Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 28, No.
ASCE (2008), Standard Calculation Methods 4, 4th Quarter, pp. 159–168.
for Structural Fire Protection, ASCE/SEI/
ASNT (2006a), Personnel Qualification and
SFPE 29-08, American Society of Civil
Certification in Nondestructive Testing,
Engineers, Reston, VA.
ASNT SNT-TC-1A-2003, American
ASCE (2009), “Recommendations for Seismic Society of Nondestructive Testing,
Design of Hybrid Coupled Wall Systems,” Columbus, OH.
American Society of Civil Engineers,
ASNT (2006b), Standard for Qualification
Reston, VA.
and Certification of Nondestructive
ASCE (2010), Minimum Design Loads for Testing Personnel, ANSI/ASNT CP-189-
Buildings and Other Structures, ASCE/SEI 2006, American Society of Nondestructive
7-10, American Society of Civil Engineers, Testing, Columbus, OH.
Reston, VA.
Astaneh-Asl, A., Bolt, B., McMullin, K.,
ASCE Task Committee on Design Criteria for Donikian, R.R., Modjtahedi, D. and Cho,
Composite Structures in Steel and S-W (1994), “Seismic Performance of
Concrete (1992a), “Proposed Steel Bridges During the 1994 Northridge
Specification for Structural Steel Beams Earthquake,” Report No. UCB/CEE-Steel-
with Web Openings,” Journal of 94/01, Dept. of Civil and Env. Engrg.,
Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 118, Univ. of California, Berkeley, CA.
No. ST12, December, pp. 3,315–3,324.
Astaneh-Asl, A. and Ravat, S. (1997), “Cyclic
ASCE Task Committee on Design Criteria for Tests of Steel H-Piles,” Report No.
Composite Structures in Steel and UCB/CEE-Steel-97/01, Dept. of Civil and
Concrete (1992b), “Commentary on Env. Engrg., Univ. of California, Berkeley,
Proposed Specification for Structural Steel CA.
Beams with Web Openings,” Journal of
Astaneh-Asl, A. (2005a), “Notes on Design of
Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 118,
Double-Angle and Tee Shear Connections
No. ST12, December, pp. 3,325–3,349.
for Gravity and Seismic Loads,” Steel Tips,
ASCE Task Committee on Drift Control of Structural Steel Education Council,

SBC 306-CR-18 260

REFERENCES

Moraga, CA. ASTM (2009c), Standard Practice for Repair

of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-
Astaneh-Asl, A. (2005b), “Design of Shear
Dip Galvanized Coatings, ASTM
Tab Connections for Gravity and Seismic
A780/A780M-09, American Society for
Loads,” Steel Tips, Structural Steel
Testing and Materials, West
Education Council, Moraga, CA.
Conshohocken, PA.
ASTM (2006), Standard Test Methods for ASTM (2009d), Standard Test Methods for
Determining Effects of Large Hydrocarbon Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Pool Fires on Structural Members and Materials, ASTM E119-09c, American
Assemblies, ASTM E1529-06, American Society for Testing and Materials, West
Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
Conshohocken, PA.
ASTM (2009e), Standard Specification for Zinc
ASTM (2007a), Standard Practice for (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Safeguarding Against Warpage and Steel Products, ASTM A123/A123M-09,
Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of American Society for Testing and
Steel Assemblies, ASTM A384/A384M- Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
07, American Society for Testing and
ATC (1978), “Tentative Provisions for the
Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
Development of Seismic Regulations for
ASTM (2007b), Standard Practice for Buildings,” Publication 3-06, Applied
Castings, Carbon, Low-Alloy, and Technology Council, Redwood City, CA,
Martensitic Stainless Steel, Ultrasonic June.
Examination Thereof, ASTM
ATC (1992), “Guidelines for Cyclic Seismic
A609/A609M-91(2007), American
Testing of Components of Steel
Society for Testing and Materials, West
Structures,” ATC-24, Applied Technology
Conshohocken, PA.
Council, Redwood City, CA.
ASTM (2007c), Standard Specification for
Austin, W.J. (1961), “Strength and Design of
Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI
Metal Beam-Columns,” Journal of the
Tensile Strength, ASTM A307-07b,
Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 87, No.
American Society for Testing and
ST4, April, pp. 1–32.
Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
AWS (1977), Criteria for Describing Oxygen-
ASTM (2007d), Standard Specification for
Cut Surfaces, AWS C4.1-77, American
Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Welding Society, Miami, FL.
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds
and Shapes, ASTM A500/A500M-07, AWS (2003), Specification For The
American Society for Testing and Qualification Of Welding Inspectors, AWS
Materials, West Conshohocken, PA. B5.1:03, American Welding Society,
Miami, FL.
ASTM (2009a), Standard Specification for
Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel AWS (2005) , Structural Welding Code—
Hardware, ASTM A153/153M-09, Reinforcing Steel, ANSI/AWS D1.4/D1.4M:
American Society for Testing and 2005, American Welding Society, Miami,
Materials, West Conshohocken, PA. FL.
ASTM (2009b), Standard Practice for AWS (2005) , Structural Welding Code— Seismic
Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings Supplement, ANSI/AWS D1.4/D1.4M:
(Hot- Dip), ASTM A385/A385M-09, 2005, American Welding Society, Miami,
American Society for Testing and FL.
Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
AWS (2009), Structural Welding Code—

SBC 306-CR-18 261

REFERENCES

Seismic Supplement, ANSI/AWS 682.

D1.8/D1.8M: 2009, American Welding
Bathe, K. (1995), Finite Element Procedures,
Society, Miami, FL.
Prentice-Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ.
AWS (2010), Structural Welding Code—Steel,
Beedle, L.S. (1958), Plastic Design of Steel
AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2010, American
Frames, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York,
Welding Society, Miami, FL.
NY.
AWS (2008), Structural Welding Code—Sheet
Berman, J. W. and Bruneau, M. (2005a),
Steel, AWS D1.3/D1.3M:2008, American
“Approaches for the Seismic Retrofit of
Welding Society, Miami, FL.
Braced Steel Bridge Piers and Proof-of-
Bansal, J.P. (1971), “The Lateral Instability of Concept Testing of a Laterally Stable
Continuous Steel Beams,” CESRL Eccentrically Braced Frame,” Technical
Dissertation No. 71-1, University of Texas, Report MCEER-05-0004, Multidisciplinary
Austin, TX. Center for Earthquake Engineering
Research, Buffalo, NY.
Barsom, J.M. and Rolfe, S.T. (1999), Fracture
and Fatigue Control in Structures: Berman, J. and Bruneau, M. (2006), “Further
Applications of Fracture Mechanics, 3rd Development of Tubular Eccentrically
Ed., ASTM International MNL41, Braced Frame Links for the Seismic
American Society for Testing and Retrofit of Braced Steel Truss Bridge
Materials, West Conshohocken, PA. Piers,” Technical Report MCEER-06-
0006, Multidisciplinary Center for
Bartlett, F.M., Jelinek, J.J., Schmidt, B.J.,
Earthquake Engineering Research,
Dexter, R.J., Graeser, M.D., and
Buffalo, NY.
Galambos, T.V. (2001), Updating
Standard Shape Material Properties Berman, J. and Bruneau, M. (2007),
Database for Design and Reliability, “Experimental and Analytical
University of Western Ontario and Investigation of Tubular Links for
University of Minnesota. Eccentrically Braced Frames,”
Engineering Structures, Vol. 29, No. 8, pp.
Bartlett, R.M., Dexter, R.J., Graeser, M.D.,
1929–1938.
Jelinek, J.J., Schmidt, B.J. and Galambos,
T.V. (2003), “Updating Standard Shape Berman, J. and Bruneau, M. (2008a), “Tubular
Material Properties Database for Design Links for Eccentrically Braced Frames, I:
and Reliability,” Engineering Journal, Finite Element Parametric Study,” Journal
AISC, Vol. 40, No. 1, pp. 2–14. of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 134,
No. 5, pp. 692–701.
Basler, K., Yen, B.T., Mueller, J.A. and
Thürlimann, B. (1960), “Web Buckling Tests Berman, J. and Bruneau, M. (2008b), “Tubular
on Welded Plate Girders,” Welding Links for Eccentrically Braced Frames, II:
Research Council Bulletin No. 64, Experimental Verification,” Journal of
September, New York, NY. Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 134,
No. 5, pp. 702–712.
Basler, K. (1961), “Strength of Plate Girders in
Shear,” Journal of the Structural Division, Bigos, J., Smith, G.W., Ball, E.F. and Foehl,
ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9, October, pp. P.J. (1954), “Shop Paint and Painting
151–180. Practice,” Proceedings of AISC National
Engineering Conference, Milwaukee, WI,
Basler, K. and Thürlimann, B. (1963),
American Institute of Steel Construction,
“Strength of Plate Girders in Bending,”
Chicago, IL.
Transactions of the American Society of
Civil Engineers, Vol. 128, Part II, pp. 655– Bijlaard, F.S.K., Gresnigt, A.M. and van der

SBC 306-CR-18 262

REFERENCES

Vegte, G.J. (eds.) (2005), Connections in Structures III: Behaviour, Strength and
Steel Structures V, Bouwen met Staal, Design, Pergamon Press, London,
Delft, the Netherlands. England.
Birkemoe, P.C. and Gilmor, M.I. (1978), Bjorhovde, R., Goland, L.J. and Benac, D.J.
“Behavior of Bearing-Critical Double- (1999), “Tests of Full-Scale Beam-to-
Angle Beam Connections,” Engineering Column Connections,” Southwest
Journal, AISC, Vol. 15, No. 4, 4th Research Institute, San Antonio, TX and
Quarter, pp. 109–115. Nucor-Yamato Steel Company,
Blytheville, AR.
Birnstiel, C. and Iffland, J.S.B. (1980), “Factors
Influencing Frame Stability,” Journal of the Bjorhovde, R. (2006), “Cold Bending of Wide-
Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 106, No. Flange Shapes for Construction,”
2, pp. 491–504. Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 43, No. 4,
4th Quarter, pp. 271–286.
Bjorhovde, R. (1972), “Deterministic and
Probabilistic Approaches to the Strength of Bjorhovde, R., Bijlaard, F.S.K. and
Steel Columns,” Ph.D. Dissertation, Geschwindner, L.F. (eds.) (2008),
Lehigh University, Bethlehem, PA, May. Connections in Steel Structures VI, AISC,
Bjorhovde, R. (1978), “The Safety of Steel Chicago, IL.
Columns,” Journal of the Structural Bleich, F. (1952), “Buckling Strength of Metal
Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9, Structures,” Engineering Societies
September, pp. 1371–1387. Monographs, McGraw Hill, 508p.
Bjorhovde, R. and Birkemoe, P.C. (1979), Blodgett, O.W. (1967), “The Question of
”Limit States Design of HSS Columns,” Corrosion in Hollow Steel Sections,”
Canadian Journal of Civil Engineering, Welding Design Studies in Steel
Vol. 6, No. 2, pp. 276–291. Structures, Lincoln Electric Company,
Bjorhovde, R., Brozzetti, J. and Colson, A. D610.163, August, Cleveland, OH.
(eds.) (1988), Connections in Steel Blodgett, O.W. (2001), “Notes on Beam to
Structures: Behaviour, Strength and Column Connections,” Steel Moment
Design, Elsevier Applied Science, London, Frame Connection Advisory No. 3, SAC
England. 95-01, SAC Joint Venture, Sacramento,
Bjorhovde, R. (1988), “Columns: From CA.
Theory to Practice,” Engineering Journal, Borello, D.B., Denavit, M.D. and Hajjar, J.F.
AISC, Vol. 25, No. 1, 1st Quarter, pp. 21– (2009), “Behavior of Bolted Steel Slip-
34. Critical Connections with Fillers,” Report
Bjorhovde, R., Colson, A. and Brozzetti, J. No. NSEL-017, Department of Civil and
(1990), “Classification System for Beam- Environmental Engineering, University
to- Column Connections,” Journal of of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign,
Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 116, Urbana, IL, August.
No. 11, pp. 3,059–3,076. Bradford, M.A., (1998), “Local and post-
Bjorhovde, R., Colson, A., Haaijer, G. and local Buckling of concrete filled Steel
Stark, J.W.B. (eds.) (1992), Connections in welded box columns” journal of
Steel Structures II: Behavior, Strength and constructional steel research, 47: 47-72.
Design, American Institute of Steel Bradford, M.A., Loh, H.Y. and Uy, B. (2002),
Construction, Chicago, IL. “Slenderness Limits for Filled Circular
Bjorhovde, R., Colson, A. and Zandonini, R. Steel Tubes,” Journal of Constructional
(eds.) (1996), Connections in Steel Steel Research, Vol. 58, No. 2, pp. 243–

SBC 306-CR-18 263

REFERENCES

252. Structures, FEMA P-750, Building Seismic

Safety Council, Washington, DC.
Brandt, G.D. (1982), “A General
Solution for Eccentric Loads on Weld Buonopane, S.G. and Schafer, B.W. (2006),
Groups,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. “Reliability of Steel Frames Designed
19, No. 3, 3rd Quarter, pp. 150–159. with Advanced Analysis,” Journal of
Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 132,
Bridge, R.Q. (1998), “The Inclusion of No. 2, pp. 267–276.
Imperfections in Probability-Based Limit
Butler, L.J., Pal, S. and Kulak, G.L. (1972),
States Design,” Proceedings of the 1998
“Eccentrically Loaded Welded
Structural Engineering World Congress,
Connections,” Journal of the Structural
San Francisco, CA, July.
Division, ASCE, Vol. 98, No. ST5, May,
Bridge, R.Q. and Bizzanelli, P. (1997), pp. 989–1,005.
Imperfections in Steel Structures,
Proceedings— 1997 Annual Technical Carter, C.J., Tide, R.H. and Yura, J.A. (1997),
Session, and Meeting, Structural Stability “A Summary of Changes and Derivation
Research Council, pp. 447–458. of LRFD Bolt Design Provisions,”
Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 34, No. 3,
Brockenbrough, R.B. and Johnston, B.G. 3rd Quarter, pp. 75–81.
(1981), USS Steel Design Manual, United
States Steel Corporation, Pittsburgh, PA. Carter, C.J. (1999), Stiffening of Wide-Flange
Columns at Moment Connections: Wind
Brockenbrough, R.L. (1983), and Seismic Applications, Design Guide
“Considerations in the Design of Bolted 13, AISC, Chicago, IL.
Joints for Weathering Steel,” Engineering
Journal, AISC, Vol. 20, No. 1, 1st Quarter, Cattan, J. (1995), Statistical Analysis of
pp. 40–45. Charpy V-Notch Toughness for Steel Wide-
Flange Structural Shapes, AISC, Chicago,
Brosnan, D.P. and Uang, C.M. (1995), IL.
“Effective Width of Composite L-Beams
in Buildings,” Engineering Journal, CEN (1991), Eurocode 1: Basis of Design and
AISC, Vol. 30, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, pp. Actions on Structures, EC1 1991-2-2,
73–81. Comite Européen de Normalisation,
Brussels, Belgium.
Bruneau, M., Mahin, S.A., and Popov, E.P.
(1987), Ultimate Behavior of Butt Welded CEN (2003), Eurocode 4: Design of
Splices in Heavy Rolled Steel Sections, Composite Steel and Concrete Structures,
Report No. UCB/EERC-87/10, Earthquake Comite Européen de Normalisation,
Engineering Research Center, Berkeley, Brussels, Belgium.
CA. CEN (2005), Eurocode 3: Design of Steel
Bruneau, M., Uang, C.-M. and Whittaker, A. Structures, Comite Européen de
(1998), Ductile Design of Steel Structures, Normalisation, Brussels, Belgium.
McGraw Hill, New York, NY. Charney, F.A. (1990), “Wind Drift
BSSC (2003), NEHRP Recommended Serviceability Limit State Design of
Provisions for Seismic Regulations for Multi-story Buildings,” Journal of Wind
New Buildings and Other Structures, Engineering and Industrial
FEMA 450-1, Building Seismic Safety Aerodynamics, Vol. 36, pp. 203–212.
Council, Washington, DC. Chen, P.W. and Robertson, L.E. (1972),
BSSC (2009), NEHRP Recommended Seismic “Human Perception Thresholds of
Provisions for New Buildings and Other Horizontal Motion,” Journal of the
Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 98,

SBC 306-CR-18 264

REFERENCES

No. ST8, August, pp. 1681–1695. 464–473, Reston, VA.

Chen, W.F. and Atsuta, T. (1976), Theory of Chien, E.Y.L. and Ritchie, J.K. (1984),
Beam-Columns, Volume I: In-Plane Composite Floor Systems, Canadian
Behavior and Design, and Volume II: Institute of Steel Construction,
Space Behavior and Design, McGraw- Willowdale, Ontario, Canada.
Hill, New York, NY.
Civjan, S.A. and Singh, P. (2003),
Chen, W.F. and Atsuta, T. (1977), Theory of “Behavior of Shear Studs Subjected to
Beam Columns, Volume II: Space Behavior Fully Reversed Cyclic Loading,”
and Design, McGraw-Hill, New York, NY. Journal of Structural Engineering,
ASCE, Vol. 129, No. 11, pp. 1466–
Chen, W.F. and Lui, E.M. (1987), Structural
Stability: Theory and Implementation, 1474, Reston,VA.
Elsevier, New York, NY. Clarke, M.J., Bridge, R.Q., Hancock, G.J. and
Chen, W.F. and Lui, E.M. (1991), Stability Trahair, N.S. (1992), “Advanced Analysis
Design of Steel Frames, CRC Press, Boca of Steel Building Frames,” Journal of
Raton, FL. Constructional Steel Research, Vol. 23,
No. 1–3, pp. 1–29.
Chen, S. and Tong, G. (1994), “Design for
Stability: Correct Use of Braces,” Steel Cooke, G.M.E. (1988), “An Introduction to
Structures, Journal of the Singapore the Mechanical Properties of Structural
Structural Steel Society, Vol. 5, No. 1, Steel at Elevated Temperatures,” Fire
December, pp. 15–23. Safety Journal, Vol. 13, pp. 45–54.

Chen, W.F. and Toma, S. (eds.) (1994), Cooney, R.C. and King, A.B. (1988),
“Serviceability Criteria for Buildings,”
Advanced Analysis of Steel Frames:
BRANZ Report SR14, Building Research
Theory, Software and Applications, CRC
Association of New Zealand, Porirua, New
Press, Boca Raton, FL.
Zealand.
Chen, W.F. and Sohal, I. (1995), Plastic Design
and Second-Order Analysis of Steel Frames, Cooper, P.B., Galambos, T.V. and Ravindra,
Springer Verlag, New York, NY. M.K. (1978), “LRFD Criteria for Plate
Girders,” Journal of the Structural
Chen, W.F., Goto, Y. and Liew, J.Y.R. (1995), Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9,
Stability Design of Semi-Rigid Frames, September, pp. 1389–1407.
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY.
Crisfield, M.A. (1991), Nonlinear Finite
Chen, W.F. and Kim, S.E. (1997), LRFD Steel Element Analysis of Solids and Structures,
Design Using Advanced Analysis, CRC John Wiley & Sons, Inc., NY.
Press, Boca Raton, FL. CSA (2004), General Requirements for
Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/
Cheng, J.J.R. and Kulak, G.L. (2000),
Structural Quality Steel, CAN/CSA-
“Gusset Plate Connection to Round HSS
G40.20/G40.21-04, Canadian Standards
Tension Members,” Engineering Journal,
Association, Mississauga, Ontario, Canada.
AISC, Vol. 37, No. 4, 4th Quarter, pp.
133–139. CSA (2009), Limit States Design of Steel
Structures, CSA Standard S16-09,
Chi, B. and Uang, C.M. (2002), “Cyclic Canadian Standards Association, Rexdale,
Response and Design Recommendations Ontario, Canada
of Reduced Beam Section Moment
Connections with Deep Columns,” Darwin, D. (1990), Steel and Composite Beams
Journal of Structural with Web Openings, Design Guide 2, AISC,
Engineering,ASCE, Vol. 128, No. 4, pp. Chicago, IL.

SBC 306-CR-18 265

REFERENCES

Davies, G. and Packer, J.A. (1982), “Predicting in Girders,” Recent Developments in

the Strength of Branch Plate—RHS Bridge Engineering, Proceedings of the
Connections for Punching Shear,” Canadian Second New York City Bridge Conference,
Journal of Civil Engineering, Vol. 9, pp. October 20-21, 2003, New York, NY,
458–467. Mahmoud, K.M. (ed.), A.A.
Balkema/Swets & Zeitlinger, Lisse, the
Dawe, J.L. and Kulak, G.L. (1986), “Local Netherlands, pp. 67–81.
Buckling Behavior of Beam-Columns,”
Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Disque, R.O. (1964), “Wind Connections
Vol. 112, No. 11, pp. 2447–2461 with Simple Framing,” Engineering
Journal, AISC, Vol. 1, No. 3, July, pp.
Deierlein, G.G. and Noguchi, H. (2004), 101-103.
“Overview of US-Japan Research on the
Seismic Design of Composite Reinforced Dusicka, P. and Itani, A.M. (2002), “Behavior
Concrete and Steel Moment Frame of Built-Up Shear Links Under Large
Structures,” Journal of Structural Cyclic Deformations,” Proceedings of the
Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 130, No. 2, pp. 2002 Annual Meeting of the Structural
361–367, Reston, VA. Stability Research Council, Structural
Stability Research Council, Gainesville,
Deierlein, G.G., Sheikh, T.M., and Yura, J.A. FL.
(1989), “Part 2: Beam Column Moment
Connections for Composite Frames,” Dusicka, P. and Iwai, R. (2007),
Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, “Development of Linked Column Frame
Vol. 115, No. 11, November, pp. 2877– Lateral Load Resisting System,” 2nd
2896, Reston, VA. Progress Report for AISC and Oregon Iron
Works, Portland State University, Portland,
Dekker, N.W., Kemp, A.R. and Trinchero, P. OR.
(1995), “Factors Influencing the Strength
of Continuous Composite Beams in Earls, C.J. and Galambos, T.V. (1997),
Negative Bending,” Journal of “Design Recommendations for Equal Leg
Constructional Steel Research, Vol. 34, Single Angle Flexural Members,” Journal
Nos. 2–3, pp. 161–185. of Constructional Steel Research, Vol. 43,
Nos. 1-3, pp. 65–85.
Dexter, R.J. and Melendrez, M.I. (2000),
“Through-Thickness Properties of Easterling, W.S., Gibbings, D.R. and Murray,
Column Flanges in Welded Moment T.M. (1993), “Strength of Shear Studs in
Connections,” Journal of Structural Steel Deck on Composite Beams and
Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 126, No. 1, pp. Joists,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol.
24–31. 30, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, pp. 44–55.
Dexter, R.J., Hajjar, J.F., Prochnow, S.D., Easterling, W.S. and Porter M.L. (1994),
Graeser, M.D., Galambos, T.V. and “Steel-Deck Reinforced Concrete
Cotton, S.C. (2001), “Evaluation of the Diaphragms I & II,” Journal of
Design Requirements for Column Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol.
Stiffeners and Doublers and the Variation 120, No. 2, February, pp. 560–596,
in Properties of A992 Shapes,” Reston, VA.
Proceedings of the North American Steel
Construction Conference, Fort Easterling, W.S. and Gonzales, L. (1993),
Lauderdale, FL, May 9-12, 2001, AISC, “Shear Lag Effects in Steel Tension
Chicago, IL, pp. 14.1–14.21. Members,” Engineering Journal, AISC,
Vol. 30, No. 3, 3rd Quarter, pp. 77–89.
Dexter, R.J. and Altstadt, S.A. (2004),
“Strength and Ductility of Tension Flanges ECCS (1984), Ultimate Limit States

SBC 306-CR-18 266

REFERENCES

Calculations of Sway Frames With Rigid Exposed to Fires,” Engineering Journal,

Joints, Publications No. 33, European AISC, Vol. 28, No. 1, pp. 37–44.
Convention for Constructional Steelwork,
El-Zanaty, M.H., Murray, D.W. and
Rotterdam, the Netherlands.
Bjorhovde, R. (1980), “Inelastic
ECCS (2001), Model Code on Fire Behavior Of Multistory Steel Frames,”
Engineering, 1st Ed., European Structural Engineering Report No. 83,
Convention for Constructional Steelwork University of Alberta, Alberta, BC.
Technical Committee 3, Brussels,
Belgium. El-Tawil, S. and Deierlein, G.G. (1999),
“Strength and Ductility of Encased
ECS (1994), Eurocode 4, Design of composite Composite Columns,” Journal of
Steel and Concrete Structures, Part1-1: Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol.
General Rules and Rules for Bulidings, 125, No. 9, pp. 1009–1019.
European Committee for Standardization,
Brussels, Belgium. Engelhardt, M.D. and Popov, E.P. (1989a),
Behavior of Long Links in Eccen trica lly
Elgaaly, M. (1983), “Web Design under Braced Frames, Report No. UCB/EERC-
Compressive Edge Loads,” Engineering 89/01, Earthquake Engineering Res earch
Journal, AISC, Vol. 20, No. 4, 4th Center, Berkeley, CA.
Quarter, pp. 153–171.
Engelhardt, M.D. and Popov, E.P. (1989b),
Elgaaly, M. and Salkar, R. (1991), “Web “On Design of Eccentrically Braced
Crippling Under Edge Loading,” Frames,” Eart hquake Spectra, Vol. 5, No.3,
Proceedings of AISC National Steel August, Earthquake Engineering Research
Construction Conference, Washington, DC. Institute, Oakland, CA.
Ellifritt, D.S., Wine, G., Sputo, T. and Engelhardt, M.D., Tsai, K.C., and Popov, E.P.
Samuel, S. (1992), “Flexural Strength of (1992), “Stability of Beams in Eccentrically
WT Sections,” Engineering Journal, Braced Frames,” Chapter in Stability and
AISC, Vol. 29, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, pp. Ductility of Steel Structures Under Cyclic
67–74. Loading, Y. Fukumoto and G.C. Lee,
Ellingwood, B.R. and Corotis, R.B. (1991), Editors. CRC Press, pp. 99–112, 1992.
“Load Combinations for Buildings Fell, Benjamin V., Kanvinde, Amit M.,
Exposed to Fires,” Engineering Journal, Deierlein, Gregory G., Myers, Andrew
AISC, Vol. 28, No. 1, 1st Quarter, pp. T., and Fu, Xiangyang (August 2006),
37–44, Chicago, IL. “Buckling and Fracture of Concentric
Ellingwood, B. and Leyendecker, E.V. Braces Under Inelastic Cyclic Loading,”
(1978), “Approaches for Design Against Steel Tips, Structural Steel Education
Progressive Collapse,” Journal of the Council.
Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. Felton, L.P. and Dobbs, M.W. (1967),
3, pp. 413–423. “Optimum Design of Tubes for Bending
Ellingwood, B.E., MacGregor, J.G., and Torsion,” Journal of the Structural
Galambos, T.V., and Cornell, C.A. Division, ASCE, Vol. 93, No. ST4, pp.
(1982), “Probability-Based Load 185–200.
Criteria: Load Factors and Load FEMA (1994), NEHRP (National Earthquake
Combinations,” Journal of the Structural Hazards Reduction Program)
Division, ASCE, Vol. 108, No. 5, pp. 978– Recommended Provisions for Seismic
997. Regulations for New Buildings, Federal
Ellingwood, B., and Corotis, R.B. (1991), Emergency Management Agency,
“Load Combinations for Building Washington, DC.

SBC 306-CR-18 267

REFERENCES

FEMA (1995), Interim Guidelines: Evaluation, FEMA (2000g), State of the Art Report on
Repair, Modification and Design of Welded Welding and Inspection, Chapter 6, FEMA
Steel Moment Frame Structures, Bulletin 355B, Federal Emergency Management
No. 267, Federal Emergency Agency, Washington, DC.
Management Agency, Washington, DC.
FEMA (2000), Steel Moment-Frame Buildings:
FEMA (1997), NEHRP Recommended Design Criteria for New Buildings, FEMA-
Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New 350, Prepared by the SAC Joint Venture for
Buildings and Other Structures, FEMA the Federal Emergency Management
302, Part 1- Provisions, Federal Emergency Agency, Washington, DC.
Management Agency, Washington, DC.
FEMA (2001), NEHRP Recommended
FEMA (1997), “Seismic Performance of Provisions For Seismic Regulations. Part
Bolted and Riveted Connections” 2: Commentary, FEMA 369, Federal
Background Reports; Metallurgy, Emergency Management Agency,
Fracture Mechanics, Welding, Moment Washington, DC.
Connections and Frame Systems
FEMA (2003), NEHRP Recommended
Behavior, Bulletin No. 288, Federal
Provisions for Seismic Regulations for
Emergency Management Agency,
New Buildings and Other Structures,
Washington, DC.
FEMA 450, Federal Emergency
FEMA (2000a), Recommended Seismic Design Management Agency, Washington, DC.
Criteria for New Steel Moment-Frame
FEMA (2009) NEHRP Recommended
Buildings, FEMA 350, Federal Emergency
Seismic Provisions for New Buildings
Management Agency, Washington, DC.
and Other Structures, FEMA P-750,
FEMA (2000b), Recommended Specifications Federal Emergency Management
and Quality Assurance Guidelines for Steel Agency, Washington, DC.
Moment-Frame Construction for Seismic
FHWA (1999), “FHWA Demonstration
Applications, FEMA 353, Federal
Project Heat Straightening Repair for
Emergency Management Agency,
Damaged Steel Bridges,” FHWA Report
Washington, DC.
No. FHWA-IF-99-004, Federal Highway
FEMA (2000d), State of the Art Report on Administration, Washington, DC.
Systems Performance of Steel Moment
Fielding, D.J. and Huang, J.S. (1971), “Shear
Frames Subject to Earthquake Ground
in Steel Beam-to-Column Connections,”
Shaking, FEMA 355C, prepared by the
The Welding Journal, AWS, Vol. 50, No.
SAC Joint Venture for the Federal
7, Research Supplement, pp. 313–326.
Emergency Management Agency,
Washington, DC. Fielding, D.J. and Chen, W.F. (1973), “Steel
Frame Analysis and Connection Shear
FEMA (2000e), State of the Art Report on
Deformation,” Journal of the Structural
Connection Performance, FEMA 355D,
Division, ASCE, Vol. 99, No. ST1,
prepared by the SAC Joint Venture for the
January, pp. 1–18.
Federal Emergency Management Agency,
Washington, D.C. Fisher, J.W., Frank, K.H., Hirt, M.A. and
McNamee, B.M. (1970), “Effect of
FEMA (2000f), State of the Art Report on
Weldments on the Fatigue Strength of
Performance Prediction and Evaluation of
Beams,” Report 102, National
Steel Moment-Frame Buildings, FEMA
Cooperative Highway Research Program,
355F, prepared by the SAC Joint Venture
Washington, DC.
for the Federal Emergency Management
Agency, Washington, DC. Fisher, J.W., Albrecht, P.A., Yen, B.T.,

SBC 306-CR-18 268

REFERENCES

Klingerman, D.J. and McNamee, B.M. Connections. II: Experimentation,”

(1974), “Fatigue Strength of Steel Beams Journal of Structural Engineering,
with Welded Stiffeners and Attachments,” ASCE, Vol. 118, No. 10, pp. 2,804–
Report 147, National Cooperative 2,820.
Highway Research Program, Washington,
Freeman, F.R. (1930), “The Strength of Arc-
DC.
Welded Joints,” Proceedings of the
Fisher, J.W., Galambos, T.V., Kulak, G.L. and Institution of Civil Engineers, Vol. 231,
Ravindra, M.K. (1978), “Load and London, England.
Resistance Factor Design Criteria for
Freeman, S. (1977), “Racking Tests of High
Connectors,” Journal of the Structural
Rise Building Partitions,” Journal of the
Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9,
Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 103, No. 8,
September, pp. 1,427–1,441.
pp. 1,673–1,685.
Fisher, J.M. and West, M.A. (1990),
Furlong, R.W. (1997), “Composite Columns,”
Serviceability Design Considerations for
Composite Construction Design for
Low-Rise Buildings, AISC, Chicago, IL.
Buildings, Chapter 4, ASCE/McGraw Hill,
Fisher, J.M. and West, M.A. (1997), Erection New York, NY.
Bracing of Low-Rise Structural Steel Galambos, T.V. (1968a), Structural Members
Buildings, Design Guide 10, AISC, and Frames, Prentice-Hall, Englewood
Chicago, IL. Cliffs, NJ.
Fisher, J.M. and Kloiber, L.A. (2006), Base Galambos, T.V. (1968b), “Deformation and
Plate and Anchor Rod Design, 2nd Energy Absorption Capacity of Steel
Edition, Design Guide 1, AISC, Chicago, Structures in the Inelastic Range,” Steel
IL. Research for Construction Bulletin No.
8, American Iron and Steel Institute.
Foutch, D.A. (1989), “Seismic Behavior of Galambos. T.V. (1978), “Proposed Criteria for
Eccentrically Braced Steel Buil ding,” Load and Resistance Factor Design of
Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Steel Building Structures,” AISI Bulletin
Vol. 115, No. 8, August, pp. 1857–1876, No. 27, American Iron and Steel Institute,
Reston, VA. Washington, DC, January.
Frank, K.H. and Fisher, J.W. (1979), “Fatigue Galambos, T.V., Ellingwood, B., MacGregor,
Strength of Fillet Welded Cruciform J.G. and Cornell, C.A. (1982),
Joints,” Journal of the Structural Division, “Probability- Based Load Criteria:
ASCE, Vol. 105, No. ST9, September. Assessment of Current Design Practice,”
Frank, K.H. and Yura, J.A. (1981), “An Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE,
Experimental Study of Bolted Shear Vol. 108, No. ST5, May, pp. 959–977.
Connections,” FHWA/RD-81/148, Federal Galambos, T.V. (1983), “Reliability of
Highway Administration, Washington, DC, Axially Loaded Columns,” Engineering
December. Structures, Vol. 5, No. 1, pp. 73–78.
Frater, G.S. and Packer, J.A. (1992a), Galambos, T.V. and Ellingwood, B. (1986),
“Weldment Design for RHS Truss “Serviceability Limit States:
Connections. I: Applications,” Journal Deflections,” Journal of the Structural
of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. Division, ASCE, Vol. 112, No. 1, pp. 67–
118, No. 10, pp. 2,784–2,803. 84.
Frater, G.S. and Packer, J.A. (1992b), Galambos, T.V. (1991), “Design of Axially
“Weldment Design for RHS Truss Loaded Compressed Angles,” Proceedings

SBC 306-CR-18 269

REFERENCES

of the Annual Technical Session and Application of Design Provisions for the
Meeting, Chicago, IL, April 15-17, 1991, 2005 AISC Specification,” Engineering
Structural Stability Research Council, Journal, AISC, Vol. 47, No. 2, 2nd
Bethlehem, PA, pp. 353–367. Quarter, pp. 131–139.
Galambos, T.V. (ed.) (1998), Guide to Stability Geschwindner, L.F and Gustafson, K. (2010),
Design Criteria for Metal Structures, 5th “Single-Plate Shear Connection Design
Ed., Structural Stability Research Council, to Meet Structural Integrity
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY. Requirements,” Engineering Journal,
AISC, Vol. 47, No. 4, 3rd Quarter.
Galambos, T.V. (2001), “Strength of
Singly Symmetric I-Shaped Beam- Gewain, R.G. and Troup, E.W.J. (2001),
Columns,”Engineering Journal, AISC, “Restrained Fire Resistance Ratings in
Vol. 38, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, pp. 65–77. Structural Steel Buildings,” Engineering
Journal, Vol. 38, No. 2, pp. 78–89.
Galambos, T.V. and Surovek, A.E. (2008),
Structural Stability of Steel—Concepts Gibson, G.T. and Wake, B.T. (1942), “An
and Applications for Structural Engineers, Investigation of Welded Connections for
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY. Angle Tension Members,” The Welding
Journal, AWS, January, p. 44.
SBC 201-18: Saudi Building Code “The
General Building Code”, 2018. Giddings, T.W. and Wardenier, J. (1986), “The
Strength and Behaviour of Statically
SBC 301-16: Saudi Building Code “Minimum Loaded Welded Connections in Structural
Design Loads for Buildings and Other Hollow Sections,” CIDECT Monograph
Structures”, 2015. No. 6, Sections 1-10, British Steel
SBC 304-16: Saudi Building Code “Building Corporation Tubes Division, Corby,
Code Requirements for Structural England.
Concrete”, 2015. Gioncu, V. and Petcu, D. (1997), “Available
SBC 306-16: Saudi Building Code “Steel Rotation Capacity of Wide-Flange
Structures”, 2015. Beams and Beam-Columns, Part 1.
Theoretical Approaches, and Part 2.
Geschwindner, L.F. (2002), “A Practical
Experimental and Numerical Tests,”
Approach to Frame Analysis, Stability and
Journal of Constructional Steel
Leaning Columns,” Engineering Journal,
Research, Vol. 43, Nos. 1-3, pp. 161–
AISC, Vol. 39, No. 4, 4th Quarter, pp.
244.
167–181.
Gjelsvik, A. (1981), The Theory of Thin-Walled
Geschwindner, L.F. and Disque, R.O. (2005),
Bars, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York,
“Flexible Moment Connections for
NY.
Unbraced Frames Subject to Lateral
Forces—A Return to Simplicity,” Goble, G.G. (1968), “Shear Strength of Thin
Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 42, No. Flange Composite Specimens,”
2, 2nd Quarter, pp. 99–112. Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 5, No. 2,
2nd Quarter, pp. 62–65.
Geschwindner, L.F. (2010a), “Notes on the
Impact of Hole Reduction on the Goel, S.C. (1992a), Recommendations for
Flexural Strength of Rolled Beams,” US/Japan Cooperative Research
Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 47, No. Program. Phase 5: Composite and
1, 1st Quarter, pp. 37–40. Hybrid Structures, Report UMCEE 92-
29, University of Michigan, Department
Geschwindner, L.F. (2010b), “Discussion of
of Civil and Environmental Engineering,
Limit State Response of Composite
Ann Arbor, MI.
Columns and Beam-Columns Part II:

SBC 306-CR-18 270

REFERENCES

Goel, S.C. (1993), Proceedings of a Griffis, L.G. (1992), “Composite Frame

US/Japan Cooperative Research Construction,” Constructional Steel
Program Workshop on Composite and Design: An International Guide, Elsevier
Hybrid Structures, Report UMCEE 93, Science Publishers, pp. 523–553, London,
University of Michigan, Department of England.
Civil and Environmental Engineering,
Ann Arbor, MI. Griffis, L.G. (1992), Load and Resistance
Factor Design of W-Shapes Encased in
Goel, S.C. and Chao, S-H. (2008), Concrete, Design Guide 6, AISC, Chicago,
Performance-Based Plastic Design: IL.
Earthquake Resistant Steel Structures,
International Code Council. Griffis, L.G. (1993), “Serviceability Limit
States Under Wind Load,” Engineering
Gomez, I., Kanvinde, A., Kwan, Y.K. and Journal, AISC, Vol. 30, No. 1, 1st Quarter,
Grondin, G. (2008), “Strength and pp. 1–16.
Ductility of Welded Joints Subjected to
Out-of-Plane Bending,” Final Report to Grondin, G., Jin, M. and Josi, G. (2007),
AISC, University of California, Davis, “Slip Critical Bolted Connections A
and University of Alberta, July. Reliability Analysis for the Design at the
Ultimate Limit State,” Preliminary Report
Gomez, I., Kanvinde, A., Smith, C., and prepared for AISC, University of Alberta,
Deierlein, G. (2009), “Shear Transfer In Edmonton, Alberta, CA.
Exposed Column Base Plates,” March,
2009. Haaijer, G. and Thurlimann, B. (1958), “On
Inelastic Buckling of Steel,” Journal of
Gomez, I., Kanvinde, A., and Deierlein, G. the Engineering Mechanics Division,
(2010), “Exposed Column Base ASCE, April.
Connections Subjected to Axial
Compression and Flexure,” Final Report Hajjar, J.F. (2000), “Concrete-Filled Steel
Presented to the American Institute of Tube Columns under Earthquake
Steel Construction, April, 2010. Loads,”Progress in Structural Engineering
Goverdhan, A.V. (1983), “A Collection of and Materials, Vol. 2, No. 1, pp. 72–82.
Experimental Moment Rotation Curves: Hajjar, J.F., Dexter, R.J., Ojard, S.D., Ye, Y.
Evaluation of Predicting Equations for and Cotton, S.C. (2003), “Continuity
Semi-Rigid Connections,” M.S. Thesis, Plate Detailing for Steel Moment-Resisting
Vanderbilt University, Nashville, TN. Connections,” Engineering Journal,
Graham, J.D., Sherbourne, A.N. and AISC, No. 4, 4th Quarter, pp. 81–97.
Khabbaz, R.N. (1959), “Welded Interior Han, S.W., Kwon, G., and Moon, K.H.
Beam-to- Column Connections,” (2007), “Cyclic Behavior of Post-
American Institute of Steel Construction, Northridge WUF-B Connections,”
Chicago, IL. Journal of Constructional Steel
Graham, J.D., Sherbourne, A.N., Khabbaz, Research, Vol. 63, No. 3, pp. 365–374.
R.N. and Jensen, C.D. (1960), “Welded Hansen, R.J., Reed, J.W., and Vanmarcke,
Interior Beam-to-Column Connections,” E.H. (1973), “Human Response to Wind-
Welding Research Council, Bulletin No. Induced Motion of Buildings,” Journal
63, pp. 1–28. of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol.
Grant, J.A., Fisher, J.W. and Slutter, R.G. 99, No. ST7, pp. 1,589-1,606.
(1977), “Composite Beams with Formed Hardash, S.G. and Bjorhovde, R. (1985),
Steel Deck,” Engineering Journal, AISC, “New Design Criteria for Gusset Plates in
Vol. 14, No. 1, 1st Quarter, pp. 24-43. Tension”, Engineering Journal, AISC,

SBC 306-CR-18 271

REFERENCES

Vol. 22, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, pp. 77–94. ICC (2008), Acceptance Criteria for Steel
Moment Frame Connection Systems, AC
Heinzerling, J.E. (1987), “Structural Design of
129, ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.,
Steel Joist Roofs to Resist Ponding
Whittier, CA.
Loads,” Technical Digest No. 3, Steel Joist
ICC (2009), International Building Code,
Institute, Myrtle Beach, SC.
International Code Council,
Helwig, T.A., Frank, K.H. and Yura, J.A. Birmingham, AL.
(1997), “Lateral-Torsional Buckling of IIW (1989), “Design Recommendations for
Singly- Symmetric I-Beams,” Journal of Hollow Section Joints-Predominantly
Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 123, Statically Loaded,” 2nd Ed., IIW
No. 9, September, pp. 1,172–1,179. Document XV-701-89, IIW Annual
Assembly, Subcommission XV-E,
Higgins, T.R. and Preece, F.R. (1968),
International Institute of Welding, Helsinki,
“AWS-AISC Fillet Weld Study,
Finland.
Longitudinal and Transverse Shear
Tests,” Internal Report, Testing Engineers, Irwin, A.W. (1986), “Motion in Tall
Inc., Oakland, CA, May 31. Buildings,” Second Century of the
Skyscraper, L.S. Beedle (ed.), Van
Hjelmstad, K.D. and Popov, E.P. (1983),
Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York, NY.
“Cyclic Behavior and Design of Link
Beams,” Journal of Structural Engineering, Islam, M.S., Ellingwood, B. and Corotis,
ASCE, Vol. 109, No. 10, October, Reston, R.B. (1990), “Dynamic Response of Tall
VA. Buildings to Stochastic Wind Load,”
Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE,
Horne, M.R. and Morris, L.J. (1982), Plastic
Vol. 116, No. 11, November, pp. 2,982–
Design of Low-Rise Frames, MIT Press,
3,002.
Cambridge, MA.
ISO (1977), “Bases for the Design of
Horne, M.R. and Grayson, W.R. (1983),
Structures—Deformations of Buildings at
“Parametric Finite Element Study of
the Serviceability Limit States,” ISO
Transverse Stiffeners for Webs in Shear,”
4356, International Standards
Instability and Plastic Collapse of Steel
Organization, Geneva, Switzerland.
Structures, Proceedings of the Michael R.
Horne Conference, L.J. Morris (ed.), Iwankiw, N. (1984), “Note on Beam-Column
Granada Publishing, London, pp. 329– Moment Amplification Factor,”
341. Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 21, No.
Hsieh, S.H. and Deierlein, G.G. (1991), 1, 1st Quarter, pp. 21-23.
“Nonlinear Analysis of Three- Jacobs, W.J. and Goverdhan, A.V. (2010),
Dimensional Steel Frames with Semi- “Review and Comparison of Encased
Rigid Connections,” Computers and Composite Steel-Concrete Column
Structures, Vol. 41, No. 5, pp. 995– Detailing Requirements,” Composite
1,009. Construction in Steel and Concrete VI, R.
Huckelbridge, A.A. And Clough, R.W. (1977), Leon et al. (eds.), ASCE, Reston, VA.
Earthquake Simulator Tests of Nine-Story
Steel Frame with Columns Allowed to Jayas, B.S. and Hosain, M.U. (1988a),
uplift, Report No. UCB/EERC-77/23, “Composite Beams with Perpendicular
Earthquake Engineering Research Center, Ribbed Metal Deck,” Composite
Berkeley, CA. Construction in Steel and Concrete II, C.
D. Buckner and I. M. Viest, (eds.),
ICBO (1997), Uniform Building Code, American Society of Civil Engineers,
International Conference of Building New York, NY, pp. 511–526.
Officials, Whittier, CA.

SBC 306-CR-18 272

REFERENCES

Jayas, B.S. and Hosain, M.U. (1988b), Kaehler, R.C., White, D.W. and Kim, Y.D.
“Behaviour of Headed Studs in Composite (2010), Frame Design Using Web-Tapered
Beams: Push-Out Tests,” Canadian Members, Design Guide 25, Metal Building
Journal of Civil Engineering, Vol. 15, pp. Manufacturers Association and AISC,
240–253. Chicago, IL.
JCRC (1971), Handbook of Structural Kanchanalai, T. (1977), The Design and
Stability, Japanese Column Research Behavior of Beam-Columns in Unbraced
Council, English translation, pp. 3–22. Steel Frames, AISI Project No. 189, Report
No. 2, Civil Engineering/Structures
Johnson, D.L. (1985), “An Investigation into
Research Lab., University of Texas, Austin,
the Interaction of Flanges and Webs in
TX.
Wide-Flange Shapes,” Proceedings of the
Annual Technical Session and Meeting, Kanchanalai, T. and Lu, L.-W. (1979),
Cleveland, OH, April 16-17, 1985, “Analysis and Design of Framed Columns
Structural Stability Research Council, under Minor Axis Bending,” Engineering
Bethlehem, PA, pp. 397–405. Journal, AISC, Vol. 16, No. 2, 2nd
Quarter, pp. 29–41.
Johnson, D.L. (1996), “Final Report on Tee
Stub Tests,” Butler Corporation Kanno, R. and Deierlein, G.G. (1997),
Research Report, Grandview, MO, May. “Seismic Behavior of Composite (RCS)
Beam- Column Joint Subassemblies,”
Johnson, R.P. and Yuan, H. (1998), “Existing
Composite Construction III, ASCE,
Rules and New Tests for Stud Shear
Reston, VA.
Connectors in Troughs of Profiled
Sheeting,” Proceedings of the Institution Kasai, K. and Popov, E.P. (1984), “On Seismic
of Civil Engineers: Structures and Design of Eccentrically Braced Steel
Buildings, Vol. 128, No. 3, pp. 244–251. Frames,” Proceedings of the 8th World
Johnston, B.G. (1939), “Pin-Connected Plate Conference on Earthquake Engine ering,
Links,” Transactions of the ASCE, Vol. EERI, Vol. 5, pp.387-394, San Francisco,
104, pp. 314–339. CA.
Johnston, B.G. and Green, L.F. (1940), Kasai, K. and Popov, E.P. (1986a), “General
“Flexible Welded Angle Connections,” Behavior of WF Steel Shear Link Beams,”
The Welding Journal, AWS, October. Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE,
Vol. 112, No. 2, February, Reston, VA.
Johnston, B.G. and Deits, G.R. (1942),
“Tests of Miscellaneous Welded Kasai, K. and Popov, E.P. (1986b), “Cyclic
Building Connections,” The Welding Web Buckling Control for Shear Link
Journal, AWS, November, p. 5. Beams,” Journal of Structural Engineering,
ASCE, Vol. 112, No. 3, March, Reston,
Johnston, B.G. (ed.) (1976), Guide to Stability
VA.
Design for Metal Structures, 3rd Ed.,
Structural Stability Research Council, John Kasai, K. and Popov, E.P. (1986c), A Study of
Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY. Seismically Resistant Eccentrically Braced
Frames, Report No. UCB/EERC-86/01,
Kaczinski, M.R., Schneider, C.R., Dexter,
Earthquake Engineering Research Center,
R.J. and Lu, L.-W. (1994), “Local Web
Berkeley, CA.
Crippling of Unstiffened Multi-Cell Box
Sections,” Proceedings of the ASCE Kato, B. (1990), “Deformation Capacity of
Structures Congress ’94, Atlanta, GA, Steel Structures,” Journal of
Vol. 1, American Society of Civil Constructional Steel Research, Vol. 17, No.
Engineers, New York, NY, pp. 343–348. 1–2, pp. 33–94.

SBC 306-CR-18 273

REFERENCES

Kaufmann, E.J. and Fisher, J.W. (2001), Journal of Bridge Engineering, ASCE,
Effect of Straightening Method on the Vol. 12, No. 2, pp. 174–183.
Cyclic Behavior of K-area In Steel
Kirby, P.A. and Nethercot, D.A. (1979), Design
Rolled Shapes, ATLSS Center, Lehigh
for Structural Stability, John Wiley & Sons,
University, December.
Inc., New York, NY.
Kaufmann, E.J., Metrovich, B.R., and Kirby, B.R. and Preston, R.R. (1988), “High
Pense, A.W. (2001), Characterization of Temperature Properties of Hot-Rolled
Cyclic Inelastic Strain Behavior On Structural Steels for Use in Fire
Properties of A572 Gr. 50 and A913 Gr Engineering Design Studies,” Fire Safety
50 Rolled Sections, ATLSS Center, Journal, Vol. 13, pp. 27–37.
Lehigh University, August.
Kishi, N. and Chen, W.F. (1986), “Data Base
Kaufmann, E.J., Metrovich, B., Pense, A.W. of Steel Beam-to-Column Connections,”
and Fisher, J.W. (2001), “Effect of Vol. 1 and 2, Structural Engineering
Manufacturing Process on k-Area Report No. CE-STR-86-26, School of
Properties and Service Performance,” Civil Engineering, Purdue University,
Proceedings of the North American Steel West Lafayette, IN.
Construction Conference, Fort
Lauderdale, FL, May 9-12, 2001, Kitipornchai, S. and Trahair, N.S. (1980),
American Institute of Steel Construction, “Buckling Properties of Monosymmetric
Chicago, IL, pp. 17.1–17.24. I-Beams,” Journal of the Structural
Division, ASCE, Vol. 106, No. ST5,
Kavanagh, T.C. (1962), “Effective Length of May, pp. 941–957.
Framed Columns,” Transactions of the
American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. Kitipornchai, S. and Traves, W.H. (1989),
127, pp. 81–101. “Welded-Tee End Connections for
Circular Hollow Tubes,” Journal of
Keating, P.B. and Fisher, J.W. (1986), Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol.
“Evaluation of Fatigue Tests and Design 115, No.12, pp. 3,155–3,170.
Criteria on Welded Details,” NCHRP
Report No. 286, Transportation Research Kitayama, K., Otani, S., and Aoyama, H.
Board, Washington DC, September. (1987), “Earthquake Resistant Design
Criteria for Reinforced Concrete Interior
Kemp, A.R. (1986), “Factors Affecting the Beam-Column Joints,” Proceedings of the
Rotation Capacity of Plastically Designed Pacific Conference on Earthquake
Members,” The Structural Engineer, Vol. Engineering, Wairakei, New Zealand.
64B, No. 2, June, The Institution of
Klöppel, K. and Seeger, T. (1964),
Structural Engineers, London, England.
“Dauerversuche Mit Einschnittigen HV-
Kemp, A.R. (1996), “Inelastic Local and Verbindurgen Aus ST37,” Der Stahlbau,
Lateral Buckling in Design Codes,” Vol. 33, No. 8, August, pp. 225–245 and
Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 33, No. 11, November, pp. 335–346.
Vol. 122, No. 4, pp. 374–382.
Kosteski, N. and Packer, J.A. (2003),
Kim, H.J. and Yura, J.A. (1996), “The Effect “Longitudinal Plate and Through Plate-
of End Distance on the Bearing Strength to-HSS Welded Connections,” Journal of
of Bolted Connections,” PMFSEL Report Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol.
No. 96-1, University of Texas, Austin, TX. 129, No. 4, pp. 478–486.
Kim, Y.D., Jung, S.-K. and White, D.W. Krawinkler, H. (2001), Private
(2007), “Transverse Stiffener Communication with Mark Saunders,
Requirements in Straight and November 2001.
Horizontally Curved Steel I-Girders,”

SBC 306-CR-18 274

REFERENCES

Kuchenbecker, G.H., White, D.W. and MN.

Surovek-Maleck, A.E. (2004), “Simplified
Design of Building Frames Using First- Lee, S.C., Yoo, C.H. and Yoon, D.Y. (2002b),
“Behavior of Intermediate Transverse
Order Analysis and K 1,” Proceedings
Stiffeners Attached on Web Panels,”
of the Annual Technical Session and
Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE,
Meeting, Long Beach, CA, March 24-27,
Vol. 128, No. 3, pp. 337–345.
2004, Structural Stability Research
Council, Rolla, MO, pp. 119–138. Lee, D., Cotton, S. C., Hajjar, J. F., Dexter,
Kulak, G.L., Fisher, J.W., and Struik, J.H.A. R. J., and Ye, Y. (2005a), “Cyclic
(1987), Guide to Design Criteria for Bolted Behavior of Steel Moment-Resisting
Connections Reinforced by Alternative
and Riveted Joints, 2nd Ed., John Wiley &
Column Stiffener Details: I. Connections
Sons, New York, NY.
Performance and Continuity Plate
Kulak, G.L. and Grondin, G.Y. (2001), “AISC Detailing,” Engineering Journal, AISC,
LRFD Rules for Block Shear—A Vol. 42, No. 4, 4th Quarter, pp. 189-214.
Review,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol.
38, No. 4, 4th Quarter, pp. 199–203. Lee, D., Cotton, S. C., Hajjar, J. F., Dexter,
R. J., and Ye, Y. (2005b), “Cyclic
Kulak, G.L. and Grondin, G.Y. (2002), Behavior of Steel Moment-Resisting
“Closure: AISC LRFD Rules for Block Connections Reinforced by Alternative
Shear—A Review,” Engineering Journal, Column Stiffener Details: II. Panel Zone
AISC, Vol. 39, No. 4, 4th Quarter, p. 241. Behavior and Doubler Plate Detailing,”
Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 42, No.
Kulak, G.L. (2002), High Strength Bolts: A
4, 4th Quarter, pp. 215-238.
Primer for Structural Engineers, Design
Guide 17, AISC, Chicago, IL. Leigh, J.M. and Lay, M.G. (1978), “Laterally
Kurobane, Y., Packer, J.A., Wardenier, J. and Unsupported Angles with Equal and
Yeomans, N.F. (2004), “Design Guide for Unequal Legs,” Report MRL 22/2, July,
Structural Hollow Section Column Melbourne Research Laboratories,
Connections,” CIDECT Design Guide Clayton, Victoria, Australia.
No. 9, CIDECT (ed.) and Verlag TÜV Leigh, J.M. and Lay, M.G. (1984), “The
Rheinland, Köln, Germany. Design of Laterally Unsupported Angles,”
Lawson, R.M. (1992), “Shear Connection in Steel Design Current Practice, Section 2,
Composite Beams,” Composite Bending Members, American Institute of
Construction in Steel and Concrete II, W.S. Steel Construction, Chicago, IL, January.
Easterling and W.M.K. Roddis, (eds.), LeMessurier, W.J. (1976), “A Practical
American Society of Civil Engineers, New Method of Second Order Analysis, Part
York, NY. 1—Pin- Jointed Frames,” Engineering
Lay, M.G. (1965), “Flange Local Buckling in Journal, AISC, Vol. 13, No. 4, 4th
Wide-Flange Shapes,” Journal of the Quarter, pp. 89–96.
Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 91, No. 6, LeMessurier, W.J. (1977), “A Practical
December, Reston, VA. Method of Second Order Analysis, Part
Lee, D., Cotton, S., Dexter, R.J., Hajjar, J.F., 2—Rigid Frames,” Engineering Journal,
Ye, Y. and Ojard, S.D. (2002a), “Column AISC, Vol. 14, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, pp.
Stiffener Detailing and Panel Zone 49–67.
Behavior of Steel Moment Frame
LeMessurier, W.J. (1995), “Simplified K
Connections,” Report No. ST-01-3.2,
Factors for Stiffness Controlled Designs,”
Department of Civil Engineering,
Restructuring: America and Beyond,
University of Minnesota, Minneapolis,

SBC 306-CR-18 275

REFERENCES

Proceedings of ASCE Structures Congress Leon, R.T. and Easterling, W.S. (eds.) (2002),
XIII, Boston, MA, April 2-5, 1995, Connections in Steel Structures IV
American Society of Civil Engineers, Behavior, Strength and Design, American
New York, NY, pp. 1,797–1,812. Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago,
IL.
Leon, R.T. (1990), “Semi-Rigid Composite
Construction,” Journal of Constructional Leon, R.T., Kim, D.K. and Hajjar, J.F.
Steel Research, Vol. 15, No. 2, pp. 99–120, (2007), “Limit State Response of
Elsevier Science Publishers, London, Composite Columns and Beam-Columns
England. Part 1: Formulation of Design
Provisions for the 2005 AISC
Leon, R.T. (1990), “Serviceability of Specification,” Engineering Journal,
Composite Floor,” Proceedings of the 1990 AISC, Vol. 44, No. 4, 4th Quarter, pp.
National Steel Construction Conference, 341–358.
AISC, pp. 18:1–18:23.
Leon, R.T. and Hajjar, J.F. (2008), “Limit
Leon, R.T. and Ammerman, D.J. (1990), State Response of Composite Columns
“Semi-Rigid Connection for Gravity and Beam-Columns Part 2: Application
Loads,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. of Design Provisions for the 2005 AISC
27, No. 1, 1st Quarter, pp. 1–11, Chicago, Specification,” Engineering Journal,
IL. AISC, Vol. 45, No. 1, 1st Quarter, pp. 21–
Leon, R.T. and Forcier, G.P. (1992), 46.
“Parametric Study of Composite Frames,” Lesik, D.F. and Kennedy, D.J.L. (1990),
Connections in Steel Structures II, “Ultimate Strength of Fillet Welded
Proceedings of the Second International Connections Loaded in Plane,” Canadian
Workshop on Connections in Steel Journal of Civil Engineering, Vol. 17, No.
Structures, AISC, pp. 152–159, Chicago, 1, pp. 55–67.
IL.
Lewis, B.E. and Zwerneman, F.J. (1996),
Leon, R.T. and Alsamsam, I. (1993), “Edge Distance, Spacing, and Bearing in
Performance and Serviceability of Bolted Connections,” Research Report,
Composite Floors, Structural Engineering Department of Civil and Environmental
in Natural Hazards Mitigation, Engineering, Oklahoma State University,
Proceedings of the ASCE Structures Stillwater, OK, July.
Congress, ASCE, pp. 1,479–1,484.
Libby, J.R. (1981), “Eccentrically Braced
Leon, R.T. (1994), “Composite Semi-Rigid Frame Construction—A Case History,”
Construction,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 18,
Vol. 31. No. 2, 2nd Quarter, pp. 57–67. No. 4, 4th Quarter, Chicago, IL.
Leon, R.T., Hoffman, J. and Staeger, T. Liew, J.Y., White, D.W. and Chen, W.F.
(1996), Design of Partially-Restrained (1993), “Second-Order Refined Plastic-
Composite Connections, Design Guide 8, Hinge Analysis for Frame Design, Parts I
AISC, Chicago, IL. and II,” Journal of Structural Engineering,
ASCE, Vol. 119, No. 11, pp. 3,196–
Leon, R.T., Hajjar, J.F., and Shield, C.K. 3,237.
(1997), “The Effect of Composite Floor
Slabs on the Behavior of Steel Moment- Liu, J., Sabelli, R., Brockenbrough, R. L.,
Resisting Frames in the Northridge and Fraser, T. P. (2007), “Expected
Earthquake,” Composite Construction in Yield Stress and Tensile Strength Ratios
Steel and Concrete III, ASCE, pp. 735– for Determination of Expected Member
751, Reston, VA. Capacity in the 2005 AISC Seismic
Provisions,” Engineering Journal,

SBC 306-CR-18 276

REFERENCES

AISC, Vol. 44, No. 1, 1st Quarter, Malley, J.O. and Popov, E.P. (1984), “Shear Links in
Chicago, IL. Eccentrically Braced Frames,” Journal of
Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 110, No. 9,
Lorenz, R.F., Kato, B. and Chen, W.F. (eds.)
September, Reston, VA.
(1993), Semi-Rigid Connections in Steel
Frames, Council for Tall Buildings and Marino, F.J. (1966), “Ponding of Two-Way
Urban Habitat, Bethlehem, PA. Roof Systems,” Engineering Journal,
AISC, Vol. 3, No. 3, 3rd Quarter, pp. 93–
Lu, Y.O. and Kennedy, D.J.L. (1994), “The
100.
Flexural Behaviour of Concrete-Filled
Hollow Structural Sections,” Canadian Marshall, P.W. (1992), Design of Welded
Journal of Civil Engineering, Vol. 21, No. Tubular Connections: Basis and Use of
1, pp. 111–130. AWS Code Provisions, Elsevier,
Amsterdam, the Netherlands.
Lui, Z. and Goel, S.C. (1987), “Investigation
of Concrete-Filled Steel Tubes Under Martinez-Garcia, J.M. and Ziemian, R.D.
Cyclic Bending and Buckling,” UMCE (2006), “Benchmark Studies to Compare
Report 87-3, Department of Civil and Frame Stability Provisions,”
Environmental Engineering, University Proceedings—Annual Technical Session
of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI. and Meeting, Structural Stability Research
Council, San Antonio, TX, pp. 425–442.
Lutz, L.A. and Fisher, J.M. (1985), “A
Unified Approach for Stability Bracing McDaniel, C.C., Uang, C.M., and Seible, F.
Requirements, Engineering Journal, (2002), “Cyclic Testing of Built-Up Steel
AISC, Vol. 22, No. 4, 4th Quarter, pp. Shear Links for the New Bay Bridge,”
163–167. Journal of Structural Engineering,ASCE,
Vol. 129, No. 6, pp. 801–809, Reston, VA.
Lutz, L.A. (1992), “Critical Slenderness of
Compression Members with Effective McGuire, W. (1992), “Computer-Aided
Lengths about Non-Principal Axes,” Analysis,” Constructional Steel Design:
Proceedings of the Annual Technical An International Guide, P.J. Dowling, J.E.
Session and Meeting, April 6-7, 1992, Harding and R. Bjorhovde (eds.), Elsevier
Pittsburgh, PA, Structural Stability Applied Science, New York, NY, pp. 915–
Research Council, Bethlehem, PA. 932.
Lyse, I. and Schreiner, N.G. (1935), “An McGuire, W., Gallagher, R.H. and Ziemian,
Investigation of Welded Seat Angle R.D. (2000), Matrix Structural Analysis,
Connections,”The Welding Journal, AWS, 2nd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New
February, p. 1. York, NY.
Lyse, I. and Gibson, G.J. (1937), “Effect of McMullin, K.M. and Astaneh-Asl, A. (1994),
Welded Top Angles on Beam-Column “Cyclical Behavior od Welded Steel Shear
Connections,” The Welding Journal, AWS, Studs, Structures Congress XII, ASCE, pp.
October. 1024-1029.
Madugula, M.K.S. and Kennedy, J.B. (1985), Merovich, A.T., Nicoletti, J.P., and Hartle, E.
Single and Compound Angle Members, (1982), “Eccentric Bracing in Tall
Elsevier Applied Science, New York, NY. Buildings,” Journal of the Structural
Division, ASCE, Vol. 108, No. 9,
Malley, J.O. and Popov, E.P. (1983), “Design September, Reston, VA.
Considerations for Shear Links in Eccentrically
Braced Frames,” Earthquake Engineering Mottram, J.T. and Johnson, R.P. (1990),
Research Center Report EERC83/24, University “Push Tests on Studs Welded Through
of California, Berkeley, CA., 126 p. Profiled Steel Sheeting,” The Structural

SBC 306-CR-18 277

REFERENCES

Engineer, Vol. 68, No. 10, pp. 187–193. Nishiyama, I., Hasegawa, T., and Yamanouchi,
Munse, W.H. and Chesson, Jr., E., (1963), H. (1990), “Strength and Deformation
“Riveted and Bolted Joints: Net Section Capacity of Reinforced Concrete Column
Design,”Journal of the Structural Division, to Steel Beam Joint Panels,” Building
ASCE, Vol. 89, No. ST1, February, pp. Research Institute Report 71, Ministry of
49–106. Construction, Tsukuba, Japan.

Murray, T.M., Kline, D.P. and Rojani, K.B. Nowak, A.S. and Collins, K. R. (2000),
(1992), “Use of Snug-Tightened Bolts in Reliability of Structures, McGraw-Hill,
End- Plate Connections,” Connections in New York, NY.
Steel Structures II, R. Bjorhovde, A. NRC (1974), “Expansion Joints in
Colson, G. Haaijer and J.W.B. Stark, Buildings,” Technical Report No. 65,
(eds.), AISC, Chicago, IL. Standing Committee on Structural
Murray, T.M., Allen, D.E. and Ungar, E.E. Engineering of the Federal
(1997), Floor Vibrations Due to Human Construction Council, Building
Activity, Design Guide 11, AISC, Chicago, Research Advisory Board, Division of
IL. Engineering, National Research Council,
National Academy of Sciences,
Murray, T.M. and Sumner, E.A. (2004), End- Washington, DC.
Plate Moment Connections—Wind and
Seismic Applications, Design Guide 4, 2nd NRCC (1990), National Building Code of
Ed., AISC, Chicago, IL. Canada, National Research Council of
Canada, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada.
Nakashima, M., Kanao, I., and Liu, D.
(2002), “Lateral Instability and Lateral Oehlers, D.J. and Bradford, M.A. (1995),
Bracing of Steel Beams Subjected to Composite Steel and Concrete Members,
Cyclic Loading,” Journal of Structural Elsevier Science, Inc., Tarrytown, NY.
Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 128, No. 10, Okazaki, T. (2004), “Seismic Performance of Link-
October, pp. 1308–1316. to-Column Connections in Steel Eccentrically
Nethercot, D.A. (1985), “Steel Beam to Braced Frames,” Ph.D. Dissertation, Department
Column Connections—A Review of Test of Civil Engineering, University of Texas at
Data and Their Applicability to the Austin, Austin, TX.
Evaluation of the Joint Behaviour of the Okazaki, T., Arce, G., Ryu, H., and Engelhardt, M.D.
Performance of Steel Frames,” CIRIA, (2004a), “Recent Research on Link Performance
London, England. in Steel Eccentrically Braced Frames,”
Newell, James D., and Uang, Chia-Ming Proceedings, 13th World Conference on
(2008), “Cyclic Behavior of Steel Wide- Earthquake Engineering, August 1-6, 2004,
Flange Columns Subjected to Large Drift,” Vancouver, BC.
Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Okazaki, T., Engelhardt, M.D., Nakashima, M., and
Vol. 134, No. 8, August, pp. 1334–1342. Suita, K. (2004b), “Experimental Study on Link-
NFPA (2002a), Standard for the Inspection, to-Column Connections in Steel Eccentrically
Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Braced Frames,” Proceedings, 13th World
Fire Protection Systems, NFPA 25, Conference on Earthquake Engineering, August
National Fire Protection Association, 1-6, 2004, Vancouver, BC.
Quincy, MA. Okazaki, T., Engelhardt, M.D., Drolias, A., Schell,
NFPA (2002b), Standard on Smoke and Heat E., Hong, J.K., and Uang, C.M. (2009),
Venting, NFPA 204, National Fire “Experimental Investigation of Link-to-Column
Protection Association, Quincy, MA. Connections in Eccentrically Braced Frames,”
Journal of Constructional Steel Research, Vol.

SBC 306-CR-18 278

REFERENCES

65, pp. 1401–1412. Welding (IIW) Document XV-E-04-291,

University of Toronto, Toronto, Canada.
Ollgaard, J.G., Slutter, R.G. and Fisher, J.W.
(1971), “Shear Strength of Stud Shear Packer, J.A. and Wardenier, J. (2010), “Design
Connections in Lightweight and Normal Guide for Rectangular Hollow Section
Weight Concrete,” Engineering Journal, (RHS) Joints under Predominantly Static
AISC, Vol. 8, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, pp. 55– Loading,” Design Guide No. 3, CIDECT,
64. 2nd Ed., LSS Verlag, Köln, Germany.
OSHA (2001), Safety and Health Regulations Pallarés, L. and Hajjar, J.F. (2010a), “Headed
for Construction, Standards—29 CFR Steel Stud Anchors in Composite
1926 Subpart R—Steel Erection, Structures: Part II. Tension and
Occupational Safety and Health Interaction,” Journal of Constructional
Administration, Washington, DC. Steel Research, Vol. 66, No. 2, February,
pp. 213–228.
OSHA (2010), Safety Standards for Steel
Erection, Part Number 1926, Subpart R, Pallarés, L. and Hajjar, J.F. (2010b), “Headed
Occupational Safety and Health Steel Stud Anchors in Composite
Administration, Washington, D.C. Structures: Part I. Shear,” Journal of
Constructional Steel Research, Vol. 66,
Park, R., Priestley, M.J.N., and Gill, W.D.
No. 2, February, pp. 198–212.
(1982), “Ductility of Square Confined
Concrete Columns,” Journal of the Parra-Montesinos, G. and Wight, J.K.
Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 108, (2001), “Modeling Shear Behavior of
No. ST4, April, pp. 929–950, Reston, Hybrid RCS Beam-Column
VA. Connections,” Journal of Structural
Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 127, No. 1, pp.
Packer, J.A., Birkemoe, P.C., and Tucker, W.J.
3–11.
(1984), “Canadian Implementation of
CIDECT Monograph No. 6,” CIDECT Pate-Cornell, E. (1994), “Quantitative Safety
Report No. 5AJ-84/9-E, University of Goals for Risk Management of Industrial
Toronto, Toronto, Canada. Facilities,” Structural Safety, Vol. 13, No.
3, pp. 145–157.
Packer, J.A., Wardenier, J., Kurobane, Y., Dutta,
D. and Yeomans, N. (1992) “Design Guide Perlynn, M.J. and Kulak, G.L. (1974), “Web
for Rectangular Hollow Section (RHS) Joints Slenderness Limits for Compact Beam-
Under Predominantly Static Loading (3)” Columns,” Structural Engineering
CIDECT (Ed.) and Verlag TÜV Rheinland, Report No. 50, Department of Civil
Cologne, Germany. Engineering, University of Alberta.
Packer, J.A. and Cassidy, C.E. (1995), Popov, E.P. and Stephen, R.M. (1977),
“Effective Weld Length for HSS T, Y “Tensile Capacity of Partial Penetration
and X Connections,” Journal of Structural Welds,” Journal of the Structural
Engineering, ASCE, V o l. 121, No. 10, pp. Division, ASCE, Vol. 103, No. ST9,
1,402–1,408. September, Reston, VA.
Packer, J.A. and Henderson, J.E. (1997), Hollow Popov, E.P. and Stephen, R.M. (1977),
Structural Section Connections and “Capacity of Columns with Splice
Trusses— A Design Guide, 2nd Ed., Imperfections,”Engineering Journal,
Canadian Institute of Steel Construction, AISC, Vol. 14, No. 1, 1st Quarter, pp. 16–
Toronto, Canada. 23.
Packer, J.A. (2004), “Reliability of Welded Popov, E.P. (1980), “An Update on
Tubular K-Connection Resistance Eccentric Seismic Bracing,” Engineering
Expressions,” International Institute of

SBC 306-CR-18 279

REFERENCES

Journal, AISC, Vol. 17, No. 3, 3rd Rahal, K.N. and Harding, J.E. (1991),
Quarter, pp. 70–71. “Transversely Stiffened Girder Webs
Subjected to Combined In-Plane
Popov, E.P. and Engelhardt, M.D. (1988), Loading,” Proceedings of the Institution of
“Seismic Eccentrically Braced Frames,” Civil Engineers, Part 2, 1991, June, pp.
Journal of Constructional Steel Research, 237–258.
Vol. 10, pp. 321–354.
Ravindra, M.K. and Galambos, T.V. (1978),
Popov, E.P., Engelhardt, M.D., and Ricles, J.M. “Load and Resistance Factor Design for
(1989), “Eccentrically Brace Frames: U. S. Steel,”Journal of the Structural Division,
Practice,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9, September, pp.
26, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, pp. 66–80, Chicago, 1,337–1,353.
IL.
RCSC (2009), Specification for Structural Joints
Popov, E.P., Blondet, M., Stepanov, L., and Using High Strength Bolts, Research Council
Stojadinovic, B. (1996), “Full-Scale Beam- on Structural Connections, American
toColumn Connection Tests,” University of Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL.
California Department of Civil Engineering,
Berkeley, CA. Richards, P. (2004), “Cyclic Stability and
Capacity Design of Steel Eccentrically
Preece, F.R. (1968), “AWS-AISC Fillet Weld Braced Frames,” Ph.D. Dissertation,
Study—Longitudinal and Transverse University of California, San Diego, San
Shear Tests,” Testing Engineers, Inc., Los Diego, CA. (Advisor: C.M. Uang).
Angeles, CA, May.
Richards, P., Uang, C.M., Okazaki, T., and
Prion, H.G.L. and Boehme, J. (1994),
Engelhardt, M.D. (2004), “Impact of
“Beam-column behaviour of steel
Recent Research Findings on Eccentrically
tubes filled with high strength
Braced Frame Design,” Proceedings, 2004
concrete,” Canadian Journal of Civil
SEAOC Convention, August 25-28, 2004,
Engineering, Vol. 21, No. 2, pp. 207–
Monterey, CA.
218.
Ricker, D.T. (1989), “Cambering Steel
Prochnow, S.D., Ye, Y., Dexter, R.J., Hajjar, Beams,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol.
J.F. and Cotton, S.C. (2000), “Local 26, No. 4, 4th Quarter, pp. 136–142.
Flange Bending and Local Web Yielding
Limit States in Steel Moment Resisting Ricles, J.M. and Yura, J.A. (1983), “Strength
Connections,” Connections in Steel of Double-Row Bolted Web
Structures IV Behavior, Strength and Connections,”
Design, R.T. Leon and W.S. Easterling Ricles, J.M. and Popov, E.P. (1987a), Dynamic
(eds.), AISC, Chicago, IL, pp. 318–328. Analysis of Seismically Resistant
Eccentrically Braced Frames, Report No.
Rahal, K.N. and Harding, J.E. (1990a), UCB/EERC-87/107, Earthquake Enginee
“Transversely Stiffened Girder Webs ring Research Center, Berkeley, CA.
Subjected to Shear Loading—Part 1:
Behaviour,” Proceedings of the Institution Ricles, J.M. and Popov, E.P. (1987b),
of Civil Engineers, Part 2, 1989, March, Experiments on EBFs with Composite
pp. 47–65. Floors, Report No. UCB/EERC-87/06,
Earthquake Engineering Research
Rahal, K.N. and Harding, J.E. (1990b), Center, Berkeley, CA.
“Transversely Stiffened Girder Webs
Subjected to Shear Loading—Part 2: Ricles, J.M. and Paboojian, S.D. (1994),
Stiffener Design,” Proceedings of the “Seismic Performance of Steel-Encased
Institution of Civil Engineers, Part 2, 1989, Composite,” Journal of Structural
March, pp. 67–87. Engineering, ASCE, 120(8), pp. 2474–

SBC 306-CR-18 280

REFERENCES

2494. Design: An International Guide, P.J.

Ricles, J.M., Peng, S.W., and Lu, L.W. Dowling, J.E. Harding and R. Bjorhovde,
(2004a), “Seismic Behavior of (eds.), Elsevier Applied Science, London,
Composite Concrete Filled Steel Tube United Kingdom.
Column-Wide Flange Beam Moment Rolloos, A. (1969), “The Effective Weld
Connections,” Journal of Structural Length of Beam to Column Connections
Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 130, No. 2, pp. without Stiffening Plates,” Stevin Report
223–232, Reston, VA. 6-69-7-HL, Delft University of
Roberts, T.M. (1981), “Slender Plate Girders Technology, Delft, the Netherlands.
Subjected to Edge Loading,” Proceedings Ruddy, J. (1986), “Ponding of Concrete
of the Institution of Civil Engineers, Part 2, Deck Floors,” Engineering Journal,
No. 71, September. AISC, Vol. 23, No. 3, 3rd Quarter, pp.
Robinson, H. (1967), “Tests of Composite 107–115.
Beams with Cellular Deck,” Journal of Ruddy, J.L., Marlo, J.P., Ioannides, S.A. and
the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 93, No. Alfawakhiri, F. (2003), Fire Resistance of
ST4, pp. 139–163. Structural Steel Framing, Design Guide 19,
Roddenberry, M.R., Easterling, W.S. and AISC, Chicago, IL.
Murray, T.M. (2002a) “Behavior and Saari, W.K., Hajjar, J.F., Schultz, A. E., and
Strength of Welded Stud Shear Shield, C.K. (2004), “Behavior of Shear
Connectors,” Report No. CE/VPI– Studs in Steel Frames with Reinforced
02/04, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and Concrete Infill Walls,” Journal of
State University, Blacksburg, VA. Constructional Steel Research, Vol. 60, pp.
Roddenberry, M.R., Lyons, J.C., Easterling, 1453–1480.
W.S. and Murray, T.M. (2002b), Saatcioglu, M. (1991), Deformability of Steel
“Performance and Strength of Welded Columns, ACI 127.5, American Concrete
Shear Studs,” Composite Construction in Institute, Detroit, MI.
Steel and Concrete IV, American Society of
Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, pp. 458–469. SAC (1996), Experimental Investigations of
Beam-Column Subassemblages SAC96-
Roeder, C.W. and Popov, E.P. (1978), 01, SAC Joint Venture, Sacramento, CA.
“Eccentrically Braced Frames for Earth
quakes,” Journal of the Structural Division, SAC (1997), “Protocol for Fabrication,
ASCE, Vol. 104, No. 3, March, Reston, Inspection, Testing, and Documentation of
VA. BeamColumn Connection Tests and Other
Specimens,” SAC/BD-97/02 Version 1.1,
Roeder, C.W. and Foutch, D.F. (1996), SAC Joint Venture, Sacramento, CA.
“Experimental Results for Seismic
Resistant Steel Moment Frame SAC (2000), “Loading Histories for Seismic
Connections,” Journal of Structural Performance Testing of SMRF
Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 122, No. 6, June, Components and Assemblies,” SAC/BD-
Reston, VA. 00/10, SAC Joint Venture, Sacramento,
CA.
Roeder, C.W., Cameron, B. and Brown, C.B.
(1999), “Composite Action in Concrete Salmon, C.G. and Johnson, J.E. (1996), Steel
Filled Tubes,” Journal of Structural Structures: Design and Behavior, 4th
Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 125, No. 5, May, Edition, HarperCollins College Publishers,
pp. 477–484. New York, NY.

Roik, K. and Bergmann, R. (1992), Salmon, C.G., Johnson, J.E. and Malhas, F.A.
“Composite Column,” Constructional Steel (2008), Steel Structures: Design and

SBC 306-CR-18 281

REFERENCES

Behavior, Prentice-Hall, Upper Saddle SFSA (1995), Steel Castings Handbook, Steel
River, NJ. Founders Society of America, Crystal Lake,
IL.
Salvadori, M. (1956), “Lateral Buckling of
Eccentrically Loaded I-Columns,” Shanmugam, N.E. and Lakshmi, B. (2001),
Transactions of the ASCE, Vol. 122, No. 1. “State of the Art Report on Steel-
Sato, A. and Uang, C.-M. (2007), “Modified Concrete Composite Columns,” Journal of
Slenderness Ratio for Built-up Constructional Steel Research, Vol. 57, No.
Members,”Engineering Journal, AISC, pp. 10, October, pp. 1,041–1,080.
269–280. Sheikh, S.A. and Uzumeri, S.M. (1980),
“Strength and Ductility of Tied
Sawyer, H.A. (1961), “Post-Elastic Behavior
of Wide-Flange Steel Beams,” Journal of Columns,” Journal of the Structural
the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 87, Division, ASCE, Vol. 106, No. ST5,
No. ST8, December, Reston, VA. February, pp. 1079–1102, Reston, VA.

SBC 306-07: Saudi Building Code “Steel Sheikh, T.M., Deierlein, G.G., Yura, J.A.,
Structures”, 2007. and Jirsa, J.O. (1989), “Part 1: Beam
Column Moment Connections for
Schilling, C.G. (1965), Buckling Strength of Composite Frames,” Journal of
Circular Tubes, Journal of the Structural Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol.
Division, ASCE, Vol. 91, No. ST5, pp. 115, No. 11, November, pp. 2859–2876,
325–348. Reston, VA.
Schuster, J.W. (1997), Structural Steel Shen, J., Sabol, T., and Akbas, B. and
Fabrication Practices, McGraw-Hill, New Sutchiewcharn, N. (2010), “Seismic
York, NY. Demand on Column Splices in Steel
SDI (2001), Standard Practice Details, Steel Moment Frames”. Engineering Journal ,
Deck Institute, Fox River Grove, IL. AISC, Vol. 47, No. 4, Chicago, IL.

SDI (2001), Standard Practice Details, No. Sherbourne, A.N. and Jensen, C.D. (1957),
SPD2, Steel Deck Institute, Fox River “Direct Welded Beam Column
Grove, IL. Connections,” Report. No. 233.12, Fritz
Engineering Laboratory, Lehigh
SDI (2004), Diaphragm Design Manual, 3rd University, Bethlehem, PA.
Edition—No. DDMO3, Steel Deck
Institute, Fox River Grove, IL. Sherman, D.R. (1976), “Tentative Criteria for
Structural Applications of Steel Tubing
SDI (2007), Design Manual for Composite and Pipe,” American Iron and Steel
Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks, No. Institute, Washington, DC, August.
31, Steel Deck Institute, Fox River Grove,
IL. Sherman, D.R. and Tanavde, A.S. (1984),
“Comparative Study of Flexural
SDI (2004), Diaphragm Design Manual, Steel Capacity of Pipes,” Internal Report,
Deck Institute, Fox River Grove, IL. Department of Civil Engineering,
Seaburg, P.A. and Carter, C.J. (1997), University of Wisconsin- Milwaukee, WI,
Torsional Analysis of Structural Steel March.
Members, Design Guide 9, AISC, Chicago, Sherman, D.R. and Ales, J.M. (1991), “The
IL. Design of Shear Tabs with Tubular
SFPE (2002), Handbook of Fire Protection Columns,” Proceedings of the National
Engineering, 3rd Ed., P.J. DiNenno (ed.), Steel Construction Conference,
National Fire Protection Association, Washington, DC, American Institute of
Quincy, MA. Steel Construction, Chicago, IL, pp. 1.2–

SBC 306-CR-18 282

REFERENCES

1.22. Structures and Buildings, Vol. 116,

February, pp. 54–68.
Sherman, D.R. (1992), “Tubular Members,”
Constructional Steel Design—An Summers, P.A. and Yura, J.A. (1982), “The
International Guide, P.J. Dowling, J.H. Behavior of Beams Subjected to
Harding and R. Bjorhovde (eds.), Elsevier Concentrated Loads,” Report No. 82-5,
Applied Science, London, England, pp. Phil M. Ferguson Structural Engineering
91–104. Laboratory, University of Texas, Austin,
TX, August.
Sherman, D.R. (1995a), “Stability Related
Deterioration of Structures,” Proceedings Surovek-Maleck, A.E. and White, D.W.
of the Annual Technical Session and (2003). “Direct Analysis Approach for the
Meeting, Kansas City, MO, March 27-28, Assessment of Frame Stability:
1995, Structural Stability Research Verification Studies,” Proceedings—
Council, Bethlehem, PA. Annual Technical Session and Meeting,
Sherman, D.R. (1995b), “Simple Framing Structural Stability Research Council,
Connections to HSS Columns,” Baltimore, MD, pp. 423–441.
Proceedings of the National Steel
Surovek-Maleck, A., White, D.W. and Leon,
Construction Conference, San Antonio,
R.T. (2004), “Direct Analysis and Design
Texas, American Institute of Steel
of Partially-Restrained Steel Framing
Construction, Chicago, IL, pp. 30.1–
Systems,” Journal of Structural
30.16.
Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 131, No. 9, pp.
Sherman, D.R. (1996), “Designing with 1376–1389.
Structural Tubing,” Engineering Journal,
AISC, Vol. 33, No. 3, 3rd Quarter, pp. Takagi, J. and Deierlein, G.G. (2007),
101–109. “Strength Design Criteria for Steel
Slutter, R.G. and Driscoll, G.C. (1965), Members at Elevated Temperatures,”
“Flexural Strength of Steel-Concrete Journal of Constructional Steel
Composite Beams,” Journal of the Research, Vol. 63, pp. 1036–1050.
Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 91, No. Taylor, A.C. and Ojalvo, M. (1966),
ST2, April, pp. 71–99. “Torsional Restraint of Lateral Buckling,”
Sourochnikoff, B. (1950), “Wind Stresses in Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE,
Semi-Rigid Connections of Steel Vol. 92, No. ST2, pp. 115–129.
Framework,”Transactions of the ASCE, Thoft-Christensen, P. and Murotsu, Y. (1986)
Vol. 115, pp. 382–402. Application of Structural System
Stang, A.H. and Jaffe, B.S. (1948), Perforated Reliability Theory, Springer Verlag, Berlin.
Cover Plates for Steel Columns, Research Tide, R.H.R. (1985), “Reasonable Column
Paper RP1861, National Bureau of Design Equations,” Proceedings of the
Standards, Washington, DC. Annual Technical Session and Meeting,
Stanway, G.S., Chapman, J.C. and Dowling, Cleveland, OH, April 16-17, 1985,
P.J. (1993), “Behaviour of a Web Plate in Structural Stability Research Council,
Shear with an Intermediate Stiffener,” Bethlehem, PA.
Proceedings of the Institution of Civil
Tide, R.H.R. (1999), “Evaluation of Steel
Engineers, Structures and Buildings, Vol.
Properties and Cracking in the ‘k’-area
99, August, pp. 327–344.
of W Shapes,” Engineering Structures,
Stanway, G.S., Chapman, J.C. and Dowling,
Vol. 22, pp. 128-124.
P.J. (1996), “A Design Model for
Intermediate Web Stiffeners,” Proceedings Tide, R.H.R. (2001), “A Technical Note:
of the Institution of Civil Engineers, Derivation of the LRFD Column Design

SBC 306-CR-18 283

REFERENCES

Equations,” Engineering Journal, AISC, L.W. (2002), “Experimental Behavior of

Vol. 38, No. 3, 3rd Quarter, pp. 137–139. High Strength Square Concrete Filled
Tube Columns,” Journal of Structural
Tide, R.H.R. (2010), “Bolt Shear Design Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 128, No. 3, pp.
Considerations,” Engineering Journal, 309–318, Chicago, IL.
AISC, Vol. 47, No. 1, 1st Quarter, pp. 47–
64. Varma, A.H., and Zhang, K. (2009),
“Design of Non-Compact and Slender
Timoshenko, S.P. (1956), Strength of Concrete Filled Members,” Bowen
Materials, Vol. II, 3rd Ed., D. Van Laboratory Report No. 2009-01, School
Nostrand, New York, NY. of Civil Engineering, Purdue University,
West Lafayette, Indiana.
Timoshenko, S.P. and Gere, J.M. (1961),
Varma, A.H., Ricles, J.M., Sause, R. and Lu,
Theory of Elastic Stability, McGraw-Hill
L.-W. (2002), “Experimental Behavior of
Book Company, New York, NY.
High Strength Square Concrete Filled
Tremblay, R., Tchebotarev, N., and Filiatrault, Steel Tube (CFT) Columns,” Journal of
A. (1997), “Seismic Performance of RBS Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 128,
Connections for Steel Moment Resisting No. 3, pp. 309–318.
Frames: Influence of Loading Rate and
Varma, A.H. and Zhang, K. (2009),
Floor Slab,” Proceedings, STESSA ’97,
“Slenderness Limits for
Kyoto, Japan.
Noncompact/Slender Filled Members,”
Troup, E.W. (1999), “Effective Contract and Bowen Laboratory Report No. 2009-01,
Shop Drawings for Structural Steel,” School of Civil Engineering, Purdue
Proceedings of the AISC National Steel University, West Lafayette, IN, August.
Construction Conference, Toronto,
Vickery, B.J., Isyumov, N. and Davenport,
Ontario, May 19-21, 1999, American
A.G. (1983), “The Role of Damping, Mass
Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL
and Stiffness in the Reduction of Wind
pp. 37-1–37-15.
Effects on Structures,” Journal of Wind
Uang, C.M. and Chi, B. (2001), Effect of Engineering and Industrial Aerodynamics,
Straightening Method on the Cyclic Vol. 11, Nos. 1-3, pp. 285–294.
Behavior of k Area in Steel Rolled
Viest, I.M., Siess, C.P., Appleton, J.H. and
Shapes, Report No. SSRP-2001/05,
Newmark, N. (1952), “Full-Scale Tests
University of California, San Diego, CA,
of Channel Shear Connectors and
May.
Composite T-Beams,” Bulletin Series
Uang, C.M. and Fan, C.C. (2001), “Cyclic No. 405, Vol. 50, No. 29, University of
Stability Criteria for Steel Moment Illinois Engineering Experiment Station,
Connections with Reduced Beam University of Illinois, Urbana, IL.
Section,” Journal of Structural
Viest, I.M., Colaco, J.P., Furlong, R.W.,
Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 127, No. 9,
Griffis, L.G., Leon, R.T. and Wyllie,
September, Reston, VA.
L.A., Jr. (1997), Composite Construction:
Van der Sanden, P.G.F.J. (1995), “The Design for Buildings, McGraw-Hill, New
Behaviour of a Headed Stud Connection York, NY.
in a ‘New’ Push Test including a Ribbed Viest, I.M., Colaco, J.P., Furlong, R.W.,
Slab. Tests: Main Report,” BKO Report Griffis, L.G., Leon, R.T., and Wyllie,
No. 95-16, Eindhoven University of L.A., Jr. (1997), Composite
Technology, Eindhoven, the Netherlands, Construction: Design for Buildings,
March. McGraw-Hill/ASCE, Reston, VA.
Varma, A.H., Ricles, J.M., Sause, R. and Lu,

SBC 306-CR-18 284

REFERENCES

Von Kármán, T., Sechler, E.E. and Donnell, White, D.W. (2003), “Improved Flexural
L.H. (1932), “The Strength of Thin Design Provisions for I-Shaped Members
Plates in Compression,” Transactions of and Channels,” Structural Engineering,
the ASME, Vol. 54. Mechanics and Materials Report No. 23,
School of Civil and Environmental
Wardenier, J., Davies, G. and Stolle, P. (1981), Engineering, Georgia Institute of
“The Effective Width of Branch Plate to Technology, Atlanta, GA.
RHS Chord Connections in Cross
Joints,” Stevin Report 6-81-6, Delft White, D.W. and Jung, S.K (2003),
University of Technology, Delft, the “Simplified Lateral-Torsional Buckling
Netherlands. Equations for Singly-Symmetric I-
Section Members,” Structural
Wardenier, J., Kurobane, Y., Packer, J.A., Engineering, Mechanics and Materials
Dutta, D. and Yeomans, N. (1991), Design Report No. 24b, School of Civil and
Guide for Circular Hollow Section (CHS) Environmental Engineering, Georgia
Joints under Predominantly Static Loading, Institute of Technology, Atlanta, GA.
CIDECT Design Guide No. 1, CIDECT
White, D.W. (2004), “Unified Flexural
(ed.) and Verlag TÜV Rheinland, Köln,
Resistance Equations for Stability Design
Germany.
of Steel I- Section Members Overview,”
West, M.A. and Fisher, J.M. (2003), Structural Engineering, Mechanics and
Serviceability Design Considerations for Materials Report No. 24a, School of Civil
Steel Buildings, Design Guide 3, 2nd Ed., and Environmental Engineering, Georgia
AISC, Chicago, IL. Institute of Technology, Atlanta, GA.
Wheeler, A. and Bridge, R. (2006), “The White, D.W. and Barker, M. (2008), “Shear
Behaviour of Circular Concrete-Filled Resistance of Transversely-Stiffened
Thin- Walled Steel Tubes in Flexure,” Steel I- Girders,” Journal of Structural
Proceedings of the 5th International Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 134, No. 9, pp.
Conference on Composite Construction in 1,425–1,436.
Steel and Concrete V, R.T. Leon and J. White, D.W. and Goverdhan, A.V. (2008),
Lange (eds.), ASCE, Reston, Virginia, pp. “Design of PR Frames Using the AISC
413–423. Direct Analysis Method,” in Connections
White, D.W. and Chen, W.F. (ed.) (1993), in Steel Structures VI, R. Bjorhovde,
Plastic Hinge Based Methods for F.S.K. Bijlaard and L.F. Geschwindner
Advanced Analysis and Design of Steel (eds.), AISC, Chicago, IL, pp. 255–264.
Frames: An Assessment of State-of-the- Whittaker, A.S., Uang, C.-M., and Bertero,
Art, Structural Stability Research Council, V.V. (1987), Earthquake Simul ation
Bethlehem, PA. Tests and Associated Studies of a 0.3 –
White, D.W. and Hajjar, J.F. (1997a), Scale Model of a Six-Story Eccent rica
“Design of Steel Frames without lly Braced Steel Structure, Report No.
Consideration of Effective Length,” UBC/EERC-87/02, Earthquake
Engineering Structures, Vol. 19, No. 10, Engineering Research Center, Berke ley,
pp. 797–810. CA.

White, D.W. and Hajjar, J.F. (1997b), Wilkinson, T. and Hancock, G.J. (1998),
“Buckling Models and Stability Design “Tests to Examine Compact Web
of Steel Frames: a Unified Approach,” Slenderness of Cold-Formed RHS,”
Journal of Constructional Steel Research, Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE,
Vol. 42, No. 3, pp. 171–207. Vol. 124, No. 10, October, pp. 1,166–
1,174.

SBC 306-CR-18 285

REFERENCES

Wilkinson, T. and Hancock, G.J. (2002), Coventry, England.

“Predicting the Rotation Capacity of Cold-
Yuan, Q., Swanson, J. and Rassati, G.A.
Formed RHS Beams Using Finite
(2004), “An Investigation of Hole Making
Element Analysis,” Journal of
Practices in the Fabrication of Structural
Constructional Steel Research, Vol. 58,
Steel,” Internal Report, Department of
No. 11, November, pp. 1,455–1,471.
Civil and Environmental Engineering,
Wilson, W.M. (1934), “The Bearing Value University of Cincinnati, Cincinnati, OH.
of Rollers,” Bulletin No. 263, University Yura, J.A. (1971), “The Effective Length of
of Illinois Engineering Experiment Columns in Unbraced Frames,”
Station, Urbana, IL. Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 8, No. 2,
Winter, G. (1947), “Strength of Thin Steel 2nd Quarter, pp. 37–42.
Compression Flanges,” Transactions of Yura, J.A., Galambos, T.V. and Ravindra, K.
the ASCE, Vol. 112, p. 547. (1978), “The Bending Resistance of
Winter, G. (1958), “Lateral Bracing of Steel Beams,” Journal of the Structural
Columns and Beams,” Journal of the Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9, pp.
Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 84, No. 1,355–1,370.
ST3, March, pp. 1,561-1–1,561-22. Yura, J.A., Birkemoe, P.C. and Ricles, J.M.
Winter, G. (1960), “Lateral Bracing of (1982), “Beam Web Shear Connections:
Columns and Beams,” Transactions of the An Experimental Study,” Journal of the
ASCE, Vol. 125, Part 1, pp. 809–825. Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 108, No.
ST2, February, pp. 311–326.
Winter, G. (1968), Commentary on the
Specification for the Design of Cold- Yura, J.A. (1995), “Bracing for Stability—
Formed Steel Members, American Iron and State-of-the-Art,” Proceedings of the
Steel Institute, Washington, DC. ASCE Structures Congress XIII, Boston,
MA, April 2-5, 1995, American Society
Winter, G. (1970), Light Gage Cold-Formed of Civil Engineers, New York, NY, pp. 88–
Steel Design Manual: Commentary of the 103.
1968 Edition, American Iron and Steel
Institute, Washington, DC. Yura, J.A., Kanchanalai, T. and
Chotichanathawenwong, S. (1996),
Wong, M.B. (2009), Plastic Analysis and “Verification of Steel Beam-Column
Design of Steel Structures, Butterworth- Design Based on the AISC–LRFD
Heinemann, Burlington, MA. Method,” Proceedings—5th International
Xie, M. and Chapman, J.C. (2003), “Design Colloquium on the Stability of Metal
of Web Stiffeners: Axial Forces,” Journal Structures, SSRC, Bethelem, PA, pp. 21–
of Constructional Steel Research, Vol. 59, 30.
pp. 1,035–1,056. Yura, J.A. (2001), “Fundamentals of Beam
Yamanouchi, H., Nishiyama, I., and Bracing,” Engineering Journal, AISC,
Kobayashi, J. (1998), “Development and Vol. 38, No.1, 1st Quarter, pp. 11–26.
Usage of Composite and Hybrid Yura, J.A. and Helwig, T.A. (2009), “Bracing
Building Structure in Japan,” ACI SP- for Stability,” Short Course Notes,
174, American Concrete Institute, pp. Structural Stability Research Council,
151–174. North American Steel Construction
Yuan, H. (1996), “The Resistances of Stud Conference, Phoenix, AZ, April.
Shear Connectors with Profiled Sheeting,” Zahn, C.J. and Haaijer, G. (1987), “Effect of
Ph.D. Dissertation, Department of Connector Spacing on Double Angle
Engineering, The University of Warwick, Compressive Strength,” Materials and

SBC 306-CR-18 286

REFERENCES

Member Behavior, Proceedings,

Structures Congress 1987, ASCE,
Orlando, FL, pp. 199–212.
Zandonini, R. (1985), “Stability of
Compact Built-Up Struts: Experimental
Investigation and Numerical Simulation,”
Costruzioni Metalliche, No. 4.
Ziemian, R.D, McGuire, W. and Deierlein, G.
(1992), “Inelastic Limit States Design,
Part I: Planar Frame Studies, and Part II:
Three-Dimensional Frame Study,”
Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE,
Vol. 118, No. 9, pp. 2532–2567.
Ziemian, R.D. and Miller, A.R. (1997),
“Inelastic Analysis and Design: Frames
With Members in Minor-Axis Bending,”
Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE,
Vol. 123, No. 2, pp. 151–157.
Ziemian, R.D. and McGuire, W. (2002),
“Modified Tangent Modulus Approach,
a Contribution to Plastic Hinge Analysis,”
Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE,
Vol. 128, No. 10, October, pp. 1301–
1307.
Ziemian, R.D., McGuire, W. and Seo, D.W.
(2008), “On the Inelastic Strength of
Beam- Columns under Biaxial Bending,”
Proceedings-Annual Stability Conference,
Structural Stability Research Council,
Nashville, TN.
Ziemian, R.D. (ed.) (2010), Guide to Stability
Design Criteria for Metal Structures, 6th
Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken,
NJ.

SBC 306-CR-18 287

REFERENCES

This page left intentionally blank

SBC 306-CR-18 288